Bernstein Ltd

Westgate
Aldridge
West Midlands
WS9 8EX
Telephone: 0 19 22/74 49 99
Telefax: 0 19 22/45 75 55
E-mail: sales@bernstein-ltd.co.uk

Bernstein AG
Tieloser Weg 6
D-32457 Porta Westfalica
Telefon 05 71/7 93-0
Telefax 05 71/7 93-5 55
info@bernstein-ag.de

www.bernstein-ag.de The Catalogue

700.0000.674 02.2003 1302Bö. Alteration rights reserved!

The Catalogue
The Catalogue
Safety
for man and machine
in industry.

Rely on our expertise and know-how in industrial Complete safety systems. Perfect safety applications
safety. for the most demanding environments.

You identify the requirements. We provide advice A spectrum of components with intelligent
and develop convincing solutions. Economically. added-value advantages for your use. In breadth
Reliably. From one source. and depth.
 – a jump to the future.

Automation and safety in one Bus

Systems and component solutions
for selected industries.

Meet our industry specialists.

They talk your language and understand your business.

We enjoy considerable success when building

partnerships with our customers. We share development,
idea-exchanges and knowledge to realise industry specific
applications and systems.

We are particularly strong in

■ Lift/Escalators
■ Automobile production
■ Packaging systems

Systems and component solutions

for lift and escalators
Systems and component solutions Systems and components for
for automobile production Packaging machines/equipment
We are only satisfied
when you are.

Our service to you begins at the moment of first contact.

Thereafter we ensure all questions and enquiries are dealt

with swiftly and accurately.

To do so we rely on our long experience, know-how,

development capabilities and world-wide proven systems,
application and components.
 Switches
Page 8

We ensure our products meet all applicable

standards and legislation. Their cost-effectiveness is
also a primary objective helping to minimise these
concerns for our customers.

Sensors
Our team is always on hand to provide competent
advice and support for order processing, delivery Page 118
enquiries and after-sales service.

Take us at our word and try our service for yourself.

You will not be disappointed.

Enclosures
Page 286
 Switches
Plastic-bodied Metal-bodied
Footswitches
limit switches limit switches

Model Page Model Page Model Page

C2
Compact limit switches
10 GC I & II
30 Footswitches
54
• Very compact • Contact configuration
• For confined spaces • Multiple contact options • Ordering instructions
• Short contact travel • IP 65
• 6 switching versions • EEx certificated versions available
• IP 30 acc. ATEX 100 a

Ti2
Compact limit switches
13 SN 2
36 Single pedal
Types F1 & F1 UN
56
• 3 cable entries
• Compact design • Fixed/adjustable mounting • Available with or without guard
• Locking lid • IP 65 • Heavy duty version available
• 6 switching versions • IP 65
• IP 65 • EEx certificated versions
available acc. ATEX 100 a
I 88 17 ENM 2
40
• DIN EN 50 047 compliant • DIN EN 50 041 compliant Dual pedal
Types F2 & F2 UN
61
• Self-retaining snap lid • IP 65
• IP 65 • EEx certificated versions • Available with or without
available acc. ATEX 100 a guard
• IP 65
• EEx certificated versions
available acc. ATEX 100 a
Biggy 23 DI
46
• Four mounting options • Suitable for heavy duty
• 2 lateral cable entries applications Triple pedal
Types F3 & F3 UN
63
• IP 65 • IP 65 (IP 43)
• Available with or without
guard
• IP 65
ENK 26 Actuator selection 50
• DIN EN 50 041 compliant table
• Self-retaining snap lid
• IP 65
Assembly instruction
for turret head functions
52
• EEx certificated versions
available acc. ATEX 100 a Accessories 53

8
 Switches
Safety Safety Safety
switches switches switches

CATEGORY 2: Safety switches CATEGORY 1: Safety switches

with separate actuator for hinged guards
Model Page Model Page Model Page

Plastic-bodied I 88 VKS/VKW SiRK

SKT
64 88 Rope Pull safety switches
104
• Suitable for hinged lids/doors
• Rotating head, 4 x 90° • IP 65 • Insulation encapsulated
• Small design • two-sided spanning
• IP 65 (max. 2 x 75 m)
• IP 65

Plastic-bodied GC-VKS/VKW Si2

SKI
66 88 Conveyor belt monitoring
107
• Suitable for hinged lids/doors
• Rotating head, 4 x 90° • IP 65 switch
• Mounting acc. EN 50 047 • Misalignment detection
• IP 65 • IP 65

SNA
Plastic-bodied
68 I 88-AHDB
90 Emergency-stop button
108
SKC/SK • Hinge operated
• Triple coded actuator • IP 65 • Tamper-proof
• DIN VDE 0660 T 200 and • According to EN 418
IEC 947-5-1 compliant • Installation diameter 22.5 mm
• Tested to GS-ET-15 • IP 65
• IP 65
SCR
ENK…VTU
ENM-AHZ
91 Safety relay
112
safety switch with separate
72 • Safety switch with personnel
• Control category 3 and 4
protection function in
actuator forward and reverse according to EN 954-1
• Plastic bodied movement • With extended output functions
• 8 actuating directions • IP 65 • Up to 4 enabling paths
• Mounting to EN 50041
SHS
Safety-Hinge Switch
92 See Electronic safety modules
202
Metal-bodied
74 • Integrates safety switch and sensor
ENM-VTW load hinge section
GC-VT • Adjustable from 0–180°
• Standard mounting • IP 67
• IP 65

S/Si
Plastic-bodied
75 Rope Pull switches
96
interlock switches
• Plastic-bodied
SLK
• Power to lock or unlock
• Metal-bodied
• IP 65 Appendix
• Rotating head, 4 x 90°
• IP 67
SR
Metal-bodied Rope Pull safety switches
102
interlock switches
78 • EMERGENCY STOP function
SLM according to EN 60947-5-5 Page
• Power to lock or unlock • Quick rope connection clamp
• Industry standard mounting • Contacts: 2NC+2NO (standard)
Rope Pull switch
• IP 67 • Visual rope tension and
• accessories
106
EMERGENCY OFF function
• Rope tension monitoring
• IP 67

9
Plastic-bodied compact
limit switches

Combi C2
For confined spaces
With two mounting options
Protection class IP 30
Hinged snap lid

q
Designation
l Compact switches for safety or control Part number
applications Switching diagram
l 3 different contact configurations p positive break according to
available as slow-action and snap-action IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3
l All normally-closed contacts are positive Za: changeover contact is not galvanically isolated
break p Zb: changeover contact is galvanically isolated
l Two channel safety control possible Slow-action contact/snap-action contact
l Galvanically isolated terminals, type Zb Gasket inside (iw)/outside (w)
l Approvals UL, CSA, BG (pending)
l Rectangular cable entries (8.5 x 3.5 mm) Contact travel mm Actuating force N
for 4 x 1-mm2 flexible lead Tol. ± 0.25 mm Tol. ± 10%
l 4 screw-type connections (M3,5) with
self-lifting clamps
l PBT enclosure, glass-fibre reinforced, Switch angle degree Actuating torque Ncm
Tol. ± 3.5° tol. ± 10%
self-extinguishing UL 94-V0
l Lid, PC UL 94-V0
l 2 mm contact opening of slow-action
system according to EN 81-1 for lift Mounting
applications In Out

Voltage max.
Continuous current max.
Making current, acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13

Switching frequency max.

Mech. operational life – number of switching cycles
a) 2 holes for M4 screws Ambient temperature min./max.

Approvals

Weight
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order
Further switching functions
SA2 E2 SE2
b) 2 captive M3 nuts for end mounting
(depending on type) 11 12 13 14 13 14
21 22 23 24 23 24

Contact configuration

Switching element Switch function Switch contact Designation Voltage Continuous current

Slow-action changeover 1NC/1NO U1Z 250 V 10 A

Snap-action changeover 1NC/1NO SU1Z 250 V 10 A
Slow-action normally-closed 2NC A2Z 250 V 10 A
Snap-action normally-closed 2NC SA2Z 250 V 10 A
Slow-action normally-open 2NO E2 250 V 10 A Dimensions
Snap-action normally-open 2NO SE2 250 V 10 A All dimensions in mm

10
 Switches
C2-U1Z C2-SU1Z C2-A2Z C2-U1Z St C2-SU1Z St C2-A2Z St C2-U1Z K C2-SU1Z K C2-A2Z K
600.8101.001 600.8351.002 600.8801.003 600.8104.025 600.8354.026 600.8804.027 600.8107.019 600.8357.020 600.8807.021

11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12
23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22
p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l l/–
–/– –/– –/– –/– –/– –/– –/– –/– –/–

250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l l l l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

0.02 kg 0.02 kg 0.02 kg 0.02 kg 0.02 kg 0.02 kg 0.02 kg 0.02 kg 0.02 kg

l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

11
 Designation C2-U1Z R C2-SU1Z R C2-A2Z R C2-U1Z o.M.+ H C2-SU1Z o.M.+ H C2-A2Z o.M.+ H
Switch part number 600.8116.013 600.8366.014 600.8816.015 600.8101.007 600.8351.008 600.8801.009
Actuator part number – – – 391.0190.259 391.0190.259 391.0190.259
Switching diagram
11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12
p positive break according to IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3
23 24 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
Za: changeover contact is not galvanically isolated 23 24
Zb: changeover contact is galvanically isolated p Zb p Zb p Zb Zb Zb Zb
Slow-action contact/snap-action contact l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l l/–
Gasket inside (iw)/outside (w) –/– –/– –/– –/– –/– –/–

Contact travel mm Actuating force N

Tol. ± 0.25 mm Tol. ± 10%

Switch angle degree Actuating torque Ncm

Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 3.5°

On Off

Voltage max. 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC

Continuous current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
Making current, acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13 l l l l l l

Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

Mech. operational life – number of switching cycles 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106
Ambient temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.02 kg 0.02 kg 0.02 kg 0.03 kg 0.03 kg 0.03 kg

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–
Further switching functions
SA2 E2 SE2

11 12 13 14 13 14
21 22 23 24 23 24

Dimensions
All dimensions in mm

12
 Switches
Plastic-bodied
compact limit switches

Tiny Ti2
Compact design
Protection class IP 65
Mounting measurements according to
DIN EN 50047
Hinged snap lid

q
The switching system for C2 and Ti2 l Compact switches for safety or control
l Small hysteresis on the snap-action applications in protection class IP 65
system l 3 different contact configurations
l Large variety of contact functions available as slow-action or snap-action
l Optimized size utilising proven terminal devices
technology l Positive break p
l Snap-action type prevents undefined l Two channel safety monitoring possible
status even with very slow actuation l Galvanically isolated terminals, type Zb
l Approvals UL, CSA, BG
l Cable entries M 16 x 1.5
l 4 screw terminals M3.5 with self-lifting
clamps
l PBT enclosure, fiberglass reinforced, self-
extinguishing UL 94-V0
l Lid, PA 6.6 UL 94-V0
l 2 mm contact opening of slow-action
system according to EN 81-1 for lift con-
struction Mounting
l Actuator mounting in 4 x 90° a) adjustable mounting with two M4
screws (22 mm centres)

b) fixed positioning with two M5 screws

(23 mm centres) for safety applications

(0.22")
M4 5.5
Slow-action device

M5
(0.16")

(0.08")
4

22
(0.87")
23
(0.91")

Contact configuration

Switching element Switch function Switch contact Designation Voltage Continuous current

Slow-action changeover 1NC/1NO U1Z 250 V 10 A

Snap-action changeover 1NC/1NO SU1Z 250 V 10 A
Slow-action normally-closed 2NC A2Z 250 V 10 A
Snap-action device Snap-action normally-closed 2NC SA2Z 250 V 10 A
Slow-action normally-open 2NO E2 250 V 10 A
Snap-action normally-open 2NO SE2 250 V 10 A

13
Plastic-bodied
compact limit switches

Tiny Ti2
Compact design
Protection class IP 65
Mounting measurements according to
DIN EN 50047
Hinged snap lid

Designation Ti2-U1Z w Ti2-SU1Z w Ti2-A2Z w Ti2-U1Z Riw Ti2-SU1Z Riw Ti2-A2Z Riw
Part number 608.8103.001 608.8153.002 608.8803.003 608.8117.007 608.8167.008 608.8817.009
Switching diagram
p positive break according to 11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3
Za: changeover contact is not galvanically isolated 23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22
Zb: changeover contact is galvanically isolated p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow-action contact/snap-action contact l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l l/–
Gasket inside (iw)/outside (w) w w w iw iw iw

Contact travel mm Actuating force N

Tol. ± 0.25 mm Tol. ± 10%

Switching angle Actuating torque Ncm

degree Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 3.5°

In Out

Voltage max. 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC

Continuous current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
Making current, acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13 l l l l l l

Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

Mech. operational life – number of switching cycles 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106
Ambient temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

Weight 0.04 kg 0.04 kg 0.04 kg 0.05 kg 0.05 kg 0.05 kg

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–
Further switching functions
SA2 E2 SE2

11 12 13 14 13 14
21 22 23 24 23 24

Dimensions
All dimensions in mm

14
 Switches
Ti2-U1Z Hw Ti2-SU1Z Hw Ti2-A2Z Hw Ti2-U1Z AH Ti2-SU1Z AH Ti2-A2Z AH Ti2-U1 AD Ti2-SU1 AD Ti2-A2 AD
608.8121.015 608.8171.016 608.8821.017 608.8135.021 608.8185.022 608.8835.023 608.8137.027 608.8187.028 608.8837.029

11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12
23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22
p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb Zb Zb Zb
l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l l/–
w w w iw iw iw iw iw iw

250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l l l l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106 3 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

0.05 kg 0.05 kg 0.05 kg 0.07 kg 0.07 kg 0.07 kg 0.07 kg 0.07 kg 0.07 kg

l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

15
16
 Switches
Plastic-bodied
limit switches

I 88
Euronorm standard switch to
DIN EN 50047
Protection class IP 65
Hinged snap lid

q
l Standard actuators to DIN EN 50047 Mounting
type A, B, C, E a) Adjustable – Two slots for M 4 screws
l Large range of actuators (22 mm centres)
l Snap action or slow make & break b) Fixed – Two holes for M 5 screws for
contacts safety applications without additional
l Galvanically separated contacts fixings (fig. 1)
l Forced disconnection of NC contacts c) Additional positive location with guide
l Protection class IP 65 discs (fig. 2)
l Body and lid PA 6 which is self d) Front mounting (type dependant)
extinguishing (fig. 3)
l 4 x 90° actuator positions
l Cable entry M 20 x 1.5
l Terminals numbered in accordance with
DIN EN 50013
l International approvals

Benefits
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 l Hinged snap lid for quick and easy
access (screwdriver release)
l Lid hinges open to 135° (can also be
easily detached)
l Internal cover protects the contacts
during mounting
l Screw terminals with self-lifting clamps
for easy wiring
Fig. 3 l Transparent cover for easy adjustment
and inspection
Standard actuators DIN EN 50047

Options
l Contact lock (safety pull button reset)
l Contact LED display (LED protected
within terminal chamber)
l Cable entry M 16 x 1.5
l Additional lid security with fixing screw

Type A Type B Type C Type E

Contact configuration

Contact type Switch function Switch contacts Reference Max. Voltage Max constant current

Slow make & break Changeover 1NC/1NO U1/U1Z 500 V 10 A

Slow make & break Changeover 1NC/1NO UV1Z 500 V 10 A
Slow make & break Changeover 2NC/1NO UV15Z 400 V 6A
Slow make & break Changeover 1NC/2NO UV16Z 400 V 6A
Slow make & break NC 2NC A2Z 400 V 6A
Slow make & break NO 2NO E2 400 V 6A
Snap action Changeover 1NC/1NO SU1/SU1Z 500 V 10 A

17
Designation I88-U1Z w I88-SU1Z w I88-A2Z w I88-E2 w
Part number 608.6103.008 608.6153.012 608.6803.013 608.6803.014
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb –
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– –/l l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) w w w w

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off ) Latch Point

1

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 6A 6A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Standard actuator form B B B B

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.06 kg/0.13 lb 0.06 kg/0.13 lb 0.06 kg/0.13 lb 0.06 kg/0.13 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

22 30.5
(0.87") (1.20") Ø8 10
10 (0.31") (0.39")
(0.16")

Ø4.2
(0.39")
(0.17")
4

20
(0.79")
(2.91")
(0.31")

(0.78")

31
(2.44")

74

(1.22")
8

20
62

16
M20 (0.63")

18
 Switches
I88-UV1Z w I88-UV15Z w I88-UV16Z w I88-U1Z w Rast
608.6303.011 608.6603.046 608.6603.047 618.6103.005

15 16 15 16
15 16 11 12
25 26 23 24

23 24 33 34 33 34 23 24
p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– l/– l/– l/–
w w w w

500 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 6A 6A 10 A
l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 60/min.

10 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

B B B B
UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

0.06 kg/0.13 lb 0.06 kg/0.13 lb 0.06 kg/0.13 lb 0.06 kg/0.13 lb

l/– l/– l/– l/–

Ø8 10
(0.31") (0.39")
%%C15
(0.59")

(2.91")
(0.78")

74
(0.64")
20

16

20
(0.79")

19
Designation I88-U1Z Riw K I88-SU1Z Riw K I88-A2Z Riw K I88-U1Z Riw L I88-SU1Z Riw L I88-A2Z Riw L
Part number 608.6117.017 608.6167.018 608.6817.087 608.6117.050 608.6167.051 608.6817.072
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– –/l –/l l/– –/l –/l
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw iw iw iw iw iw

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off ) Latch Point

1

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 400 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 5A 10 A 10 A 5A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 1 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Standard actuator form C C C – – –

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

10
10
(0.39")
(0.39")
Ø14 3
22 30.5 Ø10 3
(0.55") (0.13")
(0.87") (1.20") (0.39") (0.13")

10
(0.16")

Ø4.2
(0.39")
(0.17")
4

(1.22")
31

20
(0.79")
(3.37")

(3.62")
85.5
(0.31")

(1.04")

31
92
(2.44")

26.5

(1.22")
8
62

16
M20 (0.63")

20
 Switches
I88-U1Z Hw I88-SU1Z Hw I88-A2Z Hw I88-U1Z AH I88-SU1Z AH I88-U1 AV
608.6121.021 608.6171.022 608.6821.099 608.6135.033 608.6185.034 608.6136.037

11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12
23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 23 24
p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb Zb
l/– –/l –/l l/– –/l l/–
w w w iw iw iw

500 V AC 500 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 10 A 5A 10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

10 x 106 10 x 106 1 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

E E E A A –
UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.10 kg/0.22 lb 0.10 kg/0.22 lb 0.11 kg/0.24 lb
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

47
49 (1.86")
10 (1.92")
Ø25 8
(0.39") Ø18 8 (0.98") (0.31")

Ø11 5.5 (0.71") (0.31")

(0.43") (0.22")
(1.20")
30.5

(4.17"-5.61")
(0.94")

106-142.5
(3.54")

(4.25")
24
90

108

(0.77"-2.16")
(0.83")

19.5-55

(0.83")
21

21

21
Designation I88-U1Z DGH w I88-SU1Z DGH w I88-A2Z DGH w I88-U1Z DGK w I88-SU1Z DGK w
Part number 608.6121.029 608.6171.030 608.6821.120 608.6127.025 608.6177.026
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– –/l –/l l/– –/l
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) w w w w w

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 5A 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 1 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Standard actuator form – – – – –

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb 0.07 kg/0.15 lb
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/– –/l

All dimensions in mm (inch) 6-12 18-24

(0.24"-0.47") 10 (0.71"-0.94") 10
(0.39") (0.39")

9 5 21 5
(0.35") (0.20") (0.83") (0.20")

22 30.5
(0.87") (1.20")

10
(0.16")

Ø4.2
(1.59")
(1.59")

(0.39")
(0.17")
4

40.5
40.5
(0.87")

(0.87")
Ø22

Ø22

(4.15")
(4.15")

105.5
105.5

20
(0.79")
(0.31")

31
(2.44")

(1.22")
8
62

16
M20 (0.63")

22
 Switches
Plastic-bodied
limit switches

Biggy
With four different mounting holes,
Protection class IP 65
Hinged snap lid
Two cable entries M 16 x 1.5

q
l Wide selection of actuators Mounting
l Snap action or slow make & break a) Adjustable – two slots for M 4 screws
l Galvanically separated contacts (22 mm centres)
l Forced disconnection of NC contacts b) Adjustable – two slots for M 4 screws
(type dependant) (42 mm centres)
l Protection class IP 65 c) Fixed – two holes for M 5 screws for
l Body and lid PA 6 which is self safety applications (21 mm centres)
extinguishing (UL-94 V0) cover PC Mounting screw
(UL-94 V0) according to DIN 912 M5
l 4 x 90° actuator positions
l Adjustment of the AH lever arm position
in 90° increments
l Two cables entries M 16 x 1.5
l Terminals numbered in accordance with
DIN EN 50013
l International approvals

Options
d) Fixed - two holes for M 5 screws for l Contact lock (safety pull button reset)
safety applications (41 mm centres) l Contact LED display (LED protected
within terminal chamber)
l Additional lid security with fixing screw
Benefits
l Two cable entries allow “through
wiring”
l Hinged snap lid for quick and easy
access (screwdriver release)
l Lid hinges open to 135° (can also be
simply detached)
l Internal cover protects the contacts
during mounting
l Screw terminals with self lifting clamps
for easy wiring
l Transparent cover for easy adjustment
and inspection

Contact configuration

Contact type Switch function Switch contacts Reference Max. Voltage Max. constant current

Slow make & break Changeover 1NF/1NO U1/U1Z 500 V 10 A

Snap action Changeover 1NF/1NO SU1Z 500 V 10 A

23
Designation BI-U1Z w BI-SU1Z w BI-SU1Z Hw
Part number 608.5103.001 608.5153.008 608.5171.017
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 13 14 13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 21 22 21 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– –/l –/l
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) w w w

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.08 kg/0.18 lb 0.08 kg/0.18 lb 0.09 kg/0.20 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

10
(0.39")

Ø13.5 5
22 (0.53") (0.19")
(0.87") Ø4.2 Ø8 10
20 (0.17") 20 (0.31") (0.39")
(0.79") (0.79")
(1.16")
(1.26")

M20
29.5
32

(3.08")
(2.44")

78

40
(1.00")
(0.63")
(1.97")
(0.16")
(0.31")

(0.78")

(1.57")
(0.41")

62

25.5
(0.88")

16
50
10.5

4
8

20

42
22

(1.65")

59 32
(2.32") (1.26")

24
 Switches
BI-U1Z Riw BI-SU1Z Riw BI-SU1Z AH BI-SU1 AV
608.5117.002 608.5167.009 608.5185.012 608.5186.013

11 12 13 14 13 14 13 14
23 24 21 22 21 22 21 22
p Zb p Zb p Zb Zb
l/– –/l –/l –/l
iw iw iw iw

500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

0.08 kg/0.18 lb 0.08 kg/0.18 lb 0.12 kg/0.26 lb 0.13 kg/0.29 lb

l/– l/– l/– l/–

47
(1.86")
(0.77"-2.16")

Ø25 8
19.5-55

(0.98") (0.31")

49
(1.92")

10 Ø18 8
(0.94")

(0.39") (0.71") (0.31")

24

Ø14 3
(0.55") (0.12")
(0.67")
17

(3.68"-5.12")
93.5-130
(1.22")
(1.31")

31

(3.78")
33

(3.15")

96
80

(0.67")
(1.06")

(0.83")

(0.83")
(0.93")
(0.93")

17
27

21

23.5

21
23.5

25
Plastic-bodied
limit switches

ENK
Euronorm standard switch according to
DIN EN 50041
Protection class IP 65
Hinged snap lid

q
l Standard actuators to DIN EN 50041 Benefits
form A, B, C, D, F, G l Hinged snap lid for quick and easy
l Large range of actuators access (screwdriver release)
l 4 x 90° actuator positions l Lid hinges open to 150° (can also be
l Snap action or slow make & break simply detached)
contacts l Internal cover protects the contacts
l Galvanically separated contacts during mounting
l Forced disconnection of NC contacts l Screw terminals with self lifting clamps
l Metal actuators for heavy duty for easy wiring
applications l Transparent cover for easy adjustment
l Cable entry M 20 x 1.5 and inspection
l Protection class IP 65
l Body and lid PA 6 which is self
extinguishing (UL-94-V0)

Mounting
a) Adjustable – two slots for M 5 screws
b) Fixed - two holes for M 5 screws for Options
safety applications l Contact lock (safety pull button reset)
l Contact LED display (LED protected
within terminal chamber)
l WK actuator (form F) can be supplied to
order
l WR actuator (form G) can be supplied to
order
l EEx certificated versions available
acc. ATEX 100 a

Standard actuators DIN EN 50041

Type A Type B Type C Type D Type F Type G

(Built to order) (Built to order)

Contact configuration

Contact type Switch function Switch contacts Reference Max. Voltage Max. constant current

Slow make & break Changeover 1NC/1NO U1/U1Z 500 V 10 A

Slow make & break Changeover overlapping 1NC/1NO UV1Z 500 V 10 A
Slow make & break NC 2NC A2Z 400 V 6A
Slow make & break NC 3NC A3Z 400 V 6A
Snap action Changeover 1NC/1NO SU1/SU1Z 500 V 10 A

26
 Switches
Designation ENK-U1Z iw ENK-SU1Z iw ENK-U1Z Riw ENK-SU1Z Riw ENK-A2Z Riw
Part number 608.1102.001 608.1152.007 608.1117.002 608.1167.008 608.1817.281
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– –/l l/– –/l –/l
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw iw iw iw iw

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm
0.5

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 400 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 5A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Standard actuator form B B C C C

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.15 kg/0.33 lb 0.15 kg/0.33 lb 0.16 kg/0.33 lb 0.16 kg/0.33 lb 0.16 kg/0.33 lb
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

16
(0.63")

16 Ø18 4
(0.63") (0.71") (0.15")

Ø10
(0.39")
(1.59")
(1.48")

40.5
37.5

(4.57")
(4.09")

116
104

27
Designation ENK-SU1 FF ENK-U1Z AHS-V ENK-SU1Z AHS-V ENK-A2Z AHS-V
Part number 608.1190.045 608.1135.003 608.1185.009 608.1835.323
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts
21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action –/l l/– –/l –/l
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) w iw iw iw

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 400 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 5A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Standard actuator form – A A A

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.15 kg/0.35 lb 0.23 kg/0.51 lb 0.23 kg/0.51 lb 0.23 kg/0.51 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

Ø7.4 16
(0.29") (0.63") 60.5
(2.38")

Ø18 8
(1.20")

(0.71") (0.31")
30.5
(5.55")
141

(8.17")
207.5

(5.14")
130.5
(0.96")
24.5

28
 Switches
ENK-U1 AV ENK-SU1 AV ENK-U1Z AD ENK-SU1Z AD ENK-U1Z Hw ENK-SU1Z Hw
608.1136.012 608.1186.018 608.1137.011 608.1187.017 608.1121.095 608.1171.096

11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14
23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22
Zb Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– –/l l/– –/l –/l –/l
iw iw iw iw iw w

500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

– – D D D –
UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

0.24 kg/0.53 lb 0.24 kg/0.53 lb 0.23 kg/0.51 lb 0.23 kg/0.51 lb 0.16 kg/0.35 lb 0.16 kg/0.35 lb
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

61.8
(2.43")

Ø25 8
(0.98") (0.31") Ø6 49
(0.24") (1.95")
16
(0.63")

Ø20 11
(0.79") (0.43")
(7.87")
200

(1.41")
36
(max.10.91")
(5.14"-7.29")
(1.06"-3.20")

max.277
130.5-185

(4.42")
112
27-81.5

(0.96")
(0.96")

24.5
24.5

29
Metal-bodied
limit switches

GC !
Slim design
Protection class IP 65
Very large range of actuators
Multiple pole contacts

Y
l Snap action or slow make & break Mounting
contacts l Adjustable – two slots for M 4 srews
l Galvanically separated contacts
(type dependant) Benefits
l Forced disconnection of NC contacts l Screw terminals with self-lifting clamps
for easy wiring
l Protection class IP 65 l Easily exchanged contact block with
l Aluminum body and lid latch holding device
l Contact switch point adjustable with
l 4 x 90° actuator positions adjusting screw
l Adjustment of the AH lever arm position
in 90° increments Options
l Single direction operation of contacts l Contact lock (button reset)
with AH actuator (user selectable) l Housing size I
l Cable entry M 20 x 1.5 Slots for M 5 fixing screws (27 mm pitch)
l Terminals numbered in accordance with l EEx certificated versions available
DIN EN 50013 acc. ATEX 100 a
l International approvals

l Model range GC §§ for additional switch

functions (on request)

(For safety applications use 4 mm ø dowel

in pre-formed blind hole on underside of
switch body or select body with M 5 round
holes)

ø5;
depth 9

Contact configuration

Contact type Switch function Switch contacts Reference Max. voltage Max. constant current

Slow make & break Changeover 1NC/1NO U1/U1Z 500 V 10 A

Slow make & break Changeover 2NC/2NO U2Z 400 V 6 A
Slow make & break Changeover overlapping 1NC/1NO UV1Z 500 V 10 A
Slow make & break Changeover 2NC/1NO U15Z 400 V 6 A
Slow make & break Changeover 1NC/2NO U16Z 400 V 6 A
Slow make & break Changeover overlapping 2NC/1NO UV15Z 400 V 6 A
Slow make & break Changeover overlapping 1NC/2NO UV16Z 400 V 6 A
Slow make & break NC 2NC A2Z 400 V 6 A
Slow make & break NO 2NO E2 400 V 6 A
Snap action Changeover 2NC/2NO SU2 250 V 6 A
Snap action Changeover 1NC/1NO SU1/SU1Z 500 V 10 A

30
 Switches
Designation GC-U1Z iw GC-SU1Z iw GC-U1Z STiw GC-SU1Z STiw
Part number 602.1102.001 602.1352.620 602.1105.015 602.1155.017
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– –/l l/– –/l
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw iw iw iw

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.14 kg/0.31 lb 0.14 kg/0,.31 lb 0.14 kg/0.31 lb 0.14 kg/0.31 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

32.5
(1.28") Ø5 14.5
(0.20") (0.57")
4.2 27
Ø5.5 14.5
(0.17") (1.06")
(0.22") (0.57") M3
(3.39"-3.49")
(0.22")

(0.53")
(0.12")

25
5.5

13.5

(0.75"-0.87")
(3.15")

(0.98")
86-89
3
(2.83")

80

19-22
72

36
(1.42")

31
Designation GC-U1Z Riw GC-UV1Z Riw GC-SU1Z Riw GC-A2Z Riw
Part number 602.1117.029 602.1317.030 602.1367.626 602.1817.172
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 15 16 13 14 11 21
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 23 24 21 22 12 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb p Za
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– –/l l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw iw iw iw

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 400 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 6A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 3 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA –

Weight 0.15 kg/0.33 lb 0.15 kg/0.33 lb 0.15 kg/0.33 lb 0.15 kg/0.33 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

14.5
(0.57")
32.5
(1.28") Ø14 3
(0.55") (0.13")
4.2 27
(0.17") (1.06")
(0.73")
(0.22")

(0.12")

(3.62")

25
18.5
5.5

(0.98")
3

92
(2.83")
72

36
(1.42")

32
 Switches
GC-U1Z Hiw GC-SU1Z Hiw GC-SU1 DR GC-U1 FF GC-SU1 FF
602.1120.057 602.1370.629 602.1191.099 602.1140.476 602.1190.100

11 12 13 14 13 14 11 12 13 14
23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22
p Zb p Zb Zb Zb Zb
l/– –/l –/l l/– –/l
iw iw iw w w

500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

0.16 kg/0.35 lb 0.16 kg/0.35 lb 0.18 kg/0.40 lb 0.17 kg/0.37 lb 0.17 kg/0.37 lb
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

Ø7.4
(0.29")

14.5
(0.57")
(5.47")
139

Ø13 7.3
(0.51") (0.29")
(8.07")
205

14.5
(0.57")
(0.89")

(3.76")
22.6

95.6

33
Designation GC-U1Z AH GC-UV1Z AH GC-SU1Z AH
Part number 602.1135.102 602.1335.133 602.1385.634
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 15 16 13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 23 24 21 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw iw iw

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

Tol. ± 0.25 mm Tol. ± 10%

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.20 kg/0.44 lb 0.20 kg/0.44 lb 0.20 kg/0.44 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

47
(1.85")

Ø18 8
(0.71") (0.31")

32.5
(1.28")
(0.75")

4.2 27
19

(0.17") (1.06")
(0.94")
24

(4.67")
118.5
(0.22")

(0.12")

25
5.5

(0.98")
3
(2.83")
72

36
(1.42")

34
 Switches
GC-U1 AV GC-SU1 AV GC-U1 AD GC-SU1 AD GC-U1 AF GC-SU1 AF
602.1136.104 602.1186.118 602.1137.103 602.1187.125 602.1139.106 602.1189.128

11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14
23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22
Zb Zb Zb Zb Zb Zb
l/– –/l l/– –/l l/– –/l
iw iw iw iw iw iw

500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

0.23 kg/0.51 lb 0.23 kg/0.51 lb 0.22 kg/0.49 lb 0.22 kg/0.49 lb 0.21 kg/0.46 lb 0.21 kg/0.46 lb
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

32.8
(1.29")

Ø1.8
(0.07")
(5.16")

5.5 38
Ø7.6
131

(0.22") (1.49")
(0.30")
(7.87")
200
(max.10.93")
max.277.5

(5.59")
142
(0.75")
(0.75")

19
19

35
Metal-bodied
limit switches

SN 2
Versatile mounting options
Protection class IP 65

Y
l Large range of actuators Mounting
l Snap action/slow make & break contacts
l Galvanically separated contacts
l Forced disconnection of NC contacts
(type dependant)

l Protection class IP 65
l Aluminum body and lid

l 4 x 90° actuator positions Fig. 1

l Single directon operation of contacts
with AH actuator (user selectable) a) Adjustable – two slots for M 4 srews
l Three cable entries M 20 x 1.5 b) Fixed – two holes for M 5 screws for
l Adjustment of the AH lever arm position safety applications
in 90° increments
l Terminals numbered in accordance with
DIN EN 50013 Benefits
l International approvals l Three cable entries allow “through Options
wiring” l Contact status display with LED
(LED protected within terminal chamber)
l Three contact slow make & break
2NC/1NO, U15, 400 V, 6 A (fig. 4)
l Three contact slow make & break
1NC/2NO, U16, 400 V, 6 A (fig. 4)

Fig. 2

l Two earth connection points

Fig. 4

Fig. 3

l Spacious connection area

l Screw terminals with self lifting clamps
for easy wiring
l Easily exchanged contact block with
latch holding device
l Contact switch point finely adjustable
with adjusting screw
Contact configuration

Contact type Switch function Switch contacts Reference Max. voltage Max. constant current

Slow make & break Changeover 1NC/1NO U1/U1Z 400 V 10 A

Slow make & break Changeover overlapping 1NC/1NO UV1Z 400 V 10 A
Slow make & break Changeover 1NC/1NO SU1/SU1Z 400 V 10 A

36
 Switches
Designation SN2-U1Z w SN2-SU1Z w SN2-U1 Liw SN2-SU1 Liw
Part number 603.3103.023 603.3353.016 603.3144.024 603.3194.022
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb Zb Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– –/l l/– –/l
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) w w iw iw

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.17 kg/0.37 lb 0.17 kg/0.37 lb 0.19 kg/0.42 lb 0.19 kg/0.42 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order –/l l/– –/l l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

58
(2.28")

40.5
(1.59") Ø10 14.5
Ø7 14.5 (0.39") (0.57")
7 5.5
(0.28") (0.57")
(0.28")

(0.28") (0.22")
(0.20")
7

5.2

(1.18")
30

(3.68")
(0.87")

(3.37")

93.5
85.5
22
(2.78")

(2.32")
70.5

(0.20")
59

Ø5.2

48 35.5
(1.89") (1.40")

37
Designation SN2-U1Z Riw SN2-SU1Z Riw SN2-U1Z Hw SN2-SU1Z Hw
Part number 603.3117.025 603.3367.017 603.3121.007 603.3371.006
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– –/l l/– –/l
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw iw w w

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.20 kg/0.44 lb 0.20 kg/0.44 lb 0.22 kg/0.49 lb 0.22 kg/0.49 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order –/l –/l l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

14.5
14.5
(0.57")
58 (0.57")
(2.28") Ø18 4
Ø20 11
(0.71") (0.15")
40.5 (0.79") (0.43")
(1.59")

7 5.5
(0.28")

(0.28") (0.22")
(0.20")

(1.59")
7

(1.41")
5.2

40.5

36
(4.45")

(4.30")
113

109
(2.78")

(2.32")
70.5

(0.20")
59

Ø5.2

48 35.5
(1.89") (1.40")

38
 Switches
SN2-U1Z DGHw SN2-SU1Z DGHw SN2-U1Z DGKw SN2-SU1Z DGKw SN2-U1Z AHS SN2-SU1Z AHS
603.3121.005 603.3371.004 603.3127.010 603.3377.011 603.3135.002 603.3385.018

11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14
23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22
p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– –/l l/– –/l l/– –/l
w w w w iw iw

400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

0.23 kg/0.51 lb 0.23 kg/0.51 lb 0.23 kg/0.51 lb 0.23 kg/0.51 lb 0.25 kg/0.55 lb 0.25 kg/0.55 lb
–/l l/– –/l –/l l/– l/–

20.5-28.5
(0.81"-1.12")
7-15 41
24.5 14.5 14.5
(0.28"-0.59") (1.63")
(0.96") (0.57") (0.57")
11 Ø20 8
Ø20 8 8
(0.44") (0.79") (0.30")
(0.79") (0.30") (0.30")
(0.81")
(1.18")

20.5
30
(1.74")

(1.55")
39.4
44

(0.79")
Ø20

(4.88")
124

39
Metal-bodied
limit switches

ENM 2
Standard switch according to DIN EN 50041
Protection class IP 65

Y
l Increased number of switching functions Mounting
for safety applications a) 2 x M 5 screws, adjustment via elongat-
l Galvanically separated contacts ed holes
l Forced disconnection of NC contacts b) 2 x M 5 screws for safety applications
(type dependant) without additional attachment
l Person-protection function p
(depending on model) Mounting advantages
l Protection class IP 65 l Increased wiring space
l Aluminum body and lid l Earthing surface on same level as switch-
l Operating device: 4 x 90° actuator ing system
positions l Turret
l Cable entry M 20 x 1.5 Lever: 7.5° / 15° adjustable
l International approvals l Contact made independent of direction
l Screw terminals with self lifting clamps
for easy wiring
l Fine adjustment of switching point via
adjusting screw
l Captive lid screws

Options
l Latching with contact locking
(strain lock-release for safety reasons)
l LED indication of switching status
l EEx certificated versions available
acc. ATEX 100 a

Standard actuating element DIN EN 50041

Form A Form B Form C Form D Form F Form G

(available upon (available upon
request) request)

40
 Switches
Standard contact configuration
ø10
Switching element Switch function Switch contact Designation Voltage Continuous current

30.5
Slow-action changeover 1NC/1NO U1/U1Z 400 V 10 A

7.5
Snap-action changeover 1NC/1NO SU1/SU1Z 400 V 10 A
Slow-action normally-closed 2NC A2/A2Z 400 V 10 A
Snap-action normally-closed 2NC SA2/SA2Z 250 V 10 A

2
Slow-action changeover 1NC/1NO UV1/UV1Z 400 V 10 A
(overlapping)

77.5
60
Slow-action changeover 2NC/1NO UV15/UV15Z 400 V 5A
(overlapping)

ø5.2
Optional contact configuration
M20x1.5
30
Switching element Switch function Switch contact Designation Voltage Continuous current 40

Slow-action normally-open 2NO E2 250 V 10 A

Snap-action normally-open 2NO SE2 250 V 10 A
Slow-action changeover 2NC/1NO U15/U15Z 400 V 5A
Slow-action changeover 1NC/2NO U16/U16Z 400 V 5A
Slow-action changeover 1NC/2NO UV16/UV16Z 400 V 5A
(overlapping)

Contact travel diagrams and graphic symbols

U1Z SU1Z A2Z SA2Z UV1Z UV15Z

11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 15 16 15 16

23 24 21 22 21 22 21 22 23 24 25 26

33 34

On request

E2 SE2 U15Z U16Z UV16Z

13 14 13 14 11 12 11 12 15 16

23 24 23 24 21 22 23 24 23 24

33 34 33 34 33 34

41
Designation ENM2-U1Z iw ENM2-SU1Z iw ENM2-A2Z iw ENM2-U1Z Riw ENM2-SU1Z Riw ENM2-A2Z Riw
Part number 608.7102.001 608.7352.002 608.7802.003 608.7117.004 608.7367.005 608.7817.006
Switching diagram
p Positive break according to 11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3
Za: changeover contact is not galvanically isolated 23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22
Zb: changeover contact is galvanically isolated p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow-action contact / snap-action contact l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l l/–
Gasket inside (iw)/outside (w) iw iw iw iw iw iw

Contact travel mm Actuating force N

Tol. ± 0.25 mm Tol. ± 10%

Switch angle degree Actuating torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

In Out

Voltage max. 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC

Continuous current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
Making current, acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13 l l l l l l

Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

Mech. operational life – number of switching cycles 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Ambient temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Standard actuating element Form B B B C C C

Approvals (applied for) UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.20 kg 0.20 kg 0.20 kg 0.21 kg 0.21 kg 0.21 kg

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm
ø10 16 ø18 4
30.5

33.5
7.5

7.5
2

16
2
77.5
60

77.5
60
ø5.2

ø5.2

17.5 17.5

M20x1.5 M20x1.5 33
30 33 30
40 42 42
40

42
 Switches
ENM2-U1Z AHS-V ENM2-SU1Z AHS-V ENM2-A2Z AHS-V ENM2-U1Z DGHW ENM2-SU1Z DGHW ENM2-A2Z DGHW ENM2-U1Z DGKW ENM2-SU1Z DGKW ENM-A2Z DGKW
608.7135.013 608.7385.014 608.7835.015 608.7121.007 608.7371.008 608.7821.009 608.7127.010 608.7377.011 608.7827.012

11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12

23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22
p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l l/–
iw iw iw w w w w w w

400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l l l l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

A A A – – – – – –
UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

0.28 kg 0.28 kg 0.28 kg 0.23 kg 0.23 kg 0.23 kg 0.23 kg 0.23 kg 0.23 kg

l/– l/– l/– –/l –/l –/l –/l –/l –/l

61 20.5-28.5 7-15
ø18 8 24.5 11
ø20 8 8
20
ø20
30.5

32
37
7.5

17.5

16 16 16
2

2
7.5
2
7.5

77.5
77.5

60
60

77.5
60

ø5.2
ø5.2
ø5.2

17.5 17.5 17.5

30 M20x1.5 33 30 M20x1.5 33 30 M20x1.5 33

40 42 40 42 40 42

43
Designation ENM2-U1 AD ENM2-SU1 AD ENM2-A2 AD ENM2-U1 AV ENM2-SU1 AV ENM2-A2 AV
Part number 608.7137.018 608.7387.019 608.7837.029 608.7136.016 608.7386.017 608.7836.028
Switching diagram
p Positive break according to 11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12 13 14 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3
Za: changeover contact is not galvanically isolated 23 24 21 22 21 22 23 24 21 22 21 22
Zb: changeover contact is galvanically isolated (*)/Zb (*)/Zb (*)/Zb (*)/Zb (*)/Zb (*)/Zb
Slow-action contact / snap-action contact l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l l/–
Gasket inside (iw)/outside (w) iw iw iw iw iw iw

Contact travel mm Actuating force N

11-12
21-22
Tol. ± 0.25 mm Tol. ± 10%
0 8Ncm

Switch angle degree Actuating torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%
35∞

In Out 75∞ 15Ncm

Voltage max. 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC

Continuous current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
Making current, acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13 l l l l l l

Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

Mech. operational life – number of switching cycles 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Ambient temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Standard actuating element Form D D D – – –

Approvals (applied for) UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Weight 0.29 kg 0.29 kg 0.29 kg 0.30 kg 0.30 kg 0.30 kg

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– –/l l/– l/– –/l

All dimensions in mm
10 50 62
ø25 8
ø6
(*) Adjustable operating devices are not recommended
for safety applications.
16
27-81.5
200
7.5

17.5

7.5

17.5
max. 281

16
2
77.5
60

77.5
60
ø5.2
ø5.2

17.5 17.5

30 M20x1.5 33 30 M20x1.5 33
40 42 40 42

44
45
Switches
Metal-bodied
limit switches

D!
Heavy duty housing
For harsh operating environment
Robust design of actuator assembly
and contact systems
Protection class IP 65

Y
l Robust contact assembly l On request: Two cable entries
l Guide bushings resistant to wear & tear M 20 x 1.5 (type D §§) for increased
l Large range of actuators contact functions
l Snap action or slow make & break
contacts
l Extended body (D §§) for multiple pole Type D §§
contact versions
l Forced disconnections of NC contacts
(type dependant)

l Protection class IP 65
l Aluminum body and lid

l 4 x 90° actuator positions

(type dependant)
l Two cable entries M 20 x 1.5 (type D §)
l International approvals
Installation benefits
l Two cable entries for easy
“through wiring”
l Spacious connection area
l Captive lid screws
l Slotted mounting holes

Type D §

Contact configuration

Contact type Switch function Switch contacts Reference Max. voltage Max. constant current

Slow make & break Changeover 1NC/1NO U1 500 V 16 A

Slow make & break Changeover 1NC/1NO U11 500 V 16 A
Slow make & break Changeover overlapping 1NC/1NO UV1/UV1Z 400 V 16 A
Slow make & break Changeover 2NC/2NO U2 500 V 16 A
Slow make & break NO 2NO E2 400 V 16 A
Slow make & break NC 1NC A1Z 400 V 16 A
Slow make & break NC 3NC A3Z 400 V 16 A
Snap action Changeover 1NC/1NO SU1 500 V 16 A
Snap action Changeover 2NC/2NO SU2 500 V 16 A

46
 Switches
Designation D-U1 w D-E2 w D-UV1Z w D-SU1 w
Part number 604.1103.002 604.1803.046 604.1303.134 604.1153.156
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 23 24 23 24 21 22
Zb: galvanically separated contacts – – p Zb –
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– l/– –/l
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) w w w w

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals CSA CSA CSA CSA

Weight 0.27 kg/0.60 lb 0.27 kg/0.60 lb 0.27 kg/0.60 lb 0.27 kg/0.60 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

72
(2.83")
Ø11 20.5
5.4 8.5
(0.43") (0.81")
(0.21") (0.33")
(0.20")
5

(3.23")
(1.57")

(0.20")

(2.20")

82
(1.20")
(0.12")

30.5
40

56

3
(0.28")

82 44
(3.23") (1.73")
7

47
Designation D-U1 Pw D-E2 Pw D-U1Z Rw D-U1 Rw
Part number 604.1113.006 604.1813.050 604.1118.229 604.1118.008
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 13 14 11 12 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24
Zb: galvanically separated contacts – – p Za –
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) w w w w

Contact travel mm Actuator force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Actuator angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals CSA CSA CSA CSA

Weight 0.28 kg/0.62 lb 0.28 kg/0.62 lb 0.28 kg/0.62 lb 0.28 kg/0.62 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

20.5
(0.81")
72 Ø35 20.5 Ø20 5
(2.83") (1.38") (0.81") (0.79") (0.20")
5.4 8.5
(0.21") (0.33")
(0.20")

(1.79")

(1.49")
45.5
5

38

(3.91")
(3.82")

99
97
(1.57")

(0.20")

(2.20")

(0.12")
40

56

3
(0.28")

82 44
(3.23") (1.73")
7

48
 Switches
D-UV1Z Rw D-SU1 Rw D-U1 Hw D-SU1 Hw D-U1 AH D-SU1 AH
604.1318.140 604.1168.162 604.1121.010 604.1171.164 604.1135.019 604.1185.173

15 16 13 14 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14
23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22 23 24 21 22
p Zb – – – – –
l/– –/l l/– –/l l/– –/l
w w w w iw iw

400 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A
l l l l l l

100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min. 100/min.

10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA

0.28 kg/0.62 lb 0.28 kg/0.62 lb 0.33 kg/0.73 lb 0.33 kg/0.73 lb 0.40 kg/0.88 lb 0.40 kg/0.88 lb
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

78
(3.06")
20.5
(0.81") Ø20 11
(0.79") (0.43")
Ø22 11
(0.87") (0.43")
(1.73")

(4.57"-4.96")
44

116-126
(4.19")
106.5

(1.22"-1.61")
(0.93")

31-41
23.5

49
Actuator selection table
Actuator Code Seal Plastic bodied Metal bodied
iw = internally COMBI TINY I 88 BIGGY ENK GC ! SN 2 ENM 2 D!
w = externally Page 10 Page 14 Page 19 Page 25 Page 28 Page 32 Page 38 Page 42 Page 46
Plunger – iw – – – – l – – – –
– w – l l l – – – – –
– IP 30 l – – – – – – – –
– IP 43 – – – – – – – – m
Roller ball KU iw – – – – – m m m –
Mushroom P w – – – – – – – – l
Telescopic plunger L iw – – – – – l m m –
Plunger (adjustable) ST w – – – – – l m m l
ST iw – – – – – l m m –
ST IP 30 l – – – – – – – –
Button K IP 30 l – – – – – – – –
Roller plunger R IP 30 l – – – – – – – –
R iw – l m l l l l l –
w – – – – – – – – l
IP 43 – – – – – – – – m
Roller plunger (long) R…L iw – m l m – – – – –
Roller plunger (short) R…K iw – m l m – – – – –
Roller lever H IP 30 l – – – – – – – –
H w – l l l l – – – –
H, HT iw – – – – – l m m –
Roller lever (long) H/D-WI w – – – – – l l m l
HL iw – – – – – l m m –
HL/D-H w – – – – – l m m l
D–H IP 43 – – – – – – – – m
Roller lever (adjustable) DGH w – m l m m m l l –

Roller lever (adjustable) DGK w – m l m m m l l –

Angled roller lever KN iw – – – – – l m m –

KN w – m l m – l m m m

Roller lever (directional) KG iw – – – – – l m m –

KG w – m l m – l m m –

Bi-stable roller lever DR iw – – – – – l m m –

Wobble stick FF iw – – – – – l l m –
FF w – l m l l – – – –
Wobble stick (long) FFL w – – – – – l m m –

Turret head AH iw – l l l – l m m l
Turret head (star clamp) AHS iw – l l l – m l m –
Turret head (positive drive) AHS-V iw – – – – l m l l –
Turret head (or force disconnec- AHZ iw – – – – – m m l –
tion in forward & return travel)
Turret head (adjustable) AV iw – l l l l l m l l

Turret head (adjustable AD iw – l l l l l m l m

rod)

Turret head (spring) AF iw – m l m m l l m –

l Catalogue model (stock item or to order) m Technically possible (on request) – Not available

50
 Switches
Operating direction Plunger Approach speed/angle Notes
direction
m/s 0.1 0.5 1 2 5
Metal A 20° 20° 10° 5° – l The information shown in the diagrams for contact travel / switching force is valid in
B 20° 20° 10° 5° – plunger direction.
Plastic A 20° 20° 10° 5° –
B 20° 20° 10° 5° –

Metal A 30° 5° – – – l The information shown in the diagrams for contact travel / switching force is valid in
B 30° 5° – – – plunger direction.
Plastic A 30° 5° – – – l Plunger tip is adjustable on type ST
B 30° 5° – – –

Metal A 30° 30° 20° 10° 5° l The information shown in the diagrams for contact travel / switching force is valid in
B 30° 30° 20° 10° 5° plunger direction.
Plastic A 30° 30° 20° 10° 5°
B 30° 30° 20° 10° 5°

Metal A – 30° 30° 20° 10° l The information shown in the diagrams for contact travel / switching force is valid in
B 20° 20° 10° – – plunger direction.
Plastic A – 30° 30° 20° 10°
B 40° 40° 30° 20° 10°

Metal A – 30° 30° 20° 10° l The information shown in the diagrams for contact travel / switching force
B 20° 20° 10° – – is valid in plunger direction.
Plastic A – 30° 30° 20° 10° l Upper part of the actuator with roller – adjustable
B 40° 40° 30° 20° 10°
Metal A – – – – – l The information shown in the diagrams for contact travel / switching force
B 30° 30° 20° 10° – is valid 90° to the plunger direction.
Plastic A – – – – – l Upper part of the actuator with roller – adjustable
B 40° 40° 40° 30° 20°
Metal A – – – – – l The information shown in the diagrams for contact travel / switching force
B 30° 30° 20° 10° – is valid 90° to the plunger direction.
Plastic A – – – – –
B 40° 40° 40° 30° 20°
Metal A – – – – – l The information shown in the diagrams for contact travel / switching force
B 40° 40° 30° 20° – is valid in plunger direction.
Plastic A – – – – –
B 40° 40° 40° 30° 20°
Metal A 45° 45° 40 ° 30° – l The information shown in the diagrams for contact travel / switching force
B 45° 45° 40° 30° – is valid in direction of rotation.
Plastic A – – – – – l Switch position will remain until return actuation
B – – – – –
Metal A 60° 50° 45° – – l The information shown in the diagrams for switching angle/actuator torque
B – – – – – is valid for any operating direction.
Plastic A 20° 20° 10° 5° – l Not suitable for operators protection
B – – – – –
Metal A 45° 45° 45° 40° 30° l The information shown in the diagrams for switching angle/actuator torque
B 45° 45° 45° 40° 30° is valid in direction of rotation.
Plastic A 45° 45° 45° 40° 30° l Roller lever adjustable on the shaft gradually (step by step) in radial direction and can
B 45° 45° 45° 40° 30° be turned by 180°

Metal A 45° 45° 45° 40° 30° l The information shown in the diagrams for switching angle/actuator torque
B 45° 45° 45° 40° 30° is valid in direction of rotation.
Plastic A 45° 45° 45° 40° 30° l Roller lever adjustable in longitudinal & radial direction on the shaft and can be turned by 180°
B 45° 45° 45° 40° 30° l Not suitable for operators protection
Metal A 45° 45° 40° 30° 20° l The information shown in the diagrams for switching angle/actuator torque
B 45° 45° 40° 30° 20° is valid in direction of rotation.
Plastic A 45° 45° 40° 30° 20° l Rod adjustable in longitudinal & radial (step by step) direction
B 45° 45° 40° 30° 20°
Metal A 45° 45° 40° 30° 20° l The information shown in the diagrams for switching angle/actuator torque
B 45° 45° 40° 30° 20° is valid in direction of rotation.
Plastic A 45° 45° 40° 30° 20° l Spring adjustable in radial direction on the shaft
B 45° 45° 40° 30° 20° l Not suitable for operators protection

51
Limit switches

Technical data

Switches with turret head housing

When supplied the contacts work in both

directions according to the contact travel
diagrams

Adjustment of the actuator standard

position on the shaft:
The standard position of the unit can be
changed and fixed step by step for exact
positioning.

– AH, AHS, AHZ, AF, AD, AV:

Adjustment in 15º steps (fig. 1) Fig. 1 Fig. 2

– AHS-V
Adjustment in 7,5° increments or 15°
positive drive steps selected by reversing
the drive washer between the lever and
head (fig. 2)

– Adjustment AV, AD
Adjustment in radial direction

– AH, AHS, AHS-V, AHZ, AV:

By rotating 180º the roller lever is usable
at a different axial level (fig 3. and 4) Fig. 3 Fig. 4

Adjustment for switching (dependent

on direction)
With actuators AHS, AHS-V, AV, AD

When supplied as standard the contacts

work in both directions according to the
contact travel diagrams. By simply
changing the actuator push rod, an idle
run function can be achieved in the chosen
direction (fig 5. and 6). The idle run func-
tion may be used in control systems, which
cannot handle successive signals due to the
return “over swing” of very long actuators
AV/AD.
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
Forced disconnect
Forward and return movement AHZ
For special safety applications the forced
disconnection of the NC contacts may be
required in the forward movement (moving
in one direction) as well as in the return
movement (back to normal position). For
operator safety applications the roller must Note – when altering actuators
be positively guided in both directions (see AH, AHS, AHS-V, AHZ, AF, AD, AV,
fig. 7 and 8). DGH, DGK
– the assured conditions of supply will
change.

After the adjustment, the user must

make sure that the part reaches the
necessary safety levels.
Fig. 7 Fig. 8

52
 Switches
Accessories for
plastic bodied
limit switches

Fixing support

For type I 88 Bi ENK

Part number 319.1871.157 319.1871.158 319.1871.154
Stock status: Ex stock / Built to order –/l –/l –/l

Finger protection

For type I 88, Bi, ENK

Part number 359.5900.060
Stock status: Ex stock / Built to order l/–

Guide disc

For type I 88
Part number 351.5900.209
Stock status: Ex stock / Built to order l/–

53
Footswitches

Selection table: contact arrangements

l Catalogue model (stock item or to order)

m Technically possible (to special order)

– not available

Options

l EEx certificated versions available

acc. ATEX 100 a

Contacts/Pedals Additional features

Function Contacts Circuit Contacts Additional features

diagram Ref: Ref:

Slow make & break 1NC/1NO 1 U1/U1Z

Slow make & break 1NC/1NO 2 U1 Latch switch
Slow make & break 1NC/1NO 3 U1 Emergency stop button NA2

Snap action 1NC/1NO 4 SU1/SU1Z

Snap action 1NC/1NO 5 SU1Z Pressure point D
Snap action 1NC/1NO 6 SU1 Latch switch Y
Snap action 1NC/1NO 7 SU1Z Power contactor LS 22
Snap action 1NC/1NO 8 SU1Z Latch switch/power contactor Y/LS 22
Snap action 2NC/2NO 9 SU1 Mi Potentiometer RG
Snap action/slow make & break 1NC/2NO 10 SU1Z/UV1 Safety function with pressure point D

Slow make & break 2NC/2NO 11 U2Z

Slow make & break 2NC/2NO 12 U2Z Pressure point D

Snap action 2NC/2NO 13 SU2Z

Electronic output ES
Pedal protection PS
Pedal latch AT
Foot support FS
Drop down pedal guard UK

Circuit diagrams

23 24 23 24 23 24 21 22 21 22 21 22
11 12 11 12 11 12 13 14 13 14 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6

54
 Switches
Ordering instructions for footswitches 1. Type 3. Information about additional func-
The following part numbers or type refe- of footswitch requested – F1, F2, F3 or tions, design or pedal accessories
rences of our catalogue versions are suffi- FG This must be indicated in the type
cient to place an order for a Bernstein 2. Number and type of contact inserts reference directly after the appropriate
footswitch. To ensure correct supply of for multiple-pedal switches, list in order contact element.
footswitches with non-standard contact from left to right. Example: With latch & pressure point –
combinations or accessories, which are not Example: F3-U1Z/SU1Z/U2Z F3-U1Z/SU1Y/U2ZD
shown in the catalogue we require the
exact type reference.

Type Pedal 1 Pedal 2 Pedal 3 Pedal independent

addition
F1 – Contact type Additional function Accessory
F2 – Contact type Additional function Contact type Additional function Accessory
F3 – Contact type Additional function Contact type Additional function Contact type Additional function Accessory

Example:
F3 – U1 SU1 Y U2 D UN

Type F1 Type F1 UN Type F2 Type F2 UN Type F3 Type F3 UN

Page 56 Page 58 Page 61 Page 62 Page 63 Page 63

l l l l l l
l l m m m m
– l – m – m

l l m l m m
m m m l m m
m m m m m m
– m – m – m
– m – m – m
l m m m m m
– l – m – –

l l l l m m
l l m l m m

m m m m m m
m m m m m m
m m m m m m
m l U1Z m m m m
m m m m m m
m – – – – –

Circuit diagrams

P3 33 34
)
2 43 44 43 44 41 42
P1 25 26
21 22 21 22 31 32 31 32 33 34
P2
13 14 13 14 14 23 24 23 24 21 22
)
1

11 13 14
12 11 12 11 12 13 14

7 8 9 10 ) Pressure point 11
1
12 13
) Latch
2

55
Footswitches
with single pedal

F1
Protection class IP 65

Designation F1-U1Z F1-U1Y F1-SU1Z F1-SU1 Mi RG

Part number 606.1100.005 606.1100.001 606.1300.011 616.1300.327
Circuit diagram
) pressure point
1
23 24 23 24 21 22 P3
P1
11 12 11 12 13 14
P2
14
11
12

Slow make & break/snap action l/– l/– –/l –/l

Pressure point – – – –
Latching switch – l – –
Potentiometer – – – l 10 kΩ 2 W 2)
Pedal interlocking – – – –
Emergency stop function – – – –
Power contactor – – – –

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 250 V AC DC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 5A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 50/min. 50/min. 50/min. 20/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Mechanical life – number of revolutions – – – 50 x 103 3)
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL –

Cable entry 1 x M 20 1 x M 20 1 x M 20 1 x M 20

Weight 0.60 kg/1.3 lb 0.60 kg/1.3 lb 0.60 kg/1.3 lb 0.75 kg/1.65 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

70 60
) other resistance figures on request
2 (2.76") (2.36")

) number of revolutions available up to 5 x 106

3
(8.66")
220

IN - CL
TE A
S
BERN

SS
IC
Po

a
ic

ta
r

l
Westfa

66 57
(2.58") (2.24")

56
 Switches
F1-U2Z F1-U2Z D
606.1200.003 606.1200.007

43 44 43 44
31 32 31 32
)
1

23 24 23 24
11 12 11 12

l/– l/–
– l
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –

500 V AC 500 V AC
10 A 10 A
l l

50/min. 50/min.
10 x 106 10 x 106
– –
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL

3 x M 20 3 x M 20

0.60 kg/1.3 lb 0.70 kg/1.5 lb

l/– l/–

70 60
(2.76") (2.36")
(8.66")
220

IN - CL
TE A
S
BERN

SS
IC
Po

a
ic

ta
r

l
Westfa

66 57
(2.58") (2.24")

57
Footswitches
with single pedal
(guarded)

F1 UN
Protection class IP 65

Designation F1-U1Z UN F1-U1Y UN F1-SU1Z UN

Part number 606.1600.006 606.1600.002 606.1800.012
Circuit diagram
) pressure point
1
23 24 23 24 21 22
) Emergency stop
2

11 12 11 12 13 14
button – self latching

Slow make & break/snap action l/– l/– –/l

Pressure point – – –
Latching switch – l –
Potentiometer – – –
Pedal interlocking – – –
Emergency stop function – – –
Power contactor – – –

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 50/min. 50/min. 50/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Mechanical life – number of revolutions – – –
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL

Cable entry 1 x M 20 1 x M 20 1 x M 20

Weight 1.50 kg/3.3 lb 1.50 kg/3.3 lb 1.50 kg/3.3 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

75 94
(2.96") (3.70")
(9.83")
250

(3.66")
93

IN - CL
TE A
S
BERN

SS
IC
Po

a
ic

ta
r

l
Westfa

66 57
(2.58") (2.24")
156 146
(6.14") (5.73")

58
 Switches
F1-U2Z UN F1-U2ZD UN F1-U1Z NA2 UN F1-U1Z AT UN
606.1700.004 606.1700.008 606.1600.435 616.1600.400

43 44 43 44 23 24 21 22 23 24
31 32 31 32 11 12 11 12 11 12
)
1

23 24 23 24 )
2

11 12 11 12

l/– l/– l/– l

– l – –
– – – –
– – – –
– – – l
– – l –
– – – –

500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 600 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l – l

50/min. 50/min. 50/min. 50/min.

10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
– – – –
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL

3 x M 20 3 x M 20 3 x M 20 1 x M 20

1.50 kg/3.3 lb 1.60 kg/3.5 lb 1.60 kg/3.5 lb 1.50 kg/3.3 lb

l/– l/– l/– –/l

75 94 75 94 75 94
(2.96") (3.70") (2.96") (3.70") (2.96") (3.70")
(9.83")
(9.83")

(9.83")

250
250

250

(3.66")
(3.66")

(3.66")

93
93

93

IN - CL IN - CL IN - CL
TE A TE A TE A
S

S
BERN

BERN

BERN
SS

SS

SS
IC

IC

IC
Po

Po

Po

a
ic

ic

ic

ta ta ta
r

l l l
Westfa Westfa Westfa

66 57 66 57 66 57
(2.58") (2.24") (2.58") (2.24") (2.58") (2.24")
156 146 156 146 156 146
(6.14") (5.73") (6.14") (5.73") (6.14") (5.73")

59
Safety footswitch
Safety latch with manual reset

Protection class IP 65

OFF

ON

Designation F1-SU1Z/UV1 DUN

Part number 616.1000.203
Circuit diagram
) pressure point
1 33 34
)
2
STOP
) latch
2
25 26

)
1

13 14

Slow make & break/snap action l/l

Pressure point l
Latching switch l
Potentiometer –
Pedal interlocking –
Emergency stop function –
Power contactor l
–

Voltage max. 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 1. Depressing the pedal to the pressure
In-rush current complies with standards l point closes the contact and the
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13 operating process starts.
Switching frequency max. 50/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 2. In an emergency situation the pressure
Mechanical life – number of revolutions point is overcome – the contact is
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C opened and locked – the operating
–22 °F/+176 °F process is then interrupted. The latching
mechanism holds the contact in the off
Approvals BG, UL, CSA position ensuring that an uncontrolled
restart or new start of the machine can-
Cable entry 1 x M 20 not happen.

Weight 1.50 kg/3.3 lb 3. Interlocking: Only by releasing the

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– locking device manually (reset button on
the side of the housing), after the
All dimensions in mm (inch) dangerous situation has been cleared,
75 94
can the contacts be set to normal again.
(2.96") (3.70")
The operating process can then be
repeated by operating the pedal to the
pressure point.
(9.83")
250

(3.66")
93

IN - CL
TE A
S
BERN

SS
IC
Po

a
ic

ta
r

l
Westfa

66 57
(2.58") (2.24")
156 146
(6.14") (5.73")

60
 Switches
Footswitches
with two pedals

F2
Protection class IP 65

Designation F2-U1Z/U1Z F2-U2Z/U2Z

Part number 606.2110.013 606.2220.015
Circuit diagram
23 24 23 24 43 44 43 44
11 12 11 12 31 32 31 32
23 24 23 24
11 12 11 12

Slow make & break/snap action l/– l/– l/– l/–

Pressure point – – – –
Latching switch – – – –
Potentiometer – – – –
Pedal interlocking – – – –
Emergency stop function – – – –
Power contactor – – – –

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 50/min. 50/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106
Mechanical life – number of revolutions – –
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL

Cable entry 1 x M 20 1 x M 20

Weight 1.70 kg/3.7 lb 1.70 kg/3.7 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

190 60
(7.48") (2.36")
(8.66")
220

IN - CL IN - CL
TE A TE A
S

S
BERN

BERN
SS

SS
IC

IC
Po

Po
a

a
ic

ic

ta ta
r

l l
Westfa Westfa

66 66 57
(2.58") (2.58") (2.24")
118
(4.65")

61
Footswitches
with two pedals
(guarded)
F2 UN

With three pedals F3

With three pedals

(guarded)
F3 UN
Protection class IP 65

Designation F2-U1Z/U1Z UN F2-SU1Z/SU1Z UN F2-U2Z/U2Z UN F2-U2ZD/U2ZD UN

Part number 606.2610.014 606.2830.022 606.2720.016 606.2720.020
Circuit diagram
) pressure point
1 23 24 23 24 21 22 21 22 43 44 43 44 43 44 43 44
11 12 11 12 13 14 13 14 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32
)
1
)
1

23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12

Slow make & break/snap action l/– l/– –/l –/l l/– l/– l/– l/–
Pressure point – – – – – – l l
Latching switch – – – – – – – –
Potentiometer – – – – – – – –
Pedal interlocking – – – – – – – –
Emergency stop function – – – – – – – –
Power contactor – – – – – – – –

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 50/min. 50/min. 50/min. 50/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
Mechanical life – number of revolutions – – – –
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL

Cable entry 1 x M 20 1 x M 20 1 x M 20 1 x M 20

Weight 2.60 kg/5.7 lb 2.60 kg/5.7 lb 2.60 kg/5.7 lb 2.80 kg/6.2 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

195
(7.69") 94
(3.70")
(9.83")
250

(3.66")
93

IN - CL
TE A
S
BERN

SS
IC
Po

a
ic

ta
r

l
Westfa

118
(4.65") 57
66 66 (2.24")
(2.58") (2.58") 146
276 (5.73")
(10.87")

62
 Switches
F2-SU1ZD/SU1ZD UN F3-U1Z/U1Z/U1Z F3-U1Z/U1Z/U1Z UN
606.2830.417 606.3111.025 606.3611.026

21 22 21 22 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24
13 14 13 14 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12

–/l –/l l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

l l – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –

500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l

50/min. 50/min. 50/min.

10 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106
– – –
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL BG, CSA, UL

1 x M 20 2 x M 20 2 x M 20

2.80 kg/6.2 lb 3.10 kg/6.8 lb 5.40 kg/11.9 lb

l/– l/– l/–

325 94
(12.80") (3.70")
32 6
(12.80") (2.59")
(9.83")
250
(8.66")
22

(3.66")
93

IN - CL
TE A
S
BERN

SS
IC

N- N- N-
TEI CLA TEI CLA TEI CLA
S

Po

a
BERN

BERN

BERN

ic
SSI

SSI

SSI

ta
r

l
Westfa
C

C
a

a
Por

Por

Por
ic

ic

ic

ta ta ta
Westfal Westfal Westfal

6 6 6 5 66 66 66
(2.58") (2.58") (2.58") (2.24") (2.58") (2.58") (2.58") 57
12 12 125 125 (2.24")
(4.92") (4.92") (4.92") (4.92") 146
410 (5.73")
(16.14")

63
Interlocking safety
switches

SKT
Protection class IP 65

q
The SKT is the smallest safety switch with a Available are: Positioning the actuator head
separate actuator offering the same fea- l 1 NC p/1 NO slow-action device l Rotation in 4 x 90° increments: when
tures, relating to safety, as all other produc- l 1 NC p/1 NO snap-action device mounted, the head is fixed into position
ts in this range. The SKT is perfect for l 2 NC p slow-action device by the clasp
applications that require a particularly slim l 2 NC p snap-action device l Horizontal or vertical operation
and compact switching device. The rotating
head, two actuator openings and different Mechanical data
switching functions are proof of its versa- l Enclosure and lid made from highly
tility. durable fiberglass reinforced thermoplas-
The SKT offers further options enabling it tic (UL 94-VO)
to suit a wide variety of applications. l Operating mechanism: head made from
l Integrated forced ejection function (FE): PA, clasp from Zn, rivets from stainless
The actuator is ejected from the switch: steel
– preventing unauthorized use of a spare l Actuator made from stainless steel
actuator to defeat the safety function l Cable entry M 16 x 1.5
– ensuring the guard must be closed
securely to enable the machine to run
l Integrated actuator holding force
(FI50 = 50 N):
Guard doors which may open due to
(0.22")
5.5

M4
vibration can be held shut by using the
SKT with increased actuator holding
force up to 50 N, without the need for
bulky external latches. In addition several
doors mounted in a straight line on one M5
(0.16")

(0.08")

machine are kept closed.

4

22
l Universal radius actuator (MRU): (0.87") Warning
In addition to the standard straight-on 23
(0.91")
l The safety switch must not be used
actuator made from stainless steel (oper- as a mechanical end stop.
ating radius 150 mm), the universal l To preserve the level of safety, the safety
radius actuator offers an adjustable Mounting and installation switch must only be used in conjunction
operating radius to a minimum 50 mm l The safety switch is mounted using 2 x with the correct actuator.
both horizontally and vertically. M5 screws in the provided locating and
The SKT offers a variety of different switch- mounting holes (23 mm centres).
ing functions in a highly compact enclo- l The separate actuator is attached using
sure. All systems are fitted with galvanically 2 x M4 screws (20 mm centres).
isolated contacts, the normally-closed The safety switch and the actuator should
being positive break. Snap-action contacts be secured well, in order to prevent unin-
have been designed for control systems tentional loosening (one-way and break-off
that require a simultaneous signal. screws, rivets etc.)

Contact configuration

Switching element Switch function Switch contact Designation Voltage Continuous current

Slow-action changeover 1 NC/1 NO U1Z 250 V 10 A

Snap-action changeover 1 NC/1 NO SU1Z 250 V 10 A
Slow-action normally-closed 2 NC A2Z 250 V 10 A
Snap-action normally-closed 2 NC SA2Z 250 V 10 A

64
 Switches
Designation SKT-U1Z M3 SKT-SU1Z M3 SKT-A2Z M3 SKT-SA2Z M3
Part number 601.6419.059 601.6409.060 601.6469.066 601.6469.067
Switching diagram
p positive break according to 11 12 13 14 11 12
11 12
IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3 21 22
Za: changeover contact is not galvanically isolated 23 24 21 22 21 22
Zb: changeover contact is galvanically isolated p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow-action contact/snap-action contact l/– –/l l/– –/l
Gasket inside (iw)/outside (w) iw iw iw iw

11-12
21-22
11-12
21-22
21-22
13-14
13-14
21-22

11-12
21-22
11-12
23-24

Contact travel mm Actuating force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10% 21.5(0.85) 2) 21.5(0.85) 2) 21.5(0.85) 2) 21.5(0.85) 2)
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Switch angle degree Actuating torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%
6(0.24) 6(0.24)
4.4(0.17)
4.3(0.17) 4.5(0.18) 4.5(0.18)
4.5(0.18)
1
) actuator in 4(0.16) 3.7(0.15) 4.2(0.17) 3.9(0.15)
2
) actuator out
In Out 0 12-1) 0 12-1) 0 12-1) 0 12-1)
N N N N
mm(inch) mm(inch)
mm(inch)

Voltage max. 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC

Continuous current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
Making current, acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13 l l l l

Switching frequency max. 30/min. 30/min. 30/min. 30/min.

Mech. operational life – number of switching cycles 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
Ambient temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

Weight 0.13 kg/0.29 lb 0.13 kg/0.29 lb 0.13 kg/0.29 lb 0.13 kg/0.29 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

Alternative M 2

6.5
Rm (0.26") R
(5.91in. 150 (5.9min. 1
") 1") 50
(0.44")

(0.06")
11.25

(0.20")

30
1.5

(1.18")
5

s0

30
(1.71")

(1.18")
43.5

(0.31")

4.25
(0.06")
1.5

(0.17")
(3.27")
83

24
(0.94")
(1.77")
45

(1.18")
(0.83")
(0.75")
19

21

30

30 11
(1.18") M16 (0.43")
27
(1.06")

M4

65
Interlocking safety switches

SKI
Protection class IP 65

q
The slim design and dimensions of the SKI Mechanical data Positioning the actuator head
(according to EN 50047) allow it to be l Enclosure and lid made from glass-fibre l Rotation in 4 x 90° increments: when
mounted onto narrow profile systems and reinforced PA 6 (UL 94-V0) mounted, the head is fixed into position
in confined spaces. Operation can be per- l Switching device made from PA/St and by the clasp
formed both horizontally and vertically. This stainless steel l Horizontal or vertical operation
flexible form of mounting is supported by l Actuator made from stainless steel
the ability to position the actuating head in l Cable entry M 20 x 1.5
4 x 90° increments. (optional: M 16 x 1.5)
The SKI has the option of two new built-in
operating functions. Mounting and installation
l Integrated forced ejection function (FE): l The safety switch is mounted using 2 x
The actuator is ejected from the switch: M5 screws in the locating and mounting
– preventing unauthorized use of a spare holes.
actuator to defeat the safety function l The separate actuator is mounted using
– ensuring the guard must be closed 2 x M4 screws. The safety switch and
securely to enable the machine to run the actuator should be secured well, in
l Integrated actuator holding force order to prevent unintentional loosening
(FI 50 = 50 N): (one-way and break-off screws, rivets
Guard doors which may open due to etc.).
vibration can be held shut by using the
SKI with increased actuator holding
force of 50 N, without the need for
bulky external latches. In addition several
doors mounted in a straight line on one
machine are kept closed. Ø5 ")
0
.2
(0
(0.30")

21.5
7.5

The SKI is equipped with positive-break (0.85")

and galvanically-isolated contacts.
Available are: Warning
l 1 NC p/1 NO slow-action device l The safety switch must not be used
l 1 NC p/1 NO snap-action device as a mechanical end stop.
l 2 NC p slow-action device l To preserve the level of safety, the safety
l 2 NC p/1 NO slow-action device switch must only be used in conjunction
with the correct actuator.

Contact configuration

Switching element Function Contacts Designation Voltage Continuous current

Slow-action changeover 1 NC/1 NO U1Z 250 V 10 A

Snap-action changeover 1 NC/1 NO SU1Z 250 V 10 A
Slow-action normally-closed 2 NC A2Z 250 V 10 A
Slow-action changeover, overlapping 2 NC/1 NO UV15Z 400 V 6 A

66
 Switches
Designation SKI-U1Z M3 SKI-SU1Z M3 SKI-A2Z M3 SKI-UV15Z M3
Part number 601.6819.052 601.6809.057 601.6869.056 601.6869.058
Switching diagram
15 16
p positive break according to 11 12 13 14 11 12
25 26
IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3
Za: changeover contact is not galvanically isolated 23 24 21 22 21 22
33 34
Zb: changeover contact is galvanically isolated p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow-action contact/snap-action contact l/– –/l l/– l/–
Gasket inside (iw)/outside (w) iw iw iw iw
21-22
13-14
13-14
21-22

11-12
21-22

15-16
25-26
33-34
11-12
23-24

Contact travel mm Actuating force N

(inch) Tol. ± 10% 21.5(0.85) 2) 21.5(0.85) 2) 21.5(0.85) 2) 21.5(0.85) 2)
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

Switch angle degree Actuating torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%
7.3(0.29) 8.8(0.35)
4(0.16) 8.4(0.33)
3.9(0.15) 5.5(0.22) 8.3(0.33)
7.4(0.29)
1
) actuator in 3.1(0.12) 3.9(0.15) 7.6(0.30)
2
) actuator out
0 12-1) 0 12-1)
In Out 0
mm(inch)
12-1)
N mm(inch) N mm(inch) N mm(inch)
0 12-1)
N

Voltage max. 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 400 V AC

Continuous current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 6A
Making current, acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13 l l l l

Switching frequency max. 30/min. 30/min. 30/min. 30/min.

Mech. operational life – number of switching cycles 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
Ambient temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

Weight 0.13 kg/0.29 lb 0.13 kg/0.29 lb 0.13 kg/0.29 lb 0.13 kg/0.29 lb

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

Alternative M 2
6.5
R min (0.26") Rm
(5.91 . 150 (5.9 in. 1
") 1") 50
(0.44")
11.25

30
(0.20")

(1.18")
(0.06")
5

s
1.5

0
(0.31")

(0.31")

30
(0.06")
1.5
8

Ø4 ")
(0.1
6 (1.18") 4.25
(0.17")
(3.94")

23
100

20
(0.79") (0.91")
22
(0.15")

(0.87")
(2.44")
4
62

16
(1.18")
(0.83")
(0.75")

(0.63")
19

21

30

M20
30.5
31 (1.20")
(1.22")

M4

67
Plastic-bodied
interlocking safety switch

SKC
SK
Protection class IP 65

Designation SKC-A1Z M SK-U1Z M SK-UV1Z M

Part number 601.6169.039 601.6119.016 601.6139.034
Circuit diagram
11 12 15 16
p Forced disconnect to 11 12

IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3 23 24 23 24

Za: not galvanically separated contacts
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw iw iw

Contact travel Actuator force N

mm (inch) Tol. ± 10%
Tol. ± 0.25 mm

1
) actuator in
2
) actuator out
On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 30/min. 30/min. 30/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

Weight 0.11 kg/0.24 Ib 0.13 kg/0.29 Ib 0.13 kg/0.29 Ib

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

52
(2.05")
(0.31")

40
52
7.9

(2.05") (1.57")
30
40 (1.18")
(0.31")

(1.57")
7.9

8
30 (0.31")
(1.14")

(01.18")
(1.07")
29
27

8
(0.32")
(1.14")
(1.06")

(0.31")
29
27

Ø5.1
8

(0.20")
(0.31")

Ø5.1
8

(0.20")
(1.15")
29
(01.15")
29.1

(0.71")
18.1

(3.54")
(2.95")

5.5
90

(0.22")
75
(0.71")

5.5
(0.28")
18.1

(0.22") 40
7

(1.57")
(0.28")

40
(1.57")
7
M16x1.5

M20x1.5

33 52 33.5 52
(1.30") (2.05") (1.32") (2.05")

68
 Switches
SK-UV15Z M SK-UV16Z M SK-A2Z M
601.6169.026 601.6169.027 601.6169.036

15 16 15 16 11 12
25 26 23 24 21 22

33 34 33 34
p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– l/– l/–
iw iw iw

400 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC

6A 6A 10 A
l l l

30/min. 30/min. 30/min.

1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

0.13 kg/0.29 Ib 0.13 kg/0.29 Ib 0.13 kg/0.29 Ib

l/– l/– l/–

69
Actuator selection table

SKC/SK
Safety switch
DIN EN 60947-5-1

l p Forced disconnection of NC contacts Actuator M Actuator P

l Galvanically separated contacts
according to Zb form l Metal l Thermoplastic
l Stainless steel l Polyamide
Approvals
l UL, CSA
l BG

Standard models Actuator Contact diagram Part number Part number

Single & double poles retention force Designation Designation
SKC-A1Z 10N 601.6169.039 601.6169.054
SKC-A1Z M SKC-A1Z P
SKC-A1Z F30 30N 11 12 m m

SKC-A1Z Fi100 100N 601.6169.003 –

SKC-A1Z Fi100 M
SK-U1Z 10N 601.6119.016 601.6119.035
SK-U1Z M SK-U1Z P
SK-U1Z F30 30N 11 12 611.6119.109 m
SK-U1Z F30 M
23 24
SK-U1Z Fi100 100N 601.6119.001 –
SK-U1Z Fi100 M
SK-UV1Z 10N 601.6139.034 m
SK-UV1Z M
SK-UV1Z F30 30N 15 16 m m

23 24
SK-UV1Z Fi100 100N m –

SK-A2Z 10N 601.6169.036 m

SK-A2Z M
SK-A2Z F30 30N 11 12 601.6169.053 m
21 22 SK-A2Z F30 M
SK-A2Z Fi100 100N 601.6169.024 –
SK-A2Z Fi100 M
SK-SU1Z 10N m m

SK-SU1Z F30 30N 13 14 m m

21 22
SK-SU1Z Fi100 100N m –

Standard models Actuator Contact diagram Part number Part number

Three poles retention force Designation Designation
SK-UV15Z 10N 601.6169.026 m
15 16 SK-UV15Z M
SK-UV15Z F30 30N 601.6169.061 m
25 26 SK-UV15Z F30 M
SK-UV15Z Fi100 100N 601.6169.025 –
33 34 SK-UV15Z Fi100 M
SK-UV16Z 10N 601.6169.027 m
15 16 SK-UV16Z M
SK-UV16Z F30 30N m m
23 24
SK-UV16Z Fi100 100N m –
33 34

m Technically possible (on request)

– Not available

70
 Switches
Actuator F Actuator MRU

l Spring loaded to l Adjustable hori-

accomodate over- zontally & vertically
travel l Flexible
l Stainless steel or l Stainless steel
polyamide l Spring loaded to
accomodate
overtravel
Part number Part number
Designation Designation Technical data l Forced Ejection (FE):
Standard models
m 601.6169.087
single & double poles
The actuator mechanism is
SKC-A1Z MRU spring loaded to forcibly eject
m m Insulation voltage: the actuator.
Ui = 500 V
m m Thermal constant current: l Actuator Retention
Ith = 10 A (F 30, Fi 100)
601.6119.074 601.6119.084 This model retains the
Switching frequency: actuator with the indicated
SK-U1Z PF SK-U1Z MRU
Max. 30/min.
m m force in Newtons.
Mechanical life:
m m 1 x 106 strokes l MRU Actuator:
Operating temperature:
This actuator is spring
m m –30 °C/+80 °C mounted to accommodate
some misalignment as
m m Weight: well as over travel.
0.13 kg/0.29 lbs

m m

m 601.6169.085 Technical data

SK-A2Z MRU Standard models
three poles
m m
Insulation voltage:
m 601.6169.032 Ui = 400 V
SK-A2Z Fi100 MRU
Thermal constant current:
m m Ith = 6 A

m m Switching frequency:
Max. 30/min.

m m Mechanical life:
1 x 106 strokes

Operating temperature:
–30 °C/+80 °C

Weight:
0.13 kg/0.29 lbs
Part number Part number
Designation Designation
601.6169.063 601.6169.086
SK-UV15Z MF SK-UV15Z MRU
m m

m m

m m

m m Important note:

m m To ensure safety integrity, actuators

should only be purchased together
with the safety switch.

71
 Plastic-bodied
safety switch with
separate actuator

ENK … VTU
Protection class IP 65

(pending)
Designation
The safety switch ENK ...VTU offers the Part number
optimum combination of a cost-redu- Switching diagram
cing plastic-bodied housing and an actu- p Forced disconnect
ating system for difficult industrial IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3
demands. Za: changeover contact is not galvanically isolated
Zb: changeover contact is galvanically isolated
The housing, made of glass-fibre reinforced Slow-action contact/snap-action contact
polyamide, fulfils the demands required for Gasket inside (iw)/outside (w)
isolated low-voltage switching and contact
devices. Due to its pin shaped geometry, the Contact travel mm Actuating force N
particularly robust, separate actuator is suit- Tol. ± 0.25 mm Tol. ± 10%
able for use in tolerance-burdened protec- l Safety contacts with positive break and
tive equipment. Optional actuators, which galvanic isolation
can be adjustable or flexibly mounted, guar- l Contacts: 1NC+1NO, 2NC or 2NC+1NO
antee a high mechanical loading capacity. (with overlapping contacts) In Out
l Wiring space with hinged, self-locking
l Mounting dimensions according to lid
EN 50041 l Protection class IP 65
l Integrated mounting plate made l Radius actuator and lateral actuator
of metal optional
l Actuation in horizontal and vertical Voltage max.
directions Continuous thermal current max.
l A total of 8 actuating directions possible Making current, acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13

max. 0.5 Nm Switching frequency max.

2. 3. Mech. operational life – number of switching cycles
Ambient temperature min./max.

Approvals
Pending Approvals
Weight
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order
1. One-way screw
32
8

S0
20

46 S0
16 32-37
ø4.5

9
75

1.
37.1
ø5.2
2
130.5

116.5

31
83
60

29
6.5

The positioning of the actuating head in either a horizontal or vertical actuating direction 30 M20x1.5 15
40 40
offers the choice of 8 actuating directions for the actuator.

72
 Switches
ENK-U1Z VTU ENK-A2Z VTU ENK-UV15Z VTU
601.6619.132 601.6669.133 601.6669.154

15 16
11 12 11 12
25 26
23 24 21 22 33 34
p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– l/– l/–
iw iw iw

Actuating force Actuating force Actuating force

approx. 20 N approx. 20 N approx. 20 N

250 VAC 250 VAC 400 VAC

10 A 10 A 6A
240 V/3 A 240 V/3 A 240 V/1,5 A
(AC 15) A300 (AC 15) A300 (AC 15) A300
30/min. 30/min. 30/min.
1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

– – –
BG BG BG
0.2 kg 0.2 kg 0.2 kg
l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm
32
8

S0
20

46 S0
16 32-37
ø4.5

9
75

37.1
ø5.2
2
130.5

116.5

31
83
60

29
6.5

30 M20x1.5 15
40 40

73
Metal-bodied
interlocking
safety switches

ENM2
GC
Protection class IP 65

Designation ENM2-U1Z VTW GC-U1 VT 90°

Part number 601.6219.100 612.1100.555
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 23 24
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw iw

Contact travel Actuating force N

mm (inch) Tol. ± 15%
Mounting dimension

max. 1 mm
53–56.5
1
) actuator in
2
) actuator out
On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 50/min. 10/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, UL, CSA (in preparation) BG, UL, CSA

Weight 0.34 kg/0.75 Ib 0.31 kg/0.68 Ib

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

64
18
56
Ø10

4
25
3
max.

5.5
2.

4.2
5°

25
72

13.5

36

74
 Switches
Interlocking solenoid
safety switches
with plastic body

SLK
Safelock Family
Plastic body
Protection class IP 67
Power to lock or unlock

q
Product advantages Innovative installation Safety in demanding environmental
l Safety built into the system through two conditions
independent safety circuits, flexible con-
tact assembly with max. 4 NC p
l Universal integration into system due to
multiple voltage supply 24–48 V DC and
24–230 V AC
(Standard: 24 V AC/DC)
l Flexible integration due to rotatable
actuating head (4 x 90°) and horizontal
or vertical operation The electrical connection of the SLK is safe
l Compact design with slim dimensions and reliable. A terminal block with cage- The use of an innovative electromechanical
with total length of 170 mm clamp terminal connectors is used. The ter- system (Bernstein patent) consisting of a
l Innovative installation due to cage-clamp minal compartment is separate from all solenoid actuator, electro-magnetic retenti-
connection technology. working parts ensuring that the connec- on system and electronic controller, results
l Function according to GS ET 19, EN tions are safely made. A terminal block in a very low power consumption. This
60 204-1 and EN 60 947-5-1. with conventional screw-type connections allows reliable continuous operation even
is available as an option. in high ambient temperatures.

Safe application The terminal compartment is designed Universal integration in system

according to protection class IP 67.

The LED indicator showing the actual sta-

tus is optional.

Flexible application

The actuator made from stainless steel In the multiple voltage version, the SLK can
guarantees reliable operation. The coding be connected to all control voltages from
prevents manipulation and bypassing in the 24 to 48 V DC as well as from 24 to 230 V
"simplest possible way". The optional AC. The standard SLK is equipped for a
radius actuator allows smaller safety doors control voltage of 24 V DC/AC.
to be monitored. It can be installed
horizontally or vertically, and is also made
from stainless steel.

The SLK can be operated both horizontally

and vertically. The necessary pre-setting is
carried out before mounting by simply
adjusting the actuating head. This flexible
method of mounting is supported by the
ability to position the actuating head in 4 x
90° increments.

75
High-level safety
at low cost 32
33
,2

184

170
Reliable
operation Flexible application
45 5
42,

Mounting
l The safety switch is mounted using a
minimum of two M5 screws in the
mounting holes.
l The separate actuator is to be suitably
secured to prevent unintentional
loosening (one-way and break-off
screws, rivets).
Safety in demanding l The user sets the actuating head to
environments either horizontal or vertical operation
before installation.
l This is achieved by changing the align-
ment of the actuating head and the
upper and lower parts are then secured
together using a security screw.
Universal integration l The four operating directions are select-
in system ed by pulling forward the clasp and
turning the actuating head.
Innovative
installation

Warning
l The safety switch must not be used
as a mechanical end stop.
l The interlock of the safety device is
maintained on power failure only with
the types SLK-FVTU… (spring-locking).
l To operate the auxiliary release, first
loosen the screw and turn the actuat-
ing lever.
l To maintain the safety level, the safety
switch may only be used in conjunc-
tion with the corresponding actuator.

Product designation system for SLK safety switches

Switch Locking Actuating Operating Two-digit contact Auxiliary release function Additional function
principle device voltage code:
1st digit = Actuator contact(s)
2nd digit = Solenoid contact(s)

SLK F Spring force VTU 24UC- 1 = 1NF p (AR Auxiliary release (L = LED
M Magnet force 24–230MC 2 = 2NF p (R = Radius actuator
3 = 1NO p (S = Plug-in connector
4 = 2NO p (A = Adaptor
5 = 1NF p 1NO (X = Special design
6 = no contact
Example : SLK FVTU24UC-55-ARR = type F, 24 V AC/DC, 1 NF p 1 NO on the interlock,
1 NF p 1 NO on the safety equipment, auxiliary release, radial actuator

76
 Switches
Table
of standard products

SLK

Part number Designation Locking Connection assembly Control voltage Add. functions Actuator
Spring force Safety Locking Auxiliary LED Standard
Magnet force equipment release Radius actuator
(AR) (L)
601.8119.001 SLK-FVTU24UC-55-AR Spring force 1NF p 1NO 1NF p 1NO 24 V AC/DC AR – Standard
601.8119.002 SLK-FVTU24-230MC-55-AR Spring force 1NF p 1NO 1NF p 1NO 24-48 V DC + 24-230 V AC AR – Standard
601.8119.003 SLK-MVTU24UC-55 Magnet force 1NF p 1NO 1NF p 1NO 24 V AC/DC – – Standard
601.8119.004 SLK-MVTU24-230MC-55 Magnet force 1NF p 1NO 1NF p 1NO 24-48 V DC + 24-230 V AC – – Standard
601.8169.005 SLK-FVTU24UC-21-AR Spring force 2NF p 1NF p 24 V AC/DC AR – Standard
601.8169.006 SLK-FVTU24-230MC-21-AR Spring force 2NF p 1NF p 24-48 V DC + 24-230 V AC AR – Standard
601.8119.009 SLK-FVTU24UC-55-ARL Spring force 1NF p 1NO 1NF p 1NO 24 V AC/DC AR L Standard
601.8169.010 SLK-FVTU24UC-21-ARL Spring force 2NF p 1NF p 24 V AC/DC AR L Standard
601.8119.012 SLK-FVTU24-230MC-55-ARL Spring force 1NF p 1NO 1NF p 1NO 24-48 V DC + 24-230 V AC AR L Standard
601.8169.013 SLK-FVTU24-230MC-21-ARL Spring force 2NF p 1NF p 24-48 V DC + 24-230 V AC AR L Standard
601.8119.015 SLK-FVTU24UC-55-ARR Spring force 1NF p 1NO 1NF p 1NO 24 V AC/DC AR – Radius actuator
601.8169.016 SLK-FVTU24UC-21-ARR Spring force 2NF p 1NF p 24 V AC/DC AR – Radius actuator
601.8119.018 SLK-FVTU24-230MC-55-ARR Spring force 1NF p 1NO 1NF p 1NO 24-48 V DC + 24-230 V AC AR – Radius actuator
601.8169.019 SLK-FVTU24-230MC-21-ARR Spring force 2NF p 1NF p 24-48 V DC + 24-230 V AC AR – Radius actuator
601.8119.021 SLK-MVTU24UC-55-L Magnet force 1NF p 1NO 1NF p 1NO 24 V AC/DC – L Standard
601.8169.022 SLK-MVTU24UC-21-L Magnet force 2NF p 1NF p 24 V AC/DC – L Standard
601.8119.024 SLK-MVTU24UC-55-R Magnet force 1NF p 1NO 1NF p 1NO 24 V AC/DC – – Radius actuator
601.8169.025 SLK-MVTU24UC-21-R Magnet force 2NF p 1NF p 24 V AC/DC – – Radius actuator
According to the part designation systematic, customer specific versions (i.e. different contacts) are possible (see page 76)

Electrical characteristics Mechanical characteristics

Switching devices Enclosure: PA 6 GV (UL94-V0)
Rated isolated Lid: PA 6 GV (UL94-V0)
voltage Ui: 250 V Actuating device: PA 6 GV / GD
Application category: AC 15 230 V/4 A Separate actuator: St/PA
Thermal current Ith: 10 A Ambient temperature: -25 °C to + 70 °C
Short-circuit protection: DIAZED - Switching function: 2 NC; 2 NO z. B.
DIN VDE 0636 Part 1 Switching principal: 4 push-button devices
6 A/inert gL/gG Mechanical life: 1 million cycles
Actuating radius: R = 400 mm min.
Electronic magnets Approach speed: V = 0.5 m/s max.
Duration of current: 3.4 / 100% ED Mounting: 4 x M5 screws
Temperature class: E (120 °C) Connection cross section: 1.5 mm2 flex. max.
Pulse power: 56 VA (0.2 s) Connection type: cage clamp
Holding power: 1.1 VA (constant) Cable entries: 3x M 20 x 1.5
Switching frequency: 600 / h max. Weight: approx. 0.3 kg
Protection class: IP 67
Mounting position: variable
Locking: Power to lock or unlock
Locking force: 2 000 N
Isolated: q

77
Interlocking solenoid safety switches
with metal body
SLM
Protection class IP 67
Y
Machines, which have a “run down time” System description
after they have been switched off, are The safety switch SLM with lock is available
often part of automatic production proces- in spring and solenoid interlocking design.
ses. The separate actuator is securely mounted
to the closing guard. When the actuator is
Safety devices should prevent access by the inserted into the switch the guard door Benefits of this system
operator and must be kept locked until the position is then monitored and either l All elements are enclosed in one metal
dangerous movement has stopped. locked or released (dependant on control housing
The safety-position switch (with suitable system/status of machine). l High resistance to heavy industrial use
control) will ensure that safety guards, l Compact housing for space saving instal-
doors and other covers are kept closed as The separate actuator provides a very high lation
long as there is danger. level of “operator interference” protection l Triple coded actuator with high
because of its triple coding. interference protection
The safety switch has three main functions: l Simple alteration of actuator approach
The locking device in the safety switch SLM direction in 90º positions (adjust only
l Allowing the machine to operate while is integrated into the switch housing. with actuator fitted)
the guard is closed and locked In the spring latch version locking is l All switch functions enclosed in inner
l Isolating the machine when the guard is achieved with a spring mechanism, in the module
open solenoid latch version locking is achieved l Safe and easy wiring due to terminals in
l Monitoring the position of the guard by energizing an electromagnet. Both types separate connection area.
and the actuator (open or closed) link the actuator with a switch mechanism l Individual contact configurations possible
for position indication. l Integrated safety circuit protects against
With the safety switch SLM the user has a voltage peaks and incorrect termination
position switch with separate actuator and l Mounting with M 5 screws according to
built in locking device, which meets the cri- DIN EN 50041
teria of interlocking devices, according to l Construction design according to VDE
EN 1088, the EN 292 part I and 2 are also 0660 part 200 IEC 947-5-1 control
valid since 01.01.1995 complying to the principles GS-ET 19 of the (German)
necessary machine guide-lines. employer’s liability insurance association
l Certification: UL & CSA
l Approval: BG

Important note:

The actuator head position may only

be changed with the actuator insert-
ed.

78
 Switches
Locking systems Options
SLM metal-bodied safety switches with l Individual contact configurations possible
separate actuators are available with spring l Radius actuator for actuating radius
locking as well as solenoid locking. lower than 400 mm
l Auxiliary unlock
l Key override
l Emergency stop override
l Visual indication of operating status of
the guard and lock
l Actuator for operating with head rotat-
ed 180º from standard
l Customised solutions

Spring locking
The lock for the standard product operates
with a spring force latch. The safety device Important note:
is self-latched, when the actuator reaches
its inserted end position and the solenoid is Safety switch model SLM with emer-
not energized (rest current principle). The gency stop override must be installed
actuator is released only when current is inside the guarded (dangerous) area.
applied to the solenoid coil. The guard The emergency stop should only be
door can than be opened. able to be activated to ensure escape
from a dangerous area in case of a
system error.

Solenoid locking
The SLM safety switch is also available with
solenoid powered locking. The guard is
only then locked when the actuator
reaches its inserted end position and the
solenoid is energized (conducting).
The actuator is released when power is
removed. The guard can then be opened.

79
Interlocking solenoid safety switch SLM
selection table: standard models

Type Locking Actuator Operating Contact type: Contact type:

type head voltage Actuator (guard) Solenoid status
Spring Solenoid position
SLM locking locking 12 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 48 V 120 V 230 V 1NC 2NC 1NC 1NC 2NC 1NC
VTW DC DC AC UC AC AC AC 1NO 1NO

l l – l – l – – – – – – – l – – l

l l – l – – – – – l – – – l – – l

l l – l – – – – – – l – – l – – l

l l – l – l – – – – – – – l l – –

l l – l – – – – – – l – – l l – –

l l – l – – – – – – l – – l – – l

l l – l – – – – – – l – – l – – l

l l – l – – – – – – l – – l – – l

l l – l – – – – – – l – – l – – l

l – l l – l – – – – – – – l – – l

l – l l – – – – – l – – – l – – l

l – l l – – – – – – l – – l – – l

l – l l – l – – – – – – – l l – –

l – l l – – – – – – l – – l l – –

Description/Reference
SLM F M VTW 12 DC 24 DC 24 DC 24 UC 48 AC 120 AC 230 AC 1 2 5 1 2 5

Example for Type description: Spring lock mechanism (F)

l l – l m m m m l m m m l m l m m

Example for Type description: Solenoid lock mechanism (M)

l – l l l m m m m m m m l m m l m

l Standard functions
m Technically possible function combination
– Not available

80
 Switches
Auxiliary unlock function Additional Additional Additional Additional Designation Part number Page
– AR KR ER functions functions functions functions
without Auxiliary Key Emer- Actuator for
unlock override gency Radius Plug Adapter 180° head
stop LED actuator connector /2˝ NPT
1
rotation
override
– l – – – – – – – SLM-FVTW 24DC-55-AR 601.7119.020 74

– l – – – – – – – SLM-FVTW 120AC-55-AR 601.7119.032 74

– l – – – – – – – SLM-FVTW 230AC-55-AR 601.7119.022 75

– l – – – – – – – SLM-FVTW 24DC-51-AR 601.7119.028 75

– l – – – – – – – SLM-FVTW 230AC-51-AR 601.7119.029 75

– – l – – – – – – SLM-FVTW 230AC-55-KR 601.7119.057 76

– – – l *) – – – – – SLM-FVTW 230AC-55-ER 601.7119.058 76

– l – – l – – – – SLM-FVTW 120AC-55-ARL 601.7119.051 77

– l – – – – – – l SLM-FVTW 230AC-55-AR180 601.7119.060 77

l – – – – – – – – SLM-MVTW 24DC-55 601.7119.023 78

l – – – – – – – – SLM-MVTW 120AC-55 601.7119.033 78

l – – – – – – – – SLM-MVTW 230AC-55 601.7119.024 79

l – – – – – – – – SLM-MVTW 24DC-51 601.7119.030 79

l – – – – – – – – SLM-MVTW 230AC-51 601.7119.031 79

– AR KR ER L R S A 180

– m l m *) m m l m m SLM-FVTW 48AC-21-KRS on request

l – – m *) m l m m m SLM-MVTW 12DC-22-R on request

*) Important note: Safety switch model SLM with emergency stop override must be installed
inside the guarded (dangerous) area. The emergency stop should only be able to be
activated to ensure escape from a dangerous area in case of a system error.

81
Interlocking solenoid
safety switch
– spring force version –

SLM
Protection class IP 67

Designation SLM-FVTW 24DC-55-AR SLM-FVTW 120AC-55-AR

Part number 601.7119.020 601.7119.032
Circuit diagram E1 E1
p Forced disconnect to 21 22 31 32 21 22 31 32
24 V DC 120 V AC
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
13 14 E2 43 44 13 14 E2 43 44
Za: not galvanically separated contacts
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) 1000 N 1000 N

Contact travel Actuating force N

mm (inch) Tol. ± 15%

1
) actuator in
2
) actuator out
On Off

Voltage max. 250 V 250 V

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+60 °C –30 °C/+60 °C
–22 °F/+140 °F –22 °F/+140 °F

Approvals BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

Weight 0.81 kg/1.79 Ib 0.81 kg/1.79 Ib

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

82
 Switches
SLM-FVTW 230AC-55-AR SLM-FVTW 24DC-51-AR SLM-FVTW 230AC-51-AR
601.7119.022 601.7119.028 601.7119.029
E1 E1 E1
21 22 31 32 21 22 31 32 21 22 31 32
230 V AC 24 V DC 230 V AC
13 14 E2 43 44 13 14 E2 13 14 E2
p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–
1000 N 1000 N 1000 N

250 V 250 V 250 V

10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l

1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106

–30 °C/+60 °C –30 °C/+60 °C –30 °C/+60 °C
–22 °F/+140 °F –22 °F/+140 °F –22 °F/+140 °F

BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

0.81 kg/1.79 Ib 0.81 kg/1.79 Ib 0.81 kg/1.79 Ib

l/– –/l –/l

83
Interlocking solenoid
safety switch
– spring force version –

SLM
Protection class IP 67

Designation SLM-FVTW 230AC-55-KR SLM-FVTW 230AC-55-ER

Part number 601.7119.057 601.7119.058
Circuit diagram E1 E1
p Forced disconnect to 21 22 31 32 21 22 31 32
230 V AC 230 V AC
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
13 14 E2 43 44 13 14 E2 43 44
Za: not galvanically separated contacts
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) 1000 N 1000 N

Contact travel Actuating force N

mm (inch) Tol. ± 15%

1
) actuator in
2
) actuator out
On Off

Voltage max. 250 V 250 V

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+60 °C –30 °C/+60 °C
–22 °F/+140 °F –22 °F/+140 °F

Approvals BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

Weight 0.88 kg/1.49 Ib 0.94 kg/2.08 Ib

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

84
 Switches
SLM-FVTW 120AC-55-ARL SLM-FVTW 230AC-55-AR180
601.7119.051 601.7119.060
E1
21 22 31 32
230 V AC
13 14 E2 43 44

p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– l/– l/– l/–
1000 N 1000 N

250 V 250 V
10 A 10 A
l l

1 x 106 1 x 106
–30 °C/+60 °C –30 °C/+60 °C
–22 °F/+140 °F –22 °F/+140 °F

BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

0.83 kg/1.83 Ib 0.83 kg/1.83 Ib

l/– l/–

85
Metal bodied
safety switches
with separate actuator
and solenoid latch
interlocking

SLM
Protection IP 67

Reference type SLM-MVTW 24DC-55 SLM-MVTW 120AC-55

Part number 601.7119.023 601.7119.033
Circuit diagram E1 E1
p Forced disconnect to 21 22 31 32 21 22 31 32
24 V DC 120 V AC
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
13 14 E2 43 44 13 14 E2 43 44
Za: not galvanically separated contacts
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) 1000 N 1000 N

Contact travel Actuating force N

mm (inch) Tol. ± 15%

) actuator in
1

) actuator out
2

On Off

Voltage max. 250 V 250 V

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+60 °C –30 °C/+60 °C
–22 °F/+140 °F –22 °F/+140 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA

BG BG
Weight 0.81 kg/1.79 Ib 0.81 kg/1.79 Ib
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

86
 Switches
SLM-MVTW 230AC-55 SLM-MVTW 24DC-51 SLM-MVTW 230AC-51
601.7119.024 601.7119.030 601.7119.031
E1 E1 E1
21 22 31 32 21 22 31 32 21 22 31 32
230 V AC 24 V DC 230 V AC
13 14 E2 43 44 13 14 E2 13 14 E2
p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–
1000 N 1000 N 1000 N

250 V 250 V 250 V

10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l

1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106

–30 °C/+60 °C –30 °C/+60 °C –30 °C/+60 °C
–22 °F/+140 °F –22 °F/+140 °F –22 °F/+140 °F

UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

BG BG BG
0.81 kg/1.79 Ib 0.81 kg/1.79 Ib 0.81 kg/1.79 Ib
l/– l/– –/l

87
Plastic-bodied
safety switches
for hinged lids/guards
I88 –VKS, I88 –VKW
Protection class IP 65 q
Metal-bodied
safety switches
for hinged lids/guards
GC–VKS, GC –VKW
Protection class IP 65 Y
Designation I88-U1Z VKS I88-U1Z VKW RE
Part number 608.6100.093 608.6100.094
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 23 24
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw iw

Switching angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 50/min. 50/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

Weight 0.09 kg/0.20 Ib 0.09 kg/0.20 Ib

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order –/l –/l

All dimensions in mm (inch)

88
 Switches
I88-U1Z VKW LI GC-U1Z VKS GC-U1Z VKW
608.6100.095 612.1100.622 612.1100.623

11 12 11 12 11 12
23 24 23 24 23 24
p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– l/– l/–
iw iw iw

500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l

50/min. 20/min. 20/min.

1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

0.09 kg/0.20 Ib 0.20 kg/0.44 Ib 0.20 kg/0.44 Ib

–/l l/– l/–

89
Plastic-bodied
safety switches
I88 –AHDB
For installation to hinged axis
Protection class IP 65

q
Designation I88-U1Z AHDB
Part number 618.6100.267
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw

Switching angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 50/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, UL, CSA

Weight 0.09 kg/0.20 Ib

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order –/l

All dimensions in mm (inch)

90
 Switches
Metal-bodied
safety switch
with personnel protection
function in forward and
reverse movement

ENM2-AHZ
Protection class IP 65

Designation ENM2-U1Z AHZ

Part number 608.7135.030
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) iw

Switching angle ° Actuator torque Ncm

Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%

On Off

Forced disconnect in forward and

reverse travel AHZ
Voltage max. 400 V AC For special safety applications the forced
Permanent current max. 10 A disconnection of the NC contacts is not
In-rush current complies with standards l only achieved in the forward direction, but
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13 also in the reverse direction (back to stan-
Switching frequency max. 100/min. dard position). For operator safety applica-
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106 tions the roller must be positively guided in
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C both directions.
–22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals BG, UL, CSA

Weight 0,28 kg/0,62 Ib

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

62
ø20 12

16
32
7.5

17.5

16
2

77.5
60
ø5.2

17.5

30 M20x1.5 33
40 42

91
Safety Hinge Switch

SHS
IP 67 Metal housing

Hinged machinery guards and covers as

well as safety fence doors may be found in
every type of industry.

The safety hinge switch SHS is the logi-

cal integration of the safety switch and
load-bearing hinge for industrial appli-
cations.

Designed to facilitate mounting onto

extruded aluminium profiles, steel or plastic
doors, the slim profile of the SHS even
when fully closed, allows the hinge to be
readily mounted where space is
constrained.

Traditional safety switches with separate

actuator keys are often subject to mechani-
cal wear, particularly when mounted on the (approval pending)
closing edge of guards where accumulated
tolerances can cause misalignment. The
SHS removes this problem with the safety Safe:
contact mounted internally, inaccessible to l 2 SHS hinge switches each with a force Fast:
the user and therefore providing excellent disconnect safety contact allow safety l Industry standard M12 x 1 connectors
tamper protection. One or more switches category 4 systems to be configured with axial and radial (rear) mounting
may be used dependent on the category of subject to the required risk analysis and available as well as fixed cable version.
safety protection required. Matching hinges safety contact monitoring.
without safety contacts are also available, Reliable:
allowing the style to be standardised for Flexible: l A cast Zinc alloy body allows the SHS a
general use. In operation, consideration l The hinge operating angle is 0–180°. high degree of mounting freedom.
must simply be given to the required con- l The switch point may similarly be select- l In it’s hinge capacity the SHS can bear
tact operation angle, which is determined ed through 180°. up to 750 N axially and over 1000 N
by guard size and the maximum allowable l AC/DC to 250 V or 60 V DC versions radially, after the switching point has
guard opening distance before actuation. available. been set.
l Ingress protection to IP 67.

SHS configuration summary

With M12x1 connector, for 60 V DC applications, without earth connection
SHS-A1Z-SR DC 601.9261.010 Radial Plug Ex-stock
SHS-A1Z-SA DC 601.9261.015 Axial Plug Ex-stock
With M12x1 connector, for AC/DC applications to 250 V, with earth connection
SHS-A1Z-SA AC/DC 601.9261.009 Axial Plug Ex-stock
SHS-A1Z-SR AC/DC 601.9261.016 Radial Plug Ex-stock
With fixed cable
SHS-A1Z-KR5 AC/DC 601.9261.014 fixed cable radial To order
SHS-A1Z-KA5 DC 601.9261.011 fixed cable axial To order
Standard hinge
SHS-OZ 601.9291.013 No connection Ex-stock

92
 Switches
True Category 4
(EN 954-1/2)

l true electrical redundancy Installation example:

l true mechanical redundant safety
l avoids mechanical common 24 V DC
mode failure

feedback path

SCR
Cat. 4

start
button

power
contactor

motor

Plug

M 12 x 1

DC configuration AC/DC configuration

with moulded cable

Terminal code,
DC configuration
1 = brown
2=–
3 = blue
4 = black

Terminal code,
AC/DC configuration
1 = brown
M12x1
Ø14.5

2 = black 1 2

3 = blue
4 3
4 = green-yellow 1
11.3
45.5

Straight line Right-angled Straight line Right-angled

Cable lenght Model description AN-KAB.SHS 2M DC AN-KAB.SHS 2M DC
2m Part number 325.1003.221 325.1003.224 on request on request
Cable lenght Model description AN-KAB.SHS 5M DC AN-KAB.SHS 5M DC AN-KAB.SHS 5M AC AN-KAB.SHS 5M AC
5m Part number 325.1003.222 325.1003.225 325.1004.219 325.1004.220
Cable lenght Model description AN-KAB.SHS 10M DC AN-KAB.SHS 10M DC
10 m Part number 325.1003.223 325.1003.226 on request on request

Material of cable sleeve PVC/PVC PVC/PVC

Material body/Contact carrier PUR/PUR PUR/Nylon 6.6
Rated voltage max. 60 V AC/75 V DC 300 V AC
Current carrying capacity max. 1.5 A 4.0 A
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C
–13 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F
Cable structure mm2 3 x 0.34 4 x 0.34
Protection class after installation IP 67 IP 68

93
Safety Hinge Switch

SHS

Designation SHS-A1Z-SR SHS-A1Z-SR SHS-A1Z-KR 5

Part number 601.9261.010 601.9261.016 601.9261.014
Contact diagram 4 4 4
1
1 1
p Forced disconnect to
2 2 2
IEC 947-5-1 annex k
BK BN
Za: non-galv. separated contact 4 3 1 Plug 4 3 2 1 Plug BU
Fixed cable, 5 m
Zb: galv. separated contact pC pC GNYE

Slow make and break/Snap action l/– l/–

Sealed internally (iw)/externally (w) iw iw

Switch angle degrees

Tol. + 1,5°
1-2
1-4

1-2
1-4

1-2
1-4
– 1,0° 180°

10° 10° 10°

Operating angle

programmable

3° 3° 3°
Setpoint

Setpoint

Setpoint
Setpoint

On Off
3° 3° 3°

10° 10° 10°

0°

Voltage max. 250 VAC 250 VAC 250 VAC

Thermal current max. 3A 3A 3A
Utilization category per IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13 60 V/0.5 A 60 V/0.5 A 230 V/1.5 A 60 V/0.5 A 230 V/1.5 A
(DC 13) (DC 13) (AC 15) (DC 13) (AC 15)
Switching frequency max. 1200/h 1200/h 1200/h
Mechanical life – switching operations 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F

Approvals – – –
Approvals pending BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA
Weight 0.4 kg 0.4 kg 0.4 kg
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– –/l

All dimensions in mm 72

M12x1
6.6

5m
2.5
6.5

4.5

2.5
6.5

4.5

M12x1
10
15.5
10
15.5

72
(19)
(19)

R9 R9
11 15 16 10
ø6.5

ø10.5

GD-ZnAl4Cu1
GD-ZnAl4Cu1
64 +-0.1
80

Ø12
21
21

* dependent
12 12
on connector

94
 Switches
SHS-A1Z-SA SHS-A1Z-SA SHS-A1Z-KA 5
601.9261.015 601.9261.009 601.9261.011
4 4 4
1 1 1

2 2 2

4 3 1 Plug 4 3 2 1 Plug 3 2 1 Fixed cable, 5 m

pC pC pC
l/– l/– l/–
iw iw iw
1-2
1-4

1-2
1-4

1-2
1-4
10° 10° 10°

3° 3° 3°
Setpoint

Setpoint

Setpoint
3° 3° 3°

10° 10° 10°

250 VAC 250 VAC 250 VAC

3A 3A 3A
60 V/0.5 A 60 V/0.5 A 230 V/1.5 A 60 V/0.5 A
(DC 13) (DC 13) (AC 15) (DC 13)
1200/h 1200/h 1200/h
1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
–25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F

– – –
BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA
0.4 kg 0.4 kg 0.4 kg
l/– l/– –/l

R9
2.5
6.5

4.5

R9
15.5
(19)
15.5
(19)

10
10
10

15.5
(19)

2.5
6.5
4.5
2.5
6.5
4.5

72
R9

72
11 15 16 10
11 15 16 10
GD-ZnAI 4Cu 1

Ø6.5

Ø10.5
Ø6.5

Ø10.5

– 0.1
– 0.1

80
64 +
64 +
80

17

5000

M12 x 1 Ø5.2

95
Plastic-bodied
Rope Pull switch
S/Si
Protection class IP 65 q

Metal-bodied
Rope Pull switch
S/Si
Protection class IP 65 Y
Designation Si-U1Z Sil-UV1Z SEK-U1Z SiEK-UV1Z
Part number 601.3812.075 601.3832.076 601.1811.133 601.1831.134
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 21 22 25 26 21 22 25 26
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) – – – –

Contact travel Pulling force N

mm (inch) Tol. ± 15%

On Off

Voltage max. 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
Maximum rope length 2m 2m 5m 5m
Switching frequency max. 50/min. 50/min. 50/min. 50/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA

Cable entry 1 x M 20 x 1.5 1 x M 20 x 1.5 1 x M 20 x 1.5 1 x M 20 x 1.5

Weight 0.09 kg/0.20 Ib 0.09 kg/0.20 Ib 0.17 kg/0.37 Ib 0.17 kg/0.37 Ib
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

96
 Switches
SEM2-U1Z SiEM2-UV1Z SiEM2-UV1Z Rast SD-U1 SD-U1
601.2811.029 601.2831.022 601.2831.023 601.1411.856 611.1411.029

13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
21 22 25 26 25 26 21 22 21 22
p Zb p Zb p Zb – –
l/– l/– – l/– l/–
– – l – –

Latch

400 V AC 400 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A 16 A 16 A
l l l l l
5m 5m 5m
50/min. 50/min. 17/min. 50/min. 50/min.
1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

1 x M 20 x 1.5 1 x M 20 x 1.5 1 x M 20 x 1.5 2 x M 20 x 1.5 2 x M 20 x 1.5

0.22 kg/0.49 Ib 0.22 kg/0.49 Ib 0.26 kg/0.57 Ib 0.33 kg/0.73 Ib 0.33 kg/0.73 Ib
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

ø25
ø25
ø15 5
ø15 5
73.5
51

8.5
7.5

7.5

ø15

16
2

16
2

52
77.5
60

77.5
60
ø5.2

ø5.2

17.5 17.5

30 M20x1.5 33 30 M20x1.5 33
40 42 40 42

97
Metal-bodied
Rope Pull switch
S/Si
Protection class IP 65

Y
Designation SiD-UV1Z SiD-UV1Z SD-U1 SiD-UV1Z Rast
Part number 601.1431.857 611.1431.022 601.1411.868 601.1431.869
Circuit diagram
p Forced disconnect to 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 25 26 25 26 21 22 25 26
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb – p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) – – l l

Contact travel Pulling force N Latch

mm (inch) Tol. ± 15%
Latch

On Off

Voltage max. 400 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC 400 V AC

Permanent current max. 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l l
Maximum rope length 5m 10 m 10 m 10 m
Switching frequency max. 50/min. 50/min. 20/min. 20/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Cable entry 2 x M 20 x 1.5 2 x M 20 x 1.5 2 x M 20 x 1.5 2 x M 20 x 1.5

Weight 0.33 kg/0.73 Ib 0.33 kg/0.73 Ib 0.49 kg/1.08 Ib 0.49 kg/1.08 Ib
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

98
 Switches
SiD-UV1Z Rast SiD-UV1Z SiD-UV1Z Rast SiD-UV1Z Rast
611.1431.060 601.2431.877 601.2431.883 611.2431.050

13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
25 26 25 26 25 26 25 26
p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– l/– l/– l/–
l – l l

Latch

400 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC 500 V AC

16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A
l l l l
20 m
20/min. 50/min. 20/min. 20/min.
1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

2 x M 20 x 1.5 2 x M 20 x 1.5 2 x M 20 x 1.5 2 x M 20 x 1.5

0.53 kg/1.17 Ib 0.47 kg/1.04 Ib 0.70 kg/1.54 Ib 0.64 kg/1.41 Ib
l/– l/– l/– l/–

99
Metal bodied
Rope Pull switches
S/Si
Protection class IP 65

Designation SiD-UV2Z Rast SiD-UV1Z/E1 Rast SiN-UV1Z P-Rast

Part number 601.2441.907 611.2461.041 601.3531.367
Circuit diagram
13 14
p Forced disconnect to 25 26
13 14
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3 33 34 25 26
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 45 46 33 34
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb p Zb p Zb
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– l/– l/–
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) l l l

Contact travel Pulling force N

mm (inch) Tol. ± 15% Latch
Latch Latch

On Off

Voltage max. 400 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC

Permanent current max. 16 A 16 A 16 A
In-rush current complies with standards l l l
Maximum rope length 10 m 10 m 50 m
Switching frequency max. 20/min. 20/min. 20/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA

Cable entry 2 x M 20 x 1.5 2 x M 20 x 1.5 2 x M 20 x 1.5

Weight 0.70 kg/1.54 Ib 0.70 kg/1.54 Ib 1.30 kg/2.87 Ib
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

100
 Switches
Si1-U2Z AK R-Rast Si1-U1Z/U1Z AK R-Rast Si2-U2Z AK R-Rast
601.4735.001 601.4735.025 601.5735.002
23 24
11 12

11 12
23 24

p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– l/– l/–
l l l

Latch
Latch Latch
left right

left right

left right
Lever

Lever

Lever

Latch
Latch
Latch

250 V AC 250 V AC 500 V AC

10 A 10 A 10 A
l l l
100 m 100 m 100 m
10/min. 10/min. 10/min.
1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106
–30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F

UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA UL, CSA

1 x M 20 x 1.5 1 x M 20 x 1.5 3 x M 20 x 1.5

1.60 kg/3.53 Ib 1.60 kg/3.53 Ib 3.80 kg/8.38 Ib
l/– l/– l/–

101
Safety Rope Pull switches

SR
Plastic housing
Protection class IP 67

EMERGENCY STOP switch gear

acc. IEC 947-5-5

Integrated EMERGENCY STOP

push button

Quick mounting device for

rope installation (in preparation)

Designation
Safe: l The correct rope tension is clearly and Part number
l The EMERGENCY STOP function is visibly indicated. Switching diagram
enabled by positive-break safety l Also clearly recognisable is the circuit p Forced disconnect
contacts following actuation or failure of status indication, combined with the IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3
the rope-pull system. reset function, of the E-STOP device. Za: changeover contact is not galvanically isolated
l The SR ... NA QF has an integrated l The electrical connection is made via Zb: changeover contact is galvanically isolated
EMERGENCY STOP push button, which, “cage clamp”-connection terminals. Slow-action contact/snap-action contact
due to its design, is particularly well pro- Latching mechanism
tected against external mechanical influ- Reliable:
ences and blocking. l The glass-fibre reinforced polyamide Contact travel mm Tensile force N
housing can cope with the roughest Tol. ± 15%
Flexible: operating conditions. The SR is
l 2 NC and 2 NO contacts is the standard mounted using a mounting plate made
contact configuration. According to cus- of metal.
tomer preference, separate specification l Protection class IP 67.
In Out
of the 4 switching elements is possible;
thus allowing system integration close to In the future:
the application. l Two integrated diffuse reflective sensors
are to be offered, which will signal if the
Fast: rope tension is exceeded. This facilitates
l The fast rope attachment of the “preventative maintenance”. Voltage max.
SR … NA QF is shown in the drawing Continuous terminal current max.
on the left. The rope-pull system is Utilization category acc.to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15 /DC 13
quickly installed thanks to the quick-
change clamping device. Switching frequency max.
Mech. operational life acc. to IEC 947-5-5
Ambient temperature min./max.

Approvals
Pending Approvals
cable conduit
Weight
Delivery: ex stock/built to order

All dimensions in mm

102
 Switches
SR-U2Z-NA-QF 300 SR-U2Z-NA-QF 175 SR-U2Z-NA-QF 100 SR-U2Z-QF 300 SR-U2Z-QF 175 SR-U2Z-QF 100 SR-U2Z 300 SR-U2Z 175 SR-U2Z 100
601.1629.019 601.1629.027 601.1629.031 601.1629.028 601.1629.024 601.1629.032 601.1620.020 601.1621.026 601.1621.030
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34
41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42
p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb p Zb
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–
l l l l l l l l l

300N 175N 100N 300N 175N 100N 300N 175N 100N

240N 140N 80N 240N 140N 80N 240N 140N 80N

180N 105N 60N 180N 105N 60N 180N 105N 60N

250 VAC 250 VAC 250 VAC 250 VAC 250 VAC 250 VAC 250 VAC 250 VAC 250 VAC
10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
230 V/4 A 230 V/4 A 230 V/4 A 230 V/4 A 230 V/4 A 230 V/4 A 230 V/4 A 230 V/4 A 230 V/4 A
(AC 15) (AC 15) (AC 15) (AC 15) (AC 15) (AC 15) (AC 15) (AC 15) (AC 15)
20/min. 20/min. 20/min. 20/min. 20/min. 20/min. 20/min. 20/min. 20/min.
l l l l l l l l l
–25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158°F –13 °F/+158°F –13 °F/+158°F –13 °F/+158°F –13 °F/+158°F –13 °F/+158°F –13 °F/+158°F –13 °F/+158°F

– – – – – – – – –
BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA
3x M20 x 1.5 3x M20 x 1.5 3x M20 x 1.5 3x M20 x 1.5 3x M20 x 1.5 3x M20 x 1.5 3x M20 x 1.5 3x M20 x 1.5 3x M20 x 1.5
0.6 kg 0.6 kg 0.6 kg 0.6 kg 0.6 kg 0.6 kg 0.5 kg 0.5 kg 0.5 kg
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–

ø25
ø36 Ø36 ø15 21
s=38
s=38

21 21
ø33.4
294
294

224
256
256

124
ø47.2

91

M20x1.5
124
124

ø5.3
91

M20x1.5 88 M20x1.5
Ø5.3
91

ø5.3

15
19.5
5

30 37.5
30 15 30 15
42.5
19.5

45
5
5

42.5 37.5
19.5

42.5 37.5
45 45 78.3
78.3

103
Rope Pull
safety switches

SiRK
Plastic body
Two-sided spanning (max. 2x 75 m)
Protection class IP 65

Application Construction Product characteristics

The SiRK rope pull safety switch has been The plastic insulated body offers superior l Tamper-proof switching mechanism
developed for larger system spans in a cor- electrical protection for the user. (EN 418)
rosion free material. The switching parts allow for wide range l Automatic latching when pulled and by
The SiRK can also be delivered with an of multi-pole protective circuits. slack or broken rope
indicator lamp. The switching mechanism has been con- l Low actuating force
structed so that the switch remains in func- l Available with or without multi-voltage
Utilization tion even when the spring element has indicator lamp
When larger machines or entire installa- broken. l 6-pole terminal for daisy-chaining
tions are to be protected, the emergency- Construction and function fulfil all require- l Maintenance-free construction
stop command can be initiated from any ments according to EN 418 and l Switching device simple to mount with
point in the plant using rope-pull safety EN 60947-5-5. 2 x M10 screws
switches. This can be advantageous com- l Enclosure lid simple to attach with 2 x
pared to individually mounted emergency- M5 screws (captive)
stop buttons when preventing injury to l Protection class IP 65
persons and damage to machinery.
The SiRK can be adapted to suit a wide
range of applications thanks to the individ-
ual selection of rope lengths and various
mounting positions.

System configuration

0 I

Switch Contacts Function Voltage Current

SiRK - U2Z R 2NC/2NO Latch function 250 V 10 A

SiRK - U2Z R MLED 2NC/2NO Latch function/indicator lamp* 250 V 10 A

* Indicator lamp for multiple voltages with additional 6-pole terminal for daisy-chaining.

104
 Switches
Designation SiRK-U2Z R SiRK-U2Z R MLED
Part number 601.5625.001 601.5625.002
Switching diagram
p positive break according to 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12
IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3
23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24
Zb: changeover contact is galvanically isolated p Zb p Zb
Slow-action contact/snap-action contact l/– l/–
Locking device l l
Indicating lamp – l

Contact travel mm Tension force N

Tol. ± 15%

Latch Latch
R
R

In Out
L
L

Latch Latch

Voltage max. 250 V AC 250 V AC

Continuous current max. 10 A 10 A
Making current, acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13 l l

Switching frequency max. 30/min. 30/min.

Mech. operational life – number of switching cycles 1 x 105 1 x 105
Ambient temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F –22 °F/+176 °F
Approvals BG, UL, CSA BG, UL, CSA
Pending Approvals
Cable inlet 2x M 20 x 1.5 2x M 20 x 1.5
Weight 0.8 kg/1.8 lb 0.9 kg/2 lb
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm
159
147
147

129
129

M20 M20 M20 M20

0 I 0 I
9
9

ø8 ø8
35
35

14
14

38
38

86

55
86

55

8.5
8.5

24
24

161 161

175 175

105
Rope Pull switch
accessories

➀ ➁➂ ➃ ➄ ➃ ➂ ➅ ➂ ➃ ➇ ➃ ➂ ➆ ➆ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➈ ➇
1 Nut 4 Rope clamp 7 Tension adjuster
M6 260.0439.090 D2 269.0000.004 M 5 x 50 269.1480.016
M8 260.0439.187 D3 269.0000.005 M 6 x 60 269.1480.017
M 10 260.0934.092 D4 269.0000.006 M 6 x 110 269.1480.025

2 Eye bolt 4 Rope clamp 7 Turnbuckle nut

M 10 x 50 260.0444.076 (simplex) M6 260.1479.188
M 6 x 50 260.0444.185 D2 269.0000.007 M8 260.1479.189
M 8 x 50 260.0444.186 D3 269.0000.008
D4 269.0000.009

3 Thimble 4 Rope clamp (duplex) 8 Pulley block

D 2.5 269.6899.013 D2 269.0000.010 269.0000.022
D3 269.6899.014 D3 269.0000.011
D4 269.6899.015 D4 269.0000.012
D5 269.6899.001

4 Rope clamp 5 Rope 9 Pulley block

D5 269.0741.002 Line-ø/sleeve-ø swivel 269.0000.023
D 1.8/D 5 369.9100.008
D 2/D 2.5 369.9100.024
D 3/D 4 369.9100.025
D 4/D 5 369.9100.026

6 Spring Pulley block clamp

18 N 365.2100.331 for 8 and 9
24 N 365.2100.332 391.1751.437

106
 Switches
Metal-bodied Conveyor belt
conveyor control switches Conveyed material 1) 2)
for monitoring
conveyor belts

Si2
Protection class IP 65
1
) Normal position
2
) Latch point

Designation Si2-U1Z AW
Part number 601.5736.003 The safety switch, in combination with the
Circuit diagram conveyor control system, protects the
11 12
p Forced disconnect to
23 24
conveyor belt from damage or destruction
IEC 947-5-1 chapter 3 11 12
in the event of belt misalignment. The
Za: not galvanically separated contacts 23 24 pressure of the cylindrical roller against the
Zb: galvanically separated contacts p Zb conveyor belt allows for detection of
Slow make & break/snap-action l/– incorrect alignment in either direction and
Internal seal (iw)/external seal (w) l assures a shut down by latching the safety
contacts.

latching point
After solving the problem, the plant can be
Switching angle ° Actuator torque Ncm re-started by pulling the reset plunger (key
Tol. ± 3.5° Tol. ± 10%
ring). The cylindrical roller is mounted on
ball bearings.
The cast housing is supplied with three
cable entries (M 20 x 1.5) for easy
On Off “through wiring” (display lamps available
on request).
neutral position
This switch allows reliable and trouble-free
Voltage max. 500 V AC operation, in extreme conditions because
Permanent current max. 10 A of its robust assembly.
In-rush current complies with standards l
IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13
Switching frequency max. 10/min.
Mechanical life – number of switching actions 2 x 106
Operating temperature min./max. –30 °C/+80 °C
–22 °F/+176 °F

Approvals UL, CSA

Cable entry 3 x M 20
Weight 4.10 kg/9.02 Ib
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/–

All dimensions in mm (inch)

107
Emergency-stop button
with turn and key release

SNA
Tamper-resistant according to EN 418
Protection class IP 65

V
G
Every moving part of plant or machinery l Tamper-proof according to EN 418 Complete devices for front installation
should be brought to a halt as soon as
there is danger to man or machine. l Red Ø 37 mm latching push button, Construction:
The trigger for this often life-saving action released by turning in direction of arrow The switching contacts are clipped on the
can be, in addition to electronic safety or by turning key in direction of arrow. button assembly by means of a latching
equipment, the emergency-stop button. bar through the front adapter.
The SNA product range fulfills all safety l Standard design front fitting
relevant requirements, for example, an 1 normally-closed contact p Mounting:
automatic latch as soon as the clearly Standard design enclosure assembly
defined pressure point is exceeded. The 1 normally-closed contact p, Mounting hole
control device locks itself into an off 1 normally-open contact
position, the contacts of switching device Extending possible by mounting further
open simultaneously. NO/NC devices, max. 3 elements.
They thereby fulfil all the requirements of
EN 418 "Emergency-Stop Devices", i.e. l Terminal labelling according to
each operation of the emergency-stop DIN EN 50013
button is latched, and is preceded by the
opening of the safety contacts. l Terminal cross-section:
Solid core: 0.50 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
No manipulation can lead to the contacts Stranded core: 0.75 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
being closed again. The button is released Stranded core with
by turning the key or the mushroom-head wire-end ferrules: 0.50 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
slam button.
The specially formed slam button cannot l Materials: Mounting hole with notch to prevent rota-
be blocked by any objects positioned under (UL-listed plastics, Cd-free) tion according to IEC 947-5-1.
the button. Mounting hole without rotation protection
Control device: can be accomplished by removing the lug
PA 6, PA 12, PC from the attachment elements.
The grid dimensions for the emergency-
Switching devices: stop button should measure at least 40 x
PC, PA 6.6 self-extinguishing 50 mm.

Contact material: Complete devices with enclosure

Ag-Ni compound
Construction:
Built-on enclosure, yellow The different switching elements are locked
PC onto the standard base adaptors in the
enclosure. This allows wiring to be
l Cable entries/knockouts on base connected independently from the control
device.
l Protection class IP 65 according to
IEC 529
Mounting enclosure:
l International certification: 2 x M5 screws for safety devices without
UL, CSA additional fixing, and 2 additional M5
screws for adjustment purposes in both
horizontal directions.

108
 Switches
Emergency-stop button
with turn and key release
for front-side mounting

SNA
Tamper-resistant according to EN 418
Protection class IP 65

Designation SNA-A1Z P SNA-A1Z K

Part number 601.9169.001 601.9169.002
Switching diagram
p positive break according to
IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3 1 2 1 2

p p
Slow-action contact/snap-action contact l/– l/–
Lock-in function l l
Turn-to-release/key-release l/– –/l
Contact travel mm approx. 6 mm 6 mm
Actuating force ≤ 70 N ≤ 70 N

Rated voltage isolation Ui 660 V 660 V

Rated thermal current Ith 10 A 10 A
Making current acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13

Mech.operating life – Number of switching cycles 0.5 x 105 0.5 x 105

Ambient temperature min./max. – 25 °C/+ 60 °C – 25 °C/+ 60 °C
– 13 °F/+ 140 °F – 13 °F/+ 140 °F

Approvals UL, CSA, GL, VDE UL, CSA, GL, VDE

Weight 0.06 kg 0.08 kg

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm ø37

ø37
ca.47
max.9.9

ca.72
47
max.9.9
max.6

max.6
max.53
max.53

43.5 43.5 29.6

29.6

109
Emergency-stop button
with turn and key release
complete with enclosures

SNA
Tamper-resistant according to EN 418
Protection class IP 65

Designation SNA-A1Z/E1 AP SNA-A1Z/E1 AK

Part number 601.9169.003 601.9169.004
Switching diagram
p positive break according to
IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
p p
Slow-action contact/snap-action contact l/– l/–
Lock-in function l l
Turn-to-release/key-release l/– –/l
Contact travel mm approx. 6 mm 6 mm
Actuating force ≤ 70 N ≤ 70 N

Rated voltage isolation Ui 660 V 660 V

Rated thermal current Ith 10 A 10 A
Making current acc. to IEC 947-5-1 AC 15/DC 13

Mech.operating life – Number of switching cycles 0,5 x 105 0,5 x 105

Ambient temperature min./max. – 25 °C/+ 60 °C – 25 °C/+ 60 °C
– 13 °F/+ 140 °F – 13 °F/+ 140 °F

Approvals VDE VDE

Weight 0.23 kg 0.25 kg

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm
137
112

65
65
ø22.5

ø22.5
54

72
54

72

67 67
84 84

110
 Switches
Accessories
Switching elements
for emergency stop button

For type range Emergency stop button Emergency stop button Emergency stop button Emergency stop button
Front attachment Front attachment Built-on enclosure Built-on enclosure
Part number 601.9169.005 601.9169.006 601.9169.007 601.9169.008
Slow-action contact/snap-action contact l/– l/– l/– l/–
Switching diagram
p positive break according to
IEC 947-5-1 Chap. 3 1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
p p
Contact travel mm (inch)

3-4
1-2
3-4
1-2

0(0) <5N 0(0) <5N 0(0) <5N 0(0) <5N

2(0.08) 2(0.08)

3(0.12) 3(0.12)

6(0.24) 6(0.24) 6(0.24) 6(0.24)

mm(inch) N mm(inch) N mm(inch) N mm(inch) N

Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm
43.5 43.5
max.9,9

max.9,9

Accessories

Legend plate Legend plate

for emergency-stop button/front-side attachment for emergency-stop
Self-adhesive, yellow button/built-on encl.
Protection class IP 65 is guaranteed after the removal of Plastic (alu-coated)
the protective film self-adhesive, not labelled

For type range Emergency stop button Emergency stop button Emergency stop button Emergency stop button
Front-side mounting Front-side mounting Front-side mounting Built-on enclosures
Ø 45 mm Ø 60 mm Ø 90 mm 19 x 19 mm
Label language Part number
without labelling 321.4000.037 321.4000.041 321.4000.045 321.4000.049
NOT-AUS 321.4000.038 321.4000.042 321.4000.046
Emergency Stop 321.4000.039 321.4000.043 321.4000.047
ARRET D’URGENCE 321.4000.040 321.4000.044 321.4000.048
Delivery: ex-stock/ l/– l/– l/– l/–
built to order

111
Safety relay

SCR
Control category 3 and 4
according to EN 954-1
With extended output functions
and up to 4 safety outputs

(in preparation)

The SCR safety relay is another new mem- The SCR module monitors the position and Operating method
ber of the Safelock Family, designed to moni- function of the safety sensing equipment
tor, for example, safety position switches including the safety contacts of the posi- The SCR continuously analyses two galvani-
and emergency-stop buttons. It thereby tion switches. Control system devices such cally-isolated, normally-closed contacts that
makes it possible to build safety systems up as frequency converters or power contac- are operated in a synchronised manner
to control category 4 with Bernstein safety tors are driven according to the safety eval- within the system (i.e. the normally-closed
switches. Bernstein now offers all necessary uation. Additionally, the actual status of contacts belonging to two position switch-
safety components for monitoring safety the power contactors are verified and com- es on the same door). The power device
doors or guards outside of the power pared to the input position in order to can only be operated when both normally-
stage. monitor their correct function. To meet the closed contacts are actually closed. As soon
requirements of safety category 4, each as one of the two input circuits is interrupt-
fault has to be recognised immediately or ed, by the opening of a safety contact or a
at the next machine start. For this reason, fault occurs, the safety outputs open and
it is necessary to perform a start-up test. the machine is turned off.

Should the switch-off be due to a fault in

one of the input circuits or in the output
device in the control system, then the SCR
prevents a renewed start-up, until the fault
has been repaired.
Position detection Power stage
The SCR 4 modules also have a status indi-
cator for both channels to simplify the task
of maintenance personnel in identifying
the fault.

All SCR modules are optionally suitable for

automatic or manual starts. The SCR 4
modules also allow the start button to be
monitored.
Safety-
relevant
signals

Evaluation of Evaluation of
redundant feedback
information

112
 Switches
System advantages

l Monitoring of two independent, galvani-

cally-isolated safety circuits.

l Cross-connection safety, i.e. possible l As well as the two standard LEDs for The SCR family
cross-connections between the cables to indicating the voltage supply (Pow) and
the safety position switches will be output status (out), the SCR 4 has two SCR 3-W22-3.6-D:
recognised and the green LED "Power" additional yellow LEDs (Ch1 and Ch2). The SCR 3 has been designed for category
extinguishes. This is made possible These are lit when a fault occurs, and 3 control systems according to EN 954-1.
because both input circuits work on dif- indicate which channel is faulty. The control module guarantees one-fault
ferent operating voltages. A faulty cross- safety for the entire system, i.e. the occur-
connection leads to a short-circuit and l The SCR safety relays have the following rence of a single fault does not place the
the triggering of the internal fuse. approvals UL, CSA and BG. entire system into a dangerous state.

l Start-up testing, i.e. before the machine l Standardised enclosure widths 22.5 and SCR 4-W22-2.6-SD:
can be restarted by means of a start but- 52.5 mm. In addition to the safety function of SCR 3,
ton, a start-up test ascertains that no the SCR 4 recognises each fault either
fault exists in the control system. l Mounting on TS35 mounting rails. immediately or on the next attempt to
re-start the machine. This characteristic cor-
l Safety outputs, i.e. at least 2 safety responds to control systems for category 4
outputs made up of normally-open according to EN 954-1. An additional pro-
contacts are available to redundantly drive grammable option allows for the start but-
two power contactors. ton to be monitored.

l Feedback circuit or external device moni- SCR 4-W52-4.10-SD:

toring (EDM), i.e. correct operation of Incorporating all of the features of SCR
the power contactors is monitored by 4-W22, the SCR 4-W52 has additional
wiring the “EDM loop” through the aux- safety outputs.
iliary NC contacts. This means: should a
power contactor fail to release, the nor-
mally-closed contacts, connected in
series to the start button, prevent a
renewed machine start.

113
Possible SCR connections

Designation
Two-channel circuit with Two-channel circuit with Part number
monitored start automatic start Control category
Enabling path
l Connect a safety switch to each of the l Connect a safety switch to each of the Function
terminals S11/S12 and S21/S22 terminals S11/S12 and S21/S22 Analysable contact-pair
l Connect the start button and the feed- l Connect the feedback contacts to termi- Start function
back contacts from an external contactor nals X1/X2 automatic
to terminals X1/X2 l Bridge the terminals X1/X2 and X3/X4 manual
manual (start button monitored)
The green LED "POWER" is lit when volt- The green LED "POWER" lights up when Data outputs (normally-closed contact)
age is applied. When the start button is voltage is supplied. The safety outputs Voltage supply
pushed, the green LED "Output" lights and close immediately and the green LED "Out- Operating voltage
the safety outputs are closed. put" lights up. Max. power consumption
The machine must be restarted following The machine starts up immediately follow- Outputs, user categories
each opening and closing of the safety ing each opening and closing of the pro- Switching voltage max.
door. tective door. Switching current max.
For emergency-stop applications, both Power rating max.
safety-switches are replaced by an emer- LED: Operating voltage (green)
gency-stop button or a rope-pull safety Switching output (green)
switch with two positive break contacts. Error diagnosis (2 x yellow)
Switching cycles, mechanical
Ambient conditions
Temperature range min./max.

Protection class (according to DIN 40050)

for terminal range
Enclosure material
Mounting possibilities
Connection type: terminal block/cable (braided)
Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) max.
Approvals
Two-channel circuit with monitored start Two-channel circuit with automatic start Pending Approvals
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order
Feedback contacts
Feedback contacts
of external contactor
of external contactor

Safety output 1
Safety Safety
switch switch Safety output 2
Safety output 3
Safety output 4
Data output (normally-closed contact)

Evaluation Evaluation Voltage supply 24 V AC/DC

logic logic
Connection for safety contact 1
Connection for safety contact 2
Connection for feedback (EDM) and
start button
Safety
switch
Safety Program input: Change from monitored
switch
start to automatic start achieved by
bridging the terminals

114
 Switches
SCR 3-W22-3.6-D SCR 4-W22-2.6-SD SCR 4-W52-4.10-SD
607.5111.003 607.5111.001 607.5141.002
3 4 4
3 2 4

2Ö 2Ö 2Ö

l l l
l l l
– l l
1 1 1

24 V AC/DC 24 V AC/DC 24 V AC/DC

60 mA 60 mA 150 mA
AC 15 250 V/6 A DC 13 24 V/6 A AC 15 250 V/6 A DC 13 24 V/6 A AC 15 250 V/5 A DC 13 24 V/2 A
250 V 24 V 250 V 24 V 250 V 24 V
6A 6A 6A 6A 10 A 10 A
1500 VA 150 W 1500 VA 150 W 2500 VA 240 W
l l l
l l l
– l l
10 x 106 10 x 106 30 x 106

0–70 °C 0–70 °C 0–55 °C

+ 32 °F/+ 158 °F + 32 °F/+ 158 °F + 32 °F/+ 131 °F
IP 40 IP 40 IP 40
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6
TS 35 TS 35 TS 35
2.5 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm
0,2 kg 0,2 kg 0,4 kg
22.5 x 99 x 114.5 22.5 x 99 x 114.5 52.5 x 99 x 114.5
BG BG BG

l/– l/– l/–

115
Safety Control Relay
SCR
Control categories 2 up to 4 (EN 954-1)

SCR 4-W70-3.8-DT
Safety relay with integrated, reliable timer

SCR 4-W22-2.4-S
Safety relay in compact design

SCR 2-W22-3.5-D
Low-cost safety relay up to SK2

Designation
SCR 4-W70-3.8-DT features Part number
Control category according to regulations: Feedback
External Contactors
Control category
– EN 954 Category 4 Enabling path (not delayed/delayed)
l Monitoring of “safety“ guard and Safety Switch
Function
EMERGENCY STOP devices Contacts to be monitored
l Monitoring of two redundant “safety“ Start function
input signals automatic
l Monitoring of short-circuiting in the manual
“safety“ input circuits Evaluater-
Logic
manual (start-button monitored)
l Safe start up via monitored start button Data outputs (normally-closed contact)
l 3 enabling paths and 1 data output Electrical ratings
l Monitoring of the power contactors via Operating voltage
feedback circuit Max. power consumption
l 1 enabling path with 10 s time delay, Safety Switch Outputs, ratings
control category according to EN 954 Switching voltage max.
Category 3 Switching current max.
Circuitry: SCR 4-W70-3.8 DT Power rating max.
LED: Operating voltage (green)
Feedback Switching output (green)
External Contactors
Function indication (green)
SCR 4-W22-2.4-S features Mechanical life, switching cycles
Control category according to regulations: Safety Switch
Ambient conditions
– EN 954 Category 4 Temperature range min./max.
l Monitoring of safety guard and
EMERGENCY STOP devices Protection class (acc. to IEC 529) housing
l Monitoring of two redundant “safety“ terminals
input signals Evaluater- Housing material
l Monitoring of short-circuiting in the Logic
Installation
“safety“ input circuits Connection type: terminal block (cable/stranded wire)
l Safe start up via monitored start button Weight
l 2 enabling paths Dimensions (W x H x D) max.
l Monitoring of the power contactors via Safety Switch Approvals (in preparation)
feedback circuit
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order
Circuitry: SCR 4-W22-2.4-S

SCR 2-W22-3.5-D features Feedback

Control category according to regulations: External Contactors

– EN 954 Category 2
l Monitoring of safety guard and Safety Switch
EMERGENCY STOP devices
l Testing of safety control at every machine
start
l One-channel “safety“ input signal
l Automatic or manual machine starts Evaluater-
Logic
possible
l 3 enabling paths
l Monitoring of the power contactors via
feedback circuit

Circuitry: SCR 2-W22-3.5 D

116
 Switches
SCR 4-W70-3.8-DT SCR 4-W22-2.4-S SCR 2-W22-3.5 D
607.5151.006 607.5111.005 607.5111.007
4/3 4 2
3/1 with 10 s 2/– 3/–

2Ö 2Ö 1Ö

– – l
– – l
l l –
1 – 1

24 V AC/DC 24 V AC/DC 24 V AC/DC

180 mA 60 mA 60 mA
AC 15 230 V/5 A DC 13 24V/2 A AC 15 230 V/4 A DC 13 24 V/4 A AC 15 230 V/5 A DC 13 24 V/4 A
250 V 24 V 250 V 24 V 250 V 24 V
8A 8A 4A 4A 5A 5A
2000 VA 200 W 1500 VA 150 W 1500 VA 150 W
l l l
– l –
l (2 x 2) – l (2)
30 x 106 10 x 106 10 x 106

0–55 °C 0–70 °C 0–70 °C

+32 °F/+131 °F +32 °F/+158 °F +32 °F/158 °F
IP 40 IP 40 IP 40
IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
PA 6.6 PC PC
TS 35 TS 35 TS 35
2.5 mm2 2 x 2.5 mm2 2 x 2.5 mm2
0.5 kg 0.2 kg 0.2 kg
70 x 99 x 114.5 22.5 x 82 x 98.8 22.5 x 82 x 118
BG BG BG

l/– l/– l/–

117
 Sensors
Photoelectric
Inductive sensors
sensors

Model Page Model Page Model Page

Introduction and Introduction and

definitions 120 definitions 166
Inductive sensors
ø3 122 with extended
150 OT12 RT
OM12 RT
168
ø4 sensing distances • Diffuse reflective sensors
ø 6.5 • 200% Sn • M12
• Robust design • IP 67
• IP 67

M 4 x 0.5 124 Inductive sensors

temperature range
152 M 18 series
170
M 5 x 0.5 • Length < 60 mm
–40 °C to +100 °C • All important function types
M8x1 • M12 range • Programmable output
• M18 range function
• M30 range

M 12 x 1 126 Inductive sensors

special-purpose design
154 OZ20
174
• Smooth stainless steel housing
• N40, S12 plug • All important function types
• Ring sensor • Programmable output function
• Slot sensor

NAMUR SENSORS
M 18 x 1 132 NAMUR switching
156 Analog output sensors
175
amplifiers • Programmable sensing distances
• Voltage output 0–10 V
M 30 x 1.5 135 • Current output
0–20 mA; 4–20 mA
• Housing in plastic brass,
PCS or stainless steel
programmable universal
158
5 x 5 x 25 138 switching device for:
8 x 8 x 40
• Rotational speed master
OR05
177
• Through-beam sensors
8 x 8 x 47 • Analog signal evaluation
• Retroreflective sensors,
• Level and position detection
12 x 12 x 55 polarized
• Switching point evaluation
• Diffuse reflective sensors
• Fibre optic controls
27 x 10 x 5 140 • IP 67
28 x 16 x 11
40 x 26 x 12
OR10
180
50 x 25 x 10
Capacitive sensors • Through-beam sensors
• IP 67

Multinorm 142
Model Seite OR12
182
• Through-beam sensors
Introduction and
definitions 160 • Through-beam sensors
with reduced interior beam
• Laser-through-beam sensors
Globaline 144
M 12 x 1
164 • Retroreflective sensors
M 18 x 1 • Diffuse reflective sensors
• IP 65
M 30 x 1.5
M 32 x 1.5
OR17
186
Programmable
148
RD 20
165 • Through-beam sensors
• Retroreflective sensors,
inductive sensors RD 34
polarised
• Teach-in function • Diffuse reflective sensors
• Programmable operating distance
20–40 mm
• Programmable speed monitoring
1–5000 Hz
• Simple mounting and adjustment
Multinorm
165
E 50
E 68
N 44

118
 Safety
Photoelectric
magnetic Float switches
sensors
controller

Model Page Model Page Model Page

Introduction and General table

definitions 166 202
System type 4
OR20
188 204 Standard float switches
240
• Through-beam sensors • According to EN 954-1 in • Stainless steel
• Retroreflective sensors safety category 4 • Brass
• Retroreflective sensors, • Double-failsafe system • PVC
polarised with selfcontrol
• Diffuse reflective sensors • IP 20
• Diffuse reflective sensors with
background suppression Mini level float switches
System type 3
248
206 • Stainless steel

Sensors
OR90
192 • According to EN 954-1 in
safety category 3
• Brass
• PP
• Through-beam sensors
• Retroreflective sensors • Single-failsafe system with • PVC
partial fault recognition
• IP 20
Adjustable float switches
252
• Stainless steel
System type 1
209 • Brass
• PVC
• According to EN 954-1 in
safety category 1
• Standard, integrated
redundancy
Photoelectric • IP 20 Accessories
256
• Floats
safety devices • Technical data
Coded magnetic switches
210 • Order form and
questionnaire
• IP 67

Model Page

Introduction and
definitions 194 Magnetic monitoring
212
systems
• Connection diagrams
Light barrier OSG 4
194
• Type 4
• Compact design
• EDM (external device
monitoring) Appendix
• Machine restart
automatic/manual
• Muting controller

Magnetic switches
Light barrier OSS2 Page
198
• Type 2 to EN 61496-1
Inductive sensors
• Sensing distance max 20 m
• Automatic restart or • Type matrix
262
restart prevention • Connection
• Connects up to 3 light Model Page diagrams
barriers to the control device • Fixing material
• permanent self-monitoring General table
214 Capacitive sensors
• Type matrix
267
• Connection diagrams
Electromechanical
216 Opto-electronic sensors
magnetic switches
• Type matrix 270
Light barrier OSS4 • Plastic
198 • Metal
• Connection diagrams
• Reflectors
• Type 4 to EN 61496-1
• Sensing distance max. 40 m • IP 67
Accessories
• Automatic restart or • Plugs
276
restart prevention • Sensor testing unit
• Integrated evaluation Electronic magnetic
switches
226
electronics
• Permanent self-monitoring • Plastic
• Metal
• IP 67

119
Inductive sensors

Principle of operation Measuring plates Hysteresis: H

In general, inductive proximity switches The measuring plate used to specify the Hysteresis is the difference between the
consist of four basic elements: the coil, an sensing distance of a proximity sensor switch-on point as the object approaches
oscillator, a triggering circuit and an output consists of a steel square (ST37) with a the sensor, and the switch-off point as the
switching device with short-circuit protec- thickness of 1 mm. The side length is equal object moves away. Hysteresis is stated as a
tion. The oscillator generates a high-fre- to the diameter of the active surface of the percentage of the nominal sensing
quency electromagnetic field, which is sensor, or three times the operating distance. Hysteresis is needed to keep prox-
emitted from the coil, this in turn radiates distance, whichever is greater. imity sensors from output “chattering”
from the sensor’s sensing surface. When a when subjected to vibration, slowly ap-
metallic object enters this electromagnetic proaching objects, temperature drift or
field, eddy currents are induced within the electrical interferences. Hysteresis is typical-
Proximity
material. These eddy currents draw energy Metal plate switch ly 10% of the nominal sensing distance.
from both the electromagnetic field and Active
surface
the oscillator. This withdrawal of energy is
called damping and increases when the
metallic object is moved closer to the sen- Moving
Metal plate
sing surface. The trigger circuit activates direction Centre
the output switching device when a defin- (middle) line
ed damping value is exceeded. For proximi- Switching
ty switches in DC voltage units, the output distance
su max. su max. + H
switching device can be either an NPN sr max. sr max. + H
transistor, which switches the connected sn sn + H
load to the negative pole, or a PNP transis- Nominal sensing distance: Sn sr min. sr min. + H
tor, which switches the load to the positive The nominal sensing distance of different su min. su min. + H
pole. In AC voltage units a thyristor or triac models is a function of the diameter of the
can be the trigger circuit. sensing coil.
sa

Active surface
Real sensing distance: Sr
The real sensing distance is the sensing
distance measured with nominal voltage Sensor
and temperature. It must be between 90%
and 110% of the nominal sensing
0 1 2 3
distance.

Electro- Effective sensing distance: Su

0 Switch end position magnetic
field
Object
The effective sensing distance is measured
1 Threshold value switch
2
within the range of the admissible temper-
Oscillator Switch off
3 Coil atures and voltages and must be between point
Switch on point
90% and 110% of the real sensing Sensor
distance.
Moving
direction Switching distance
Sensing distance Working sensing distance: Sa Switching hysteresis
The sensing distance of a proximity sensor (Secured sensing distance)
is determined by the diameter of the coil The working sensing distance heeds the
used. This means that the larger the coil effects of temperature, supply voltage and
and diameter of the sensor, the longer the unit-to-unit variations. Within 0–80% of Repeat accuracy
sensing range will be. The size and material the nominal sensing distance is guaranteed The ability of a sensor to repeatedly detect
of the object to be detected also affects if all permissible operating conditions are an object at the same distance away from
the sensing distance. fulfilled. the sensing surface. Normally there will be
Sa D 0.8 Sn a deviation of <5%.

120
Reduction factors Installation
The definition of the sensing distance is Inductive sensors contain coils which are
based on the measurement of standardised wound in ferrite cores to point the radiated
square steel target plates. For other materi- electromagnetic field in the direction of
als with the same dimensions, the sensing use. The core is built in to the enclosure in

Sensors
distances are reduced as displayed in the such a way that the field exits from the
following figure: active surface. A portion of the magnetic
field exits laterally. This is sufficient to pre-
120 vent the sensor from being flush-installed Minimum distance for the non-flush instal-
in metal because it would activate the sen- lation of sensors.
100 sor. If a flush installation in metal is desired,
Switching distance (%)

a metal ring is placed around the ferrite

80 core to restrict the lateral radiation of the
field. This type of sensor is called a shield-
60 ed/flush mounted sensor and will have a
reduced sensing range compered to that of
40 the unshielded/non-flush mounted type.
20
Installation with mounting flange parallel
0
St CrNi Ms Al Cu to a steel wall or surface.
St = Steel Al = Aluminium Flush installation Protection types
CrNi = Stainless steel Ms = Brass
Cu = Copper IP 65
The active surface IP 67
Switching frequency may be flush with
A rotating, non-conductive disk on which metal surfaces. Materials
the standard target plates are situated (size The sensors are encapsulated in
of plates as defined above) measures the thermoplastic housings that are reinforced
switching frequency. by glass fibre. The power cable has a PVC
or PU sheath.

Weld field immune sensors

Sensor Catalogue symbol Weld field immune sensors have the ability
2a
sn/2

a for flush installation. not to false trigger in the presence of

Measuring plate
strong electromagnetic fields. These special
models are ideal for welding environments
as well as other applications where strong
a

Insulating
material magnetic fields are present.
Disc Non-flush installation
Standards
The distance between the measurement Sensors for non- All sensors correspond to the specifications
plates and the sensor is half of the nominal flush installation of the following European standards, as
sensing distance. The maximum switching must be provided devised by the European Committee for
frequency is achieved when the switch- Free with a free zone, the Standardisation of Electrotechnology:
on/off output signal falls below 50 ms. space which is three times EN 60947-5-2
greater than the CE
Temperature range diameter of the IEC 255-5 Level 2
The normal temperature range for most active surface and ENV 50140 Level 3
sensors is from –25 °C to +70 °C (–13 °F 25 mm thick. EN 61000-4-2 Level 2 Metal housing
to + 158 °F). Some sensors are available for Catalogue symbol Level 3 Plastic
use in higher temperature applications. for non-flush housing
installation. EN 61000-4-4 Level 2

121
Inductive sensors
Ø3
Ø4
Ø 6.5

Ø3 Ø4
Rated operating distance 0.6 mm (0.02 ˝ ) 0.8 mm (0.03 ˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush – l/– – l/– l/– –
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description – KIB-D03PS/ – KIB-D04NS/ KIB-D04PS/ –
0.6-KL2PU 0.8-KL2PU 0.8-KL2PU
Part number 650.2999.019 650.2399.004 650.2999.004
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/1 263/4 263/1
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– –/l l/–
Model description – KIB-D03PÖ/ – – KIB-D04PÖ/ –
0.6-KL2PU 0.8-KL2PU
Part number 650.2799.007 650.2799.002
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/2 263/2
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– –/l
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range – 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V –
Output current min./max. – –/100 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
Switching frequency max. – 3000 Hz – 3000 Hz 3000 Hz –
Short-circuit protection – l – l l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power – l/– – l/– l/– –
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. – –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –
– –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
Protection type – IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
Housing material – stainless steel 1.4305 – stainless steel 1.4305 stainless steel 1.4305 –
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 – PUR 3x0.055 – PUR 3x0.14 PUR 3x0.14 –
plug (page) – – – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – 266/3 266/3 –

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

122
Ø4 Ø 6.5 Ø 6.5
0.8 mm (0.03 ˝ ) 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ ) 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ )
l/– l/– – l/– l/– – – l/– –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
KIB-D04NS/ KIB-D04PS/ – KIB-D06NS/ KIB-D06PS/ – – KIB-D06PS/ –

Sensors
0.8-KLSM8 0.8-KLSM8 1.5-KL2 1.5-KL2 1.5-K2VPU
650.2399.015 650.2999.017 650.2399.009 650.2999.010 650.2999.034
263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1 263/1
–/l l/– –/l l/– l/–
– – – – KIB-D06PÖ/ – – – –
1.5-KL2
650.2799.011
263/2
–/l
– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

10–30 V 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V – – 10–30 V –

–/200 mA –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA – – –/200 mA –
3000 Hz 3000 Hz – 1000 Hz 1000 Hz – – 1000 Hz –
l l – l l – – l –
l/– l/– – l/– l/– – – – –
– – – – – – – – –

–25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – – –25 °C/+70 °C –
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – – –13 °F/+158 °F –
IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – – IP 67/NEMA 4 –
stainless steel 1.4305 stainless steel 1.4305 – stainless steel 1.4401 stainless steel 1.4401 – – stainless steel 1.4401 –
– – – PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 – – PUR 3x0.14 –
278/279 278/279 – – – – – – –
266/3 266/3 – 266/5 266/5 – – 266/5 –

123
Inductive sensors
M 4 x 0.5
M 5 x 0.5
M8x1

M4 M5
Rated operating distance 0.6 mm (0.02 ˝ ) 1 mm (0.04˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush l/– l/– – l/– l/– –
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description KIB-M04NS/ KIB-M04PS/ – KIB-M05NS/ KIB-M05PS/ –
0.6-KL2PU 0.6-KL2PU 001-KL2PU 001-KL2PU
Part number 650.2399.018 650.2999.020 650.2399.003 650.2999.003
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l l/– –/l l/–
Model description – KIB-M04PÖ/ – KIB-M05NÖ/ KIB-M05PÖ/ –
0.6-KL2PU 001-KL2PU 001-KL2PU
Part number 650.2799.008 650.2199.001 650.2799.001
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/2 263/5 263/2
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l –/l l/–
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range 10–30 V 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V –
Output current min./max. –/100 mA –/100 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
Switching frequency max. 3000 Hz 3000 Hz – 3000 Hz 3000 Hz –
Short-circuit protection l l – l l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power l/– l/– – l/– l/– –
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
Protection type IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
Housing material CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 – CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 –
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 PUR 3x0.055 PUR 3x0.055 – PUR 3x0.14 PUR 3x0.14 –
plug (page) – – – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) 266/3 266/3 – 266/4 266/4 –

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

124
M5 M8x1 M8x1
1 mm (0.04˝ ) 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ ) 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ )
– l/– – l/– l/– – l/– l/– –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
– KIB-M05PS/ – KIB-M08NS/ KIB-M08PS/ – KIB-M08NS/ KIB-M08PS/ –

Sensors
001-KLSM8 1.5-KL2 1.5-KL2 1.5-KLSM8 1.5-KLSM8
650.2999.018 650.2301.003 650.2901.003 650.2342.003 650.2942.005
263/1 263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1
l/– l/– l/– –/l l/–
– – – KIB-M08NÖ/ KIB-M08PÖ/ – – KIB-M08PÖ/ –
1.5-KL2 1.5-KL2 1.5-KLSM8
650.2101.001 650.2701.001 650.2742.001
263/5 263/2 263/2
l/– l/– l/–
– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

– 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V –

– –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
– 3000 Hz – 1000 Hz 1000 Hz – 1000 Hz 1000 Hz –
– l – l l – l l –
– l/– – l/– l/– – l/– l/– –
– – – – – – – – –

– –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –
– –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
– IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
– CuZn39Pb3 – stainless steel 1.4305 stainless steel 1.4305 – stainless steel 1.4305 stainless steel 1.4305 –
– – – PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 – – – –
– 278/279 – – – – 278/279 278/279 –
– 266/4 – – – – – – –

125
Inductive sensors
M 12 x 1

M 12 x 1 M 12 x 1
Rated operating distance 2 mm (0.08˝ ) 4 mm (0.16˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush l/– l/– l/– –/l –/l –/l
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description KIB-M12NS/ KIB-M12PS/ KIB-M12AS/ KIN-M12NS/ KIN-M12PS/ KIN-M12AS/
002-KL2 002-KL2 002-L2 004-KL2 004-KL2 004-L2
Part number 650.2303.001 650.2903.003 650.3503.001 650.2304.001 650.2904.002 650.3504.001
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/4 263/1 265/4 263/4 263/1 265/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–
Model description – KIB-M12PÖ/ KIB-M12AÖ/ KIN-M12NÖ/ KIN-M12PÖ/ KIN-M12AÖ/
002-KL2 002-L2 004-KL2 004-KL2 004-L2
Part number 650.2703.001 650.3403.001 650.2104.001 650.2704.001 650.3404.001
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/2 265/5 263/5 263/2 265/5
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l –/l –/l l/– –/l
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range 10–30 V 10–30 V 90–250 V 10–30 V 10–30 V 90–250 V
Output current min./max. –/200 mA –/200 mA 4/180 mA –/200 mA –/200 mA 4/180 mA
Switching frequency max. 800 Hz 800 Hz 10 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz 10 Hz
Short-circuit protection l l – l l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4
Housing material CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 PVC 2x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 PVC 2x0.14
plug (page) – – – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – – – –

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

DC AC DC AC
a 61.5 (2.42 ˝ ) 66.5 (2.62 ˝ ) a 61 (2.40 ˝ ) 66.5 (2.62 ˝ )
b 40.5 (1.59 ˝ ) 45.5 (1.79 ˝ ) b 40 (1.57 ˝ ) 45.5 (1.79 ˝ )

126
M 12 x 1 M 12 x 1 M 12 x 1
2 mm (0.08˝ ) 4 mm (0.16˝ ) 2 mm (0.08˝ )
l/– l/– – – –/l – l/– l/– –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
KIB-M12NS/ KIB-M12PS/ – – KIN-M12PS/ – KIB-M12PS/ –

Sensors
002-KLS12 002-KLS12 004-KLS12 002-KL2V
650.2343.003 650.2943.012 650.2944.012 650.2903.016
263/4 263/1 263/1 263/1
–/l l/– l/– –/l –/l
– KIB-M12PÖ/ – – KIN-M12PÖ/ – KIB-M12NÖ/ KIB-M12PÖ/ –
002-KLS12 004-KLS12 002-KL2V 002-KL2V
650.2743.003 650.2744.003 650.2103.003 650.2703.005
263/2 263/2 263/5 263/2
–/l –/l –/l –/l
– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

10–30 V 10–30 V – – 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V –

–/200 mA –/200 mA – – –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
800 Hz 800 Hz – – 400 Hz – 800 Hz 800 Hz –
l l – – l – l l –
l/– l/– – – l/– – l/– l/– –
– – – – – – – – –

–25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – – –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – – –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – – IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 – – CuZn39Pb3 – CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 –
– – – – – – PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 –
280/281/282 280/281/282 – – 280/281/282 – – – –
– – – – – – – – –

127
Inductive sensors
M 12 x 1

M 12 x 1 M 12 x 1
Rated operating distance 4 mm (0.16˝ ) 4 mm (0.16˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush –/l –/l – – –/l –
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description KIN-M12NS/ KIN-M12PS/ – – KIN-M12PS/ –
004-KL2V 004-KL2V 004-KS12V
Part number 650.2304.007 650.2904.014 650.2944.006
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/4 263/1 263/1
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l l/– l/–
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range 10–30 V 10–30 V – – 10–30 V –
Output current min./max. –/200 mA –/200 mA – – –/200 mA –
Switching frequency max. 400 Hz 400 Hz – – 400 Hz –
Short-circuit protection l l – – l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power l/– l/– – – – –
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – – –25 °C/+70 °C –
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – – –13 °F/+158 °F –
Protection type IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – – IP 67/NEMA 4 –
Housing material CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 – – CuZn39Pb3 –
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 – – – –
plug (page) – – – – 280/281/282 –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – – – –

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

128
M 12 x 1 M 12 x 1 extended sensing distance M 12 x 1 extended sensing distance
2 mm (0.08˝ ) 4 mm (0.16 ˝ ) 6 mm (0.24˝ )
– l/– – – l/– – –/l –/l –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
– KIB-M12PS/ – – KIB-M12PS/ – KIN-M12NS/ KIN-M12PS/ –

Sensors
002-KS12V 004-KL2E 006-KL2E 006-KL2E
650.2943.006 650.2903.014 650.2304.012 650.2904.009
263/1 263/1 263/4 263/1
l/– l/– –/l l/–
– KIB-M12PÖ/ – – – – – KIN-M12PÖ/ –
002-KS12V 006-KL2E
650.2743.005 650.2704.005
263/2 263/2
–/l –/l
– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

– 10–30 V – – 10–60 V – 10–60 V 10–60 V –

– –/200 mA – – –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
– 800 Hz – – 800 Hz – 400 Hz 400 Hz –
– l – – l – l l –
– – – – l/– – l/– l/– –
– – – – – – – – –

– –25 °C/+70 °C – – –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –

– –13 °F/+158 °F – – –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
– IP 67/NEMA 4 – – IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
– CuZn39Pb3 – – CuZn39Pb3 – CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 –
– – – – PVC 3x0.14 – PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 –
– 280/281/282 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –

129
Inductive sensors
M 12 x 1

M 12 x 1 extended sensing distance M 12 x 1 higher temperature range

Rated operating distance 4 mm (0.16˝ ) 2 mm (0.08˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush – l/– – – l/– –
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description – KIB-M12PS/ – – KIB-M12PS/ –
004-KL2VE 002-KL2T
Part number 650.2903.023 650.2903.013
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/1 263/1
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– –/l
Model description – – – – KIB-M12PÖ/ –
002-KL2T
Part number 650.2703.004
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/2
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range – 10–30 V – – 10–30 V –
Output current min./max. – –/200 mA – – –/200 mA –
Switching frequency max. – 800 Hz – – 800 Hz –
Short-circuit protection – l – – l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power – l/– – – l/– –
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. – –25 °C/+70 °C – – 0 °C/+100 °C –
– –13 °F/+158 °F – – –32 °F/+212 °F –
Protection type – IP 67/NEMA 4 – – IP 67/NEMA 4 –
Housing material – CuZn39Pb3 – – CuZn39Pb3 –
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 – PVC 3x0.14 – – PVC 3x0.14 –
plug (page) – – – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – – – –

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

130
M 12 x 1 higher temperature range M 12 x 1 higher switching frequency M 12 x 1 higher switching frequency
4 mm (0.16˝ ) 2 mm (0.08˝ ) 4 mm (0.16˝ )
– –/l – l/– l/– – –/l –/l –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
– KIN-M12PS/ – KIB-M12NS/ KIB-M12PS/ – KIN-M12NS/ KIN-M12PS/ –

Sensors
004-KL2T 002-KL2F 002-KL2F 004-KL2F 004-KL2F
650.2904.011 650.2303.005 650.2903.012 650.2304.006 650.2904.010
263/1 263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1
–/l –/l –/l –/l l/–
– KIN-M12PÖ/ – – – – – – –
004-KL5T
650.2704.004
263/2
–/l
– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

– 10–30 V – 10–60 V 10–60 V – 10–60 V 10–60 V –

– –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
– 400 Hz – 4000 Hz 4000 Hz – 3000 Hz 3000 Hz –
– l – l l – l l –
– l/– – l/– l/– – l/– l/– –
– – – – – – – – –

– 0 °C/+100 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –

– –32 °F/+212 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
– IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
– CuZn39Pb3 – CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 – CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 –
– PVC 3x0.14 – PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 – PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 –
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –

131
Inductive sensors
M 18 x 1

M 18 x 1 M 18 x 1
Rated operating distance 5 mm (0.20˝ ) 8 mm (0.32˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush l/– l/– l/– –/l –/l –/l
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description KIB-M18NS/ KIB-M18PS/ KIB-M18AS/ KIN-M18NS/ KIN-M18PS/ KIN-M18AS/
005-KL2 005-KL2 005-L2 008-KL2 008-KL2 008-L2
Part number 650.2305.134 650.2905.850 650.3505.004 650.2306.194 650.2906.200 650.3506.002
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/4 263/1 265/4 263/4 263/1 265/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l l/– l/– –/l l/– l/–
Model description – KIB-M18PÖ/ KIB-M18AÖ/ KIN-M18NÖ/ KIN-M18PÖ/ KIN-M18AÖ/
005-KL3 005-L2 008-KL2 008-KL2 008-L2
Part number 650.2705.172 650.3405.001 650.2106.191 650.2706.001 650.3406.001
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/2 265/5 263/5 263/2 265/5
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l –/l –/l –/l l/–
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – KIB-M18PU/ – – KIN-M18PU/ –
005-KL2 008-KL2
Part number 650.2805.001 650.2806.001
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 264/4 264/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l –/l
Electrical data
Voltage range 10–60 V 10–60 V 20–250 V 10–60 V 10–60 V 20–250 V
Output current min./max. –/200 mA –/200 mA 4/400 mA –/200 mA –/200 mA 4/400 mA
Switching frequency max. 500 Hz 500 Hz 10 Hz 200 Hz 200 Hz 10 Hz
Short-circuit protection l l – l l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4
Housing material CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 PVC 3x0.5/4x0.5 PVC 3x0.5/4x0.5 PVC 2x0.5 PVC 3x0.5/4x0.5 PVC 3x0.5/4x0.5 PVC 2x0.5
plug (page) – – – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) 266/6 266/6 266/6 266/6 266/6 266/6

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

132
M 18 x 1 M 18 x 1 M 18 x 1
5 mm (0.20˝ ) 8 mm (0.32˝ ) 5 mm (0.20˝ )
– l/– – –/l –/l – – l/– –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
– KIB-M18PS/ – KIN-M18NS/ KIN-M18PS/ – – KIB-M18PS/ –

Sensors
005-KL2V 008-KL2V 008-KL2V 005-KS12V
650.2905.008 650.2306.004 650.2906.006 650.2905.012
263/1 263/4 263/1 263/1
l/– l/– l/–
– KIB-M18PÖ/ – – KIN-M18PÖ/ – – KIB-M18PÖ/ –
005-KL2V 008-KL2V 005-KS12V
650.2705.006 650.2706.002 650.2705.007
263/2 263/2 263/2
–/l –/l –/l
– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

– 10–60 V – 10–60 V 10–60 V – – 10–60 V –

– –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA – – –/200 mA –
– 500 Hz – 200 Hz 200 Hz – – 500 Hz –
– l – l l – – l –
– l/– – l/– l/– – – – –
– – – – – – – – –
–
– –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – – –25 °C/+70 °C –
– –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – – –13 °F/+158 °F –
– IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – – IP 67/NEMA 4 –
– CuZn39Pb3 – CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 – – CuZn39Pb3 –
– PVC 3x0.5 – PVC 3x0.5 PVC 3x0.5 – – – –
– – – – – – – 260/261/262 –
– 266/6 – 266/6 266/6 – – 266/6 –

133
Inductive sensors
M 18 x 1
M 30 x 1.5

M 18 x 1 M 18 x 1
Rated operating distance 5 mm (0.20˝ ) 8 mm (0.32˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush – l/– l/– – –/l –
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description – KIB-M18PS/ KIB-M18AS/ – KIN-M18PS/ –
005-KLSD 005-LSD 008-KLSD
Part number 660.2905.662 650.3505.003 650.2941.001
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 1
) 2
) 1
)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– –/l –/l
Model description – KIB-M18PÖ/ – – KIN-M18PÖ/ –
005-KLSD 008-KLSD
Part number 650.2705.001 650.2741.001
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 1
) 1
)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range – 10–60 V 48–250 V – 10–60 V –
Output current min./max. – –/200 mA 4/180 mA – –/200 mA –
Switching frequency max. – 200 Hz 200 Hz – 200 Hz –
Short-circuit protection – l – – l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power – l/– l/– – l/– –
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –
– –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –
Protection type – IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 – IP 65/NEMA 12 –
Housing material – CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 – CuZn39Pb3 –
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 – – – – – –
plug (page) – – – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – 266/6 266/6 – 266/6 –

Dimension diagrams

) DC-3-wire
1 2
) AC-2-wire
1=+ 1 = L1
2=– 2 = Output
3 = Output

All dimensions in mm (inch)

134
M 30 x 1.5 M 30 x 1.5 M 30 x 1.5
10 mm (0.39 ˝ ) 15 mm (0.59 ˝ ) 10 mm (0.39 ˝ )
l/– l/– l/– –/l –/l –/l – l/– –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
KIB-M30NS/ KIB-M30PS/ KIB-M30AS/ KIN-M30NS/ KIN-M30PS/ KIN-M30AS/ – KIB-M30PS/ –

Sensors
010-KL2 010-KL2 010-L2 015-KL2 015-KL2 015-L2.5 010-KLS12
650.2307.135 650.2907.068 650.3507.378 650.2308.001 650.2908.002 650.3508.246 650.2939.004
263/4 263/1 265/4 263/4 263/1 265/4 263/1
–/l l/– l/– –/l l/– –/l l/–
– – KIB-M30AÖ/ – – – – – –
010-L2
650.3407.240
265/5
–/l
– – – – – – – – –

KIB-M30NU/ – – – KIN-M30PU/ – – – –
010-KL2 015-KL2
650.2207.001 650.2808.001
264/5 264/4
–/l –/l

10–60 V 10–60 V 20–250 V 10–60 V 10–60 V 20–250 V – 10–60 V –

–/200 mA –/200 mA 4/400 mA –/200 mA –/200 mA 4/400 mA – –/200 mA –
300 Hz 300 Hz 10 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz 10 Hz – 300 Hz –
l l – l l – – l –
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– – l/– –
– – – – – – – – –

–25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –
IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 –
CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 – CuZn39Pb3 –
PVC 3x0.5/4x0.5 PVC 3x0.5/4x0.5 PVC 2x0.5 PVC 3x0.5/4x0.5 PVC 3x0.5/4x0.5 PVC 2x0.5 – – –
– – – – – – – 260/261/262 –
266/8 266/8 266/8 266/8 266/8 266/8 – 266/8 –

135
Inductive sensors
M 30 x 1.5

M 30 x 1.5 M 30 x 1.5
Rated operating distance 15 mm (0.59 ˝ ) 10 mm (0.39 ˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush – –/l – – l/– –
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description – KIN-M30PS/ – – KIB-M30PS/ –
015-KLS12 010-KL2V
Part number 650.2935.005 650.2907.003
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/1 263/1
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–
Model description – – – – KIB-M30PÖ/ –
010-KL2V
Part number 650.2707.001
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/2
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range – 10–60 V – – 10–60 V –
Output current min./max. – –/200 mA – – –/200 mA –
Switching frequency max. – 100 Hz – – 300 Hz –
Short-circuit protection – l – – l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power – l/– – – l/– –
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. – –25 °C/+70 °C – – –25 °C/+70 °C –
– –13 °F/+158 °F – – –13 °F/+158 °F –
Protection type – IP 67/NEMA 4 – – IP 67/NEMA 4 –
Housing material – CuZn39Pb3 – – CuZn39Pb3 –
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 – – – – PVC 3x0.5 –
plug (page) – 280/281/282 – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – 266/8 – – 266/8 –

Dimension diagrams

) DC-3-wire
1 2
) AC-2-wire
1=+ 1 = L1
2=– 2 = Output
3 = Output

) Cable length 2.5 m/98˝

3

All dimensions in mm (inch)

136
M 30 x 1.5 M 30 x 1.5 M 30 x 1.5
15 mm (0.59 ˝ ) 10 mm (0.39 ˝ ) 15 mm (0.59 ˝ )
– –/l –/l – l/– – – –/l –/l
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
– KIN-T30PS/ KIN-T30AS/ – – – – KIN-T30PS/ –

Sensors
015-KL2 015-L2.5 3) 015-KLSD
650.2923.981 650.3523.956 650.2935.001
263/1 265/4 1
)
l/– l/– l/–
– – KIN-T30AÖ/ – – – – – –
015-L2
650.3423.955
265/5
–/l
– – – – KIB-T30PP/ – – KIN-T30PP/ KIN-T30AP/
010-KLSD 015-KLSD 015-LSD
650.2822.862 650.2836.860 650.3536.868
1
) 1
) 2
)
l/– l/– l/–
– – – – – – – – –

– 10–60 V 20–250 V – 10–60 V – – 10–60 V 20–250 V

– –/200 mA 4/400 mA – –/200 mA – – –/200 mA 4/400 mA
– 100 Hz 10 Hz – 300 Hz – – 100 Hz 10 Hz
– l – – l – – l –
– l/– l/– – l/– – – l/– l/–
– – – – – – – – –

– –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C – – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
– –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F – – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F
– IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 65/NEMA 12 – – IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
– PA 6 PA 6 – PA 6 – – PA 6 PA 6
– PVC 3x0.5 PVC 2x0.5 – – – – – –
– – – – – – –
– 266/8 266/8 – 266/8 – – 266/8 266/8

137
Inductive sensors
5 x 5 x 25
8 x 8 x 40
8 x 8 x 47
12 x 12 x 55

5 x 5 x 25 8 x 8 x 40
Rated operating distance 1 mm (0.04˝ ) 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush – l/– – l/– l/– –
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description – KIB-Q05PS/ – KIB-Q08NS/ KIB-Q08PS/ –
001-K2PU 1.5-K2 1.5-K2
Part number 650.2999.026 650.2380.001 650.2980.004
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/1 263/4 263/1
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– –/l l/–
Model description – KIB-Q05PÖ/ – – KIB-Q08PÖ/ –
001-K2PU 1.5-K2
Part number 650.2799.010 650.2780.001
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/2 263/2
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l –/l
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range – 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V –
Output current min./max. – –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
Switching frequency max. – 1000 Hz – 1000 Hz 1000 Hz –
Short-circuit protection – l – l l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power – – – – – –
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. – –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –
– –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
Protection type – IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
Housing material – CuZn39Pb3 – CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 –
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 – PUR 3x0.05 – PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 –
plug (page) – – – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – – – –

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

active surface

138
8 x 8 x 47 12 x 12 x 55 extended sensing distance 12 x 12 x 55 extended sensing distance
1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ ) 4 mm (0.16˝ ) 4 mm (0.16˝ )
– l/– – – l/– – l/– l/– –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
– KIB-Q08PS/ – – KIB-Q12PS/ – KIB-Q12NS/ KIB-Q12PS/ –

Sensors
1.5-KLSM8 004-KL2E 004-KLSM8E 004-KLSM8E
650.2980.002 650.2999.028 650.2399.021 650.2999.030
263/1 263/1 263/4 263/1
l/– –/l –/l l/–
– KIB-Q08PÖ/ – – – – – – –
1.5-KLSM8
650.2780.002
263/2
–/l
– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

– 10–30 V – – 10–60 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V –

– –/200 mA – – –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
– 1000 Hz – – 800 Hz – 800 Hz 800 Hz –
– l – – l – l l –
– l/– – – l/– – l/– l/– –
– – – – – – – – –

– –25 °C/+70 °C – – –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –

– –13 °F/+158 °F – – –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
– IP 67/NEMA 4 – – IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
– CuZn39Pb3 – – CuZn39Pb3 – CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3 –
– – – – PVC 3x0.14 – – – –
– – – – – – 278/279 278/279 –
– 278/279 – – – – – – –

139
Inductive sensors
27 x 10 x 5
28 x 16 x 11
40 x 26 x 12
50 x 25 x 10

27 x 10 x 5 28 x 16 x 11
Rated operating distance 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ ) 2 mm (0.08˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush l/– l/– – l/– l/– l/–
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description KIB-E27NS/ KIB-E27PS/ – KIB-E28NS/ KIB-E28PS/ KIB-E28AS/
1.5-KL2PU 1.5-KL2PU 002-KL2 002-KL2 002-L2
Part number 650.2393.001 650.2993.001 650.2373.001 650.2973.001 650.3573.001
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1 265/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l l/– –/l l/– –/l
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range 10–30 V 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V 90–250 V
Output current min./max. –/200 mA –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA 4/100 mA
Switching frequency max. 1000 Hz 1000 Hz – 600 Hz 600 Hz 10 Hz
Short-circuit protection l l – l l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power l/– l/– – l/– l/– l/–
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4
Housing material PA 6.6 PA 6.6 – PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 PUR 3x0.14 PUR 3x0.14 – PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 PVC 2x0.14
plug (page) – – – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – – – –

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

140
40 x 26 x 12 40 x 26 x 12 50 x 25 x 10
2 mm (0.08˝ ) 4 mm (0.16˝ ) 5 mm (0.20˝ )
– l/– l/– –/l –/l –/l l/– l/– –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
– KIB-E40PS/ KIB-E40AS/ – KIN-E40PS/ KIN-E40AS/ KIB-E50NS/ KIB-E50PS/ –

Sensors
002-KL2 002-L2 004-KL2 004-L2 005-KL2 005-KL2
650.2984.023 650.3584.004 650.2984.024 650.3584.005 650.2390.001 650.2990.001
263/1 265/4 263/1 265/4 263/4 263/1
l/– l/– l/– l/– –/l l/–
– KIB-E40PÖ/ KIB-E40AÖ/ – KIN-E40PÖ/ KIN-E40AÖ/ – – –
002-KL2 002-L2 004-KL2 004-L2
650.2784.006 650.3484.003 650.2784.007 650.3484.004
263/2 265/5 263/2 265/5
–/l –/l –/l –/l
– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

– 10–36 V 20–250 V AC 10–36 V 10–36 V 20–250 V AC 10–60 V 10–60 V –

– –/200 mA –/300 mA –/200 mA –/200 mA –/300 mA –/200 mA –/200 mA –
– 800 Hz 10 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz 10 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz –
– l – l l – l l –
– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– –
– – – – – – – – –

– –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –
– –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
– IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
– PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 –
– PVC 3x0.5 PVC 2x0.5 PVC 3x0.5 PVC 3x0.5 PVC 2x0.5 PVC 3x0.5 PVC 3x0.5 –
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –

141
Inductive sensors
Multinorm
41.5 x 41.5 x 120

41.5 x 41.5 x 120 41.5 x 41.5 x 120

Rated operating distance 15 mm (0.59 ˝ ) 20 mm (0.78 ˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush l/– l/– – –/l –/l –
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description – –

Part number KIB-N44DP/ KIN-N44DP/

Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 015-KLS 020-KLS
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order 650.2054.001 650.2054.002
Model description 263/7 – 263/7 –
l/– l/–
Part number
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description KIB-N44NP/ KIB-N44PP/ KIB-N44AP/ KIN-N44NP/ KIN-N44PP/ KIN-N44AP/
015-KLS 015-KLS 015-LS 020-KLS 020-KLS 020-LS
Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number 650.2354.011 650.2954.011 650.3554.009 650.2354.012 650.2954.012 650.3554.010
selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/6 263/3 265/6 263/6 263/3 265/6
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l –/l l/– –/l l/– l/–
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range 10–60 V 10–60 V 20–250 V 10–60 V 10–60 V 20–250 V
Output current min./max. –/400 mA –/400 mA 4/500 mA –/400 mA –/400 mA 4/500 mA
Switching frequency max. 100 Hz 100 Hz 15 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 15 Hz
Short-circuit protection l l – l l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power l/l l/l l/l l/l l/l l/l
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
Housing material PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 – – – – – –
plug (page) – – – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – – – –

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

142
41.5 x 41.5 x 120 extended sensing distance 41.5 x 41.5 x 120 extended sensing distance
20 mm (0.78 ˝ ) 40 mm (1.57 ˝ )
l/– l/– – –/l –/l –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
– –

Sensors
KIB-N44DP/ KIN-N44DP/
020-KLSE 040-KLSE
650.2054.004 650.2054.005
263/7 – 263/7 –
l/– l/–

– – KIB-N44AP/ – – KIN-N44AP/
020-LSE 040-LSE
650.3554.001 650.3554.002
265/6 265/6
l/– –/l
– – – – – –

– 10–60 V 20–250 V – 10–60 V 20–250 V

– –/400 mA –/500 mA – –/400 mA –/500 mA
– 50 Hz 15 Hz – 50 Hz 15 Hz
– l – – l –
– l/l l/l – l/– l/l
– – – – – –

– –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C

– –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F
– IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 – IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
– PA 6.6 PA 6.6 – PA 6.6 PA 6.6
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
– – – – – –

143
Inductive sensors
Globaline
M 8x1
M 12 x 1

M8x1 M8x1
Rated operating distance 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ ) 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush l/– l/– – l/– l/– –
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description KIB-M08NS/ KIB-M08PS/ – KIB-M08NS/ KIB-M08PS/ –
1.5-KL2 1.5-KL2 1.5-KLSM8 1.5-KLSM8
Part number 693.2301.001 693.2901.001 693.2342.001 693.2942.001
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range 10–30 V 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V –
Output current min./max. –/200 mA –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
Switching frequency max. 1000 Hz 1000 Hz – 1000 Hz 1000 Hz –
Short-circuit protection l l – l l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power l/– l/– – l/– l/– –
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
Housing material – – – – – –
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 – – – –
plug (page/Pos.) – – – 278/279 278/279 –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – – – –

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

144
M 12 x 1 M 12 x 1 M 12 x 1
2 mm (0.08˝ ) 2 mm (0.08˝ ) 4 mm (0.16˝ )
l/– l/– – l/– l/– – –/l –/l –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
KIB-M12NS/ KIB-M12PS/ – KIB-M12NS/ KIB-M12PS/ – KIN-M12NS/ KIN-M12PS/ –

Sensors
002-KL2 002-KL2 002-KLS12 002-KLS12 004-KL2 004-KL2
693.2303.001 693.2903.001 693.2343.001 693.2943.001 693.2304.001 693.2904.001
263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–
– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

10–30 V 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V –

–/200 mA –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
800 Hz 800 Hz – 800 Hz 800 Hz – 400 Hz 400 Hz –
l l – l l – l l –
l/– l/– – l/– l/– – l/– l/– –
– – – – – – – – –

–25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
– – – – – – – – –
PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 – – – – PVC 3x0.14 PVC 3x0.14 –
– – – 280/281/282 280/281/282 – – – –
– – – – – – – – –

145
Inductive sensors
Globaline
M 12 x 1
M 18 x 1

M 12 x 1 M 18 x 1
Rated operating distance 4 mm (0.16˝ ) 5 mm (0.20˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush –/l –/l – l/– l/– –
Switching functions NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
Model description KIN-M12NS/ KIN-M12PS/ – KIB-M18NS/ KIB-M18PS/ –
004-KLS12 004-KLS12 005-KL2 005-KL2
Part number 693.2344.001 693.2944.001 693.2305.001 693.2905.001
Normally-open (NO) Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Normally-closed (NC) Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Normally-closed/open (NC/NO) Part number

selectable Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – – – –

Part number
Complementary Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Electrical data
Voltage range 10–30 V 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V –
Output current min./max. –/200 mA –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
Switching frequency max. 400 Hz 400 Hz – 500 Hz 500 Hz –
Short-circuit protection l l – l l –
LED: yellow = switched / green = power l/– l/– – l/– l/– –
Sensitivity adjustment – – – – – –
Mechanical data
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
Housing material – – – – – –
Termination cable 2 m/6.5 ft mm2 – – – PVC 3x0.5 PVC 3x0.5 –
plug (page/Pos.) 280/281/282 280/281/282 – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – 266/6 266/6 –

Dimension diagrams
All dimensions in mm (inch)

146
M 18 x 1 M 18 x 1 M 18 x 1
5 mm (0.20˝ ) 8 mm (0.32˝ ) 8 mm (0.32˝ )
l/– l/– – –/l –/l – –/l –/l –
NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC NPN PNP AC
KIB-M18NS/ KIB-M18PS/ – KIN-M18NS/ KIN-M18PS/ – KIN-M18NS/ KIN-M18PS/ –

Sensors
005-KLS12 005-KLS12 008-KL2 008-KL2 008-KLS12 008-KLS12
693.2305.004 693.2905.004 693.2306.001 693.2906.001 693.2306.004 693.2906.004
263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1 263/4 263/1
l/– l/– l/– l/– l/– l/–
– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – –

10–30 V 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V – 10–30 V 10–30 V –

–/200 mA –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA – –/200 mA –/200 mA –
500 Hz 500 Hz – 200 Hz 200 Hz – 200 Hz 200 Hz –
l l – l l – l l –
l/– l/– – l/– l/– – l/– l/– –
– – – – – – – – –

–25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C – –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F – –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –
IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 – IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 –
– – – – – – – – –
– – – PVC 3x0.5 PVC 3x0.5 – – – –
280/281/282 280/281/282 – – – – 280/281/282 280/281/282 –
266/6 266/6 – 266/6 266/6 – – – –

147
Programmable
inductive sensors

Principle Variations
These sensors work on the conventional A further application for teach-in sensors is BERNSTEIN delivers the programmable
inductive principle, nevertheless they can, the speed monitoring of rotating shafts inductive sensor in different enclosure
thanks to their adaptable properties, be (detection by gear wheels) with changing, designs and with a varying range of
universally adapted for many applications. rotational frequencies. Here a simple volta- technical features.
ge pulse or PLC can be used to set the
With this learning capability (the so-called necessary programmable pulse to "learn" The multi-norm version has three
teach-in function), the sensors can be split the maximum operating frequency. programmable switching outputs. With this
into two groups: Additional control devices with power sup- type of sensor, four positive impulse signals
ply and complicated evaluating electronics are expected one after the other on the
l Sensors with teach-in-function are not necessary. control line. At the first impulse signal, the
for distance sensing sensor switches to the programming mode.
l Sensors with teach-in-function Mode of operation After each following impulse signal, the
for speed monitoring The teach-in-function is achieved by an actual distance to the targeted object is
A/D-converter which permanently stores assigned to an output (Teach-in sensing
The following demonstrates two applicati- and compare the values in EEPROM (Elec- distance).
on examples: trical Erasable Read Only Memory).
A practical application is the sensing range U Ctrl. input
of targets, which due to changing conditi- The EEPROM data can be safely stored for UB …
ons, e.g. operating conditions or wear and at least 40 years with the number of read/ 0
tear, would require a constant re-adjust- write-operations said to be 1.000.000. t
SP red SP yellow SP green
ment.
is being programmed
Through a simple voltage pulse or PLC the By using a micro-controller for signal pro-
necessary programmable pulse can be cessing, Bernstein sensors can also be re-
directed to the sensor and the learning programmed to meet specific customer Programming for multi-norm version
process initiated. The programmable pulse requirements for especially difficult tasks.
can vary within the voltage range of UB. The teach-in speed monitor sensors are
available in M12 and M18 enclosures in
plug and cable versions and PNP-version
(special types on request).

General data Teach-in distance sensing sensors Teach-in speed monitoring sensors

Enclosure material PA6.61) / CuZn39Pb32) CuZn39Pb3

Protection class according to IEC IP 651) / IP 672) IP 67
Operating temperature –25 °C bis +70 °C –25 °C bis +70 °C
Storage temperature –40 °C bis +80 °C –40 °C bis +80 °C
Sensing distance programmable, 20..40 mm1) / 8..16 mm2) 2 mm3) / 5 mm4)

Electrical data

Switching frequency 3 Hz programmable, 1…5000 Hz

Hysteresis ≤ 10% (from programmed sensing distance) ≤ 15% (from progr. switching frequency)
Open-circuit current < 10 mA1) / < 11 mA2) < 11 mA
Voltage drop ≤ 1.5 V ≤ 2.5 V
Polarisation protection yes yes
Overload-/short-circuit withstand capability yes yes
Repeat accuracy ≤ 5% ≤5%

) European standard enclosure (N44 series Multinorm)

1
) Metric design M12
3

) Metric design (M12 / M18)

2
) Metric design M18
4

148
Advantages Teach-in distance sensing sensors Teach-in speed monitoring sensors

l Sensor adjustment is easy

l Calibration in the application Connection diagram, N44 Connection diagram, M12/M18
l Sensors can be re-programmed without
additional mounting effort
Output yellow
l One sensor can scan a number of green
switching points red
l Programming from control panel
possible
l High process safety due to tolerance

Sensors
minimisation
l High repeat accuracy
Connection diagram, M18
1
+
4
O
RL
3
–
2
Ctrl.
Version
Designation KIN-N44PS/040-KLSE KIB-M12PS/002-KLS12I KIB-M12PS/002-KL2I
Part number 650.2954.0151) 650.2943.0141) 650.2903.0242)
Operating voltage 10 – 30 V DC 10 – 36 V DC 10 – 36 V DC
Switching current ≤ 200 mA ≤ 200 mA ≤ 200 mA
Switching distances / prog. switching frequencies 20...40 mm / – – / 1...5000 Hz – / 1...5000 Hz

Dimensions

Version
Designation KIB-M18PS/005-KLS12I KIB-M18PS/005-KL2I
Part number 650.2940.0041) 650.2905.0212)
Operating voltage 10 – 30 V DC 10 – 30 V DC
Switching current ≤ 200 mA ≤ 200 mA
Switching distance/frequency programmable – / 1...5000 Hz – / 1...5000 Hz

Dimensions

1
) S12 plug version
for connection coupling 413.9100.299
2
) Cable type 2 m

149
Inductive sensors with
increased sensing
distances

Type M12 4 mm sensing distance 8 mm sensing distance

flush metal design non-flush netal design

2 m cable M12 plug 2 m cable M12 plug

PNP normally-open KIB-M12PS/004-KL2E KIB-M12PS/004-KLS12E KIN-M12PS/008-KL2E KIN-M12PS/008-KLS12E

contact*) 650.2903.025 650.2943.015 650.2904.021 650.2944.013

Dimensions

Type M18 8 mm sensing distance 16 mm sensing distance

flush metal design non-flush metal design

2 m cable M12 plug 2 m cable M12 plug

PNP normally-open KIB-M18PS/008-KL2E KIB-M18PS/008-KLS12E KIN-M18PS/016-KL2E KIN-M18PS/016-KLS12E

contact*) 650.2905.022 650.2940.005 650.2906.018 650.2941.004

Dimensions

*) Order only with part number, NPN- and normally-closed version on request

150
Wiring diagrams
Type M12/M18, cable version Type M12/M18, plug version

BN 1
+ +
I I

Sensors
BK 4

BU 3
— —

Accessories
Cable couplings see page 280 ff.

General data

M12 M18
flush non-flush flush non-flush
Operating voltage UB 10–36 V
Rated operating voltage IB D 200 mA
Switching hysteresis H 10% from rated switching distance
Reproducibility R D 5%
Switching frequency F 800 Hz 400 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz
Output short circuit- and overload proof
Polarity reversal protection yes
Rated switching distance sn 4 mm 8 mm 8 mm 16 mm
Functions-/operating voltage display l/– l/– l/– l/–
Ambient temperature – 25 °C to + 70 °C
Protection class IP 67 according to IEC 529, EN 60 529
Enclosure nickel-plated brass (CuZn39Pb3)
Cable PVC mm2 3 x 0.14 3 x 0.5

151
Inductive sensors

Temperature range
– 40 °C to +100 °C

Type M12 2 mm sensing distance M12 5 mm sensing distance M18

M18

flush metal design flush metal design

PNP normally-open
contact*) 2 m cable M12 plug 2 m cable M12 plug

Model description KIB-M12PS/002-KL2T KIB-M12PS/002-KLS12T KIB-M18PS/005-KL2PUT KIB-M18PS/005-KLS12T

Part number 650.2903.026 650.2943.016 650.2905.023 650.2940.006

Dimensions

Type M30 10 mm sensing distance

flush metal design

PNP normally-open
contact*) 2 m cable M12 plug

Model description KIB-M30PS/010-KL2PUT KIB-M30PS/010-KLS12T

Part number 650.2907.013 650.2939.006

Dimensions

*) Order only with part number, NPN- and normally-closed version on request

152
Wiring diagrams
Type M12/M18/M30, cable version Type M12/M18/M30, plug version

BN 1
+ +
I I

Sensors
BK 4

BU 3
— —

Accessories
Cable couplings see page 280 ff.

General data

M12 M18 M30

flush flush flush
Operating voltage UB 10–30 V
Rated operating voltage IB ≤ 200 mA
Switching hysteresis H 10% from rated switching distance
Reproducibility R ≤ 5%
Switching frequency F 800 Hz 500 Hz 300 Hz
Output short circuit- and overload proof
Polarity reversal protection yes
Rated switching distance sn 2 mm 5 mm 10 mm
Functions-/operating voltage display l/– l/– l/–
Ambient temperature – 40 °C to + 100 °C
Protection class IP 67 according to IEC 529, EN 60 529
Enclosure nickel-plated brass (CuZn39Pb3)
Cable PVC mm2 3 x 0.14 3 x 0.5 3 x 0.5

153
Inductive sensors

Special-purpose design

Type N40 15 mm sensing distance 20 mm sensing distance

Flush design Non-flush design

M12 plug/PNP NO contact M12 plug/PNP NC contact M12 plug/PNP NO contact M12 plug/PNP NO contact

Model description KIB-N40PS/015-KLS12 KIB-N40PÖ/015-KLS12 KIN-N40PS/020-KLS12 KIN-N40PÖ/020-KLS12

Part number 650.2988.001 650.2788.001 650.2982.003 650.2782.001

Dimensions

Type N40 Ring sensor Ø 16 mm Slot sensor 3 mm slot width

– Ring sensor

Type S03
– Slot sensor

6 m cable 2 m cable

PNP-NO contact NPN-NO contact PNP-NO contact NPN-NO contact

Model description KIR-N40PS/000-KL6 KIR-N40NS/000-KL6 KIN-S03PS/003K2

–
Part number 650.2999.036 660.2399.375 650.2999.035

Dimensions

154
Wiring diagrams Type N40, cable version Type N40, plug version
Type SO3, slot sensor

BN 1
+ +
I I
BK 4

Sensors
BU 3
— —

Accessories
Cable couplings see page 280 ff.

General data

N40 N40 N40 N40

flush non-flush Ring sensor Slot sensor
Operating voltage UB 10–36 V 10–30 V
Rated operating voltage IB ≤ 200 mA
Switching hysteresis H 10% from rated switching distance –
Reproducibility R ≤ 5%
Switching frequency F 100 Hz 50 Hz 4000 Hz
Output continuous short-circuit- and overload proof
Polarity reversal protection yes
Rated switching distance sn 15 mm 20 mm Immersion approx. 20 mm Immersion approx. 7 mm
Functions-/operating voltage display l/– l/– l/– –/–
Ambient temperature – 25 °C to + 70 °C
Protection class IP 67 according to IEC 529, EN 60 529
Enclosure PA6 PA6
Connection mm2 S12 plug cable 3 x 0.5 mm2 cable 3 x 0.14 mm2

155
NAMUR
DIN EN 60947-5-6

Inductive sensors

19 x 17 x 10 Ø 6.5; 25 mm length
Rated operating distance Slot 3.5 mm (0.13˝) 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush l/– l/–
Switching functions NAMUR / B NAMUR / A
Model description KIB-S03EA/ * screw KIB-D06EA/
M 1.6 x 12 DIN 963
3.5-0.5 1.5-2
and nut
Part number 650.1675.001 M 1.6 DIN 964 650.1699.002
Wiring diagram (page/Pos.) 263/8 are included 263/8
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l –/l
Mechanical data
Housing material PA 6 stainless steel 1.4305
Cable length 2 m/6.5 ft. mm 0.5 m/2 x 0.14 single core PVC 2 x 0.25
Accessories (page/Pos.) – –

M 5; 25 mm length M 8 x 1; 32 mm length
Rated operating distance 1 mm (0.04˝ ) 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝ )
Mounting flush /non-flush l/– l/–
Switching functions NAMUR / B NAMUR / A
Model description KIB-M05EA/ KIB-M08EA/
001-2 1.5-2
Part number 650.1699.008 650.1601.003
Wiring diagram (page/Pos.) 263/8 263/8
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–
Mechanical data
Housing material CuZn39Pb3 stainless steel 1.4305
Cable length 2 m/6.5 ft. mm PVC 2 x 0.14 PVC 2 x 0.25
Accessories (page/Pos.) – –
Electrical and mechanical data Electrical data Mechanical data
for NAMUR inductive sensors Nominal input voltage 8.2 V DC Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C
Input resistance 1 kΩ –13 °F/+158 °F
Protection class IP 67/NEMA 4
Output current
Diagram A Diagram B
damped ≤ 1 mA ≤ 1.1 mA
undamped ≥ 4 mA ≥ 2.2 mA

156
M 8 x 1; 32 mm length M 12 x 1; 30 mm length M 12 x 1; 32 mm length
2 mm (0.08 ˝ ) 2 mm (0.08 ˝ ) 4 mm (0.16 ˝ )
–/l l/– –/l
NAMUR / A NAMUR / A NAMUR / A
KIN-M08EA/ KIB-M12EA/ KIN-M12EA/

Sensors
002-2 002-2 004-2
650.1601.005 650.1624.760 650.1625.761
263/8 263/8 263/8
–/l l/– l/–

stainless steel 1.4305 CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3

PVC 2 x 0.25 PVC 2 x 0.25 PVC 2 x 0.25
– – –

M 18 x 1; 35 mm length M 18 x 1; 35 mm length PEA-T22NR/202-B08S

5 mm (0.20˝ ) 8 mm (0.32˝ )
l/– –/l
NAMUR / A NAMUR / A
KIB-M18EA/ KIN-M18EA/ PEA-T22NR/
005-2 008-2 202-B08S
650.1626.762 650.1627.763 661.2208.012
263/8 263/8
l/– –/l

CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3
PVC 2 x 0.5 PVC 2 x 0.5
– –
Intrinsic safe [EEx ia] II C
Diagram A Diagram B PTB-No.: Ex-93.C.4001
2-channel switching amplifier with fault condition
monitor for short-circuit and wire breakage
230 V* ± 10%, 45–60 Hz
8 V; 12.6 Vmax.; Ri = 1 kΩ
2 x 5 A, 250 V AC, 100 VA normally-closed (NC)
Mounting: TS 35 DIN rail
Temperature range = –25 °C/+50 °C
IP 20/NEMA 1
Input signals NAMUR sensors, variable resistances,
mechanical contacts
* Other voltages on request

157
Programmable
universal switching device

PCS-T75UR/205-D

Main fields of applications With state of the art evaluation electronics 5 potential-free relay contacts are available
PCS-T75UR/205D, BERNSTEIN introduces a as outputs. If required, the evaluation elec-
l Rotational speed monitor new Programmable Control System into tronics can be divided in to 2 functional
l Analogue signal evaluation automation technology that offers the user units, which means the user has two sepa-
l Level and position evaluation a high degree of flexibility and configurati- rate configurations available.
l Switching point evaluation on options.
This innovative feature ensures a high
Main features The PCS is controlled via a menu for appli- degree of flexibility when configuring and
cations that require rotational speed quer- installing. Despite its comprehensive func-
l Programmable Control System (PCS) ies, evaluation of analogue signals, levels or tions of the PCS, the evaluation electronics
l Programming via menu positions, and switching points. The sensor can be operated without the need for
l Teach-in function inputs are wired to standard sensors, previous experience.
l Universal NAMUR sensors or analogue sensors with
l Easy to operate current or voltage output from 5/24 V.

In addition to the menu controlled pro-

gramming function, the PCS can learn pre-
defined switching points or rotational
speeds (teach-in function). This enables the
user to minimise tolerances when setting
or programming applications.

Wiring diagram

Output Relay:
NO = Normally-Open Contact
NC = Normally-Closed Contact

158
Technical data
Electrical data
Supply voltages 85–265 V AC

Sensors
Sensor voltages 8.2 V DC (NAMUR)
24 V DC (standard sensor)
5 V DC
Relay outputs 5 relay outputs
(divides in to 2 functions) – 4x CO
– 1x NO
– current: 2 A, voltage: 200 V DC, power: 60 W
Input signals NAMUR sensors
PNP/NPN sensors 0…24 V
Analog sensors 0…24 mA, 0…5 V
Auxiliary inputs 1x reset (start-up delay)
Hysteresis programmable 2–20 %
Protection class IP 20/NEMA 1

Mechanical data
Temperature range –20 °C…+70 °C (0 °C…+60 °C legible display)
Enclosure, see-through cover PC black, PC
Connection Rigid 0.2…4 mm2
Flexible 0.2…2.5 mm2
AWG 24-11
Mounting Mounts on to mounting rail according to EN 50 022

Function and programming

Mode Programmable
Mean-value generation
Level or position evaluation
Programming Default by entering the values
Adaptive programming
Visualisation/operator guidance
Start-up override Adjustable from 1 to 100 s
Rotational speed monitoring Programmable from 2 Hz–10 kHz

Dimensions

159
Capacitive sensors

Introduction significant resulting in a long sensing adjustment, non-flush capacitive sensors

Capacitive sensors can sense conducting distance. If a non-conductive target appro- can be mounted in areas where the “Free
and non-conducting materials in solid or aches the switch (>1) there is only a small Zone” is restricted. These sensors are less
liquid form. They have various uses includ- change in the dielectric constant and the sensitive to dust or moisture in the atmos-
ing level control in tanks, as well as detec- rise in capacitance is quite small compared phere than flush-mounting sensors.
tion of container contents on filling and to conductive materials. Correction factors
packaging machinery. Other uses include therefore have to be noted when compa-
positioning and counting of materials ring quoted sensing distances. Flush-mounting sensors have an in-built
within transportation and storage systems, shielding electrode, which is connected to
for example conveyor belts, and steering Correction factors earth. As both electrodes are very near to
mechanisms. each other, the flush-mounting sensors are
Steel or other grounded metals 1.00 especially efficient in sensing different
Typical materials which can be sensed: Surface of water 1.00 dielectrics. However, this makes them more
Solids: Steel 150 x 150 x 1 mm prone to sensing dust or moisture in the
Wood, ceramic, glass, piles of paper, plas- (5.9” x 5.9” x 0.03”) not grounded 0.85 atmosphere.
tic, stone, rubber, ice, non-ferrous materials Marble 150 x 150 x 12.5 mm
and vegetable matter. (5.9” x 5.9” x 0.49”) 0.65 If capacitive sensors are mounted next or
Liquids: Glass 150 x 150 x 7.5 mm opposite to one another they can also
Water, oil, glue and paint. (5.9” x 5.9” x 0.29”) 0.55 influence each other. Flush mounting
Granular: Pile of paper (500 sheets) 0.55 switches are much less sensitive in such
Plastic granules, seed, feed and salt. Pressed wood 150 x 150 x 16 mm applications than non-flush mounting. If
Powder: (5.9” x 5.9” x 0.62”) 0.45 the required sensing distance between sen-
Dyes, soap-powder, sand, cement, fertilizer, Ceramic tile 150 x 150 x 6 mm sors is >2 <8 times the housing diameter
sugar, flour and coffee (5.9” x 5.9” x 0.23”) 0.25 an application test is necessary. It is not
PVC 150 x 150 x 4 mm necessary to test applications where the
Technical specifications (5.9” x 5.9” x 0.15”) 0.15 sensing distances between sensors is >8
The function of a capacitive sensor is to times the housing diameter.
signal a change of state based on the eval-
uation of the stimulus from an electrical The factors given are average values, as the
field. Capacitive sensors detect metallic or sensing distance is influenced by individual
non-metallic objects by measuring the features of the target and the environment
change in capacitance, which is dependent in which the sensor is installed. In all appli-
upon the dielectric constant of the material cations, it is important to note the influen-
being sensed, its mass, size and distance ce of humidity around the switch and tar-
from the active surface of the sensor. get. High moisture content, in wood or
paper for example, increases sensing
Capacitive sensors are built around an RC- distance.
oscillator. Due to the influence of the tar-
get and the change in capacitance, the Capacitive switches are available for:
amplification becomes stronger causing the – Flush mounting or shielded
oscillator to oscillate. The exact start of – Non-flush mounting or non-shielded.
that function can be adjusted by means of
a potentiometer, which controls the feed-
back to the oscillator. The sensing distance
of a certain material can therefore be Free
space
adjusted by the potentiometer. The output Flush
signal of the oscillator feeds another Non-flush
amplifier, which in turn feeds the signal to
the output stage.
Around a non-flush mounting capacitive
If a conductive target approaches the active switch a free zone must be made available
face of the switch the target becomes a so no influencing material can affect the
capacitor. The change in capacitance is sensor. Because of the sensitivity control

160
Specifications

Active-face Effective sensing distance: sn Switching frequency

Active-face is the capacitive sensor’s hous- This includes all tolerances of temperature The switching frequency is measured accor-
ing surface where the electrical field emerg- and voltage supply. It has to be between ding to EN 60947-5-2. The standard tar-
es. To ensure correct installation, cylindrical 80% and 120% of the standardised sen- gets with the side length “a” are mounted
housings are mostly front sensing, while rec- sing distance. at intervals of 2 times “a” on a disc which
tangular housings generally have the position does not influence the sensor when the
marked with a line or a cross. Usable sensing distance disc starts rotating. If the on-off signal of
(Working sensing distance). The usable sen- the sensor is shorter than 50 ms the maxi-
Actuation sing distance should be calculated for mum switching frequency of the sensor is
To actuate means to bring the material in applications under the worst circum- reached. For AC sensors the maximum
front of the active face of the capacitive stances. This is calculated to be between switching frequency of the sensor is
sensor so that the output changes. 0-72% of the nominal sensing distance. reached when the on-off time equals half

Sensors
one sine wave.
Standard targets Measuring plate
The standard target is square, 1 mm thick Reference axis Proximity switch
and made from steel (FE 360). 2a

sn/2
a Measuring plate,
su max. su max. + H earthed
Measuring plate Proximity switch sr max. sr max. + H
Active sn sn + H

a
surface sr min. + H
sr min. Low interference
su min. su min. + H material
Disc
a

sa

Direction
of movement Active surface

Switching distance
Temperature range
Proximity The temperature range for sensors is meas-
switch ured according to the EN-DIN at –25 ºC to
The Front face of the square target is iden- +75 ºC. In this range the sensors will work
tical to the diameter of the active face. If with a tolerance of +10%.
the sensing distance were three times
greater than the diameter of the active face, Repeatability Protection class
the target would have to be this size. In This is the accuracy between the first and IP 65
order to ensure accurate sensing distances, second switching, within 8 hours of each IP 67
the target needs to be grounded. The sen- other and with a temperature band of 18
sing distance of a rectangular capacitive ºC to 28 ºC. The maximum difference of Cable
sensor is aligned with a grounded plate the the voltage supply may vary only by 5%. The standard cable has PVC insulation. Sili-
same size as the active face. The difference between both measure- con cable, Polyurethane cable, special sta-
ments may not be more than 10% of the bilised PVC- or PTFE-cable is available upon
Real sensing distance standardised sensing distance. request.
Real sensing distance is the distance be-
tween the target and the active-face when Hysteresis Plug and socket
the sensor switches and gives a change in This is the difference between the switch- For electronic products today the plug and
output, while mounted in a specific on point when approaching the switch and socket are just as important as the cable.
application. the switch-off point when leaving the The Bernstein capacitive proximity switch
switch. The value is given as a percentage es are available with several plug and
Nominal sensing distance: sn of the standardised sensing distance. socket variations.
Nominal sensing distance is the sensing
distance shown without taking into Standards
account tolerances and influences from All sensors are in accordance with
temperature or power supply. Disconnecting Starting point EN 60947-5,2.
point Proximity switch
Standardised sensing distance: sr
Standardised sensing distance is the Direction
of movement Switching distance
distance aligned at 23 ºC +/– 5 ºC. It has Hysteresis
to be between 90% and 110% of the
nominal sensing distance.

161
The way to the right
sensor

Using the selection matrix Important notes

The factors indicated in the table show an
To assist the user in selecting the right Capacitive sensors are able to sense con- expected approximation of the reacting
capacitive sensor for their application, ducting and non-conducting materials in sensitivity, since specific characteristics of
Bernstein developed the selection matrix solid, liquid, granular or powder form. In the target objects (especially cross section,
below. operation however, a number of criteria thickness and moisture content) and the
The colours of the individual fields match must be taken into account. surrounding area (earthing) have a major
those in the product index to allow rapid influence on the sensing distance.
selection of the most suitable sensor (by Switching distance Compensation for most applications can
part number) starting with the most impor- The rated switching distance is shown be made by adjustment of the built-in
tant criteria, switching distance. By not (according to DIN EN 6947-5-2/97) and potentiometer.
using detailed technical descriptions the adjusted on site. The greatest switching
selection is considerably simplified, but our distance is reached with an approaching Free zone
engineers are always available to answer conducting target of a certain size. Non-flush mounting capacitive sensors are
any technical questions. With a non-conducting material, knowled- less sensitive to dust or condensation than
ge of the specific inductive capacity of the flush mounting versions, but a free zone
target is important as the switching must be established around the sensor,
distance will vary by a factor dependent on clear of materials that could influence it.
material and application (see fig. 1 and 2).

Selection matrix – capacitive sensors

Rated sensing Housing

Mounting Supply Output Switching Connection
distance metal/plastic

2 mm M12 flush mounted

M NPN PNP plug cable
M12 10 - 36 V DC N.C. N.O.
non-flush 3L 3L M8 2m
4 mm K
mounted

M18 NPN PNP

5 mm flush mounted 10 - 60 V DC 3L plug
M 3L cable
M18 N.C. N.O. M8
non-flush 10 - 60 20 - 250 NPN PNP AC 2m
8 mm K M12
mounted V DC V AC 3L 3L 2L

M30 NPN PNP

10 mm flush mounted 10 - 60 V DC 3L
M 3L plug cable
M30 N.C. N.O.
non-flush 10 - 60 20 - 250 NPN PNP AC M12 2m
20 mm K mounted V DC V AC 3L 3L 2L

15 mm M32 flush mounted NPN/PNP Comple- N.O./

M prog. 3L plug cable
M32 10 - 60 V DC mentary N.C.
non-flush NPN/PNP AC M12 2m
30 mm K prog. prog.
mounted prog. 3L 2L

15 mm ø 20 non-flush 10 - 60 20 - 250 NPN PNP AC N.C. N.O.

plug cable
K mounted V DC V AC 3L 3L 2L M12 2m

20 mm ø 34 flush mounted 10 - 36 V DC PNP 3L

plug cable
M ø 34 N.C. N.O.
non-flush 10 - 60 20 - 250 NPN PNP AC M12 2m
30 mm K mounted V DC V AC 3L 3L 2L

E 50 N.C.
NPN PNP cable
8 mm 50 x 25 x 10 mm flush mounted 10 - 36 V DC on N.O.
3L 3L 2m
P request

E 68 N.C.
PNP PNP cable
10 mm 68 x 30 x 15 mm flush mounted 10 - 36 V DC on N.O.
3L 3L 2m
P request

15 mm N 44 flush mounted
NPN/PNP N.C./N.O. Terminal
40 x 40 x 120 mm 10 - 60 V DC
non-flush prog. 3L prog. chamber
30 mm P
mounted

162
Flush mounting capacitive sensors have, by Glass 3…14
design, higher sensitivity to a variety of Rubber 2.5…3

(% of the rated switching distance)

materials, so care must be taken to ensure Hard paper 3.5…6
the sensing face is kept free of contamina- Wood 2.5…6.8
tion by dust or moisture. Marble 8.4…14
If capacitive sensors are mounted within a Mineral oil 2.15
distance of 2 - 8 housing diameters of one Epoxy resin 3.3…3.6

Switching distance
another, they can influence each other and Petroleum 2.2
testing under real conditions is strongly Plexiglas 3.6
recommended. The aforementioned adjust- Polyamid 3…8
ment capability however, allows a solution PVC 3.3…4.1
China 4.2…6.5

Sensors
to be found for virtually every application.
Teflon PTFE 2
Air 1 Dielectric Factor ε
Water 80.8
Paper (dry) 2

Fig. 1 Dielectric Factor Fig. 2 Variation of the switching distance

depending on Dielectric Factor ε

Applications
Capacitive proximity sensors are particularly
useful for sensing fill levels through non-
metallic container walls.
Advantage:
The container wall does not have to be
breached and the sensed material will not
come in contact with the sensor. A require-
ment for this application is that the
Dielectric Factor of the target material is
higher than that of the container. Using
the potentiometer the sensitivity of the
sensor is reduced until it responds to the
target medium but not the container wall.
See below for further applications.

Top: insulating glass-production line fitted with Bernstein capacitive sensors

Level monitoring Level control Detection at wood

through non-metallic in paint and processing
containers glue containers

Level control Registration, counting,

for granulate or sorting or control of Tear sensing
feed hoppers conveyor belt systems

Pallet height sensing Position sensing in

e.g. paper continuous processing Level control
in cardboard packaging

163
Standard- 2 mm switching distance 4 mm switching distance
models

M12

flush mounted metal design non-flush mounted plastic design

2 m cable, length = 61.5 mm Plug M8, length = 61.8 mm 2 m cable, length = 61 mm Plug M8, length = 61.3 mm
N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C.
NPN 650.7303.001 650.7103.001 650.7303.004 650.7103.004 650.7319.001 650.7119.001 650.7319.004 650.7119.004
DC
PNP 650.7903.001 650.7703.001 650.7903.004 650.7703.004 650.7919.001 650.7719.001 650.7919.004 650.7719.004

Standard- 5 mm switching distance 8 mm switching distance

models

M18

flush mounted metal design non-flush mounted plastic design

2 m cable, length = 81.7 mm Plug S12, length = 81.7 mm 2 m cable, length = 81 mm Plug M8 (DC) length = 81 mm
Plug S12 (AC)
N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C.
NPN 650.7305.001 650.7105.001 650.7305.004 650.7105.004 650.7321.723 650.7121.722 650.7321.002 650.7121.002
DC
PNP 650.7905.001 650.7705.001 650.7905.004 650.7705.004 650.7921.724 650.7721.001 650.7921.002 650.7721.002
AC 650.8521.001 650.8421.001 650.8521.004 650.8421.004

Standard- 10 mm switching distance 20 mm switching distance

models

M30

flush mounted metal design non-flush mounted plastic design

2 m cable, length = 82 mm Plug S12, length = 82 mm 2 m cable, length = 81 mm Plug S12, length = 81 mm
N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C.
NPN 650.7307.001 650.7107.001 650.7307.004 650.7107.004 650.7323.001 650.7123.001 650.7323.004 650.7123.004
DC
PNP 650.7907.001 650.7707.001 650.7907.004 650.7707.004 650.7923.727 650.7723.001 650.7923.004 650.7723.004
AC 650.8523.001 650.8423.001 650.8523.004 650.8423.004

Standard- 15 mm switching distance 30 mm switching distance

models

M32

flush mounted metal design non-flush mounted plastic design

2 m cable, length = 70 mm Plug S12, length = 70 mm 2 m cable, length = 70 mm Plug S12, length = 70 mm
N.O./N.C. prog. Complementary N.O./N.C. prog. Complementary N.O./N.C. prog. Complementary N.O./N.C. prog. Complementary
NPN/
DC PNP 650.7013.011 650.7013.012 650.7013.015 650.7013.016 650.7013.001 650.7013.002 650.7013.004 650.7013.005
progr.
AC Relais
650.8613.001
Timer

164
Standard- 15 mm switching distance 20 mm switching distance 30 mm switching distance
models

Ø 20
Ø 34

non-flush mounted plastic design flush mounted metal design non flush mounted plstic design
2 m cable Plug M8, 2 m cable, Plug S12, 2 m cable, Plug S12,
length = 81 mm length = 81 mm length = 80.5 mm length = 80.5 mm length = 81 mm length = 81 mm
N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.F. N.O. N.F.

NPN 650.7310.002 650.7110.001 650.7310.004 650.7315.001 650.7115.001 650.7315.004 650.7115.004

DC
PNP 650.7910.001 650.7710.001 650.7910.004 650.7710.004 650.7915.005 650.7915.006 650.7915.001 650.7715.154 650.7915.004 650.7715.004

AC 650.8510.001 650.8410.001 650.8515.001 650.8415.001 650.8515.005 650.8415.004

Standard- 8 mm switching distance 10 mm switching distance 15 mm sw. dist. 30 mm sw. dist.

models

E50

Sensors
(50 x 25 x 10)
E68
(68 x 30 x 15)
flush mounted non-flush
flush mounted metal design flush mounted plastic design plastic design plastic design
N44
2 m cable 2 m cable Terminal chamber
(40 x 40 x120)
N.O. N.O. N.O./N.C. prog. N.O./N.C. prog.
NPN 650.7390.001 650.7356.001
DC 650.7054.001 650.7054.002
PNP 650.7990.001 650.7956.001

Technical data
DC-data
M12 M18 M30 M32 Ø 20 Ø 34 E50 E68 N44
Operating voltage UB 10 - 36 V 10 - 60 V 10 - 60 V 10 - 60 V 10 - 60 V 10 - 36 V 10 - 36 V 10 - 36 V 10 - 60 V
Operating current IB D 200 mA D 200 mA D 400 mA D 400 mA D 400 mA D 400 mA D 200 mA D 200 mA D 400 mA
Switch hysteresis H 20% of rated switching distance
Repeatability R D 10%
Switching frequency F , 25 Hz
Output Sustained short curcuit and overload protection
Reverse voltage protection yes

AC-data
M18 M30 M32 Ø 20 Ø 34 N44
Operating voltage UB 20 - 250 V
Operating current IB D 300 mA (M32 version with relay output 8 A)
Switch hysteresis H 20% rated switching distance
Repeatability R D 10%
Switching frequency F , 15 Hz
Output (M32 version with adjustable off-delay 3-600 s)
Reverse voltage protection yes

general technical data

M12 M18 M30 M32 Ø 20 Ø 34 E50 E68 N44
Rated switching distance
(flush mounted/non-flush mounted) sn 2/4 mm 5/8 mm 10/20 mm 15/30 mm -/15 mm 20/30 mm 8/- mm 10/- mm 15/30 mm
Adjustable switching distance yes with potentiometer (apart from M12 plug version)
Function-/operating voltage indication l/– l/l l/l l/l l/l l/l l/– l/– l/l
Operating temperature -25°C…+70°C
Ingress protection IP 65/67 according to CEI 529/EN 60529

165
Photoelectric sensors

Bernstein photoelectric sensors can be l High operational safety, interference Polarised retroreflective sensors (PS)
divided into four basic types: reflections rarely trigger the receiver
l Detection of very small objects, possible Polarised transmitting beam
l Through-beam by the additional use of lenses or filters
Object with
l Retro-reflective reflective surface
l Diffuse reflective Disadvantage:
l Fibre optic l High installation cost with two devices
having to be mounted, wired and
The specifications of the above mentioned adjusted
sensors are defined in the standard Triple reflector
Receiver not
EN 60947-5-2. Retroreflective sensors (RS) reacting to
reflection of object
The use of these systems depends primarily l
on the application and the operating en- Reflector This device is a special type of retro-reflec-
vironment. On the following pages you can tive sensor. Special linear or circular polar-
find a number of application examples which ised filtering elements (foils) are mounted
demonstrate the advantages and dis- between the reception/transmission
advantages of the individual sensing types. elements and the lens of the sensor.

The division of photoelectric sensors into Advantage:

type/model helps make selection easier, the l Reflections of mirroring or transparent
housing style and material distinguish the Object objects are reliably ignored
different type groups. You will find the
available sensing options of the individual Disadvantage:
type groups in the data section of this Retroreflective sensors have the light source l The sensing distance is shorter compared
catalogue. and the receiver in the same head. The to standard devices without polarisation
light beam emitted by the source is reflect- filters
In general, Bernstein photoelectric sensors ed back to the receiver by a reflector (e.g.
operate using pulsating red or infrared triple reflector or reflective foil). Any break Special types with autocollimation
light. This technology offers the following in the light path is evaluated by the
benefits: receiver and in turn results in a change of Transmission/reception channels use the
the output mode. same lens
l High immunity to ambient light
l Maximum sensing range Advantages: Advantage:
l Reduced temperature, resulting in longer l Easy installation of sensor head and No dead zone with reflectors in short
operational life of transmitter diodes reflector distance ranges
l Reflector can be fixed to a moving tar-
Sensing types get, e.g. conveyor belt installations Diffuse reflective sensors (RT)

Through-beam sensors (ES) Disadvantages:

l Shorter sensing range than a through-
Transmitter Receiver beam system since the light beam has to
travel from the light source to the reflec-
tor and back to the receiver
l High-gloss objects can function as reflec-
tors and may cause malfunctions Object

Note: Diffuse reflective sensors have the light

The sensing ranges specified in the data source and receiver in the same head. The
Object section of this catalogue refer to use with a light emitted by the source is diffusely
triple reflector with a diameter of 83 mm. reflected by the detected object. A part of
Through-beam sensors have the light source Changes in the sensing range due to the this reflection returns to the receiver and
and receiver in separate heads. The light use of other reflector types are available on changes the switching status of the output
emitted by the source is analysed by the request (see page 274). when a certain intensity is exceeded. Thus
receiver. Interruption of the light path the texture and colour of the object’s surfa-
(caused by an object) is evaluated and ce has a great effect on the detection (pre-
results in switching of the output. sence/absence) of objects.

Advantages:
l Long sensing distance; the light beam
needs only to travel in one direction
from the transmitter to the receiver

166
The sensing distances indicated in the data Diffuse reflective sensors with back- Fibre optic controls (LC) for the
section of this catalogue are defined as fol- ground suppression (RH) connection of fibre optics
lows in accordance with EN 60947-5-2.
Sensing distances of up to 400 mm refer to
a 100 x 100 mm white paper test card from
Kodak. For sensing distances of more than Transmitter
component
400 mm, 200 x 200 mm test cards are to
be used. Receiver
component

The reflectivity of the object surface to be

sensed effects the sensing distance, so that
a correction factor or re-emission factor has This type of sensor is a special type of dif- Fibre optic controls with corresponding

Sensors
to be specified. This value may vary from, fuse reflective sensor. It is based on two fibre optics can be used for the through-
less than 10% for matt-black plastic to receptive elements (segmented receivers). beam and diffuse reflective principle, fibre
200% for raw aluminium sheet metal (spe- Using the triangulation principle, reflections optics for sensor applications consist of
cial values on request). Usually we recom- of objects beyond the target do not reach bundled glass fibres or one or more trans-
mend an application-dependent test of the the active surface of the receiver modules. parent plastic fibres. The light falling below
specific object to take ambient conditions, the limit angle of the total reflection forms
such as dust and humidity, into considerati- Advantage: the basis of the light transportation princi-
on for the selection of the optimum sensor. l No background effect on object detec- ple. In the interior of the fibre, which has a
tion (e.g. a faintly reflecting object may higher refraction index than the sleeve, the
Advantages: be detected in front of a high-gloss light is conducted in a zigzag course from
l Easiest installation background) the transmitter on the switching amplifier
l No reflector necessary to the fibre end. The material of the sur-
Disadvantages: rounding sleeve can either be plastic or
Disadvantage: l Short sensing distance metal, depending on the application type,
l Different sensing distances and sensitivi- l Higher technical expense in addition, a wide selection of fibre ends
ty settings are required for different of different types are available to the oper-
objects (surface, colour) Convergent beam sensors, ator.
fixed focus (FF)
Advantages:
l Use in confined areas
Active l Not effected by electrical and magnetic
area
fields
l High temperature range
l Detection of very small objects possible
Focus

Object

The transmission and reception elements of

convergent beam sensors are arranged in a
defined angle to each other. The light cone
of the source and the receiver are joined in
a fixed focal point. This results in the active
zone for the detection of objects being
defined around this focal point.

Advantages:
l Background/foreground suppression
l Defined active zone

Disadvantage:
l Short sensing distances (due to limited
base width of sensor housing)

167
Photoelectric sensors
OT12
OM12
OT12 RT Diffuse reflective sensors
OM12 RT Diffuse reflective sensors

M 12 x 61.5 mm M 12 x 74.5 mm
Sensing type Diffuse reflective sensors Diffuse reflective sensors
Sensing distance / range 60 mm (2.36 ˝ ) 200 mm (7.87 ˝ ) 60 mm (2.36 ˝ ) 200 mm (7.87 ˝ )

Model description OT12 RT-DHTP- OT12 RT-DHTP- OT12 RT-DHTP- OT12 RT-DHTP-
PNP 0060-CL 0200-CL 0060-S 0200-S
LA Part number 655.7930.002 655.7930.001 655.7929.002 655.7929.001
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/4 271/4 271/4 271/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– –/l –/l –/l
Model description – – – –
PNP
DA Part number
Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – –
NPN
DA Part number
Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description – – – –
Transmitter
Part number
Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Voltage range 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC
Short-circuit protection l l l l
Output current max. 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA
Switching frequency max. >100 Hz >100 Hz >100 Hz >100 Hz
LED for output function/supply voltage/diagnostic l/–/– l/–/– –/–/– –/–/–
Adjustable sensitivity – – – –
Timer function – – – –
Diagnostic function – – – –
Temperature range min./max. 0 °C/+70 °C 0 °C/+70 °C 0 °C/+70 °C 0 °C/+70 °C
+32 °F/+158 °F +32 °F/+158 °F +32 °F/+158 °F +32 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4
Screw-clamp termination (page/Pos.)
Cable length (2 m) Cross section (mm2) 3 x 0.14 3 x 0.14 – –
Plug (page/Pos.) – – 280/282; 281/3, 4 280/282; 281/3, 4
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – –

Dimensions
On request transmitter and receiver in a single packing
unit (ES)

All dimensions in mm (inch)

168
M 12 x 66.5 mm M 12 x 74.5 mm M 12 x 76 mm
Diffuse reflective sensors Diffuse reflective sensors Diffuse reflective sensors
60 mm (2.36 ˝ ) 200 mm (7.87 ˝ ) 60 mm (2.36 ˝ ) 200 mm (7.87 ˝ )

OM12 RT-DHTP- OM12 RT-DHTP- OM12 RT-DHTP- OM12 RT-DHTP-

Sensors
0060-CL 0200-CL 0060-S 0200-CLE
655.7928.002 655.7928.004 655.7927.001 655.7928.003
271/4 271/4 271/4 271/4
l/– –/l –/l –/l
– – –

– – –

– – –

10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC

l l l l
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA
>100 Hz >100 Hz >100 Hz >250 Hz
l/–/– l/–/– –/–/– l/–/–
– – – l
– – – –
– – – –
0 °C/+70 °C 0 °C/+70 °C 0 °C/+70 °C 0 °C/+70 °C
+32 °F/+158 °F +32 °F/+158 °F +32 °F/+158 °F +32 °F/+158 °F
IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 65/NEMA 12

3 x 0.14 3 x 0.14 3 x 0.14

– – 280/282; 281/3, 4 –
– – – –

169
The new M18 product line
of photoelectric sensors

Using the selection matrix Variants and Highlights

To assist the user in selecting the right The new photoelectric sensors of the The transmission and reception ele-
photoelectric sensor for their applica- M18 product line are available in three ments of convergent beam sensors are
tion, Bernstein developed the selection different housing materials: arranged in a defined angle to each
matrix below. Plastic, nickel-plated brass and stainless other. This results in an active detec-
The colour of the individual fields steel. tion zone being defined around this
matches those in the product index to The new product line covers all the focal point.
allow rapid selection of the most suit- most popular function types. In addition to the retroreflective sensor
able sensor (by part number) starting Diffuse reflective sensors are available with 3 m fixed range, the product line
with the most important criteria with different sensing distances. One includes a polarized retroreflective
switching distance. By not using variant has a fixed sensing distance of sensor with 2.5 m adjustable range.
detailed technical descriptions the 100 mm, two further diffuse reflective The polarized retroreflective sensor is
selection is considerably simplified, sensors have an adjustable sensing an autocollimation type. The advan-
but our engineers are always available distance of 300 mm and 500 mm. tage of this technology is, that the
to answer any technical questions. An integral part of this product line is transmission and reception channel
also a convergent beam sensor with have the same light emitting surface,
40 mm fixed sensing distance. and therefore no dead detection zone.

Selection matrix photoelectric sensors product line M18

Sensing range-/ Housing

Function type Output Connection
distance material

100 mm fixed
Nickel
Diffuse reflective Stainless plug cable
300 mm adjustable Plastic plated NPN PNP
(R T) steel M12 2m
brass
500 mm adjustable

Convergent beam Nickel

Stainless plug cable
(Fix-Focus) 40 mm fixed Plastic plated NPN PNP
steel M12 2m
(FF) brass

Nickel
Retroreflective Stainless plug cable
3 m fixed Plastic plated NPN PNP
(R S) steel M12 2m
brass

Polarized retroreflective
2.5 m adjustable
(PS) Nickel
Stainless plug cable
Plastic plated NPN PNP
steel M12 2m
Transparent sensor brass
0.8 m adjustable
(PS)

Through-beam Nickel
Stainless plug cable
Transmitter Plastic plated
steel M12 2m
(SE) brass

Set (ES)

Through-beam Nickel
Stainless plug cable
Receiver 8 m fixed Plastic plated NPN PNP
steel M12 2m
(EE) brass

170
Specific for the detection of translu- The photoelectric sensors have either a
cent materials, e.g. film, plastic cans, 2 m cable or an M12 connector, both
bottles, etc., a transparent sensor was versions are available with PNP or NPN
developed. From a technical point of output.
view, a polarized retroreflective sensor To simplify the stockkeeping and the
is equiped with enhanced optical selection of the correct sensor, all
qualities. By the implementation of this sensors have a programmable
technique into a M18 housing, this switching output. The dark activated
variant provides, in conjunction with a output (standard for diffuse reflective
MICROTUBE-reflector (Part.-No. and convergent beam sensors) and the
657.2100.011), an ideal solution to light activated output (standard for
detect objects which could hardly have retroreflective and through-beam

Sensors
been registered previously. sensors) can be chosen by means of a
The M18 product line also includes a programming wire.
through-beam sensor with 8 m range.
The transmitter and the receiver are
available separately or as a set (simple Picture above: Transparent sensor for
stockkeeping). the detection of film
(packaging industry)

Reflectors
The BERNSTEIN reflectors, which con-
sist of several triple mirrors standing
pyramid-shaped, are best suited for
retro and polarised retro applications.
The pyramid-shaped structure of these
triple mirrors allows a variation of the
reflector of up to 30° to the optical
axis (e.g. caused by vibration or slight
movements at the application).
Part number 657.2108.008 657.2109.009
Diameter 17.5 mm 22 mm
The ranges of the retroreflective
sensors refer to the Ø 83 mm type
(657.2107.003); use of reflectors with
smaller surface area will result in a
reduction of the stated sensing
distance.

The reflector diameter should be

selected in terms of the range and the
size of the object to be detected. The
ideal case is, the object should be
larger than the reflector, which is then Part number 657.2110.010 657.2107.003
”shadowed“ completely. Diameter 32 mm 83 mm

Accessory
You find further accessories on page
274 ff.

Part number 657.2100.007 657.2100.011

Dimensions 60 x 41 mm 60 x 51 mm

171
Overview diffuse reflective/retroreflective sensors M 18

Type OT,
Plastic
housing

PA 12-front cap glass lens

2 m cable, length = 56 mm plug M12, length = 65 mm 2 m cable, length = 58.5 mm plug m12, length = 67.5 mm
Sensing range-/distance PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN
RT 100 mm fixed 655.7819.004 655.7219.004 655.7818.002 655.7218.001
RT 300 mm adjustable 655.7819.005 655.7219.005 655.7818.003 655.7218.005
RT 500 mm adjustable 655.7819.006 655.7219.006 655.7818.006 655.7218.006
FF 40 mm fixed 655.8819.001 655.8219.001 655.8818.002 655.8218.001
RS 3 m fixed 655.4819.003 655.4219.002 655.4818.001 655.4218.001
PS 2.5 m adjustable 655.5819.003 655.5219.001 655.5818.001 655.5218.001
PS 0.8 m adjustable 655.5819.004 655.5219.002 655.5818.002 655.5218.002

Type OM,
Nickel plated
brass housing

PA 12-front cap glass lens

2 m cable, length = 56 mm plug M12, length = 65 mm 2 m cable, length = 58.5 mm plug M12, length = 67.5 mm
Sensing range-/distance PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN
RT 100 mm fixed 655.7817.002 655.7217.001 655.7816.001 655.7216.001
RT 300 mm adjustable 655.7817.003 655.7217.002 655.7816.002 655.7216.003
RT 500 mm adjustable 655.7817.004 655.7217.003 655.7816.006 655.7216.004
FF 40 mm fixed 655.8817.001 655.8217.001 655.8816.001 655.8216.001
RS 3 m fixed 655.4817.001 655.4217.001 655.4816.001 655.4216.001
PS 2.5 m adjustable 655.5817.001 655.5217.001 655.5816.001 655.5216.001
PS 0.8 m adjustable 655.5817.002 655.5217.002 655.5816.002 655.5216.002

Type ON,
Stainless
steel housing

PA 12-front cap glass lens

2 m cable, length = 56 mm plug M12, length = 65 mm 2 m cable, length = 58.5 mm plug m12, length = 67.5 mm
Sensing range-/distance PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN
RT 100 mm fixed 655.7822.001 655.7222.001 655.7821.001 655.7221.001
RT 300 mm adjustable 655.7822.002 655.7222.002 655.7821.002 655.7221.002
RT 500 mm adjustable 655.7822.003 655.7222.003 655.7821.003 655.7221.003
FF 40 mm fixed 655.8822.001 655.8222.001 655.8821.001 655.8221.001
RS 3 m fixed 655.4822.001 655.4222.001 655.4821.001 655.4221.001
PS 2.5 m adjustable 655.5822.001 655.5222.001 655.5821.001 655.5221.001
PS 0.8 m adjustable 655.5822.002 655.5222.002 655.5821.002 655.5221.002

172
Overview through-beam sensors M 18

Type OT,
Plastic
housing

Receiver Set
2 m cable, length = 56 mm plug M12, length = 65 mm 2 m cable, length = 56 mm plug M12, length = 65 mm
Sensing-/distance PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN
8m 655.1819.001 655.1219.002 655.1818.001 655.1218.001 655.1819.101 655.1219.102 655.1818.101 655.1218.101
Transmitter
655.1019.001 655.1018.001

Sensors
Type OM,
Nickel plated
brass housing

Receiver Set
2 m cable, length = 56 mm plug M12, length = 65 mm 2 m cable, length = 56 mm plug M12, length = 65 mm
Sensing range-/distance PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN
8m 655.1817.001 655.1217.001 655.1816.001 655.1216.001 655.1817.101 655.1217.101 655.1816.101 655.1216.101
Transmitter
655.1017.001 655.1016.001

Type ON,
Stainless steel
housing

Receiver Set
2 m cable, length = 56 mm plug M12, length = 65 mm 2 m cable, length = 56 mm plug M12, length = 65 mm
Sensing range-/distance PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN
8m 655.1822.001 655.1222.001 655.1821.001 655.1221.001 655.1822.101 655.1222.101 655.1821.101 655.1221.101
Transmitter
655.1022.001 655.1021.001

General data

Operating voltage UB 10–36 V DC Ambient light resistance 10 kLux

Max. switching current I 200 mA Operating temperature -20°C…+70°C
Switch hysteresis H ≤ 15% Ingress protection IP67
Repeatability R ≤ 10% Protection class II, protective insulation
Switching frequency f 500 Hz Cable PVC 0.34 mm2
Output Voltage reversal protection, short-circuit protection Housing material (Type) PBT(OT18), Nickel plated brass (OM18), 1.4305 (ON18)
light-/dark activated programmable

173
Photoelectric sensors

Type OZ20 – stainless steel

The photoelectric range has been further Many different functional types are
extended by the housing OZ20. available.

A smooth stainless steel barrel with a The sensors are connected via 2 m fixed
20 mm diameter that has been specially cable or an M 12 plug.
designed for use in hygienic areas. The
food industry requires that installations and
components are easy to clean. The smooth
barrel form offers bacteria no hiding
places.

Overview design OZ20

Design OZ, stainless steel housing Ø 20 mm, 2 m cable

Function type, detection range Part number Designation
Sensor, 100 mm fixed 655.7800.001 OZ20RT-DPTP-0100-CL
Sensor, 300 mm adjustable 655.7800.003 OZ20RT-DPTP-0300-CLE
Sensor, 500 mm adjustable 655.7800.005 OZ20RT-DPTP-0500-CLE
Fix-focus, 40 mm fixed 655.8800.001 OZ20FF-DPTP-0040-CL
Retroflective beam, 3 m fixed 655.4800.001 OZ20RS-DPTP-03.0-CL
Pole filter beam, 2.5 m adjustable 655.5800.001 OZ20PS-DPTP-02.5-CLE
Transparent sensor, 0.8 m adjustable 655.5800.003 OZ20PS-DPTP-0800-CLE
Transmitter, 8 m 655.1000.002 OZ20SE-DOOS-08.0-CC
Receiver, 8 m 655.1800.001 OZ20EE-DPTP-08.0-CL

Design OZ, stainless steel housing Ø 20 mm, plug M12

Function type, detection range Part number Designation
Sensor, 100 mm fixed 655.7800.002 OZ20RT-DPTP-0100-SL
Sensor, 300 mm adjustable 655.7800.004 OZ20RT-DPTP-0300-SLE
Sensor, 500 mm adjustable 655.7800.006 OZ20RT-DPTP-0500-SLE
Fix-focus, 40 mm fixed 655.8800.002 OZ20FF-DPTP-0040-SL
Retroflective beam, 3 m fixed 655.4800.002 OZ20RS-DPTP-03.0-SL
Pole filter beam, 2.5 m adjustable 655.5800.002 OZ20PS-DPTP-02.5-SLE
Transparent sensor, 0.8 m adjustable 655.5800.004 OZ20PS-DPTP-0800-SLE
Transmitter, 8 m 655.1000.001 OZ20SE-DOOS-08.0-SC
Receiver, 8 m 655.1800.002 OZ20EE-DPTP-08.0-SL

174
Photoelectric sensors

Analog output sensors

Bernstein has extended its M 18 The sensor sets a new amplification, by The new diffuse-reflective sensor with
photoelectric range through a diffuse- means of a brief connection to the positive analog output is available in the following

Sensors
reflective sensor with an analog output. operating voltage (0.1 - 10 s). Parameters housing variants:
Suitable for sensing distances between 30 such as the steepness of the characteristic Threaded design in plastic, brass, stainless
and 200 mm, the required sensing distance curve and direction can be factory pro- steel and in smooth stainless steel barrels
can easily be set within this range via a grammed. with a 20 mm diameter.
programming wire.
The following voltage and current signals An M 12 x 1 plug was chosen for the
are available on the output side: connection.
0-10 V, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.

Overview of analog output sensors

Design OT, plastic housing

Output Part number Designation
0–20 mA 655.7018.001 OT18RT-DPAP-0200-SE
4–20 mA 655.7018.002 OT18RT-DPAP-0200-SE
0–10 V 655.7018.003 OT18RT-DPAP-0200-SE

Design OM, metal housing

Output Part number Designation
0–20 mA 655.7016.001 OM18RT-DPAP-0200-SE
4–20 mA 655.7016.002 OM18RT-DPAP-0200-SE
0–10 V 655.7016.003 OM18RT-DPAP-0200-SE

Design ON, stainless steel housing

Output Part number Designation
0–20 mA 655.7021.001 ON18RT-DPAP-0200-SE
4–20 mA 655.7021.002 ON18RT-DPAP-0200-SE
0–10 V 655.7021.003 ON18RT-DPAP-0200-SE

Design OZ, stainless steel housing Ø 20 mm

Output Part number Designation
0–20 mA 655.7000.002 OZ20RT-DPAP-0200-SE
4–20 mA 655.7000.003 OZ20RT-DPAP-0200-SE
0–10 V 655.7000.004 OZ20RT-DPAP-0200-SE

175
176
Photoelectric sensors
OR05
OR05 ES Through-beam sensors
OR05 PS Polarised retroreflective
sensors
OR05 RT Diffuse reflective sensors
OR05 LC Fibre optic controls

30 x 30 x 15 mm 30 x 30 x 15 mm
Sensing type Through-beam sensors Polarised retroreflective sensors
Sensing distance / range 12 m (39.4 ft) 4 m (13.1 ft)

Model description – – OR05 PS-DHTP-

Sensors
PNP 04.0-3LFE
LA Part number 655.5975.002
Wiring diagram (page/Pos.) 271/6
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/–
Model description OR05 EE-DATP- OR05 EE-DATP- OR05 PS-DATP-
PNP 12.0-3DE 12.0-SDE 04.0-3DE
antivalent Part number 655.1875.003 [ 2 ] 655.1875.004 [ 1 ] 655.5875.001
Wiring diagram (page/Pos.) 271/5 271/5 271/5
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/– l/–
Model description – OR05 SE-DOOS- –
Transmitter 12.0-SC
(Connector) Part number 655.1075.004
Wiring diagram (page/Pos.) 271/3
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/–
Model description OR05 SE-DOOS- – –
Transmitter 12.0-3C
(Cable) Part number 655.1075.003
Wiring diagram (page/Pos.) 271/3
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/–
Voltage range SE: 10–36 V DC EE: 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC
Short-circuit protection – l l
Output current max. – 200 mA 200 mA
Switching frequency max. – >1000 Hz >1000 Hz
LED for output function/supply voltage/diagnostic –/–/– l/–/l l/–/l
Adjustable sensitivity – l l
Timer function – – –
Diagnostic function l – –
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
-13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4
Screw-clamp termination (page/Pos.) – – –
Cable length (2 m) Cross section (mm2) 3 m/4 x 0.14 – 3 m/4 x 0.14
Plug (page/Pos.) – 277 –
Accessories (page/Pos.) 273/1 273/1 273/1; 274

Dimensions
All dimensions in mm (inch)

[ 1 ] Connector
[ 2 ] Cable

177
Photoelectric sensors
OR05
OR05 ES Through-beam sensors
OR05 PS Polarised retroreflective
sensors
OR05 RT Diffuse reflective sensors
OR05 LC Fibre optic controls

30 x 30 x 15 mm 30 x 30 x 15 mm
Sensing type Polarised retroreflective sensors Diffuse reflective sensors
Sensing distance / range 4 m (13.1 ft) 1.2 m (3.94 ft)

Model description OR05 PS-DHTP- OR05 RT-DHTP-

PNP 04.0-SLFE 01.2-3LFE
LA Part number 655.5975.001 655.7975.004
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/6 271/6
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–
Model description – OR05 RT-DATP-
PNP 01.2-3DE
antivalent Part number 655.7875.003
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/5
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/–

Voltage range 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC

Short-circuit protection l l
Output current max. 200 mA 200 mA
Switching frequency max. >1000 Hz >1000 Hz
LED for output function/supply voltage/diagnostic l/–/l l/–/l
Adjustable sensitivity l l
Timer function – –
Diagnostic function – –
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4
Screw-clamp termination (page/Pos.) – –
Cable length (2 m) Cross section (mm2) – 3 m/4 x 0.14
Plug (page/Pos.) 277 –
Accessories (page/Pos.) 273/1, 274 273/1

Dimensions
All dimensions in mm (inch)

178
30 x 30 x 15 mm 30 x 30 x 15 mm 30 x 30 x 15 mm
Diffuse reflective sensors Fibre optic controls Fibre optic controls
1.2 m (3.94 ft) depending on fibre type depending on fibre type

OR05 RT-DHTP- OR05 LC-DHTP- OR05 LC-DHTP-

Sensors
01.2-SLFE 0000-3LFE 0000-SLFE
655.7975.003 655.2975.004 655.2975.003
271/6 271/6 271/6
l/– l/– l/–
– OR05 LC-DATP- –
0000-3DE
655.2875.002
271/5
l/–

10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC

l l l
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA
>1000 Hz >250 Hz >250 Hz
l/–/l l/–/l l/–/l
l l l
– – –
– l l
–25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C –25 °C/+70 °C
–13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F –13 °F/+158 °F
IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4
– – –
– 3 m/4 x 0.14 –
277 – 277
273/1 275 275

179
Photoelectric sensors
OR10
OR10 ES Through-beam sensors

9 x 10 x 82 mm 9 x 10 x 82 mm
Sensing type Through-beam sensors1) Through-beam sensors1)
Sensing distance / range 6 m (19.7 ft) 6 m (19.7 ft)
Light output: lens Light output: lens
Model description – OR10 EE-DDTP- – OR10 EE-DDTP-
PNP 06.0-S 06.0-6
DA Part number 655.1757.001 655.1757.002
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/4 271/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l –/l
Model description OR10 SE-DOOS – OR10 SE-DOOS- –
Transmitter 06.0-SC 06.0-6C
Part number 655.1057.001 655.1057.002
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/3 271/3
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– –/l

Voltage range SE: 10–36 V DC EE: 10–36 V DC SE: 10–36 V DC EE: 10–36 V DC
Short-circuit protection – l – l
Output current max. – 200 mA – 200 mA
Switching frequency max. – >100 Hz – >100 Hz
LED for output function/supply voltage/diagnostic –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/–
Adjustable sensitivity – – – –
Timer function – – – –
Diagnostic function l – l –
Temperature range min./max. –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C
+23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4
Screw-clamp termination (page/Pos.) – – – –
Cable length (2 m) Cross section (mm2) – – 3 x 0.14 3 x 0.14
Plug (page/Pos.) 276/1, 2 276/1, 2 – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – –

Dimensions

) On request transmitter and receiver in a single

1

packing unit (ES)

Installation accessories on request:

l Adhesive mounting
l Screw mounting
l Single-hole mounting

NPN or LA on request

All dimensions in mm (inch)

180
9 x 10 x 82 mm
Through-beam sensors1)
6 m (19.7 ft)
Light output: plane
– OR10 EE-DDTP-

Sensors
06.0-S
655.1757.003
271/4
l/–
OR10 SE-DOOS- –
06.0-SC
655.1057.003
271/3
l/–

SE: 10–36 V DC EE: 10–36 V DC

– l
– 200 mA
– >100 Hz
–/–/– –/–/–
– –
– –
l –
–5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C
+23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F
IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4
– –
– –
276/1, 2 276/1, 2
– –

181
Photoelectric sensors
OR12
OR12 ES Through-beam sensors
OR12 ES Through-beam sensors
with reduced interior beam
OR12 RS Retroreflective sensors
OR12 RT Diffuse reflective sensors

12 x 12 x 55 mm 12 x 12 x 55 mm
Sensing type Through-beam sensors Throug-beam sensors
Sensing distance / range 6 m (19.7 ft)2) 1 m (3.28 ft)

Model description – OR12-EE-DHTP- – OR12 EE-DHTP-

PNP 06.0-SL 01.0-SL
LA Part number 655.1955.001 655.1955.002
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/4 271/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– –/l
Model description OR12 EE-DDTP- OR12-EE-DDTP- OR12 EE-DDTP OR12 EE-DDTP
PNP 06.0-SL 06.0-SLE 01.0-SL 01.0-SLE
DA Part number 655.1755.001 655.1755.003 655.1755.002 655.1755.0043)
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/4 271/4 271/4 271/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– –/l l/– –/l
Model description OR12 SE-DOOS- [2] – OR12 SE-DOOS- [2] –
[1] NPN 06.0-SVC 01.0-SVC
LA Part number 655.1055.002 655.1055.003
[2] Transmitter Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/3 271/3
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–
Model description – OR12-EE-DDTN- – OR12 EE-DDTN
NPN 06.0-SL 01.0-SL
DA Part number 655.1155.001 655.1155.002
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/7 271/7
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l –/l
Voltage range SE: 10–36 V DC EE: 10–36 V DC SE: 10–36 V DC EE: 10–36 V DC
Short-circuit protection – l – l
Output current max. – 200 mA – 200 mA
Switching frequency max. – >100 Hz – >100 Hz
LED for output function/supply voltage/diagnostic –/l/– l/–/– –/l/– l/–/–
Adjustable sensitivity – – – –
Timer function – – – –
Diagnostic function l – l –
Temperature range min./max. –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C
+23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
Screw-clamp termination (page/Pos.) – – – –
Cable length (2 m) Cross section (mm2) – – – –
Plug (page/Pos.) 276/1, 2; 278 276/1, 2; 278 276/1, 2; 278 276/1, 2; 278
Accessories (page/Pos.) – 273/5 273/5 273/5

Dimensions

) Range 10 m and 60 m LASER on request

2

) Adjustable sensitivity
3

All dimensions in mm (inch)

182
12 x 12 x 65 mm 12 x 12 x 60 mm 12 x 12 x 65 mm
Retroreflective sensors Diffuse reflective sensors Diffuse reflective sensors
4 m (13.1 ft) 200 mm (7.87 ˝ ) 1.2 m (3.94 ft)

OR12 RS-DHTP- OR12 RT-DHTP- OR12 RT-DHTP-

Sensors
04.0-SL 0200-SLE 01.2-SLE
655.4955.001 655.7955.001 655.7955.002
271/4 271/4 271/4
–/l l/– l/–
OR12 RS-DDTP- OR12 RT-DDTP- OR12 RT-DDTP-
04.0-SL 0200-SLE 01.2-SLE
655.4755.001 655.7755.001 655.7755.002
271/4 271/4 271/4
l/– –/l –/l
OR12 RS-DHTN- [1] OR12 RT-DHTN- [1] OR12 RT-DHTN- [1]
04.0-SL 0200-SLE 01.2-SLE
655.4355.001 655.7355.001 655.7355.002
271/7 271/7 271/7
–/l –/l –/l
OR12 RS-DDTN- OR12 RT-DDTN- OR12 RT-DDTN-
04.0-SL 0200-SLE 01.2-SLE
655.4155.001 655.7155.001 655.7155.002
271/7 271/7 271/7
–/l –/l –/l
10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC
l l l
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA
>100 Hz >100 Hz >100 Hz
l/–/– l/–/– l/–/–
– l l
– – –
– – –
–5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C
+23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F
IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
– – –
– – –
276/1, 2; 278 276/1, 2; 278 276/1, 2; 278
273/5, 274 273/5 273/5

183
Photoelectric sensors
OR12
OR12 ES Laser-through-beam sensors
OR12 FF Convergent beam sensor
(Fixed-Focus)

12 x 12 x 55 mm 12 x 12 x 65 mm
Sensing type Laser-through-beam sensors Convergent beam sensor (Fixed-Focus)
Sensing distance / range 60 m (197 ft) 50 mm

Model description – OR12-EE-DDTP- –

PNP 60.0-SL
DA Part number 655.1755.005
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) –
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l
Model description OR12 FF-DHTP-0050-SL
PNP
LA Part number 655.8955.001
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/–
Model description OR12 SE-DOOS-
Transmitter 60.0-SVC
Part number 655.1055.004
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) –
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l

Voltage range SE: 10–36 V DC EE: 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC

Short-circuit protection – l l
Output current max. – 55 mA 200 mA
Switching frequency max. – >1000 Hz >100 Hz
LED for output function/supply voltage/diagnostic –/l/– l/–/– l/–/–
Adjustable sensitivity – – –
Timer function – – –
Diagnostic function l – –
Temperature range min./max. –10 °C/+50 °C –10 °C/+50 °C –5 °C/+70 °C
+14 °F/+122 °F +14 °F/+122 °F –
Protection type IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
Screw-clamp termination (page/Pos.) – – –
Cable length (2 m) Cross section (mm2) – – –
Plug (page/Pos.) 276/1, 2; 278 276/1, 2; 278 276/1, 2; 278
Accessories (page/Pos.) 273/5 273/5 273/5

Dimensions

All dimensions in mm (inch)

184
185
Sensors
Photoelectric sensors
OR17
Multinorm

OR17 ES Through-beam sensors

OR17 RT Diffuse reflective sensors
OR17 PS Polarised retroreflective
sensors

120 x 41.5 x 41.5 mm 120 x 41.5 x 41.5 mm

Sensing type Through-beam sensors Diffuse reflective sensors
Sensing distance / range 25 m (82.0 ft) 500 mm (19.7 ˝ )

Model description – OR17 EE-DPTU- OR17 RT-DPTU- –

PNP/NPN 1) 25.0-AHE 0500-AHE4)
Changeover switch Part number 655.1860.001 655.7060.001
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 272/9 272/9
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l l/–
Model description – – – OR17 RT-DPTP-
PNP 0500-AGEC
selectable Part number 655.7860.001
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 272/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/–
Model description – – – –
NPN
selectable Part number
Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description OR17 SE-DOOS- – – –
Transmitter 25.0-AVC
Part number 655.1060.001
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 272/4
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l
Voltage range SE: 10–60 V DC EE: 10–60 V DC 10–60 V DC 10–60 V DC
Short-circuit protection – l l l
Output current max. – 400 mA 400 mA 400 mA/50 mA2)
Switching frequency max. – >50 Hz >50 Hz >50 Hz
LED for output function/supply voltage/diagnostic –/l/– l/l/– l/l/– l/l/l3)
Adjustable sensitivity – l l l
Timer function – – – –
Diagnostic function l – – l
Temperature range min./max. 0 °C/+70 °C 0 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C
+32 °F/+158 °F +32 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
Screw-clamp termination (page/Pos.) 272/4 272/9 272/9 272/4
Cable length (2 m) Cross section (mm2) – – – –
Plug (page/Pos.) – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) – – – –

Dimensions
1
) Two integrated DIP switches allow to select between
light or dark activation (LA/DA) and between
NPN or PNP
2
) 50 mA output current for activated diagnostic signal
3
) Red LED flashes in unsafe operation mode (e.g.
maladjustment); diagnosis output (see 2) is static

All dimensions in mm (inch)

186
120 x 41.5 x 41.5 mm 120 x 41.5 x 41.5 mm
Diffuse reflective sensors Polarised retroreflective sensors
2 m (6.56 ft) 8 m (26.2 ft)

OR17 RT-DPTU- – OR17 PS-DPTU- –

Sensors
02.0-AHE 08.0-AHE
655.7060.002 655.5060.001
272/9 272/9
l/– l/–
– OR17 RT-DPTP- – OR17 PS-DPTP-
02.0-AGEC 08.0-AGEC
655.7860.002 655.5860.001
272/4 272/4
l/– –/l
– – – –

– – – –

10–60 V DC 10–60 V DC 10–60 V DC 10–60 V DC

l l l l
400 mA 400 mA/50 mA2) 400 mA 400 mA/50 mA2)
>50 Hz >50 Hz >50 Hz >50 Hz
l/l/– l/l/l3) l/l/– l/l/l3)
l l l l
– – – –
– l – l
–5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C
+23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F +23 °F/+158 °F
IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
272/9 272/4 272/9 272/4
– – – –
– – – –
– – 274 274

187
Photoelectric sensors
OR20
DC types

OR20 ES Through-beam sensors

OR20 RS Retroreflective sensors
OR20 PS Polarised retroreflective
sensors
OR20 RT Diffuse reflective sensors
OR20 RH Diffuse reflective sensors
with background
suppression

88 x 63 x 24 mm 88 x 63 x 24 mm
Sensing type Through-beam sensors Retroreflective sensors
Sensing distance / range 20 m (65.6 ft) 8 m (26.2 ft)

Model description – OR20 EE-DPTP- OR20 RS-DPTP-

PNP 20.0-ALET 08.0-ALET
selectable Part number 655.1886.003 655.4886.001
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 272/5 272/5
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–
Model description – – –
NPN
selectable Part number
Wiring diagram (page/pos.)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order
Model description OR20 SE-DOOS- – –
Transmitter 20.0-AV
Part number 655.1086.003
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 272/1
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/–

Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order

Voltage range SE: 10–36 V DC EE: 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC
Short-circuit protection – l l
Output current max. – 200 mA 200 mA
Switching frequency max. – >100 Hz >100 Hz
LED for output function/supply voltage/diagnostic –/l/– l/–/– l/–/–
Adjustable sensitivity – l l
Timer function – l l
Diagnostic function – – –
Temperature range min./max. –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C
–4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
Screw-clamp termination (page/Pos.) 272/1 272/5 272/5
Cable length (2 m) Cross section (mm2) – – –
Plug (page/Pos.) – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) 273/2, 3 273/2, 3 273/2, 3; 274

Dimensions

All dimensions in mm (inch)

188
88 x 63 x 24 mm 88 x 63 x 24 mm 88 x 63 x 24 mm
Polarised retroreflective sensors Diffuse reflective sensors Background suppression
6 m (19.7 ft) 600 mm (1.97 ft) 1.5 m (4.92 ft) 400 mm (1.31 ft)

OR20 PS-DPTP- OR20 RT-DPTP- OR20 RT-DPTP- OR20 RH-DPTP-

Sensors
06.0-ALET 0600-ALET 01.5-ALET 0400-ALET
655.5886.001 655.7886.001 655.7886.003 655.8886.002
272/5 272/5 272/5 272/5
l/– –/l l/– –/l
– – – –

– – – –

10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC 10–36 V DC

l l l l
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA
>100 Hz >100 Hz >100 Hz >100 Hz
l/–/– l/–/– l/–/– l/–/–
l l l l
l l l l
– – – –
–20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C
–4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F
IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
272/5 272/5 272/5 272/5
– – – –
– – – –
273/2, 3; 274 273/2, 3 273/2, 3 273/2, 3

Notes on operation of
OR20 series (DC types)
Housing types:
1 Snap-cover housing
(to be opened with screwdriver)
2 Screw-cap housing
(with M 16-cable gland)

Operating elements
3 Sensitivity potentiometer
4 Time potentiometer
5 Operation-mode micro switch
6 Delay-type micro switch
7 Connection terminals

189
Photoelectric sensors
OR20
AC/DC types

OR20 ES Through-beam sensors

OR20 RS Retroreflective sensors
OR20 PS Polarised retroreflective
sensors
OR20 RT Diffuse reflective sensors
OR20 RH Diffuse reflective sensors
with background
suppression

88 x 63 x 24 mm 88 x 63 x 24 mm
Sensing type Through-beam sensors Retroreflective sensors
Sensing distance / range 20 m (66.2 ft) 8 m (26.2 ft)

Model description OR20 SE-MOOS- – –

20.0-AV
Relay output Part number 655.1086.001
– Contacts: change- Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 272/1
over (1 x) Stor./deliv.: on requ. l/–
– Switching current 3 A Model description – OR20 EE-MAR5- OR20 RS-MAR5-
– Connection com- 20.0-ALET 08.0-ALET
partment cover with Part number 655.1686.003 655.4686.001
quick snap release Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 272/3 272/3
Stor./deliv.: on requ. l/– l/–
Model description OR20 SE-MOOS- – –
20.0-AV
Relay output Part number 655.1086.002
– Contacts: change- Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 272/1
over (1 x) Stor./deliv.: on requ. –/l
– Switching current 3 A Model description – OR20 EE-MAR5- OR20 RS-MAR5-
– Connection com- 20.0-ALET 08.0-ALET
partment cover with Part number 655.1686.004 655.4686.002
screws Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 272/3 272/3
– Cable gland Stor./deliv.: on requ. –/l –/l
Voltage range SE: 12–265 V AC/DC EE: 12–265 V AC/DC 12–265 V AC/DC
Short-circuit protection – – –
Output current max. – 3A 3A
Switching frequency max. – >50 Hz >50 Hz
LED for output function/supply voltage/diagnostic –/l/– l/–/– l/–/–
Adjustable sensitivity – l l
Timer function – l l
Diagnostic function – – –
Temperature range min./max. –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C
–4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
Screw-clamp termination (page/Pos.) 272/1 272/3 272/3
Cable length (2 m) Cross section (mm2) – – –
Plug (page/Pos.) – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) 273/2, 3 273/2, 3 273/2, 3; 274

Dimensions

All dimensions in mm (inch)

190
88 x 63 x 24 mm 88 x 63 x 24 mm 88 x 63 x 24 mm
Polarised retroreflective sensors Diffuse reflective sensors Background suppression
6 m (19.7 ft) 600 mm (1.97 ft) 1.5 m (4.92 ft) 400 mm (1.31 ft)

– – – –

Sensors
OR20 PS-MAR5- OR20 RT-MAR5- OR20 RT-MAR5- OR20 RH-MAR5-
06.0-ALET 0600-ALET 01.5-ALET 0400-ALET
655.5686.001 655.7686.001 655.7686.003 655.8686.002
272/3 272/3 272/3 272/3
l/– l/– l/– l/–
– – – –

OR20 PS-MAR5- – OR20 RT-MAR5- –

06.0-ALET 01.5-ALET
655.5686.002 655.7686.004
272/3 272/3
l/– –/l
12–265 V AC/DC 12–265 V AC/DC 12–265 V AC/DC 12–265 V AC/DC
– – – –
3A 3A 3A 3A
>50 Hz >50 Hz >50 Hz >50 Hz
l/–/– l/–/– l/–/– l/–/–
l l l l
l l l l
– – – –
–20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C
–4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F
IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
272/3 272/3 272/3 272/3
– – – –
– – – –
273/2, 3; 274 273/2, 3 273/2, 3 273/2, 3

Notes on operation of OR20 series

(AC/DC types)
Housing types:
1 Snap-cover housing
(to be opened with screwdriver)
2 Screw-cap housing
(with M 16-cable gland)

Operating elements
3 Sensitivity potentiometer
4 Time potentiometer
5 Delay-type micro switch
6 Connection terminals

191
Photoelectric sensors
OR90
AC/DC types
AC types
DC types

OR90 ES Through-beam sensors

OR90 RS Retroreflective sensors

85 x 50 x 23 mm 85 x 50 x 23 mm
Sensing type Through-beam sensors Retroreflective sensors
Sensing distance / range 12 m (39.4 ft) 8 m (26.2 ft)

Model description – OR90 EE-AAR5- OR90 RS-MAR5- –

Relay output 12.0-4L 08.0-CL
– Contacts: changeover (1 x) Part number 655.1696.001 655.4696.001
– Switching current 3 A Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 272/8 272/8
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–
Model description OR90 SE-AOOS- – – –
Transmitter 12.0-4V
Part number 655.1096.002
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/2
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l
Model description – – – OR90 RS-DATP-
PNP 08.0-CL
antivalent Part number 655.4896.001
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/5
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/–
Model description – – – OR90 RS-DATN-
NPN 08.0-CL
antivalent Part number 655.4296.001
Wiring diagram (page/pos.) 271/8
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l
Voltage range SE: 185–242 V AC EE: 185–242 V AC 12–265 V AC/DC 10–30 V DC
Short-circuit protection – – – l
Output current max. – 3A 3A 200 mA
Switching frequency max. – >50 Hz >80 Hz >100 Hz
LED for output function/supply voltage/diagnostic –/l/– l/–/– l/–/– l/–/–
Adjustable sensitivity – – – –
Timer function – – – –
Diagnostic function – – – –
Temperature range min./max. 0 °C/+70 °C 0 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C
+32 °F/+158 °F +32 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F
Protection type IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12 IP 65/NEMA 12
Screw-clamp termination (page/Pos.) – – – –
Cable length (2 m) Cross section (mm2) 4 m/2 x 0.5 4 m/5 x 0.5 5 x 0.5 4 x 0.5
Plug (page/Pos.) – – – –
Accessories (page/Pos.) 273/4 273/4 273/4; 274 273/4; 274

Dimensions

All dimensions in mm (inch)

Light beam
central line Light beam
central line

deep deep

192
193
Sensors
Opto-electronic safety devices

Light barrier OSG 4

Apropos safety Non-contact transmitters Transistor-output or relay?

Safety at work is an everyday task – The best safety environment is of no value The OSG-4 safety light barriers are
ethically as well as economically. Annually, if it obstructs the personnel. On one hand, available with relay or transistor outputs.
the number of accidents at work resulting it disrupts operating procedures, therefore The safety relays (positive break contacts)
in personal injury (and more than three reducing efficiency; and even worse, opera- are mounted in a robust, industrial enclo-
days sick leave) costs the economy tens of tors are tempted to remove the obstruction sure measuring 54 x 57 mm. These can
millions of Pounds. which means trying to outwit or manipula- then directly trigger the power contactors
te the safety device. of a machine.
This does not have to be the case.
Technological advancement and innovative Safety light barriers operate contact-free. The semi-conductor outputs deliver signals
products now offer a higher level of An encroachment into the protected area which are reliably recognised by a PLC.
protection than was ever previously initiates the stop signal for the machine or
available. plant. The OSG-4 from BERNSTEIN reacts to
an object larger than 14 mm or 29 mm.
Safety light barriers protect machine and This represents finger protection or hand
plant operators from accidents. Reliable protection (just one finger or one hand
and safe, i.e. safe from manipulation, but initiates the stop signal). This means that
also functionally safe. The safety category the safety light barrier initiates the stop
type 4 demands full internal monitoring: So signal so effectively that (bearing in mind
that even when a piece of equipment the machines run-down time) very short
malfunctions, the machine receives a stop distances between the safety light barrier
command and personnel remain protected. and points of hazard are possible.

High resolution, therefore finger protection Despite small dimensions:

is achieved relay outputs are possible

Picture left:
Safety provisions for a production conveyor
at an automobile manufacturer by means
of a safety light barrier

194
Dialogue modules Diagnostics Should material be detected by this device,
LEDs on the OSG-4 indicate the actual The RS 485 interface enables diagnostics it short-circuits ("mutes") the OSG-4 safety
operating function (output active, output and configuration with the aid of a PC. light barrier using a relay controller. The
passive and waiting for start command). detection of, for example, pallets can be
Muting controller achieved by using mechanical limit
It is not always desirable that safety switches or sensors from the BERNSTEIN
equipment simply stops plant or machinery product range.
without pre-conditions. In many cases, it is
often necessary that the machine is The safety light barrier is not in operation
continually supplied with material without during the muting process. This reduction
stopping the production process. to the operators safety must be indicated

Sensors
Depending on certain circumstances, the by a supervised, clearly visible warning light
material may have to pass through the sen- (external short-circuit indication).
sor field of the safety light barrier
(protected field).

The task is therefore to distinguish

between man and material. This distinction
is achieved by the appropriate installation
of either optical, inductive or capacitive
sensors or mechanical limit switches, and
Alphanumeric display and LEDs for clear allowing the muting controller to logically
communication interprets their signals.

An alphanumeric display (four digit) aids in

problem solving, e.g. indicates rising levels
of contamination, helps the technician
when making alignment adjustments (with- Extended features thanks to
out additional tools such as laser-alignment muting controller
equipment) and by helping to identify
faults.

It also serves as a display for entering a

password when making changes to the
settings.

Adjustment buttons
Two push-buttons (protection class IP 65)
allow individual configuration of the safety
equipment (e.g. safety mode with or with-
out restart protection, with or without
– external – safety control).

Safety-relevant settings can be password Pallet with

Conveyor belt

protected. material

A1 A2 B1 B2

Safety light barrier

Saves time: PC diagnostics via RS-485 Distinction between man and material thanks to logical interpretation of sensor
interface information

195
Light barrier OSG 4

Protection at points of hazard... Securing hazardous areas... The OSG-4 safety light barrier can be set to
…the classical application for a safety light …that are to be periodically entered – if operate in this way – however, it doesn't
barrier. The operator has to be protected (contrary to access control) valuable space have to be. Besides automatic activation,
against being able to reach a point of is to be saved. there is also the manual mode. In this case,
danger with his hands – if there is the the device operates with start-up and
possibility of injury. restart protection.
The machine can only be started (when the
A mechanical protection device is not hazard area is free) by pressing a push-but-
always practicable, because it can hinder ton (start-up protection). If the safety light
the production process. barrier halts the machine (because of an
encroachment into the hazard area), then it
Conventional two-handed operation can remains in this status until the hazard area
prevent the operator from causing injury to is free. The device can only be set to
himself during hazardous machine-move- "green" by pressing a push-button (restart
ments. Should he let go of the switches, protection).
the machine stops. Accident prevention is
guaranteed. However, during machine ope- Availability…
ration, the operator cannot carry out any Helps save space by securing hazardous …is an important criterion for industrial
additional tasks. areas production. No company can afford to
have its production stopped for no appa-
Operation can be greatly simplified, if it is rent reason. Modern safety light barriers
sufficient to take the hands out of the With and without restart protection have to be able to cope with disruptive
hazard zone in order to press the start The OSG-4 safety light barrier can be used conditions in the working environment.
button – and the danger point in question with or without restart protection. A light The OSG-4 complies with all EMC regula-
is secured by opto-electronic safety barrier normally works in "automatic tions, is protected against foreign light
equipment. mode", i.e. when just one light beam is sources and can also not be influenced by
interrupted, the output is deactivated. The stroboscope or welding sparks.
device goes to "red". Should the protected
area be given free, the output is reactivat- This is achieved by "double scanning".
ed or the relays are made. The device
"goes to green".

Safety light barrier, 14 mm, Range 0.35…6 m Safety light barrier, 29 mm, Range 0.5…9 m

Type Protected Part Type Protected Part

field height number field height number
Relay-output mm Relay-output mm
Short installation distances thanks to high OSG 4-14 ES-06-0254-DRA 254 654.1323.001 OSG 4-29 ES-09-0509-DRA 509 654.2323.001
resolution OSG 4-14 ES-06-0374-DRA 374 654.1323.002 OSG 4-29 ES-09-0749-DRA 749 654.2323.002
OSG 4-14 ES-06-0494-DRA 494 654.1323.003 OSG 4-29 ES-09-0989-DRA 989 654.2323.003
OSG 4-14 ES-06-0614-DRA 614 654.1323.004 OSG 4-29 ES-09-1229-DRA 1229 654.2323.004
OSG 4-14 ES-06-0734-DRA 734 654.1323.005 OSG 4-29 ES-09-1469-DRA 1469 654.2323.005
OSG 4-14 ES-06-0854-DRA 854 654.1323.006 OSG 4-29 ES-09-1709-DRA 1709 654.2323.006
OSG 4-14 ES-06-0974-DRA 974 654.1323.007 OSG 4-29 ES-09-1949-DRA 1949 654.2323.007
OSG 4-14 ES-06-1094-DRA 1094 654.1323.008
OSG 4-14 ES-06-1214-DRA 1214 654.1323.009
OSG 4-14 ES-06-1334-DRA 1334 654.1323.010
OSG 4-14 ES-06-1454-DRA 1454 654.1323.011
Transistor-output Transistor-output
OSG 4-14 ES-06-0254-DPA 254 654.1321.001 OSG 4-29 ES-09-0509-DPA 509 654.2321.001
OSG 4-14 ES-06-0374-DPA 374 654.1321.002 OSG 4-29 ES-09-0749-DPA 749 654.2321.002
OSG 4-14 ES-06-0494-DPA 494 654.1321.003 OSG 4-29 ES-09-0989-DPA 989 654.2321.003
OSG 4-14 ES-06-0614-DPA 614 654.1321.004 OSG 4-29 ES-09-1229-DPA 1229 654.2321.004
Muting controller OSG 4-14 ES-06-0734-DPA 734 654.1321.005 OSG 4-29 ES-09-1469-DPA 1469 654.2321.005
OSG 4-14 ES-06-0854-DPA 854 654.1321.006 OSG 4-29 ES-09-1709-DPA 1709 654.2321.006
Type Voltage Part number OSG 4-14 ES-06-0974-DPA 974 654.1321.007 OSG 4-29 ES-09-1949-DPA 1949 654.2321.007
Muting controller 24 V DC 656.2322.001 OSG 4-14 ES-06-1094-DPA 1094 654.1321.008
24 V AC 656.2322.002 OSG 4-14 ES-06-1214-DPA 1214 654.1321.009
230 V AC 656.2322.003 OSG 4-14 ES-06-1334-DPA 1334 654.1321.010
115 V AC 656.2322.004 OSG 4-14 ES-06-1454-DPA 1454 654.1321.011

196
Easy mounting Apropos maintenance Protection control, test input,
Attachment brackets are supplied with the All devices from BERNSTEIN are of course alarm-output
safety light barrier. These allow four designed to industrial standards and The receiver unit has an input terminal
possible 90° angles of rotation. Fine adjust- undergo strict quality controls during which can monitor, when required, the
ment of ± 5° possible within these settings. manufacturing. This does not protect the correct operation of both positively-
devices from harsh, everyday industrial breaking power contactors, e.g. if the
A coding screw inserted into the conditions. Therefore, the front cover can contacts weld shut. This function also
attachment bracket ensures that the devi- be replaced without having to undo checks the relay's response time.
ce's alignment is maintained even when a screws, each individual optical module can
new device is fitted. Re-adjustment is not be replaced with ease and the plug-in Although the OSG-4 is a self-checking
necessary. terminal blocks in the connection compart- device, a complete systems check can be

Sensors
ment make device replacement straight initiated through a test-signal from the
An additional method of mounting is forward. sender unit.
provided by the T-slot in the enclosure
which can be used to fit sliding nuts. Alarm outputs signal to remote monitoring
points when the light barrier's light reserve
is too low due to contamination and
cleaning is necessary.

Pluggable terminal blocks enable devices to

be replaced in just seconds

The attachment bracket provides universal

mounting options. Patent: the mechanical
alignment tool for quick replacement of
devices
For maintenance purposes, the optical
modules are easy to dismount
Technical data
OSG 4-14....-DPA OSG 4-14....-DRA OSG 4-29....-DPA OSG 4-29....-DRA
Resolution 14 mm 14 mm 29 mm 29 mm
Protected field, height (dep. on type) 254 ... 1454 mm 254 ... 1454 mm 509 … 1949 mm 509 … 1949 mm
Protected field, width 0,35 ... 6 m 0,35 ... 6 m 0,5 … 9 m 0,5 … 9 m
Outputs transistor relay transistor relay
Output power 1 A / 24 V DC 2 ... 4 A / 24 ... 250 V AC 1 A / 24 V DC 2 ... 4 A / 24 ... 250 V AC
Response time (dep. on type 15–53 ms 28–66 ms 15–38 ms 28–51 ms
Galvanic isolation — l — l
Output status indicator l 1 NC l 1 NC
Operation Start and restart protection
Supply voltage 24 V DC
Contamination signal output l
Protection class Type 4 (self checking)
Protection type IP 65
Test input l
Communication connection RS 485
Connection pluggable terminal block
Cable input Pg 13.5

197
Light barriers

OSS 2
and OSS 4

Opto-electronic protective equipment from The main fields of use for the light barriers The light barriers are divided into two cate-
BERNSTEIN safely and reliably protects the OSS2 and OSS4 are: gories: commensurate with the risk analysis
operator against workplace injuries that of a machine or installation, light barriers
occur in dangerous installations and l Protective equipment for operating type 2 from the OSS2 range or light
systems. personnel on machines and installations barriers type 4 from the OSS4 range may
l Protection of the working area of a be required.
An EC-type examination certificate was robot, entire production lines or of load-
issued for the light barriers by the Experts ing and handling systems, storage and
Committees for Iron and Metal III, the feeding systems, paletting and depalle-
Workers Compensation Board (Berufs- ting, pallet and packaging installations ...
genossenschaft), the Examination and l Protection of entrances
Certification Body (Prüf- und Zertifizie- l Building a safety area
rungsstelle). l Additional protection with light barriers
l Prevention of collisions
Examination basis: Council Directive
98/37/EC, EN 61496-1
issued 02.1998 and
IEC 61496-2
issued 44/208/FDIS
11.1997

OSS2 OSS4
Light barrier type 2 consisting of a Light barrier type 4, consisting of a
control device OSS2, a transmitter OSS2-01SE and transmitter and a receiver, placed together in
a receiver OSS2-01EE one delivery unit OSS4-01ES

Functions
Two independent safety relays with positively driven contacts
Both contacts are open if the IR beam is interrupted.

Two different means of restarting after the IR beam is again intact

Possibility of programming wiring Possibility of selecting a variety of devices
on the control device upon ordering

Automatic restart
The outputs are closed once the IR beam is again intact.

Restart protection
The contacts remain closed after first being turned on as well as whenever the IR beam is intact.
This function is also named 'manual release'.
The release is realised through an external start button.

198
Light barrier
OSS2

Type 2 according to
EN 61496-1
EC-type examination certificate
EN 61496-1/IEC 61496-2
BG Iron and Metal III
No. 01 021

Technical Data
Supply voltage 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC
Output Two safety relays with positively driven contacts, contact rating (resistive load) max 2A, 250 VAC

Sensors
Temperature range Operating temperature –10 °C … +50 °C
Storage temperature –25 °C … +85 °C
Response time ≤ 40 ms
Sensing distance max. 20 m
Protection class Control device IP 20
Transmitter and receiver: plug connection IP 65, cable connection IP 67
Dimensions Control device 75 x 100 x 110 mm
Transmitter and receiver 80 x 89 x 25.4 mm

Designation Part number

Transmitter Cable connection area OSS2-01SE-20-0000-PA 654.6101.001
Transmitter plug M12 OSS2-01SE-20-0000-PS 654.6101.002

Receiver Cable connection area OSS2-01EE-20-0000-PA 654.6201.001

Receiver plug M12 OSS2-01EE-20-0000-PS 654.6201.002

Control devices Control device OSS2 24 VAC 656.2322.006

Control device OSS2 115 VAC 656.2322.008
Control device OSS2 230 VAC 656.2322.007
Control device OSS2 24 VDC 656.2322.005

199
Light barrier
OSS4

Type 4 according to
EN 61496-1
EC type examination certificate
EN 61496-1/IEC 61496-2
BG Iron and Metal III
No. 01 019 and 01 020

Technical data
Supply voltage 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 110 VAC, 230 VAC
Output Two safety relays with positively driven contacts, contact rating (resistive load) max 2A, 250 VAC
Temperature range Operating temperature –20 °C … +50 °C
Storage temperature –25 °C … +85 °C
Response time 15 ms
Sensing distance max. 40 m
Protection class Transmitter and receiver IP 65
Dimensions Transmitter 78 x 104 x 211 mm
Receiver 78 x 104 x 219 mm

Light barrier with

automatic restart
Supply voltage Designation Part number
24 V AC OSS4-01ES-40-AUTO-ARS 654.6313.001
48 V AC OSS4-01ES-40-AUTO-ARS 654.6313.002
110 V AC OSS4-01ES-40-AUTO-ARS 654.6313.003
230 V AC OSS4-01ES-40-AUTO-ARS 654.6313.004
24 V DC OSS4-01ES-40-AUTO-DRS 654.6323.001

Light barrier with

restart protection/manual release
Supply voltage Designation Part number
24 V AC OSS4-01ES-40-MANU-ARS 654.6313.005
48 V AC OSS4-01ES-40-MANU-ARS 654.6313.006
110 V AC OSS4-01ES-40-MANU-ARS 654.6313.007
230 V AC OSS4-01ES-40-MANU-ARS 654.6313.008
24 V DC OSS4-01ES-40-MANU-DRS 654.6323.002

200
201
Sensors
Safety magnetic controller
General table

Designation MÜZ-102/24 MÜZ-102/24-UM MÜZ-102/D24-FL MÜZ-202/D24-FL MÜZ-202/D24-UM

Part number 639.2701.006 639.2701.010 639.2701.306 639.2702.307 639.2702.301
Operating data AC 230 V – – – – –
AC 24 V l l – – –
DC 24 V – – l l l
Division into safety category Safety category I # # # # #
Safety category II # # # # #
Safety category III # # l l l
Safety category IV l l – – –
Approval l BIA l BIA l TÜV l TÜV –
BIA-risk evaluated – – – – l
BE-risk-evaluated – – – – –
Max. connectable Sensor units
1 Sensor (switch) l l l # #
2 Sensor (switch) – – – l l
6 Sensor (switch) – – – – –
Suitable sensor units
Magnet TK-42-CD l l – – –
Switch MAK-4237

Magnet TK-42-CD – – l l l
Switch MAK-4236

Magnet TK-52-CD – – l l l
Switch MAK-5236

Magnet TK-43-CD – – l l l
Switch MAK-5336

l: normal category for the risk level

#: possible application (possibly over-qualifield)

202
MÜZ-602/D24-UM MÜZ-202/024 MÜZ-202/230 MÜZ-602/024 MÜZ-602/230
639.2706.302 639.2702.008 639.2702.007 639.2706.005 639.2706.001
– – l – l
– l – l –
l l – l –
# l l l l
# – – – –
l – – – –
– – – – –
– – – – –
l – – – –
– l l l l

Sensors
# # # # #
# l l # #
l – – l l

– – – – –

l l l l l

l l l l l

l l l l l

203
Safety magnetic controller
According to VDE 0660 Part 209

BIA-certified
System type 4
consists of
magnetic monitoring system (1)
coded magnet (2)
coded magnetic switch (3)

(1) (2) (3)

Model description MÜZ-102/24 TK-42-CD MAK-4237-3

Part number 639.2701.006 640.2042.015 649.0742.008
Max. connectable sensor units 1 – –
Normally-open contact l – –
Combined normally-open/normally-closed contact – – l
Changeover contact – – –

Operating voltage
AC 230 V – – –
AC 24 V l – –
DC 24 V – – –
Input current 0.1 A – –

Switching capacity. safety contact

Switching voltage max. AC
. 250 V – DC 30 V
Switching current max. 8A – –
Switching capacity max. 1500 VA – 250 mW
LED: Status of hazard/switching status –/l – –
Relay: forced disconnection/standard l/– – –

Ambient conditions
Temperature range min./max. 0 °C/+55 °C –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C
32 °F/+131 °F –4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F
Protection type (according to DIN 40050) IP 20 IP 67 IP 67
Humidity class (according to DIN 40040) E – –
Housing material PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6
Attachment option TS 35 (DIN 50022) M4 M4
Connection type: terminal block/cable max. 2.5 mm2/– – –/4 x 0.25 mm2
Connection diagram (page/pos.) 212/1 – –
Sensing distance S on min. – – 3 mm
S off max. – – 14 mm

Approvals BIA/SUVA BIA/SUVA BIA/SUVA

Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm

All sensor units refer to the standard cable length

of 3 m

(1) (2) (3)

204
 (1) (2) (3)

MÜZ-102/24-UM TK-42-CD MAK-4237-3

639.2701.010 640.2042.015 649.0742.008
1 – –

Sensors
– – –
– – l
l – –

– – –
l – –
– – –
0.1 A – –

AC 250 V – DC 30 V
8A – –
1500 VA – 250 mW
–/l – –
l/– – –

0 °C/+55 °C –20 °C/+70 °C –20 °C/+70 °C

32 °F/+131 °F –4 °F/+158 °F –4 °F/+158 °F
IP 20 IP 67 IP 67
E – –
PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6
TS 35 (DIN 50022) M4 M4
max. 2.5 mm2/– – –/4 x 0.25 mm2
212/2 – –
– – 3 mm
– – 14 mm

BIA/SUVA BIA/SUVA BIA/SUVA

l/– l/– l/–

(1) (2) (3)

205
Safety magnetic controller Coded magnetic switches
TÜV certificated

System type 3
according to EN 954-1
in safety category 3

Single fault tolerance S to IEC 60947-5-3

Designation MÜZ-102/D24-FL-DA MÜZ-202/D24-FL 3 m PVC cable

Part number 639.2701.306 639.2702.307 Designation
Max. connectable sensor units 1 2 Part number
safety output, N.O. l l Delivery: ex-stock/built to order
Feedback circuit l –
Data output, N.C. l –

Operating voltage
AC 230 V –* –*
AC 24 V – –
DC 24 V l l
Input current 60 mA 60 mA

Switching capacity, safety contact

Switching voltage max. AC 250 V AC 250 V
Switching current max. 8A 8A
Switching capacity max. 1700 VA 1700 VA
LED: Status of hazard/switching status l/– l/–
LED: supply voltage/on l –
Relay: forced disconnection/standard l/– l/–

Ambient conditions Ambient conditions

Temperature range min./max. 0 °C/+55 °C 0 °C/+55 °C Temperature range min./max.
32 °F/+131 °F 32 °F/+131 °F
Protection class (according to IEC 529, EN 60529) IP 20 IP 20 Protection type (according to IEC 529, EN 60529)
Housing material PC PC Housing material
Attachment option (DIN 50022) TS 35 TS 35 Sensing distance S on min.
Connetion type: terminal block max. 2.5 mm2 max. 2.5 mm2 S off max.
212/7 212/8
Applicable sensor units see page 203 Operating magnet
Designation
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– Part number
To be used MÜZ
Part number

All dimensions in mm All dimensions in mm

* By using separate power supply (housing with same Other versions available on request.
width: 22.5 mm); available on request.

206
MAK-4236-3 MAK-5236-3 MAK-5336-3
649.0642.315 649.0652.316 649.0653.317

Sensors
l/– –/l l/–

–5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C

+23 °F/+158 °C +23 °F/+158 °C +23 °F/+158 °C
IP 67 IP 67 IP 67
PA 6.6 PBT PA 6.6
4 mm 3 mm 3 mm
14 mm 14 mm 14 mm

TK-42-CD TK-52-CD/2 TK-43-CD

640.2042.310 640.2052.311 640.2043.312

639.2701.306 639.2701.306 639.2701.306

639.2702.307 639.2702.307 639.2702.307

207
Safety magnetic controller
BIA risk-evaluated

System type 3
according to EN 954-1
in safety category 3

Designation MÜZ-202/D24-UM MÜZ-602/D24-UM

Part number 639.2702.301 639.2706.302
Max. connectable sensor units 2 6
Normally-open contact – –
Combined normally-open/normally-closed contact – –
Changeover contact l l

Operating voltage
AC 230 V – –
AC 24 V – –
DC 24 V l l
Input current 0.1 A 0.1 A

Switching capacity, safety contact

Switching voltage max. AC
. 250 V AC 250 V
Switching current max. 8A 8A
switching capacity max. 1700 VA 1700 VA
LED: Status of hazard/switching status l/– l/–
Relay: forced disconnection/standard l/– l/–

Ambient conditions
Temperature range min./max. 0 °C/+55 °C 0 °C/+55 °C
32 °F/+131 °F 32 °F/+131 °F
Protection class (according to DIN 40050) IP 20 IP 20
Housing material PA 6.6 PA 6.6
Attachment option (DIN 50022) TS 35 TS 35
Connection type: terminal block max. 2.5 mm2 max. 2.5 mm2
212/3 212/4
Applicable sensor units
Switch MAK-xx36 MAK-xx36
Magnet TK-xx-CD TK-xx-CD
see page 210–211 210–211
Approvals
BIA risk-evaluated in safety category III III
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm

Other versions available on request.

208
Safety magnetic controller
Bernstein risk-evaluated

System type 1
according to EN 954-1
in safety category 1

Designation MÜZ-202/024 MÜZ-202/230 MÜZ-602/024 MÜZ-602/230

Part number 639.2702.008 639.2702.007 639.2706.005 639.2706.001
Max. connectable sensor units 2 2 6 6

Sensors
Nornally-open contact – – – –
Combined normally-open/normally-closed contact – – – –
Changeover contact l l l l

Operating voltage
AC 230 V – l – l
AC 24 V l AC/DC universal – l AC/DC universal –
DC 24 V l – l –
Input current 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A

Switching capacity, safety contact

Switching voltage max. AC
. 250 V/DC 30 V AC 250 V/DC 30 V AC 250 V/DC 30 V AC 250 V/DC 30 V
Switching current max. 15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A
Switching capacity max. 2000 VA/150 W 2000 VA/150 W 2000 VA/150 W 2000 VA/150 W
LED: Status of hazard/switching status l/– l/– l/– l/–
Relay: forced disconnection/standard –/l –/l –/l –/l

Ambient conditions
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+55 °C –25 °C/+55 °C –25 °C/+55 °C –25 °C/+55 °C
–13 °F/+131 °F –13 °F/+131 °F –13 °F/+131 °F –13 °F/+131 °F
Protection class (according to DIN 40050) IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Housing material PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6
Attachment option (DIN 50022) TS 35 TS 35 TS 35 TS 35
Connection type: terminal bloc max. 2.5 mm2 max. 2.5 mm2 max. 2.5 mm2 max. 2.5 mm2
212/5 212/6 212/9 212/10
Applicable sensor units
Switch MAK-xx36 MAK-xx36 MAK-xx36 MAK-xx36
Magnet TK-xx-CD TK-xx-CD TK-xx-CD TK-xx-CD
see page 210–211 210-211 210–211 210–211
Approvals
BE- risk-evaluated in safety category I I I I
Delivery: ex-stock/built to order l/– l/– l/– l/–

All dimensions in mm

Other versions available on request.

209
Coded switches

3 m PVC cable
Designation MAK-4236-3 MAK-5236-3
Part number 649.0642.301 649.0652.306
Delivery: ex-stock/bult to order l/– –/l
6 m PVC cable
Designation MAK-4236-6 MAK-5236-6
Part number 649.0642.302 649.0652.307
Delivery: ex-stock/bult to order l/– –/l
9 m PVC cable
Designation MAK-4236-9 MAK-5236-9
Part number 649.0642.303 649.0652.308
Delivery: ex-stock/bult to order l/– –/l
Plug RD 6.5 mm/4 poles
Designation MAK-4236-STK MAK-5236-STK
Part number 649.0642.305 649.0652.309
Delivery: ex-stock/bult to order l/– –/l
Switching capacity
Operating voltage max. DC 30 V DC 30 V
Switching capacity max. 250 mW 250 mW

Ambient conditions
Temperatur range min./max. –5 °C/+70 °C –5 °C/+70 °C
+23 °F/+158 °C +23 °F/+158 °C
Protection class (according to IEC 529, EN 60529) IP 67 IP 67
Housing material PA 6.6 PA 6.6
Sensing distance S on min. 5 mm 8 mm 3 mm
S off max. 14 mm 16 mm 14 mm

Operating magnet
Designation TK-42-CD TK-42-CD-SN8 TK-52-CD/2
Part number 640.2042.301 640.2042.306 640.2052.307

To be used MÜZ
see page 208–209 208–209 208–209

All dimensions in mm

Other versions available on request.

SW: wrench size

210
Coded switches

3 m PVC cable
Designation MAK-5336-3
Part number 649.0653.310

Sensors
Delivery: ex-stock/bult to order l/–
6 m PVC cable
Designation MAK-5336-6
Part number 649.0653.311
Delivery: ex-stock/bult to order l/–
9 m PVC cable
Designation MAK-5336-9
Part number 649.0653.312
Delivery: ex-stock/bult to order l/–
Plug M 12/4 poles
Designation MAK-5336-STK
Part number 649.0653.313
Delivery: ex-stock/bult to order l/–
Switching capacity
Operating voltage max. DC 30 V
Switching capacity max. 250 mW

Ambient conditions
Temperatur range min./max. –5 °C/+70 °C
+23 °F/+158 °C
Protection class (according to IEC 529, EN 60529) IP 67
Housing material PA 6.6
Sensing distance S on min. 3 mm
S off max. 10 mm

Operating magnet
Designation TK-43-CD
Part number 640.2043.023

To be used MÜZ
see page 208–209

All dimensions in mm

Other versions available on request.

211
Magnetic switch
Monitoring relays
Wiring diagrams

1 MÜZ-102 8 MÜZ-202/Fl

4 MÜZ-602/Um

5 MÜZ-202

2 MÜZ-102/Um 9 MÜZ-602

6 MÜZ-202
Sensor 1 DC 24 V
BU GY BN BK +–

1.1 1.4 80

1.2 1.3 81

K1 K2

60 9.2 7.4

61 9.1 7.3

Data
output

Feedback Safety output

circuit

3 MÜZ-202/Um 7 MÜZ-102/Fl 10 MÜZ-602

212
213
Sensors
Table of contents

Magnetic switches – General features Page 215

Electromechanical magnetic switches Page 216 Electronical magnetic switches Page 226
- Selection aid cylindrical and metric housing Page 218 - Selection aid cylindrical and rectangular housings Page 227
- Selection aid rectangular housing Page 221

Overview
Electromechanical magnetic switches

Cylindrical and Page 219 Rectangular housings Page 222

metric housings

Overview
Electronic magnetic switches

Cylindrical and Page 228 Rectangular housings Page 229

metric housings

Magnets Page 232

Accessories

- Overview magnets Page 234

- Mounting brackets Page 238

- Connecteurs Page 239

Output diagrams Page 223

Dimension diagrams/Magnetic switches Page 230

Model code Page 232

Wiring diagrams Page 224

214
Magnetic switches –
General features

Electromechanical and
electronic models

BERNSTEIN has extended its range of elec-

tromechanical magnetic switches with elec-
tronic versions which operate according to
the Hall and magnetoresistive principle.
Electromechanical and electronic magnetic
switches have special properties which
ensure optimal use in their respective
environments.

Sensors
The electronic versions are characterised by
their improved mechanical characteristics
(high resistance to vibration, shock or
impact) and are absolutely wear-free.
The traditional electromechanical magnetic
switches have a very high operational
reliability thanks to the use of only one
single "active" component (reed contact).
The multi-voltage capability and low
procurement costs allow these switches to
be used in a wide range of applications.
The matrix below highlights the main
features for each principle of function and
helps you to decide on which magnetic
switch to use for your application. Technical features and fields of use

More detailed information about the

technical features and fields of use for the
two principles of function is available in the
following chapters.

Downsizing; Alternative for

large sensing distances Encapsulated design, High switching 2-wire inductive sensors Low-cost versions
with compact design high protection classes frequency multi-voltage versions (3-wire technology)

High vibration Improved pressure Multi-voltage capability Short-circuit proof Plastic,

resistance resistance (AC / DC) and polarity stainless steel
reversal protection and brass enclosures

Electromechanical
magnetic switches

Electronic
magnetic switches

215
Electromechanical
magnetic switches

Bernstein magnetic switches –

the advantages
Actuating
● reliability even under extreme ambient direction

conditions. They are unaffected by dirt,

Detection area
humidity, gases, dust, etc. and operate Body (glass) N, H; Off
or evaporated
completely free from wear and tear
● IP 67 protection On On
● repeatable switching point precision of
contact material FeNi
approx. 0.1 mm paddle: Rhodium

● may be operated from several directions

● can be mounted in any position
● electromechanical magnetic switches Actuating
normally contain only a single direction

component, thus ensuring high reliabili-

ty Detection area
Construction of a reed contact
● easy to mount Off
● long electrical life (> 108 switching cycle
lifetime if contacts are suitably Biasing On On On

protected)
● special types available for extreme Bias magnets energise or hold the bistable
temperature ranges (- 40° C to + 150° C) or normally-closed contact closed, until a
● AC/DC switching stronger magnet with opposite polarity
neutralises the biasing.
Design, function and effect of an
electromechanical magnetic switch
Actuating
The basic elements of this type of switch N.C. bistable “on-off” direction

are the components which change their

behaviour when approaching a magnet.
System: 1 System: 4 Detection area
The contact paddles invert their polarity Off
(north and south pole) under the influence On
N.O. bistable change-over
of a magnetic field. The approach can be
made by either permanent magnets or
electromagnets; the sensitivity of the System: 2
System: 5
switch and the field strength of the
magnet determine the sensing distance. change-over

Correspondingly the approach or moving

System: 3
away of the magnet controls the opening
and closing of the reed contacts. Normally-
closed, normally-open and changeover Actuating
direction
contacts are available in our range of Types of reed contacts
products. bistable
The magnetic switches and their auxiliary Actuation and switching behavior
components (resistors, diodes, triacs,
output stages etc.) are cast in high-quality Switching behavior is principally determin-
isolating material or casting compound to ed by the movement and polarity of the
increase their resistance to vibration and to magnet. The following drawings show
guarantee the protection class up to IP 67. typical characteristics.
For use under extreme ambient conditions Body material and external dimensions are
such as wider temperature ranges, metal specified in the product overview. The
versions (non-corrosive steel, aluminium Switching distances
magnetic switches with reed-contact out-
and brass) as well as standard plastic put are identified by an „A“ in the second
versions are available. Refer to tables of this catalogue to indentify
position of the type code (MA...). which switching magnet may be used and
therefore which minimum switching
Switching frequency distance will be realised.
Up to 200 Hz, depending on the size of
load to be switched (i. e. considerably
faster than relays, contactors, etc.).

216
Temperature ranges
In AC voltage applications, two solutions It should however be as large as possible to
The standard version may be used in may be applied. reduce the discharge current to a permissi-
ble value to ensure reliable contact protec-
environments from – 5° C to + 70° C.
1) Voltage peaks induced by switching off tion. These considerations are also valid for
Special types are also available offering an
inductive loads are suppressed by connec- charging capacitors.
extended operating temperature range of
– 40° C to + 150° C. ting a Voltage Dependent Resistor (VDR) in
parallel to the reed contact.
Electrical life
Cable
To maintain the long operational life of the
electrical contacts, it is important to ensure Cable

Sensors
the maximum supply voltage and maxi- Relay
mum switching current are not exceeded. Relay
The following graphs show the load values
for different contacts.

Guidelines for reed contact protection

The values for current, performance and Suppression of reverse voltage peaks with a VDR
voltage specified in the catalogue are valid
only for resisitive loads. Very often however, 2) A Resistive/Capacitive (RC) element is
these loads will be used in conjunction connected in parallel to the contact, thus
with inductive or capacitive components being in series with the load (vice versa is
when it is advisable to protect the reed also possible).
contacts against voltage and current spikes.
Whilst it is not possible to recommend a
safe contact protection that applies to all
load ranges (each individual case will requi-
re its own evaluation) we would like to
present a general introduction to how reed Relay
contacts may be connected to different
loads for improved operation.

1. Inductive loads

In DC voltage applications, contact protec- Suppression of reverse voltage peaks with RC network Contact protection with resistors
tion is realised relatively easily with the help
of a reverse polarity diode connected in 2. Capacitive loads Using the selection matrix
parallel to the load. The diode polarity is
selected so that it will block the normal In contrast to inductive loads, increased To assist the user in selecting the right
operating voltage applied but will short-cir- making currents can occur in connection sensor for their application, Bernstein
cuit any reverse voltage resulting from the with capacitive loads and lamp loads. If developed the following selection matrix.
switch being opened. (Note: these reverse charged capacitors are switched (including The individual fields match those in the
voltage peaks can significantly exceed the inherent cable capacities), a sudden product index to allow rapid selection of
normal operating voltage.) discharge occurs that can damage and the most suitable sensor starting with the
even weld contacts closed. The intensity of model description. By not using detailed
this discharge depends on the capacity and technical descriptions the selection is con-
length of the cable leading to the switch siderably simplified. The corresponding
but may be decreased by inserting a series output diagrams are shown on page 223.
resistor. The size of the resistor is determin-
Relay ed by the characteristics of the correspon-
ding switching circuit.

Suppression of reverse voltage peaks with a reverse

polarity diode

217
Selection guide
electromechanical
magnetic switches
in threaded and smooth barrels

Model Switching capacity Switching voltage Switching distance Output Housing material Connection
S/Imax. Umax. San

10 VA/0.5 A 250 V 19 mm N.O.

MA-30
plastic PA 6.6 cable
ø 6 x 28 mm 5 VA/0.25 A 100 V 19 mm change over

20 VA/0.5 A 250 V 18 mm N.O.

MA-46
plastic PA 6 cable
ø 6.5 x 40 mm 20 VA/1 A 150 V on request change over

100 VA/3 A 7 mm N.O.

MA-06
60 VA/1 A 250 V 10 mm change over aluminium cable
ø 12 x 86 mm 250 VA/5 A 18 mm bistable

100 VA/3 A 7 mm N.O.

MA-16
250 V stainless steel cable
ø 12 x 86 mm 60 VA/1 A 12 mm change over

100 VA/3 A 7 mm N.O.

MA-26
250 V plastic PA 6 cable
ø 12 x 92 mm 60 VA/1 A 12 mm change over

MA-36
250 VA/5 A 250 V 13 mm bistable plastic PA 6.6 cable
ø 13 x 108 mm

MA-04
80 VA/1 A 250 V 6 mm change over plastic PC plug
ø 15.5 x 145 mm

250 V 18 mm N.O.
MA-08 10 VA/3 A cable
100 V stainless steel
M 8 x 1 x 32 mm (Cable) 13 mm change over
M 8 x 1 x 40 mm (Plug) 20 VA/1 A 30 V plug

10 VA/0.5 A 18 mm N.O.
MA-18
250 V brass, nickel-plated cable
M 12 x 1 x 60 mm 60 VA/1 A 12 mm change over

MA-28
60 VA/1 A 250 V 15 mm N.O. plastic PA cable
M 12 x 1 x 60 mm

MA-23
100 VA/3 A 250 V 6 mm N.O. brass, nickel-plated cable
M 12 x 1 x 80 mm

100 VA/3 A 7 mm N.O.

MA-33
60 VA/1 A 250 V 10 mm change over plastic PA 6 cable
M 12 x 1 x 80 mm 250 VA/5 A 22 mm bistable

MA-17
30 VA/0.5 A 250 V 12 mm change over plastic PA 6 cable
Pg 9 x 60 mm

MA-43
60 VA/1 A 250 V 17 mm change over brass, nickel-plated cable
Pg 9 x 80 mm

218
Overview
electromechanical
magnetic switches
in smooth barrels

Smooth barrels MA-30, Ø 6 x 28 mm MA-46, Ø 6.5 x 39 mm MA-06, Ø 12 x 86 mm

PA 6.6 PA 6 Al

Switching distance (San) 19 mm 19 mm 18 mm on request 7 mm 10 mm 18 mm

Sensors
Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching capacity (diagr.-no.) 10 VA (4) 5 VA (2) 20 VA (7) 20 VA (6) 100 VA (11) 60 VA (9) 250 VA (12)
Max. switching voltage 250 V 100 V 250 V 150 V 250 V 250 V 250 V
Switching function N.O. change over N.O. change over N.O. change over bistable
Special features Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard

Designation MAK-3012-B-1 MAK-3013-X-1 MAK-4612-A-2 MAK-4613-3 MAA-0612-F-1 MAA-0613-L-1 MAA-0614-P-1

Part number 631.1230.571 631.0330.572 631.0246.500 641.0346.336 631.4206.246 631.6306.248 631.0406.554

Smooth barrels MA-06, Ø 12 x 86 mm MA-16, Ø 12 x 86 mm MA-16, Ø 12 x 86 mm

Al Stainless steel 1.4305 Stainless steel 1.4305

Switching distance (San) 16 mm 10 mm 7 mm 12 mm 7 mm

Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching capacity (diagr.-no.) 60 VA (9) 60 VA (9) 100 VA (11) 60 VA (9) 100 VA (11)
Max. switching voltage 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V
Switching function N.O. change over N.O. change over N.O.
Special features Temp. range Temp. range Standard Standard Temp. range
-40 °C…+150 °C -40 °C…+150 °C -40 °C…+150 °C
Designation MAA-0612-NT-4 MAA-0613-LT-1 MAN-1612-F-3 MAN-1613-L-1 MAN-1612-FT-8
Part number 641.0206.399 631.6306.004 631.4216.476 631.6316.259 631.4216.585

Smooth barrels MA-26, Ø 12 x 92 mm MA-36, Ø 13 x 108 mm MA-04, Ø 15.5 x 145 mm

PA 6 PA 6.6 PC

Switching distance (San) 7 mm 12 mm 13 mm 6 mm

Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching capacity (diagr.-no.) 100 VA (11) 60 VA (9) 250 VA (12) 80 VA (10)
Max. switching voltage 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V
Switching function N.O. change over bistable change over
Special features Standard Standard Standard plug
Amphenol
Designation MAK-2612-F-1 MAK-2613-L-1 MAK-3614-P-2 MAK-0413-M-S
Part number 631.4226.423 631.6326.426 631.0436.553 631.7304.313

219
Overview
electromechanical
magnetic switches
in threaded barrels

Threaded barrels MA-08, M8 x 1 x 32 mm MA-08, M8 x 1 x 39 mm MA-18, M12 x 1 x 60 mm

Stainless steel 1.4305 Stainless steel 1.4305 CuZn39Pb3

Switching distance (San) 18 mm 13 mm 13 mm 18 mm 12 mm

Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching capacity (diagr.-no.) 10 VA (4) 10 VA (3) 20 VA (5) 10 VA (4) 60 VA (9)
Max switching voltage 250 V 100 V 30 V 250 V 250 V
Switching function N.O. change over change over N.O. change over
Special features Standard Standard plug Standard Standard
Ø 6.5
Designation MAN-0812-B-1 MAN-0813-Y-1 MAN-0813-STK MAM-1812-B-1 MAM-1813-L-1
Part number 631.1208.596 631.0308.597 631.0308.595 631.1218.294 631.6318.002

Threaded barrels MA-28, M12 x 1 x 60 mm MA-23, M12 x 1 x 80 mm MA-33, M12 x 1 x 80 mm

PA CuZn39Pb3 PA 6

Switching distance (San) 15 mm 7 mm 7 mm 10 mm 22 mm

Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching capacity (diagr.-no.) 60 VA (9) 100 VA (11) 100 VA (11) 60 VA (9) 250 VA (12)
Max switching voltage 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V
Switching function N.O. N.O. N.O. change over bistable
Special features Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard

Designation MAK-2812-L-3 MAM-2312-F-1 MAK-3312-F-2 MAK-3313-L-1 MAK-3314-P-2

Part number 641.6228.260 631.4223.268 631.4233.002 631.6333.005 641.0433.350

Threaded barrels MA-17, Pg 9 x 60 mm MA-43, Pg 9 x 80 mm

PA 6 CuZn39Pb3

Switching distance (San) 12 mm 17 mm

Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching capacity (diagr.-no.) 30 VA (8) 60 VA (9)
Max switching voltage 250 V 250 V
Switching function N.O. change over
Special features Standard Standard

Designation MAK-1713-K-1 MAM-4313-L-2

Part number 631.5317.001 631.6343.544

220
Selection guide
electromechanical
magnetic switches
in rectangular housings

Model Switching capacity Switching voltage Switching distance Output Housing material Connection
S/Imax. Umax. San

10 VA/0.5 A 250 V 10 mm N.O.

MA-11
3 VA/0.25 A 130 V 8 mm change over plastic PA 6.6 cable
28.6 x 6.4 x 18 mm 10 VA/0.5 A 250 V on request bistable

MA-01 10 VA/0.5 A 250 V 10 mm N.O. plastic PA 6.6 cable

45 x 9 x 13 mm

Sensors
10 VA/0.5 A 10 mm N.O.
MA-45 250 V plastic PA 6.6 cable
45 x 9 x 25.5 mm 60 VA/1 A 5 mm change over

10 VA/0.5 A 18 mm N.O.
MA-13 250 V plastic PC cable
68 x 30 x 15 mm 60 VA/1 A 12 mm change over

100 VA/3 A 21 mm N.O.

MA-02 250 V plastic PA 6 cable
30 VA/0.5 A 18 mm change over
80 x 15 x 20 mm 250 VA/5 A on request bistable

100 VA/3 A 21 mm N.O.

MA-12 250 V plastic PA 6.6 cable
24 mm change over
60 VA/1 A
80 x 15 x 20 mm 25 mm bistable

100 VA/3 A 19 mm N.O.

MA-44 250 V plastic PA 6.6 plug
80 VA/1 A 22 mm change over
80 x 15 x 30 mm 250 VA/5 A 20 mm bistable

cable
MA-32 250 VA/5 A 250 V 16 mm bistable plastic PBT
85 x 24 x 26 mm plug

100 VA/3 A 25 mm N.O.

MA-42 250 V plastic PA 6.6 cable
80 VA/1 A 28 mm change over
88 x 13 x 25 mm 250 VA/5 A 5 mm bistable

100 VA/3 A 10 mm N.O.

MA-03 250 V aluminium die casting screw termination
80 VA/1 A 10 mm change over
105 x 25.5 x 58 mm 250 VA/5 A 15 mm bistable

221
Overview
electromechanical
magnetic switches
in rectangular housings

Rectangular housings MA-11, 28.6 x 6.4 x 18 mm MA-01, 45 x 9 x 13 mm MA-45, 45 x 9 x 25.5 mm

PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6

Switching distance (San) 10 mm 8 mm on request 10 mm 10 mm 5 mm

Referring magnet (page) TK-11-11 (229) TK-11-11 (229) TK-11-01 (229) TK-45 (229) TK-45 (229)
Switching capacity (diagr.-no.) 10 VA (4) 3 VA (1) 10 VA (4) 10 VA (4) 10 VA (4) 60 VA (9)
Max. switching voltage 250 V 130 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V
Switching function N.O. change over bistable N.O. N.O. change over
Special features Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard

Designation MAK-1112-B-1 MAK-1113-1.5 MAK-1114-B-5 MAK-0112-B-1 MAK-4512-B-1 MAK-4513-L-1

Part number 631.1211.541 641.0311.368 631.1411.603 631.1201.288 631.1245.539 631.6345.540

Rectangular housings MA-13, 68 x 30 x 15 mm MA-02, 80 x 15 x 20 mm MA-02, 80 x 15 x 20 mm

PC PA 6.6 GDAlSi 12

Switching distance (San) 8 mm 21 mm 18 mm auf Anfrage 10 mm 30 mm

Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) TK-21-02 (229) TK-21-02 (229) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching capacity (diagr.-no.) 60 VA (9) 100 VA (11) 30 VA (8) 250 VA (12) 100 VA (11) 60 VA (9)
Max. switching voltage 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V
Switching function N.O. N.O. change over bistable N.O. change over
Special features Standard Standard Standard Standard Temp. range Temp. range
-40 °C…+150 °C -40 °C…+150 °C
Designation MAK-1313-L-1 MAK-0212-F-1 MAK-0213-K-1 MAK-0214-P-3 MAA-0212-FT-5 MAA-0213-LT-1
Part number 631.6313.004 631.4202.204 631.5302.309 641.9402.397 631.4202.522 631.6302.389

Rectangular housings MA-12, 80 x 15 x 20 mm MA-44, 80 x 15 x 30 mm MA-32, 85 x 24 x 26 mm

PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PBT

Switching distance (San) 21 mm 24 mm 25 mm 19 mm 22 mm 20 mm 16 mm

Referring magnet (page) TK-21-12 (229) TK-21-12 (229) T-62N/S (228) TK-44 (229) TK-44 (229) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching capacity (diagr.-no.) 100 VA (11) 60 VA (9) 60 VA (9) 100 VA (11) 80 VA (10) 250 VA (12) 250 VA (12)
Max. switching voltage 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V
Switching function N.O. change over bistable N.O. change over bistable bistable
Special features Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard

Designation MAK-1212-F-1 MAK-1213-L-1 MAK-1214-L-2 MAK-4412-F-1 MAK-4413-M-1 MAK-4414-P-2 MAK-3214-P-1

Part number 631.4212.217 631.6312.220 641.0412.143 631.4244.536 631.7344.538 631.0444.562 631.0432.598

222
Overview
electromechanical
magnetic switches
in rectangular housings

Rectangular housings MA-32, 85 x 24 x 26 mm MA-42, 88 x 13 x 25 mm MA-03, 100 x 29.5 x 58 mm

PBT PA 6.6 GK-AlSi 12

Switching distance (San) 16 mm 25 mm 22 mm 5 mm 10 mm 10 mm 15 mm

Sensors
Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) TK-42 (229) TK-42 (229) T-62N/S (228) TA-31 (230) TA-31 (230) T-62N/S (228)
Switching capacity (diagr.-no.) 250 VA (12) 100 VA (11) 80 VA (10) 250 VA (12) 100 VA (11) 80 VA (10) 250 VA (12)
Max. switching voltage 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V
Switching function bistable N.O. change over bistable N.O. change over bistable
Special features plug Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
flat plug 4.8
Designation MAK-3214-P-STK 4.8 MAK-4212-F-1 MAK-4213-M-1 MAK-4214-P-2 MAA-0312-F MAA-0313-M MAA-0314-P
Part number 631.0432.590 631.4242.533 631.7342.535 631.0442.564 631.4203.232 631.7303.312 631.9403.532

Technical data standard versions

electromechanical magnetic switches
Switching current see output diagram
Temperature range -5 °C…+70 °C
Protection class (IEC 529, EN 60 529) IP 67
Repeatable accuracy ≈ ± 0.1 mm
Mech. operational life > 3 x 108 switching cycles

Output diagrams
electromechanical magnetic switches

U[V] 3 VA U [V] I [A] U[V] 5 VA U [V] I [A] U[V] 10 VA U [V] I [A] U[V] 10 VA U [V] I [A] U[V] 20 VA U [V] I [A] U[V] 20 VA U [V] I [A]
24 0,125 24 0,125 24 0,417 24 0,417 12 1,000 24 0,833
130 100 100 250 30 150
48 0,063 48 0,104 48 0,208 48 0,208 24 0,833 48 0,417
120 0,025 120 - 120 - 120 0,083 48 - 120 0,167
230 - 230 - 230 - 230 0,043 20 230 -

20 20
12 20
20

0 0,023 0,250 I[A] 0 0,050 0,250 I[A] 0 0,100 0,500 I[A] 0 0,040 0,500 I[A] 0 0,667 1,000 I[A] 0 0,133 1,000 I[A]

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

U[V] 20 VA U [V] I [A] U[V] 30 VA U [V] I [A] U[V] 60 VA U [V] I [A] U[V] 80 VA U [V] I [A] U[V] 100 VA U [V] I [A] U[V] 250 VA U [V] I [A]
24 0,833 24 0,500 24 1,000 24 1,000 24 3,000 24 5,000
250 250 250 250 250 250
48 0,417 48 0,500 48 1,000 48 1,000 48 2,083 48 5,000
120 0,167 120 0,250 120 0,500 120 0,667 120 0,833 120 2,083
230 0,087 230 0,130 230 0,261 230 0,348 230 0,435 230 1,087

80
60 60 50
20 33,333

0 0,080 1,000 I[A] 0 0,120 0,500 I[A] 0 0,240 1,000 I[A] 0 0,320 1,000 I[A] 0 0,400 3,000 I[A] 0 1,000 5,000 I[A]

(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

223
Contact types

Electrical loading capacity

of reed contacts

Contact type
ID Performance Voltage Current
R 3 VA 28 V 0.25 A
X 5 VA 100 V 0.25 A
B 10 VA 250 V 0.5 A
Y 10 VA 100 V 0.5 A
A 20 VA 250 V 0.5 A
K 30 VA 250 V 0.5 A
H 60 VA 250 V 1.0 A
L 60 VA 250 V 1.0 A
M 80 VA 250 V 1.0 A
F 100 VA 250 V 3.0 A
G 250 VA* 250 V 5.0 A*
P 250 VA* 250 V 5.0 A*

* max. making current of 2.5 A for duration of 2 ms;

100 W/VA in permanent operation

Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams

electromechanical magnet switches electronic magnet switches

Normally closed
Normally closed,
PNP

Normally open

Normally open,
Change over PNP/
PNP, bistabil

Bistable Normally closed,

ON-OFF NPN

Bistable Normally open,

Change over
NPN

224
225
Sensors
Electronic
magnetic switches

Electronic magnetic switches

The electronic magnetic switches from

Bernstein are based on two different physi-
cal operating principles: the Hall effect and
magneto-resitive (MR) effect. The sensors
are characterised by their high sensing ran-
ge and the absolute non-sensitivity to
mechanical influences.

MR sensor technology

The prime elements of MR sensors are

magnetic field dependent, ferromagnetic
thin-film resistors. The base material of
such a unit is made from silicon to which
the ferromagnetic film is applied using
electron gun vaporisation.

Fields of use for MR sensors

The main application areas for MR sensors

are in the detection of current, angles, Hall element technology Fields of use for Hall sensors
speed of rotation, position and magnetic
fields. Detecting very low magnetic fields is The Hall effect is defined as the generation Since, when the sensor is suitably installed,
possible with such sensors. An output volt- of a voltage difference on the opposing only the polarity of the Hall voltage or the
age proportional to the magnetic field can sides of a thin gold wafer through which a zero crossing is evaluated, InSb is used as
be electrically conditioned. The ability to current is flowing. This effect also occurs in the sensitive material for these Hall ele-
set the sensitivity or hysteresis allows these some semiconductors when certain ments as its high sensitivity to temperature
sensors to be used in a wide range of geometrical conditions are fulfilled. The is not a problem for this application.
applications. thickness of the wafer must be very small Having designed the Hall elements for
in relation to the length and width. various application areas, they can be used
for:
Signal Hall elements are used in all types of ● measuring induction
controllers as contact-free signal sensors. ● measuring tangential and axial
Since the signal voltage is independent of components of magnetic induction
the speed of motion, and in contrast to ● measurements at low temperatures
inductive systems, targets with a very low ● contact-free signal generation
speed, almost stopped, can be detected. ● replacing inductive sensors (large
sensing distance)

Schematic description of the Hall effect

226
Selection guide
electronic magnetic switches
in smooth and threaded barrels
and rectangular housings

Designation Switching Operating voltage Switching Activity: Output- and Housing material Connection
current Ub distance N = North Pole switching function:
Imax. Sn* S = South Pole N.O.
O = Omnipolar N.C.
bi = bistable

MA-70
200 mA 10…30 V 45 mm O PNP N.O. stainless steel 1.4401 cable
ø 6.5 x 25 mm

N PNP N.O.
MA-61 plastic PPE, red
200 mA 10…30 V 17 mm cable

Sensors
brass, nickel-plated
M 10 x 1 x 40 mm N PNP N.C.

N PNP N.O.
MA-62 17 mm plastic PA 6, red
400 mA 10…30 V N PNP N.C. cable**
brass, nickel-plated
M 12 x 1 x 46 mm 35 mm N/S*** PNP bi

N PNP N.O., NPN N.O.

MA-63 17 mm plastic PA 6, red
400 mA 10…30 V N PNP N.C., NPN N.C. cable**
brass, nickel-plated
M 18 x 1 x 35 mm 35 mm N/S*** PNP bi

MA-80
200 mA 10…30 V 45 mm O PNP N.O. brass, nickel-plated cable
8 x 8 x 40 mm

N PNP N.O.
MA-55 17 mm
400 mA 10…30 V N PNP N.C. brass, nickel-plated cable**
12 x 12 x 55 mm 35 mm N/S*** PNP bi

O PNP N.O. PNP N.O.

MA-52 plastic PA 12,
200 mA 10…30 V 60 mm cable**
black
O PNP N.C. PNP N.C.
26 x 13 x 43 mm

* Switching distance referring to magnet T-62N/S

for magnet T-67N/S approx. 10 % lower switching distance
for magnet T-69N/S approx. 30 % higher switching distance
** Plug on request
*** Activity:
south-pole – switches on
north-pole – switches off

227
Overview
electronic magnetic switches
in smooth and threaded barrels

Smooth and threaded MA-70, Ø 6.5 x 25 mm MA-61, M 10 x 1 x 40 mm MA-61, M 10 x 1 x 40 mm

barrels Stainless steel 1.4401 PPE, red CuZn39Pb3, nickel-plated

Switching distance (San) 45 mm 17 mm 17 mm 17 mm 17 mm

Mag. sensivity 0.5 mT 10 mT 10 mT 10 mT 10 mT
Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching function N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O.
PNP Designation MEN-70OP2-01.2-2/K MEK-61NP1-10.2-2/KL MEK-61NP2-10.2-2/KL MEM-61NP1-10.2-2/KL MEM-61NP2-10.2-2/KL
Part number 637.3270.067 637.1161.040 637.1261.041 637.1161.043 637.1261.042

Smooth and threaded MA-62, M 12 x 1 x 46 mm MA-62, M 12 x 1 x 46 mm

barrels PA 6, red CuZn39Pb3, nickel-plated

Switching distance (San) 17 mm 17 mm 35 mm 17 mm 17 mm 35 mm

Mag. sensivity 10 mT 10 mT 2.5 mT 10 mT 10 mT 2.5 mT
Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching function N.C. N.O. bistable N.C. N.O. bistable
PNP Designation MEK-62NP1-10.4-2/KL MEK-62NP2-10.4-2/KL MEK-62SP4-03.4-2/KL MEM-62NP1-10.4-2/KL MEM-62NP2-10.4-2/KL MEM-62SP4-03.4-2/KL
Part number 637.1162.047 637.1262.048 637.3462.049 637.1162.044 637.1262.045 637.3462.046

Smooth and threaded MA-63, M 18 x 1 x 35 mm MA-63, M 18 x 1 x 35 mm

barrels PA 6, red CuZn39Pb3, nickel-platet

Switching distance (San) 17 mm 17 mm 35 mm 17 mm 17 mm 35 mm

Mag. sensivity 10 mT 10 mT 2.5 mT 10 mT 10 mT 2.5 mT
Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching function N.C. N.O. bistable N.C. N.O. bistable
PNP Designation MEK-63NP1-10.4-2/KL MEK-63NP2-10.4-2/KL MEK-63SP4-03.4-2/KL MEM-63NP1-10.4-2/KL MEM-63NP2-10.4-2/KL MEM-63SP4-10.4-2/KL
Part number 637.1163.053 637.1263.054 637.3463.055 637.1163.050 637.1263.051 637.3463.052
NPN Designation MEK-63NN1-10.4-2/KL MEK-63NN2-10.4-2/KL MEM-63NN1-10.4-2/KL MEM-63NN2-10.4-2/KL
Part number 637.1563.069 637.1663.070 637.1563.071 637.1663.072

228
Overview
electronic magnetic switches
in rectangular housings

Rectangular housings MA-80, 8 x 8 x 40 mm MA-55, 12 x 12 x 55 mm

CuZn39Pb3, nickel-plated CuZn39Pb3, nickelé

Switching distance (San) 45 mm 17 mm 17 mm 35 mm

Sensors
Mag. sensivity 0.5 mT 10 mT 10 mT 2.5 mT
Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching function N.O. N.C. N.O. bistable
PNP Designation MEM-80OP2-01.2-2/K MEM-55NP1-10.4-2/KL MEM-55NP2-10.4-2/KL MEM-55SP4-03.4-2/KL
Part number 637.3280.057 637.1155.058 637.1255.059 637.3455.060

Rectangular housings MA-52, 43 x 26 x 13 mm

PA 12, noir

Switching distance (San) 60 mm 60 mm

Mag. sensivity 0.1 mT 0.1 mT
Referring magnet (page) T-62N/S (228) T-62N/S (228)
Switching function N.C. N.O.
PNP Designation MEK-52OP1-00.4-2/KL MEK-52OP2-00.4-2/KL
Part number 637.3152.075 637.3252.068
NPN Designation MEK-52ON1-00.4-2/KL MEK-52ON2-00.4-2/KL
Part number 637.3552.073 637.3652.074

Technical data standard versions

electronic magnetic switches
MA-70 MA-61 MA-62 MA-63 MA-80 MA-55 MA-52
Operating voltage UB 10 V…30 V 10 V…30 V 10 V…30 V 10 V…30 V 10 V…30 V 10 V…30 V 10 V…30 V
Rated operating current IB ≤ 200mA ≤ 200mA ≤ 400mA ≤ 400mA ≤ 200mA ≤ 200mA ≤ 200mA
Switching frequency ≥ 5000 Hz
Output short-circuit and overload protection
Reverse polarity protection yes
LED for output function l l l l l
Temperature range –20 °C/+70 °C
Protection class IP 65/IP 67
Cable (2 m) l l l l l l l
Plug on request l l l l l

229
Dimension diagrams
magnetic switches

MA-01 Page 222 MA-02 Page 222 MA-03 Page 223 MA-04 Page 219

cable version

plug version

MA-06 Page 219 MA-08 Page 220 MA-11 Page 222 MA-12 Page 222

MA-13 Page 222 MA-16 Page 219 MA-17 Page 220 MA-18 Page 220

MA-23 Page 220 MA-26 Page 219 MA-28 Page 220 MA-30 Page 219

230
 flat plug

Sensors
MA-32 (cable) Page 222 MA-32 (plug) Page 223 MA-33 Page 220 MA-36 Page 219

MA-42 Page 223 MA-43 Page 220 MA-44 Page 222 MA-45 Page 222

active surface

active surface

MA-46 Page 219 MA-52 Page 229 MA-55 Page 229 MA-61 Page 228

active surface

MA-62 Page 228 MA-63 Page 228 MA-70 Page 228 MA-80 Page 229

231
Designation code
Electromechanical
magnetic switches

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

M A K - 0 8 1 2 - D - 1 - S O K
Product group Design Contact specifications Cable length Special features

Product group Contact specifications 11 Dash

1 M = Magnetic switch, general 7 Number of contacts 12 Cable length in metres

e. g. 1 = 1 reed contact e. g. 1 = 1 m cable
2 Output type 2 = 2 reed contacts 2 = 2 m cable
A = reed contact
I = TRIAC etc. etc.
M = mechanical usage
Q = mercury contact 8 Contact function 13 Dash
R = relay 1 = N.C.
2 = N.O. 14-17 Special features
3 = change over
3 Housing material 4 = bistable (on-off) EX = explosion-protected
A = aluminium 5 = bistable (change over) T = temperature resistance
N = stainless steel 6 = N.C., N.O.; from
M = brass, nickel-plated separate contacts – 40 °C to + 150 °C
K = plastic 7 = coded, BG SI = with fine-wire fuse
O = other materials 8 = not used at present VDR = with VDR
9 = not used at present WID = with resistor
Design 0 = other outputs LED = with LED
Diode = with diode
4 Dash 9 Dash SPK = spiral cable
SK = special cable
5/6 Designation description 10 Performance of reed contacts SOK = plug type without head
01 = 45 x 9 x 13 mm (without device
02 = 80 x 15 x 20 mm A = 250 VDC; 0.5 A; 20 VA connector)
03 = 100 x 29.5 x 58 mm B = 250 VDC; 0.5 A; 10 VA SMK = plug type with head
04 = RD 15.5 x 145 mm C = 250 VDC; 0.5 A; 30 VA (without device
06 = RD 12 x 86 mm D = 250 VDC; 0.5 A; 30 VA connector)
08 = M 8 x 1 x 32 mm E = 250 VDC; 1.5 A; 30 VA Pg 11 = Pg11 screw thread
11 = 28.6 x 6.4 x 18 mm F = 250 VDC; 3 A; 100 VA version
12 = 80 x 15 x 20 mm G = 250 VDC; 5 A; 250 VA SSW = downtime connector
13 = 68 x 30 x 15 mm H = 250 VDC; 1 A; 60 VA with relay
16 = RD 12 x 86 mm K = 250 VDC; 0.5 A; 30 VA RZ = time delay
17 = Pg 9 x 60 mm L = 250 VDC; 1 A; 60 VA with relay
18 = M 12 x 1 x 60 mm M = 250 VDC; 1 A; 80 VA RE = relay
23 = M 12 x 1 x 80 mm N = 250 VDC; 1 A; 60 VA 220 V = 220 V version
26 = RD 12 x 92 mm O = 120 VDC; 0.5 A; 10 VA 24 V = 24 V version
28 = M 12 x 1 x 60 mm P = 250 VDC; 5 A; 250 VA
30 = RD 6 x 28 mm R = 28 VDC; 0.25 A; 3 VA
31 = Pg 9 x 100 mm W = 250 VDC; 1.0 A; 60 VA
32 = 85 x 24 x 26 mm X = 100 VDC; 0.25 A; 5 VA
33 = M 12 x 1 x 80 mm Y = 100 VDC; 0.5 A; 10 VA
36 = RD 13 x 108 mm
42 = 88 x 13 x 25 mm TRIAC usage:
43 = Pg 9 x 80 mm K = 24 - 250 VDC; 1.5 A
44 = 80 x 15 x 30 mm a. 300 VA
45 = 45 x 9 x 25.5 mm b. 330 VA
46 = RD 6.5 x 40 mm

232
Designation code
Electronic
magnetic switches

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

M E K - 0 2 N P 2 - 1 0 . 4 - 5 / L
Product group Design Polarity Output Function Magnetic Output Options
sensivity current

Sensors
Product group Polarity 13 Dot

1 M = Magnetic switch, general 7 N = north pole

S = south pole Output current
2 E = electronic type O = omnipolar
(north and south pole) 14 4 = 400 mA
3 Housing material 2 = 200 mA
A = aluminium Bistable types: 0 = other
N = stainless steel The polarity describes the pole, which
M = brass, nickel-plated switches on the device. 15 Dash
K = plastic

4 Dash Output Options

8 P = PNP 16 Cable length in metres

Design N = NPN S = plug
R = Relay
5/6 Designation description G = complementary 17 Dash
52 = 43 x 26 x 13 mm
55 = 12 x 12 x 55 mm 18 L = LED
61 = M 10 x 1 x 40 mm Function K = short circuit proof
62 = M 12 x 1 x 46 mm X = customer specific features
63 = M 18 x 1 x 35 mm 9 1 = N.C. A = 10 - 30 VDC
70 = RD 6.5 x 25 mm 2 = N.O.
80 = 8 x 8 x 40 mm 3 = not used at present
4 = bistable
5 = not used at present
6 = not used at present
7 = not used at present
8 = not used at present
9 = not used at present
0 = other

10 Dash

Magnetic sensivity

11/12 Average value in mT:

e. g. 10 = 10 mT
05 = 5 mT
(the lower the value, the higher
the sensivity)

233
Magnets

1. Hard Ferrite Magnets

Barium and strontium hard ferrites are

economical, reliable components that are
also used in automation, control and
measurement applications. If operated in
higher temperature ranges, the specified
switching distance will decrease by a factor
of 0.2% per 1°C.

Chemical characteristics:
Ferrite magnets are oxide ceramics. They
are made from approx. 80% iron oxide and
20% barium- or strontium oxide. The
magnets are resistant to a large number of
chemicals including solvents, dyes and
weak acids. If strong organic and inorganic
acids (e.g. hydrochloric, sulphuric and
hydrofluoric acid) are used, their resistance
is basically determined by the temperature,
concentration and reaction time of the
medium. In general, the resistance should
first be determined using longterm tests.

Mechanical characteristics:
Due to their ceramic character, ferrites are
brittle and are sensitive to shock and
bending loads.

2. Rare-earth magnets
Mechanical characteristics: Mechanical characteristics:
Permanent magnets that are made from Minor chips may occur if rare-earth Plastic magnets can be submitted at any
samarium cobalt and neodymium iron magnets are submitted to impact stress. time to bending and vibrations without
boron are high-performance and high- They respond very sensitively to vibrations breaking or chipping.
quality components that are especially used and may become demagnetised.
in drive and control engineering.
Application in explosion-hazardous
If used in higher temperature ranges, the surroundings
specified switching distance has to be 3. Plastic magnets
decreased by a factor of 0.02% per 1°C. Magnets must not be handled in explosi-
Plastic-bound permanent magnets have an on-hazardous surroundings since they can
interesting cost-performance ratio and can cause sparks. Grit and chips from rare
Chemical characteristics: be produced in a large variety of shapes. earth magnets are self-igniting and burn
All rare-earth magnets are metallic materials Sprayed magnets are typical composite off with very high temperatures. They
and show the corresponding characteris- materials. The magnetic powder is should therefore only be machined using a
tics associated with these materials (e.g. embedded in thermoplastics (polyamides), lot of water and never in dry conditions
the polished shine immediately after being allowing the most diverse shapes to be since even dried grinding dust can ignite.
processed). The magnets will oxidise in created.
moist surroundings and acidic Strong magnetic fields
environments may decompose them. Chemical characteristics:
Conversely, the magnets are extremely Surface corrosion can rarely be found on Strong magnetic fields can interfere or
resistant to alkaline environments. In water plastic-bound magnets. For this reason, even damage electronic or mechanical
with a pH-value of 7, rare-earth magnets they can be used in most application fields equipment. This includes cardiac
will show only slight surface oxidation but without additional coating. pacemakers. Appropriate safety clearances
otherwise are resistant. are specified in the corresponding manuals
or may be requested from the
manufacturers.

234
Radioactive radiation Applications

Permanent magnets must not be submitted ● counting

to long term radioactive radiation or they ● position indication in lifts
may lose their magnetisation. ● end-stop switches in pneumatic and
hydraulic installations
General stability ● indication on claps, sliders and valves
● conveyors in high-bay shelving
Rare earth magnets must be stored in ● position detection in textile, packaging
dry conditions in order to avoid oxidisation. and meat-cutting machines
They are not suitable for all environments ● run-time and down-time monitoring of

Sensors
since they are also partially soluble. machines
● control of machine tools
Effects on persons ● level control of liquids (see page 240 ff.
for more details)
There are no known side-effects caused by
touching magnet materials.

Magnet shapes

Rectangular, circular and cylindrical

magnets are the most common shapes of
permanent magnets. In addition to these
standard shapes, permanent magnets may
be manufactured in many other shapes. The preferred direction is achieved by sub-
The shape is in most cases designated mitting the magnetic powder to a strong
during the pressing of the magnet, since external magnetic field (coil) during the
any later shaping can only be performed pressing process. As magnets have no pre-
using complex diamond tools. Holes and ferred direction the magnetisation direction
openings can only be inserted in line with and type can be selected freely.
the pressing direction.
Instructions for mounting a magnetic
Magnetisation direction switch-system on ferromagnetic
materials
Magnetisation in alignment with the
formed magnetic crystals is preferred since If magnetic limit switches and their
this allows the highest magnetic values to corresponding magnets are mounted on
be achieved. magnetisable material (Fe, etc.), the
nominal distance may be reduced. To
ensure error-free operation, a minimum
gap of 15 mm between the magnetic
switch and any material which can be
magnetised should be maintained as a
guide value. The same applies to magnets.

235
Accessories
Magnets without
encapsulation

Magnets without encapsulation T-75 T-61N/S T-67N/S T-62N/S

Magnet material Rare-earth Bariumferrite Bariumferrite Bariumferrite

Temperature range -40 °C…+150 °C -40 °C…+150 °C -40 °C…+150 °C -40 °C…+150 °C
(in relation to magnetic switch application) -40 °F…+302 °F -40 °F…+302 °F -40 °F…+302 °F -40 °F…+302 °F
Temperature coefficient 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K
Housing material - - - -
Part number 630.1175.057 630.1261.035 630.1167.054 630.1262.039

All dimensions in mm (inch)

Magnets without encapsulation T-69N/S T-68N T-68S

Magnet material Bariumferrite Bariumferrite Bariumferrite

Temperature range -40 °C…+150 °C -40 °C…+150 °C -40 °C…+150 °C
(in relation to magnetic switch application) -40 °F…+302 °F -40 °F…+302 °F -40 °F…+302 °F
Temperature coefficient 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K
Housing material - - -
Part number 630.1269.031 630.1268.028 630.1368.033

All dimensions in mm (inch)

90° chamfering 90° chamfering

on north pole side on south pole side

236
Accessories
Magnets in plastic
housings

Magnets in plastic housings TK-11-11 TK-11-01 TK-21-02 TK-21-12

Sensors
Magnet material AlNiCo-500 AlNiCo-500 AlNiCo-500 AlNiCo-500
Temperature range -20 °C…+80 °C -20 °C…+80 °C -20 °C…+80 °C -20 °C…+80 °C
(in relation to magnetic switch application) -4 °F…+176 °F -4 °F…+176 °F -4 °F…+176 °F -4 °F…+176 °F
Temperature coefficient 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K
Housing material PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6
Part number 630.2111.047 630.3111.001 630.3121.002 630.2121.030

All dimensions in mm (inch)

Magnets in plastic housings TK-45 TK-42 TK-44 TK-50

Magnet material AlNiCo-500 AlNiCo-500 AlNiCo-500 Bariumferrit

Temperature range -20 °C…+80 °C -20 °C…+80 °C -20 °C…+80 °C -20 °C…+80 °C
(in relation to magnetic switch application) -4 °F…+176 °F -4 °F…+176 °F -4 °F…+176 °F -4 °F…+176 °F
Temperature coefficient 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K
Housing material PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6 PA 6.6
Part number 630.2145.048 630.2142.049 630.2144.050 630.2100.053

All dimensions in mm (inch)

237
Accessories
Magnets in metal housings
Mounting brackets

Magnets in metal housings TA-21-02 TA-31 TA-33

Magnet material AlNiCo-500 AlNiCo-500 Bariumferrit

Temperature range -40 °C…+150 °C -20 °C…+80 °C -20 °C…+80 °C
(in relation to magnetic switch application) -40 °F…+302 °F -4 °F…+176 °F -4 °F…+176 °F
Temperature coefficient 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K 0.2 %/K
Housing material Al Al Al
Part number 630.5121.064 630.3131.005 630.3133.034
Dimension diagrams

Mounting brackets BWN-M06NI/40 x 47 BWN-M06NI/MAGNET BWN-M06NI/27 x 38 BWN-M36NI

Material Niro 1.4301 Niro 1.4301 Niro 1.4301 Niro 1.4301

for models MA-06, MA-16, MA-26, MA-15 MA-06, MA-16, MA-26, MA-15 MA-06, MA-16, MA-26, MA-15 MA-06, MA-16, MA-26, MA-15
Part number 410.2802.001 490.4702.036 410.2802.002 490.4700.035
Dimension diagrams

238
Accessories
Miniature
snap-in connectors

Miniature snap-in connectors GDK-R06US/S00-2.5PU GDK-R06US/S00-5PU WDK-R06US/S00-2.5PU WDK-R06US/S00-5PU

Terminal code
1 = brown
2 = black
3 = blue

Sensors
Material of cable sleeve PUR PUR PUR PUR
Material of coupling PA 12 PA 12 PA 12 PA 12
Material of body POM POM POM POM
Operating voltage 60 VAC/75 VDC 60 VAC/75 VDC 60 VAC/75 VDC 60 VAC/75 VDC
Current-carrying capacity 3A 3A 3A 3A
Temperature range -25 °C…+90 °C -25 °C…+90 °C -25 °C…+90 °C -25 °C…+90 °C
-13 °F…+194 °F -13 °F…+194 °F -13 °F…+194 °F -13 °F…+194 °F
Cable length 2.5 m 5m 2.5 m 5m
Cable structure 3 x 0.25 mm2 3 x 0.25 mm2 3 x 0.25 mm2 3 x 0.25 mm2
Protection class after installation IP67/NEMA 4 IP67/NEMA 4 IP67/NEMA 4 IP67/NEMA 4
Part number 413.9100.219 413.9100.220 413.9100.221 413.9100.222
Dimension diagrams

239
Standard
float switches
Type code

Ordering example
s. page 246
Position 1 2 3 4

Magnetic Output type Combination

Version float reed contact switching
switch tube/float

Typ M A F -

Min./max. Combination switching tube/float

dimensions

Sensing distances for Material floats POM PVC PP NBR 1.4571 1.4571
falling levels Ø40 x 27 Ø42 x 44 Ø30 x 44 Ø30 x 44 Ø45 x 47 Ø52
x = max. 2000 for stainless/brass Niro/MS
x = max. 1000 for stainless/brass PVC

Material connecting head

Material switching tube

Half cable gland R3/8''

1.4571 1.4571 A V T R N E

MS 59 MS 63 M L C S P F

PVC PVC K D I U –– ––

Cable gland PG 9
1.4571 1.4571 A V T R N E

MS 58 /
gal. MS 63 M L C S P F
Zn25C

PVC PVC K D I U –– ––

Flange Ø75 with plug

PC 1.4571 A V T R N E

PC MS 63 M L C S P F

PC PVC K D I U –– ––

240
 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

General Number of Switching Switching Connecting Standard Special features

design switching function capacity head programme (see page 247)
points

7 F F F F S F

Number Switching Switching Connecting head

of switching function capacity

Sensors
points

1.4571 1.4571
Ø62 Ø84 straight type bent type
type in illustration type in illustration
mixed version (CO, NC, NO)

in 1.4571 material. in 1.4571 material.

normally-closed contact

ID letter connecting head

ID letter connecting head

max. 0.5 A - 30VA - 250 V

Slight variations Slight variations

normally-open contact

max. 1A - 60VA - 250 V

may occur for PVC may occur for PVC

changeover contact

and MS (brass) ver- and MS (brass) ver-

2 switching points
3 switching points
1 switching point

sions. sions.
1
2
3
4

B G 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L A C

O H 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L A C

–– –– 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L A ––

B G 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L V H

O H 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L V H

–– –– 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L V ––

B G 1 / 2 / –– 1/2/3/4 K L T W

O H 1 / 2 / –– 1/2/3/4 K L T W

–– –– 1 / 2 / –– 1/2/3/4 K L T ––

241
Standard
float switches
Type code

Ordering examples
s. page 246
Position 1 2 3 4

Magnetic Output type Combination

Version float reed contact switching
switch tube/float

Type M A F -

Min./max. Combination switching tube/float - float 242

dimensions

Sensing distances for Material floats POM PVC PP NBR 1.4571 1.4571
falling levels Ø40 x 27 Ø42 x 44 Ø30 x 44 Ø30 x 44 Ø45 x 47 Ø52
x = max. 2000 for stainless/brass Niro/MS
x = max. 1000 for stainless/brass PVC

Material connecting head

Material switching tube

Oval flange with plug

PC 1.4571 A V T R N E

PC MS 63 M L C S P F

PC PVC K D I U –– ––

Flange enclosures Ø78

G-AI Si 12 1.4571 A V T R N E

G-AI Si 12 MS 63 M L C S P F

G-AI Si 12 PVC K D I U –– ––

Flange enclosures Ø120

G-AI Si 12 1.4571 A V T R N E

G-AI Si 12 MS 63 M L C S P F

G-AI Si 12 PVC K D I U –– ––

242
 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

General Number of Switching Switching Connecting Standard Special features

design switching function capacity head programme (see page 247)
points

7 F F F F S F

Number Switching Switching Connecting head

of switching function capacity

Sensors
points

1.4571 1.4571
Ø62 Ø84 straight type bent type
type in illustration type in illustration
mixed version (CO, NC, NO)

in 1.4571 material. in 1.4571 material.

normally-closed contact

ID letter connecting head

ID letter connecting head

max. 0.5 A - 30VA - 250 V

Slight variations Slight variations

normally-open contact

max. 1A - 60VA - 250 V

may occur for PVC may occur for PVC

changeover contact

and MS (brass) ver- and MS (brass) ver-

2 switching points
3 switching points
1 switching point

sions. sions.
1
2
3
4

B G 1/2 1/2/3/4 K L TO TW

O H 1/2 1/2/3/4 K L TO TW

–– –– 1/2 1/2/3/4 K L TO ––

B G 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L S B

O H 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L S B

–– –– 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L S B

FL WFL
B G 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L
120 120

FL WFL
O H 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L
120 120

FL WFL
–– –– 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L
120 120

243
Standard
float switches
Type code

Ordering examples
s. page 246
Position 1 2 3 4

Magnetic Output type Combination

Version float reed contact switching
switch tube/float

Type M A F -

Min./max. Combination switching tube/float

dimensions

Sensing distances for Material floats POM PVC PP NBR 1.4571 1.4571
falling levels Ø40 x 27 Ø42 x 44 Ø30 x 44 Ø30 x 44 Ø45 x 47 Ø52
x = max. 2000 for stainless/brass Niro/MS
x = max. 1000 for stainless/brass PVC

Material connecting head

Material switching tube

Flange enclosures
DN50 Ø165 1.4571 /
1.4571 A V T R N E
G-AI Si 12

–– MS 63 –– –– –– –– –– ––

PVC /
PVC K D I U –– ––
G-AI Si 12

Flange enclosures
DN65 Ø185 1.4571 /
1.4571 A V T R N E
G-AI Si 12

–– MS 63 –– –– –– –– –– ––

PVC /
PVC K D I U –– ––
G-AI Si 12

Tank cable gland R1.5"

1.4571 /
1.4571 A V T R N E
G-AI Si 12

–– MS 63 –– –– –– –– –– ––

PVC /
PVC K D I U –– ––
Polyester

244
 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

General Number of Switching Switching Connecting Standard Special features

design switching function capacity head programme (see page 247)
points

7 F F F F S F

Number Switching Switching Connecting head

of switching function capacity

Sensors
points

1.4571 1.4571
Ø62 Ø84 straight type bent type
type in illustration type in illustration
mixed version (CO, NC, NO)

in 1.4571 material. in 1.4571 material.

normally-closed contact

ID letter connecting head

ID letter connecting head

max. 0.5 A - 30VA - 250 V

Slight variations Slight variations

normally-open contact

max. 1A - 60VA - 250 V

may occur for PVC may occur for PVC

changeover contact

and MS (brass) ver- and MS (brass) ver-

2 switching points
3 switching points
1 switching point

sions. sions.
1
2
3
4

DN WDN
B G 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L
50 50

–– –– –– –– –– –– ––

DN
–– –– 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L ––
50

DN WDN
B G 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L
65 65

–– –– –– –– –– –– ––

DN
–– –– 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L ––
65

R
B G 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L ––
1.5

–– –– –– –– –– –– ––

R
–– –– 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L ––
1.5

245
Standard
float switches
Type code

Position 1 2 3 4

Magnetic Output type Combination

Version float reed contact switching
switch tube/float

Type M A K -

Min./max. Combination switching tube/float

dimensions

Sensing distances for Material floats POM PVC PP NBR 1.4571 1.4571
falling levels Ø40 x 27 Ø42 x 44 Ø30 x 44 Ø30 x 44 Ø45 x 47 Ø52
x = max. 2000 for stainless/brass Niro/MS
x = max. 1000 for stainless/brass PVC

Material connecting head

Material switching tube

Tank cable gland R2"

1.4571 /
1.4571 A V T R N E
G-AI Si 12

–– MS 63 –– –– –– –– –– ––

PVC /
PVC K D I U –– ––
Polyester

Ordering examples MAK-721 KR2S

with specification o=______ ; u=_______ (see order form page 261)

246
 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

General Number of Switching Switching Connecting Standard Special features

design switching function capacity head programme (s. below)
points

7 2 1 K R2 S

Number Switching Switching Connecting head

of switching function capacity

Sensors
points

1.4571 1.4571
Ø62 Ø84 straight type bent type
type in illustration type in illustration
mixed version (CO, NC, NO)

in 1.4571 material. in 1.4571 material.

normally-closed contact

ID letter connecting head

ID letter connecting head

max. 0.5 A - 30VA - 250 V

Slight variations Slight variations

normally-open contact

max. 1A - 60VA - 250 V

may occur for PVC may occur for PVC

changeover contact

and MS (brass) ver- and MS (brass) ver-

2 switching points
3 switching points
1 switching point

sions. sions.
1
2
3
4

B G 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L R2 ––

–– –– –– –– –– –– –– ––

–– –– 1/2/3 1/2/3/4 K L R2 ––

Special features

l Temperature monitoring
PT 100 (P1) / PT 1000 (P10)
l Bi-metal switch

We can produce tailor-made designs for

specific applications to suit individual
customer requirements.

247
Mini-level
float switches
Type code

Ordering examples
s. page 246
Position 1 2 3

Mini
Version float Float
switch

Type MS F -

Min./max. Float
dimensions

Sensing distances for PP PVC NBR NBR 1.4571

falling levels Ø25 x 21 Ø25 x 21 Ø20 x 20 Ø23 x 25 Ø30

e = 20 (Normally-closed contact) e = 26 (Normally-closed contact) e = 23 (Normally-closed contact) e = 28 (Normally-closed contact) e = 24 (Normally-closed contact)
e = 17 (Normally-open contact) e = 23 (Normally-open contact) e = 23 (Normally-open contact) e = 22 (Normally-open contact) e = 23 (Normally-open contact)

Connection thread
R1/8" K1 K2 K3 K4 N1

K1 K2 K3 K4 N1

K1 –– K3 K4 ––

–– K2 K3 K4 ––

Connection thread
R3/8" K1 K2 K3 K4 N1

K1 K2 K3 K4 N1

K1 –– K3 K4 ––

–– K2 K3 K4 ––

Connection thread
R3/8" with plug K1 K2 K3 K4 N1

K1 K2 K3 K4 N1

K1 –– K3 K4 ––

–– K2 K3 K4 ––

248
 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Enclosure Terminal housing Switching function Characteristics

material (see page 247)

F - F - F F

Enclosure Terminal housing Switching function

material

Sensors
Version see page 6

max. number of switching points

Ni = 1.4571
O = Normally-closed contact
S = Normally-open contact
(250 V – 0.5 A – 10 VA)

MS = MS 63 U = Changeover contact
(250 V-0.5 A-10 VA)

(100 V-0.3 A-3 VA)

X = max. total length

PP = polypropylene

Cable length in m
PVC = polyvinyl chloride
version

R 1/8
Ni S O U 1000 3 1

MS S O U 1000 3 1

PP S O U 40.5 1 1

PVC S O U 500 3 1

R 3/8
Ni S O U 1000 3 1

MS S O U 1000 3 1

PP S O U 40.5 1 1

PVC S O U 500 3 1

R 3/8ST
Ni S O U 1000 3 ––

MS S O U 1000 3 ––

PP S O U 40.5 1 ––

PVC S O U 500 3 ––

249
Mini-level
float switches
Type code

Ordering examples
s. page 246
Position 1 2 3

Mini level
Version float Float
switch

Type MS F -

Min./max. Float
dimensions

Sensing distances for PP PVC NBR NBR 1.4571

falling levels Ø25 x 21 Ø25 x 21 Ø20 x 20 Ø23 x 25 Ø30

e = 20 (Normally-closed contact) e = 26 (Normally-closed contact) e = 23 (Normally-closed contact) e = 28 (Normally-closed contact) e = 24 (Normally-closed contact)
e = 17 (Normally-open contact) e = 23 (Normally-open contact) e = 23 (Normally-open contact) e = 22 (Normally-open contact) e = 23 (Normally-open contact)

Connection thread
Pg7 K1 K2 K3 K4 N1

K1 K2 K3 K4 N1

K1 –– K3 K4 ––

–– K2 K3 K4 ––

MSKS-PA-FL36-OS

–– –– –– –– ––

MSKS-PA-FL36ST-OS

–– –– –– –– ––

250
 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Enclosure Terminal housing Switching function Characteristics

material (see page 247)

F - F - F F

Enclosure Terminal housing Switching function

material

Sensors
Version see page 6

max. number of switching points

Ni = 1.4571
O = Normally-closed contact
S = Normally-open contact
(250 V – 0.5 A – 10 VA)

MS = MS 63 U = Changeover contact
(250 V-0.5 A-10 VA)

(100 V-0.3 A-3 VA)

X = max. total length

PP = polypropylene

Cable length in m
PVC = polyvinyl chloride
Version

PG7
Ni S O U 1000 3 1

MS S O U 1000 3 1

PP S O U 40.5 1 1

PVC S O U 500 3 1

FL36

PA12
S O ––
for lateral
(Enclosure & mounting
float) (with 1 m cable)

FL36ST

PA12
S O ––
for lateral
(Enclosure & mounting
float) (with plug)

251
Adjustable
float switches
Type code

Ordering examples
s. page 246
Position 1 2 3 4

Magnetic Output type Combination

Version float reed contact switching
switch tube/floats

Type M A F -

Min./max. Combination switching tube/float

dimensions (technical data see page 258 ff)

Sensing distances for Material floats 1.4571 PVC

falling levels Ø52 x 55 Ø52 x 55
Material connecting head

Material switching tube

Flange enclosures
DN50 Ø165 1.4571 /
1.4571 N V
G-AI Si 12

–– MS 63 –– ––

PVC /
PVC –– D
Polyester

Flange enclosures
DN65 Ø185 1.4571 /
1.4571 N V
G-AI Si 12

–– MS 63 –– ––

PVC /
PVC –– D
Polyester

Tank cable gland R1.5"

1.4571 /
1.4571 N V
G-AI Si 12

–– MS 63 –– ––

PVC /
PVC –– D
Polyester

252
 5 6 7 8
Note!
Adjustable Connecting Length Switching devices
head without switching
modules!
Order separately,
VST F / F please!

Terminal Length Switching module Max. number switching modules/

housing switching units

Sensors
Version Other lengths (mm)
on request
Normally-closed contact/ Changeover
normally-open contact contact

Lengths Lengths

1000 mm

1000 mm
250 mm
500 mm
750 mm

250 mm
500 mm
750 mm
Normally-closed contact/ Changeover
normally-open contact contact

FL165
250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

FL185
250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

R1.5
250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

253
Adjustable
float switches
Type code

Ordering examples
s. page 246
Position 1 2 3 4

Magnetic Output type Combination

Version float reed contact switching
switch tube/floats

Type M A F -

Min./max. Combination switching tube/float

dimensions (technical data see page 258 ff)

Sensing distances for Material floats 1.4571 PVC

falling levels Ø52 x 55 Ø52 x 55
Material connecting head

Material switching tube

Tank cable gland R2"

1.4571 /
1.4571 N V
G-AI Si 12

–– MS 63 –– ––

PVC /
PVC –– D
Polyester

Flange enclosures Ø120

G-AI Si 12 1.4571 N V

G-AI Si 12 MS 63 P L

G-AI Si 12 PVC –– D

Flange enclosures
Ø120 with G-AI Si 12 1.4571 –– ––
gush protection

MS 63
G-AI Si 12 protect.: P L
CuZN37

G-AI Si 12 PVC –– ––

254
 5 6 7 8
Note!
Adjustable Connecting Length Switching devices
head without switching
modules!
Order separately,
VST F / F please!

Terminal Length Switching module Max. number switching modules/

housing switching units

Sensors
Version Other lengths (mm)
on request
Normally-closed contact/ Changeover
normally-open contact contact

Lengths Lengths

1000 mm

1000 mm
250 mm
500 mm
750 mm

250 mm
500 mm
750 mm
Normally-closed contact/ Changeover
normally-open contact contact

R2
250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

FL120
250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

FLS120
250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

250 / 500 /750 / 1000 491.0007.069 491.6007.075 2/3/4/4 2/3/3/3

255
Float
standard programme

ID letter: A/M/K ID letter: T/C/I ID letter: R/S/U

Dimension (mm):Ø40 x 27 Dimension (mm): Ø30 x 44 Dimension (mm):Ø30 x 44
Material: POM Material: PP Material: NBR
Depth of Depth of Depth of
immersion Weighing immersion Weighing immersion Weighing
h1(mm) y (g/cm3) h1(mm) y (g/cm3) h1(mm) y (g/cm3)
18 1 27.5 1 19.5 1
20 0.9 30.5 0.9 22 0.9
22.5 0.8 34.5 0.8 24.5 0.8
26 0.7 39.5 0.7 28 0.7

Part No.: 494.5206.009 Part No.: 494.5203.019 Part No.: 494.5203.031

ID letter: V/L/D ID letter: N/P ID letter: E/F

Dimension (mm):Ø42 x 44 Dimension (mm): Ø44 x 45 Dimension (mm): Ø52
Material: PVC Material: 1.4571 Material: 1.4571
Depth of Depth of Depth of
immersion Weighing immersion Weighing immersion Weighing
h1(mm) y (g/cm3) h1(mm) y (g/cm3) h1(mm) y (g/cm3)
25 1 32 1 32 1
27.5 0.9 35 0.9 34 0.9
30.5 0.8 39 0.8 37 0.8
35 0.7 45 0.7 43 0.7

Part No.: 494.5215.029 Part No.: 494.2104.002 Part No.: 494.2105.003

ID letter: B/O ID letter: G/H

Dimension (mm): Ø62 Dimension (mm): Ø84
Material: 1.4571 Material: 1.4571
Depth of Depth of
immersion Weighing immersion Weighing
h1(mm) y (g/cm3) h1(mm) y (g/cm3)
33 1 33 1
35 0.9 35 0.9
38 0.8 38 0.8
42 0.7 42 0.7

Part No.: 494.2102.001 Part No.: 494.2101.004

256
Adjustable
floats

ID letter: V/L/D ID letter: N/P

Dimension (mm):Ø52 x 55 Dimension (mm):Ø52 x 55
Material: PVC Material: 1.4571
Depth of Depth of
immersion Weighing immersion Weighing
h1(mm) y (g/cm3) h1(mm) y (g/cm3)
29 1 33 1
32 0.9 36 0.9
36 0.8 40.5 0.8
42 0.7 46 0.7

Sensors
Part No.: 494.5216.032 Part No.: 494.2299.023

Miniature
floats

ID letter: K1 ID letter: K2 ID letter: K4

Dimension (mm):Ø25 x 21 Dimension (mm):Ø25 x 21 Dimension (mm):Ø23 x 25
Material: PP Material: PVC Material: NBR
Depth of Depth of Depth of
immersion Weighing immersion Weighing immersion Weighing
h1(mm) y (g/cm3) h1(mm) y (g/cm3) h1(mm) y (g/cm3)
12 1 15 1 16 1
13 0.9 16 0.9 17.5 0.9
14.5 0.8 18.5 0.8 19.5 0.8
16.5 0.7 – 0.7 22 0.7

Part No.: 494.5207.021 Part No.: 494.5207.022 Art.-Nr.: 494.5211.024

ID letter: K3 ID letter: N1
Dimension (mm):Ø20 x 20 Dimension (mm): Ø30
Material: NBR Material: 1.4571
Depth of Depth of
immersion Weighing immersion Weighing
h1(mm) y (g/cm3) h1(mm) y (g/cm3)
15 1 18 1
17 0.9 19 0.9
– 0.8 21 0.8
– 0.7 24 0.7

Part No.: 494.5210.020 Art.-Nr.: 494.2109.018

257
Technical data

Standard
magnetic float
switches

Electrical data

Switching function Changeover contact/normally-closed contact/normally-open contact Changeover contact/normally-closed contact/normally-open contact
Contact ID letter K L
Rated voltage (max). 250 V AC/DC 250 V AC/DC
Rated current (max.) 0.5 A 1A
Switching capacity (max.) 30 VA 60 VA

Mechanical data

Container connection options Flange enclosures RD 120 mm Flange enclosures RD 120 mm

Flange enclosures RD 77 mm Flange enclosures RD 77 mm
Flange enclosures RD 165 mm Flange enclosures RD 165 mm
Flange enclosures RD 185 mm Flange enclosures RD 185 mm
Cable gland PG 9 Cable gland Pg 9
Cable gland R3/8'' Cable gland R3/8''
Cable gland R1/5'' with plug connection DIN 43650 Cable gland R1/5'' with plug connection DIN 43650
Oval flange 75 x 50 mm with plug-in connec. Oval flange 75 x 50 mm with plug-in connec.
DIN43650 DIN43650

Materials switching tube Stainless steel 1.4571 Stainless steel 1.4571

MS 63 MS 63
PVC PVC

Float variants A / M / K Cylinder floats RD 40 x 27 mm (POM) A / M / K Cylinder floats RD 40 x 27 mm (POM)

T / C / I Cylinder floats RD 30 x 44 mm (PP) T / C / I Cylinder floats RD 30 x 44 mm (PP)
V/D Cylinder floats RD 42 x 44 mm (NBR) V/D Cylinder floats RD 42 x 44 mm (NBR)
R / SCylinder floats RD 30 x 44 mm (NBR) R / SCylinder floats RD 30 x 44 mm (NBR)
N/P Cylinder floats RD 44 x 45 mm (stainless steel) N/P Cylinder floats RD 44 x 45 mm (stainless steel)
E /F Ball floats RD 52 mm (stainless steel) E /F Ball floats RD 52 mm (stainless steel)
B /O Ball floats RD 62 mm (stainless steel) B /O Ball floats RD 62 mm (stainless steel)
G /H Ball floats RD 84 mm (stainless steel) G /H Ball floats RD 84 mm (stainless steel)

Ambient conditions

Protection type (DIN 40050) IP 65 (up to IP 68, on request) IP 65 (up to IP 68, on request)
Temperature range -5°C to 60°C (from -30°C to 150°C, on request) -5°C to 60°C (from -30°C to 150°C, on request)
Pressure 5 bar (up to 25 bar, on request) 5 bar (up to 25 bar, on request)

258
Technical data

Miniature
magnetic float
switches

Sensors
Electrical data

Switching function Normally-closed contact / normally-open contact Changeover contact/normally-closed contact/normally-open contact
Contact ID letter B X
Rated voltage (max). 250 V AC/DC 100 V AC/DC
Rated current (max.) 0.5 A 0.3 A
Switching capacity (max.) 10 VA 3 VA

Mechanical data

Container connection options Cable gland Pg 7 Cable gland Pg 7

Cable gland R1/8'' Cable gland R1/8''
Cable gland R3/8'' Cable gland R3/8''
Cable gland R3/8'' with plug Cable gland R3/8'' with plug

Materials switching tube Stainless steel 1.4571 Stainless steel 1.4571

PP PP
PVC PVC
MS 63 MS 63

Float variants K1 / Cylinder floats RD 25 x 20 mm (PP) K1 / Cylinder floats RD 25 x 20 mm (PP)

K2 / Cylinder floats RD 25 x 20 mm (PVC) K2 / Cylinder floats RD 25 x 20 mm (PVC)
K3 / Cylinder floats RD 20 x 20 mm (NBR) K3 / Cylinder floats RD 20 x 20 mm (NBR)
K4 / Cylinder floats RD 23 x 25 mm (NBR) K4 / Cylinder floats RD 23 x 25 mm (NBR)
N1 / Ball floats RD 30 mm (stainless steel) N1 / Ball floats RD 30 mm (stainless steel)

Ambient conditions

Protection type (DIN 40050) IP 65 (up to IP 68, on request) IP 65 (up to IP 68, on request)
Temperature range -5°C to 60°C (from -30°C to 150°C, on request) -5°C to 60°C (from -30°C to 150°C, on request)
Pressure 5 bar (up to 15 bar, on request) 5 bar (up to 15 bar, on request)

259
Technical data

Adjustable
magnetic float
switches

Electrical data

Contact ID letter P L
Switching module type REEDK. KPL. F. MA REEDK. KPL. F. MA
Part No. 491.0007.069 491.6007.075
Switching function Normally-open contact / normally-closed contact (bi) Changeover contact (bi)
Rated voltage (max). 250 V AC/DC 250 V AC/DC
Rated current (max.) 5A 1A
Switching capacity (max.) 250 VA 60 VA

Mechanical data

Container connection options Flange DN 50 (PVC / stainless steel) Flange DN 50 (PVC / stainless steel)
Flange DN 65 (PVC / stainless steel) Flange DN 65 (PVC / stainless steel)
Cable gland R1.5'' (PVC / stainless steel) Cable gland R1.5'' (PVC / stainless steel)
Cable gland R2'' (PVC / stainless steel) Cable gland R2'' (PVC / stainless steel)
Flange encl. RD 120 mm (with gush protect. possible) Flange encl. RD 120 mm (with gush protect. possible)

Materials switching tube Stainless steel 1.4571 Stainless steel 1.4571

MS 63 MS 63
PVC PVC

Float variants N / PCylinder floats RD 52 x 55 mm (stainless steel) N / PCylinder floats RD 52 x 55 mm (stainless steel)
V / D / L Cylinder floats RD 52 x 55 mm (PVC) V / D / L Cylinder floats RD 52 x 55 mm (PVC)

Ambient conditions

Protection class (DIN 40050) IP 65 (up to IP 68, on request) IP 65 (up to IP 68, on request)
Temperature range -5°C to 60°C (from -30°C to 150°C, on request) -5°C to 60°C (from -30°C to 150°C, on request)
Pressure 5 bar (up to 15 bar, on request) 5 bar (up to 15 bar, on request)

260
FAX

Order form and questionnaire

for magnetic float switches Page __________ from _________

Date: ________________________
Standard tube diameter 12 mm

Adress: Sender:

Company:

Bernstein AG Customer No.:

Tieloser Weg 6
D-32457 Porta Westfalica Contact:
Department:
Phone: +49-(0)5 71/7 93-0
Street:

Sensors
Fax: +49-(0)5 71/7 93-5 55 Town:
Phone:
Fax:

O Enquiry _____ pieces

Type _____| _____| _____| _____| _____| _____| _____| _____| _____| _____| _____| _____| _____

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 O Order _____ pieces

Operational environment:

Pressure: ______ bar Temperature: __________°C

Container dimens.: ______mm Medium: _____________

Switching function
(fulling level)
Cable length: ______m Separate contact type O

Mounting options: O from above

O from below

O lateral

Other comments:

S = Normally-open
Ö = Normally-closed
U = change over

261
Type matrix of
inductive sensors

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

K I N - T 1 2 N S / 0 0 4 - K L 2
Product group Housing design Output Sensing distance Options

1 K = Non-contact proximity switch Design Examples: 14 Always a dash

– S03 = Slot type sensor

2 I = Inductive – Q08 = 8 x 8 x 49 mm, 15 K = Short-circuit protected
side sensing
– M32 = M32 x 1.5 mm,
3 B = flush installation threaded barrel 16 L = LED
N = non-flush installation – D08 = 8 mm diameter (metal)
R = Ring sensor – R22 = 22 mm diameter (plastic)
– E68 = 68 x 30 x 15 mm 17… Cable length
4 Always a dash – N44 = 41.5 x 41.5 x 120 mm Examples: 2 = 2 m
(Euro standard housing) 6=6m

5 M = metric threaded barrel E = Extended sensing distance

(metal) 8 P = PNP V = Short body design
T = metric threaded barrel N = NPN P = Potentiometer
(plastic) A = AC 2-wire PU = Polyurethane cable
D = smooth barrel E = NAMUR S = Screw termination
(metal) Z = DC 2-wire (terminal compartment)
R = smooth barrel Q = AC triac SD = Plug connection,
(plastic) T = Thyristor (AC 3-wire) according to DIN
Q = rectangular housing G = Push/pull with screw termination
(metal) D = Dual output SM = Mini socket snap fit
P = PG threaded barrel NPN/PNP switching S8 = M8 quick disconnect screw
(metal) device connector
E = rectangular housing SM8 = M8 quick disconnect snap
(plastic) or screw connector
S = Slot sensor 9 S = Normally open contact S12 = M12 quick disconnect
(plastic) O= Normally closed contact screw type
N = standard fixing (in accordance P = Programmable N = Stainless steel housing
with DIN 50025/50037) A= Analogue F = High switching frequency
U= Complementary T = High temperature
resistance
6/7 two-digit number I = teach in
10 Slash
– Smooth barrel types
= diameter in mm
– Threaded barrel types 11/12/13 Sensing distance
= standard designation
– Rectangular devices Examples: 1.5 = 1.5 mm
= continuing design numbers 002 = 2 mm
040 = 40 mm

262
Wiring diagrams PNP output NPN output
electrical outputs DC (Principle wiring diagram) (Principle wiring diagram)

Definition of cable colours

BN = brown
BU = blue
BK = black (Output)

Association of the cable colours to the

connection pins of the cable couplings see
page 276 ff.
This association is not valid for all plugs
and couplings

Sensors
2) PNP normally closed 3) PNP programmable
1) PNP normally open PNP transistor disconnects the positive supply to With the built-in switch the position PNP N/O 1) or
PNP transistor switches the output high. output. PNP N/C 2) can be chosen.

5) NPN normally closed 6) NPN programmable

4) NPN normally open NPN transistor disconnects the negative supply to With the built-in switch the function NPN N/O 4) or
NPN Transistor switches the output low. output. NPN N/C 5) can be chosen.

7) PNP/NPN programmable
With two built-in switches PNP or NPN and 8) NAMUR
between NO or NC function can be chosen. Current change according to DIN EN 60947-5-6.

263
Wiring diagrams DC 2-wire DC 4-wire
of DC output types (Principle wiring diagram) (Principle wiring diagram)

Key to colour coding of cable

BN = brown
BU = blue
BK = black (switching output)
WH = white (switching output)

Load for Sinking Load for Sinking Load for Sinking

Load for Sourcing Load for Sourcing Load for Sourcing

3) Switch selectable DC 2-wire

1) Normally open DC 2-wire 2) Normally closed DC 2-wire The 1) normally-open and 2) normally closed
During operation, the contacts are bonded. During operation, the contacts are separated. functions can be selected via an integrated switch.

Load

4) Complementary output DC 5) Complementary output DC

PNP 4-wire NPN 4-wire
During operation, the positive operating voltage is During operation, the negative operating voltage is
applied alternatively to both outputs. applied alternatively to both outputs.

264
Wiring diagrams of AC 2-wire AC 3-wire
AC output types (Principle wiring diagram) (Principle wiring diagram)

Key to colour coding of cable

BN = brown
BU = blue
BK = black

Sensors
Load Load Load

1) Normally open AC 3-wire 2) Normally closed AC 3-wire

During operation, a thyristor which is positioned During operation, a thyristor which is positioned 3) Switch selectable AC 3-wire
above a rectifier bridge applies the operating above arectifier bridge separates the operating The 1) normally open and 2) normally-closed AC
voltage to the output. voltage from the output. functions can be selected via an integrated switch.

Load Load
Load

4) Normally open AC 2-wire 5) Normally closed AC 2-wire

During operation, a thyristor which is positioned During operation, a thyristor which is positioned 6) Switch selectable AC 2-wire
above a rectifier bridge applies the load to the above a rectifier bridge separates the load from the The 4) normally-open and 5) normally-closed AC
operating voltage. operating voltage. functions can be selected via an integrated switch.

265
Mounting brackets

3 Type BKB-D04PA 6 Type BKS-D20PA

Part number 596.0223.069 Part number 596.0223.085

4 Type BKB-D05PA 7 Type BKS-D22PA

Part number 596.0223.070 Part number 596.0223.040

5 Type BKB-D06PA 8 Type BKS-D34PA

Part number 596.0223.071 Part number 596.0223.041

266
Type matrix of
capacitive sensors

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

K C N - T 1 2 N S / 0 0 4 - K L P
Product group Housing design Output Sensing distance Options

Sensors
1 K = Non-contact proximity switch 6/7 Two-digit number 14 Slash
12 = M 12 x 1 mm threaded barrel
18 = M 18 x 1 mm threaded barrel
2 C = Capacitive 30 = M 30 x 1.5 mm threaded 15 K = Short-circuit proof
barrel
32 = M 32 x 1.5 mm threaded
3 B = Flush installation barrel 16 L = LED
N = Non-flush installation 20 = 20 mm diameter
22 = 22 mm diameter
34 = 34 mm diameter 17… Cable length
4 Dash 44 = 40 x 40 x 120 mm Examples: 2 = 2 m
68 = 68 x 30 x 15 mm 6=6m

5 M = Metric threaded barrel E = Extendible sensing distance

(metal housings) 8 P = PNP V = Short body design
T = Metric threaded barrel N= NPN P = Potentiometer
(plastic housings) A= AC 2-wire PU = Polyurethane cable
D = Cylindrical housings R= Relay S = Detachable connection
(metal) G= Push/pull (terminal compartment)
R = Cylindrical housings D= Dual output switching device SD = Plug connectors, according
(plastic) to DIN with fitted cable
Q = Rectangular housings socket
(metal) 9 S = Normally-open contact SM = Mini socket snap fit
E = Rectangular housings Ö= Normally-closed contact S8 = M 8 quick disconnect screw
(plastic) P = Programmable switch type
N = Standard attachment A= Analogue SM8 = M 8 quick disconnect uni-
according to DIN 50025/50037) U= Complementary versal snap and screw
S12 = M 12 quick disconnect
screw type
10 Slash N = Stainless steel housing
F = High switching frequency
T = High temperature
11/12/13 Sensing distance resistance

Examples: 1.5 = 1.5 mm

002 = 2 mm
040 = 40 mm

267
Wiring diagrams of PNP output NPN output
DC output types (Principle wiring diagram) (Principle wiring diagram)

Key to colour coding of cable

BN = brown
BU = blue
BK = black

3) PNP Switch selectable

1) PNP Normally open 2) PNP Normally closed The 1) PNP normally-open and 2) PNP normally-
During operation, output of PNP transistor During operation, output of PNP transisitor is closed functions can be selected via an integrated
is switched to positive. separated from positive pole. switch.

6) NPN Switch selectable

4) NPN Normally open 5) NPN Normally closed The 4) NPN normally-open and 5) NPN normally-
During operation, output of NPN transistor is During operation, output of NPN transistor is closed functions can be selected via an integrated
switched to negative. separated from negative pole. switch.

7) PNP/NPN Switch selectable 9) Complementary output

Two integrated switches selection between 8) Push/Pull-programmable PNP 4-wire
PNP/NPN switching and normally-open/closed During operation, the output changes from negati- During operation, the positive operating voltage is
functions. ve to positive pole, invertable by integrated switch. applied alternatively to both outputs.

268
Wiring diagrams of
AC output types
Key to colour coding of cable

BN = brown
BU = blue
BK = black

10) Normally open AC 2-wire 11) Normally closed AC 2-wire

During operation, athyristor which is positioned During operation, a thyristor which is positioned
above a rectifier bridge separates the load from the above a recifier bridge separates the load from the
operating voltage. operating voltage.

AC 2-wire
(Principle wiring diagram)

Sensors
BN
L1
L1
BU N
GY
N.C.
Öffner
BK C.
Mittenkontakt
WH N.O.
Schließer

12) AC Switch selectable

The 10 normally-open, and 11 normally closed 13) AC-Relay
functions can be selected via an integrated witch. with adjustable operate lag.

Mounting brackets
Polyamid

All dimensions in mm (inch)

14) TYPE BKS D20 PA 15) TYPE BKS D22 PA

Part number: 596.0223.085 Part number: 596.0223.040
incl. 2 screws M 5 x 35 mm, DIN 912 incl. 2 screws M 5 x 35 mm, DIN 912

16) TYPE BKS D32 PA 17) TYPE BKS D34 PA

Part number: 596.0223.002 Part number: 596.0223.041
incl. 2 screws M 6 x 45 mm, DIN 912 incl. 2 screws M 5 x 50 mm, DIN 912

269
Photoelectric
identification codes

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

O M 1 2 R T - D H T P - 0 2 0 0 - C L

1 O = Photoelectric sensor 9 Output function e. g. 06.0 = 6m

A = Complementary LA/DA e. g. 15.0 = 15 m
2 M = Metric metal housing (light activated / e. g. 0500 = 500 mm
T = Metric thermoplastic dark activated)
housing D = Dark activated (DA) 17 Dash
R = Rectangular design H = Light activated (LA)
P = Pg..thread..size O = No output 18 Connection type
Z = Cylindrical design (through-beam transmitter) A = Screw termination
P = Selectable LA/DA B = Plug with screw terminals
3/4 Specification of housing (light activated / C = Cable
dimensions dark activated) (standard C = 2 m or
e. g. 12 = M 12 X = Customer-specified output length in m)
18 = M 18 S = Plug-in connector
20 = 20 series 10 Output type
90 = 90 series A = Analogue output 19… Options
N = NAMUR C = Control/diagnostic input
5/6 ES = Through-beam sensor O = No output D = LED for output indication
(Complete set) Q = Triac E = Adjustable sensitivity
EE = Through beam, receiver R = Relay F = Diagnostic circuit with out-
only S = Others put and LED for indicator
SE = Through beam, transmitter T = Transistor G = LED for output mode,
only Y = Thyristor supply voltage and beam
LC = Fibre optic control (sensor control indication
with fibre optics 11 N = NPN transistor output H = LED for supply voltage and
connection) (switched to negative) output mode indication
RH = Diffuse reflective sensors P = PNP transistor output L = LED for output indicator
with background (switched to positive) T = Adjustable timer circuit
suppression) G = Push/pull V = LED for operating voltage
RS = Retroreflective sensor S = Through-beam light source indication
RT = Diffuse reflective sensor U = Switch selectable PNP/NPN X = Customer-specific options
FF = Convergent beam sensor, 2 = 2-wire output Z = Fixed timer
fixed focus 3 = 3-wire output
PR = Print registration sensor 4 = 4-wire output
PS = Polarised retro sensor
12 Dash
7 Dash
13-16 Sensing distance
8 Voltage type Sensing distance specifications are
A = AC always indicated by 4 digits
D = DC – mm: without decimal point
M = Multivoltage – m: with decimal point
P = Programmable voltage
(AC or DC)

270
Wiring diagrams

Sensors
brown brown
brown

black Load black Output

Output Load
blue
blue blue

1 Transmitter 4 PNP 7 NPN

light activation or dark activation light activation or dark activation

black brown brown light activation

light activation
black Load black

Outputs
blue white white Outputs

Loads
blue blue dark activation
dark activation

2 Transmitter 5 Complementary PNP 8 Complementary NPN

light activation and dark activation light activation and dark activation

Surplus detection
brown hysteresis surplus detection
brown
light activation signal
black (dark activation)
strength
black Output
Control white
input Diagnostic
output diagnostic t
blue blue fault
Loads output
(green LED)
output
(yellow LED)

3 Transmitter 6 PNP
light activation and function reserve
output

271
Wiring diagrams

blue

brown
Output Load
black

1 Transmitter 4 Multinorm 7 AC 3-wire

Output
Load

black
blue

brown
N.C.
Output white
N.O.
Load grey
COM
Output

2 NPN or PNP 5 NPN or PNP 8 Relay output

COM
N.O.
N.C.
Output

Output

3 Relay output 6 Plug connection, according to DIN 9 Multinorm

272
Fixing material
Other mounting brackets on request

Sensors
1 2

Model description BWN-L05ST KPL BWN-L20NI KPL

Part number 657.1300.003 657.1200.002
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l l/–

3 4 5

Model description BWN-L20NI KPL BWN-L90NI KPL BWN-L12AL KPL

Part number 657.1200.007 657.1100.001 657.1500.006
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/– l/–

273
Reflectors

A device called triple reflector is the best

solution for the reflection in light barriers.
Reflective foils play only a secondary role.
Triple reflectors are pyramid-shaped small
triple mirrors that are combined to make a
single reflecting surface. These three reflec-
ting surface are arranged in pyramid shape
and in an angle of 90° to each other. They
reflect the arriving light beam three times
on a single mirroring surface and permit to
return it into its original direction (180°
reversion). Vibrations, minor movements Model description RTS-D17 KK RTS-D22 KK
and variations of up to 30° in relation to Part number 657.2108.008 657.2109.009
the optical axis of the triple reflector do Diameter 17.5 mm (0.69 ˝ ) 22 mm (0.86 ˝ )
not break the light beam. Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–

Reflective foils may also be horizontally

swung or tilted. However, compared to
triple reflectors, their degree of reflection is
much decreased as their operation principle
is based on small mirrors in connection
with micro glass beads. An advantage of
reflective foil is its high agree of mounting
flexibility. Its reflective performance may be
increased by using foil with triple structure,
however it does not come near the
reflection degree of triple reflectors. In
principle a plane mirror should not be Model description RTS-D32 KK RTS-D83 KK
used, except when the light beam’s angle Part number 657.2110.010 657.2107.003
of incidence corresponds with a high Diameter 32 mm (11/4˝ ) 83 mm (31/4˝ )
precision to the angle of reflection. Only Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–
then a reflection of the light beam can be
assured.

The sensing distance specifications of retro-

reflective sensors refer to reflectors from
the RTS-083 KK or RTS-060 KK series. Basi-
cally, the reflector diameter should be sel-
ected with regard to the sensing distance
and the size of the object to be detected.
The ideal case is when the object is larger
than the reflector, which is then “shadow-
ed” completely.
Model description RTS-60 KK RFS-100 KK
Part number 657.2100.007 657.2300.001
Example: OR20RS Dimensions 60x41 mm (2.36˝x1.61˝) 100x100 mm (3.9˝x3.9˝) foil with self adhesive backing
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–
Reflector Sensing distance
RTS-D17 KK 3.2 m
RTS-D22 KK 3.5 m
RTS-D32 KK 4.0 m
RTS-D83 KK 8.0 m
RTS-60 KK 8.0 m
RFS-100 KK 6.0 m
RTS-120 KK 3.5 m
RTS-500 KK 7.0 m

Contact our technical marketing service to

obtain information on the sensing
distances of other convergent-beam light Model description RTS-120 KK RTS-500 KK
barriers. Part number 657.2100.006 657.2100.002
Dimensions 120x18 mm (4.72˝x0.71˝ ) 500x35 mm (19.7˝x1.38˝ ) plastic
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/–

274
Fibre optics for
OR05 series

–40 °C/+ 75 °C
–40 °F/+167 °F
with plastic sleeve

All plastic fibre deliveries include a cutting

tool.

Through-beam sensors, Diffuse reflective sensors, Front lens,

straight tip straight tip 3000 mm range
For use with FES-L05 fibre
Part number 657.9111.002

Sensors
Sensing distance/range 200 mm (7.87 ˝ ) 120 mm (4.72 ˝ )
2 single fibres, type can be cut Ø 2.2 mm (0.09 ˝ ) Ø 2.2 mm (0.09 ˝ )
Model description FES-L05KK/2.0-V FRS-L05KK/2.0-V VLS-L05GM/000-M2.6
Part number 657.9111.002 657.9711.001 657.0022.011 (1 unit)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/– l/– –/l

Through-beam sensors, Diffuse reflective sensors, Front lens 90°,

flexible tip flexible tip 500 mm range
For use with FES-L05 fibre
Part number 657.9111.002

Sensing distance/range 120 mm (4.72 ˝ ) 120 mm (4.72 ˝ )

2 single fibres, type can be cut Ø 2.2 mm (0.09 ˝ ) Ø 2.2 mm (0.09 ˝ )
Model description FES-L05KK/2.0-BV FRS-L05KK/2.0-BV VLS-L05GM/000-M2.6W
Part number 657.9111.001 657.9711.002 657.0022.008 (1 unit)
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order –/l l/– –/l

275
Miniature snap-in plugs
Ø 6.5
with moulded cable

All dimensions in mm (inches)

Terminal code
1 = brown
2 = black
1
3 = blue
2

3-wire 3-wire
Cable length Model description 1 GDK-R06US/S00-2.5PU 2 WDK-R06US/S00-2.5PU
2.5 m/8.2 ft Part number 413.9100.219 413.9100.221
Cable length Model description 1 GDK-R06US/S00-5PU 2 WDK-R06US/S00-5PU
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.220 413.9100.222

Material of cable sleeve PUR PUR

Material body/Contact carrier PUR PUR
Material of pull protection POM POM
Operating voltage max. 60 V AC/75 V DC 60 V AC/75 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 4A 4A
Temperature range min./max. –40 °C/+80 °C –40 °C/+80 °C
–40 °F/+176 °F –40 °F/+176 °F
Function indication – –
Operating voltage indication – –
Cable structure mm2 3 x 0.25 3 x 0.25
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4

Miniature snap-in plugs

Ø 6.5
with moulded cable

Double LED

All dimensions in mm (inch)

Terminal code
1
1 = brown
2 = black
2
3 = blue
3

PNP 3-wire NPN 3-wire

Cable length Model description 3 WDK-R06PS/SL2-2.5PU 4 WDK-R06NS/SL2-2.5PU
2.5 m/8.2 ft Part number 413.9100.223 413.9100.225
Cable length Model description 3 WDK-R06PS/SL2-5PU 4 WDK-R06NS/SL2-5PU
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.224 413.9100.226

Material of cable sleeve PUR PUR

Material body/Contact carrier PUR PUR
Material of pull protection POM POM
Operating voltage max. 36 V DC 36 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 4A 4A
Temperature range min./max. –40 °C/+80 °C –40 °C/+80 °C
–40 °F/+176 °F –40 °F/+176 °F
Function indication l l
Operating voltage indication l l
Cable structure mm2 3 x 0.25 3 x 0.25
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4

276
Miniature snap-in plugs
Ø 6.5
with moulded cable

All dimensions in mm (inch)

Terminal code
1 = brown
2 = white
1
3 = blue
4 = black 2
4

4-wire 4-wire
Cable length Model description 3 GDK-R06UA/S00-2.5PU 4 WDK-R06UA/S00-2.5PU
2.5 m/8.2 ft Part number 413.9100.228 413.9100.230
Cable length Model description 3 GDK-R06UA/S00-5PU 4 WDK-R06UA/S00-5PU
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.229 413.9100.231

Sensors
Material of cable sleeve PUR PUR
Material body/Contact carrier PUR PUR
Material of pull protection POM POM
Operating voltage max. 60 V AC/75 V DC 60 V AC/75 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 2A 2A
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+90 °C –25 °C/+90 °C
–13 °F/+194 °F –13 °F/+194 °F
Function indication – –
Operating voltage indication – –
Cable structure mm2 4 x 0.14 4 x 0.14
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4

277
Plug
M8x1
with lock nut
with moulded cable

All dimensions in mm (inches)

Terminal code
1 = brown 1
2 = black
3 = blue 2

3-wire
Cable length Model description 2 WDK-M08US/S00-2.5PU
2.5 m/8.2 ft Part number 413.9100.278
Cable length Model description 2 WDK-M08US/S00-5PU
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.279

Material of cable sleeve PVC

Material body/Contact carrier PVC
Material of pull protection CuZn39Pb3
Operating voltage max. 60 V AC/75 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 4A
Temperature range min./max. –40 °C/+80 °C
–40 °F/+176 °F
Function indication –
Operating voltage indication –
Cable structure mm2 3 x 0.25
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4

Plug
M8x1
with lock nut
with moulded cable

All dimensions in mm (inches)

Terminal code
1 = brown 1
2 = black
3 = blue 2

3-wire 3-wire
Cable length Model description 1 GDK-M08US/S00-2.5PU 2 WDK-M08US/S00-2.5PU
2.5 m/8.2 ft Part number 413.9100.261 413.9100.264
Cable length Model description 1 GDK-M08US/S00-5PU 2 WDK-M08US/S00-5PU
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.263 413.9100.265

Material of cable sleeve PUR PUR

Material body/Contact carrier PUR PUR
Material of pull protection CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3
Operating voltage max. 60 V AC/75 V DC 60 V AC/75 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 4A 4A
Temperature range min./max. –40 °C/+80 °C –40 °C/+80 °C
–40 °F/+176 °F –40 °F/+176 °F
Function indication – –
Operating voltage indication – –
Cable structure mm2 3 x 0.25 3 x 0.25
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4

278
Plug
M8x1
with lock nut
with moulded cable

Double LED

All dimensions in mm (inches)

1
Terminal code
1 = brown 2
2 = black
3 = blue 3

PNP 3-wire NPN 3-wire

Cable length Model description 3 WDK-M08PS/LL2-2 4 WDK-M08NS/LL2-2
2 m/6.56 ft Part number 413.9100.213 413.9100.214
Cable length Model description 3 WDK-M08PS/LL2-5 4 WDK-M08NS/LL2-5
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.216 413.9100.217

Sensors
Material of cable sleeve PUR PUR
Material body/Contact carrier PUR PUR
Material of pull protection CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3
Operating voltage max. 30 V DC 30 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 2A 2A
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+90 °C –25 °C/+90 °C
–13 °F/+194 °F –13 °F/+194 °F
Function indication l l
Operating voltage indication l l
Cable structure mm2 3 x 0.25 3 x 0.25
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4

279
Plug
M 12 x 1
with lock nut
with moulded cable

All dimensions in mm (inches)

Terminal code
1 = brown
2=–
3 = blue 1 2

4 = black 4 3

3-wire 3-wire
Cable length Model description 1 GDK-M12US/S00-2 2 WDK-M12US/S00-2
2 m/6.56 ft Part number 413.9100.232 413.9100.234
Cable length Model description 1 GDK-M12US/S00-5 2 WDK-M12US/S00-5
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.233 413.9100.235

Material of cable sleeve PVC PVC

Material body/Contact carrier PUR PUR
Material of pull protection PA PA
Operating voltage max. 250 V AC/300 V DC 250 V AC/300 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 4A 4A
Temperature range min./max. –40 °C/+80 °C –40 °C/+80 °C
–40 °F/+176 °F –40 °F/+176 °F
Function indication – –
Operating voltage indication – –
Cable structure mm2 3 x 0.34 3 x 0.34
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4

Plug
M 12 x 1
with lock nut
with moulded cable

All dimensions in mm (inches)

Terminal code
1 = brown
2=–
3 = blue 1 2

4 = black 4 3

3-wire
Cable length Model description 3 WDK-M12US/G00-2
2 m/6.56 ft Part number 413.9100.280
Cable length Model description 3 WDK-M12US/G00-5
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.281

Material of cable sleeve PVC

Material body/Contact carrier PUR
Material of pull protection CuZn39Pb3
Operating voltage max. 250 V AC/300 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 4A
Temperature range min./max. –40 °C/+80 °C
–40 °F/+176 °F
Function indication –
Operating voltage indication –
Cable structure mm2 3 x 0.34
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4

280
AC plug
M 12 x 1
with lock nut
with moulded cable

All dimensions in mm (inches)

Terminal code
1 = black
2 = blue
3=– 1 2

4=– 4 3

2-wire 2-wire
Cable length Model description 1 GDK-M12AS/S00-2 2 WDK-M12AS/S00-2
2 m/6.56 ft Part number 413.9100.248 413.9100.250
Cable length Model description 1 GDK-M12AS/S00-5 2 WDK-M12AS/S00-5
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.249 413.9100.251

Sensors
Material of cable sleeve PVC PVC
Material body/Contact carrier PUR PUR
Material of pull protection PA PA
Operating voltage max. 250 V AC/300 V DC 250 V AC/300 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 4A 4A
Temperature range min./max. –40 °C/+80 °C –40 °C/+80 °C
–40 °F/+176 °F –40 °F/+176 °F
Function indication – –
Operating voltage indication – –
Cable structure mm2 2 x 0.5 2 x 0.5
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4

Plug
M 12 x 1
with lock nut
with moulded cable

Double LED

All dimensions in mm (inches)

Terminal code
1 = brown 1 2

2=– 4 3
3 = blue
4 = black
PNP 3-wire NPN 3-wire
Cable length Model description 3 WDK-M12PS/SL2-2 4 WDK-M12NS/SL2-2
2 m/6.56 ft Part number 413.9100.240 413.9100.242
Cable length Model description 3 WDK-M12PS/SL2-5 4 WDK-M12NS/SL2-5
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.241 413.9100.243

Material of cable sleeve PVC PVC

Material body/Contact carrier PUR PUR
Material of pull protection PA PA
Operating voltage max. 30 V DC 30 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 4A 4A
Temperature range min./max. –40 °C/+80 °C –40 °C/+80 °C
–40 °F/+176 °F –40 °F/+176 °F
Function indication l l
Operating voltage indication l l
Cable structure mm2 3 x 0.34 3 x 0.34
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4

281
Plug
M 12 x 1
with lock nut
with moulded cable

Double LED

All dimensions in mm (inches)

Terminal code
1 = brown 1 2

2 = white 4 3
3 = blue
4 = black
PNP 4-wire NPN 4-wire
Cable length Model description 1 WDK-M12PA/SL2-2PU 2 WDK-M12NA/SL2-2PU
2 m/6.56 ft Part number 413.9100.244 413.9100.246
Cable length Model description 1 WDK-M12PA/SL2-5PU 2 WDK-M12NA/SL2-5PU
5 m/16.4 ft Part number 413.9100.245 413.9100.247

Material of cable sleeve PUR PUR

Material body/Contact carrier PUR PUR
Material of pull protection PA PA
Operating voltage max. 30 V DC 30 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 4A 4A
Temperature range min./max. –40 °C/+80 °C –40 °C/+80 °C
–40 °F/+176 °F –40 °F/+176 °F
Function indication l l
Operating voltage indication l l
Cable structure mm2 4 x 0.25 4 x 0.25
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4

Plug
M 12 x 1
with lock nut
provide own cable

All dimensions in mm (inches)

Terminal code
1 = Plus
2 = NC
3 = Minus 1 2

4 = NO 4 3

Female plug Model description 3 WDA-M12UA/LO 3 GDA-M12UA/LO

Part number 413.9100.101 413.9100.102

Max. cable diameter mm 3-6.5 3-6.5

Cross section mm2 max. 0.75 0.75
Material body/Contact carrier PA PA
Material of pull protection CuZn39Pb3 CuZn39Pb3
Operating voltage max. 125 V AC/150 V DC 125 V AC/150 V DC
Current carrying capacity max. 4A 4A
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+90 °C –25 °C/+90 °C
–13 °F/+194 °F –13 °F/+194 °F
Function indication – –
Operating voltage indication – –
Cable structure mm2 – –
Protection type after installation IP 67/NEMA 4 IP 67/NEMA 4

282
Sensor testing unit

Sensor testing unit

Technical data
Model description Sensortester
Part number 651.0000.048
Stock status: Ex stock/Built to order l/–

Sensors
Function Sensor testing units for proximity sensors in
DC-2-wire and 3-wire technology.
Testing function: Indication of switching condition of
the sensor via visual and acoustic signal

Supply voltage 9 V monobloc battery (6LR61)

Output voltage 15 V DC, 20 mA stabilised
Housing Modified housing from the OR20 series
Temperature range min./max. –25 °C/+70 °C
Input signals NPN/PNP-3-wire, DC-2-wire, NAMUR

The sensor testing unit is suitable for LED green: Operating voltage indication The sensor testing units is provided with an
checking proximity sensors in DC 2-wire automatic switch-off mechanism,
and 3-wire technology. To indicate the LED red: Weak battery deactivating the device (if not in operation)
switching conditions, colour LEDs and an after approx. 30 s.
acoustic signal are used. LED yellow: Switching condition of sensor

Terminal assignment

283
284
285
Sensors
 Enclosures

Industrial enclosures Control enclosures Suspension systems

Model Page Model Page Model Page

Selection criteria and Selection criteria for

additional enclosure 288 CC-10
compact control enclosures
374 suspension systems 400
information • Cast aluminium design
• Aluminium cover frames Lightweight
• Front plates suspension system
402
• Modern industrial design series CS-2000 SL 45/60
Aluminium enclosures
CA Series
294 • Modular suspension
• High mechanical strength system for light loads
• High corrosion resistance Lightweight control
enclosure
382 • Al-connection profiles
with or without cable
• Perfect for external applications
• IP 65 rated series CC-2000 SL channels
• Accessories • Modular slim-line • Assembly access points on
• Component aluminium concept connecting components
aluminium enclosures 296 • Direct installation of
Medium load suspension
industry standard controls
• Various front plate system
408
mounting options series CS-2000 50/60/80
• standard and customer • Modular suspension
Polycarbonate enclosures
312 specific sizes available system for medium loads
CT series • Check list CC-2000 SL 388 • Steel connection profiles
and cable channels
• Good mechanical strength
• Suitable for external • Assembly access points on
applications Control enclosures connecting components
• IP 65 rated Type CC-4000
390
• Accessories
• Component polycarbonate • Modular aluminium
and ABS enclosures 314 enclosure concept
• Direct mounting of
Heavy load suspension
ABS enclosures
industry standard
system
422
controllers
CT series • Various front plate- series CS-2000 80/140
• Lower mechanical strength mounting options • Modular suspension
• Limited external • Standard and customer systems for very high
applications specific sizes loads
• IP 65 rated • Pedestal • Steel connection profiles
• Accessories • Check list CC-4000 396 and cable chanels
• Assembly access points on
connecting components

CT-Module 326 Suspension system

accessories
426
• Adaptable before, during
and after installation
• Variety of options
• No machining required
• Reduced stock holding

Polyester enclosures
CP series
360
• High mechanical strength
• Very high corrosion resistance
• Excellent for external
applications
• IP 65 rated
• Accessories
• Component polyester
enclosures

362
Enclosures for
Ex-applications
373

286
 Stainless products Appendix

Model Page Model Page

Cable glands
Compact control
enclosures
428 446
Type CC-480 NR
• Material B.S.I. 304
• Removal hinged front
door

Control enclosures
CC-600/CC-600 NR
430
• Material painted mild steel or
stainless steel B.S.I. 304
• IP 65/66 Ingress protection
• Front plate and hinged rear door

Suspension system for

light to medium loads
434
Type CS-480 NR
• Material B.S.I. 304
• IP 65 Ingress protection

Suspension system for

medium to heavy loads
438
Type CS-600 NR
• Material B.S.I. 304 or
anodised AI.
• IP 66 Ingress protection
• Modular system

Available on request:

Enclosures
Terminal boxes
Type CV-NR
• Material 1.4301
• IP 66 Ingress protection
• foamed gasket

Wall cabinets
Type CW-NR
• Material 1.4301
• IP 66 Ingress protection
• Includes mounting plate

287
Selection criteria Customised service The BERNSTEIN
for enclosures quick release screw

The following questions will help you to What does the BERNSTEIN
select the most appropriate enclosure for customised service include?
your type of application from the wide This service can save you the inconvenience
range of the BERNSTEIN product line: of machining and enables you to use the
enclosure - as delivered by BERNSTEIN –
directly in the production process.
1. What are the dimensions of the
required enclosure? l Mechanical machining, even intricate
E.g. dimensions of printed circuit board, outlines, using modern CNC machining
number of terminals, mechanical centres
machining for cable glands, etc. l Special coatings in accordance with Invented and patented by BERNSTEIN, the
> select the required external dimensions customer specifications quick release capability offers a useful
l HF-proof designs, given special coatings innovation to our customers. The quick
and conductive gaskets release screws save time and money if the
2. What is the operating environment? l Screen-printings and engravings on the enclosure is frequently opened and closed
E.g. moisture, climate, temperature, high- enclosure surface and comes with the following features:
frequency radiation, etc. l Mounting of individual components 1. Released through just a 90° turning
> select enclosure material, surface from the wide range of BERNSTEIN action – closing and opening the
composition, gasket material accessories (external and internal hinges, enclosure with the quick release screws
mounting plates, mounting rails, termi- is considerably faster than with any
nals, cable glands) other standard locking system (e.g. lid
3. What mechanical stress will occur? l If required, BERNSTEIN aluminium enclo- screws). This saves time and therefore
E.g. impact stress, pressure, bending, etc. sures can be further protection by apply- money. All other mechanical characteris-
> select enclosure material ing the environmentally-friendly C 6100 tics of the enclosure and the IP 65
Alodine yellow-passivating method, for protection class are unaffected.
use in corrosive surroundings. The 2. Easy lock/release at a glance the user
4. What chemical resistance is application of an additional primer and can check whether the quick release is
required? final coat further guarantee resistance to open or closed. This check does not
E.g. cleaning agents, oils, lubricants, etc. corrosion. involve any mechanical testing.
> select enclosure material 3. No accidental opening caused by vibra-
tion or shock. The quick release locks
into place and is held there by a spring
5. What mechanical machining is action. Accidental opening is impossible,
necessary? thus increasing safety
E.g. plugs, cable glands, windows, etc. 4. Easy mounting – for any machining,
> draw up a model sketch for mechanical coating or labelling that may be required
machining by the customer at a later date, the
quick release can be easily removed and
then re-fitted. The screws are self-
6. Which accessories are required? retaining in the lid.
E.g. mounting plate, mounting rail, BERNSTEIN quick-release internal hinge.
terminals, windows, external hinges, Simple, convenient, cost effective in
internal hinges, etc. addition to the quick release screws,
> select required accessories BERNSTEIN offers the practical quick-
release internal hinge for mounting
enclosure lids on bases.
7. Are any special made-to-order items The alternative flexible internal hinges can
necessary? be easily mounted on the enclosure with-
E.g. specific company colours, screen- out mechanical machining and can hold
printings of logos or symbols, etc. the enclosure lid after opening. In this way,
> select and determine colour, screen- the enclosure lid is both strain-relieved and
printing, etc. captive.

288
Protection class specification
In accordance with IEC 529,
EN 60529, VDE 470 P 1

The protection class of a closed device 1st number Meaning

indicates the level of protection from Code Degree of protection from shock and against particles
external factors. It includes the degree of
protection afforded to personnel (from 0 non-protected
touching live parts) and protection of the
device from the ingress of particles and 1 protected against solid particles < 50 mm Ø
water. BERNSTEIN standard enclosures
generally conform to the protection class 2 protected against medium-sized particles < 12 mm Ø
IP 65.
3 protected against small particles < 2.5 mm Ø

4 protected against small particles < 2.5 mm Ø

5 protected against dust ingress

6 dust-proof and complete protection from accidental contact

2nd number Meaning

Code Degree of protection against water

0 non-protected

1 protected against vertically dripping water

2 protected against dripping water, when tilted up to 15 degree

3 protected against spraying water

4 protected against splashing water

5 protected against water jets

6 protected against heavy seas or powerful jets of water

Enclosures
7 protected against water immersion

8 protected against submersion

BERNSTEIN-Enclosure standard IP 65
BERNSTEIN-Enclosure in IP 66, IP 67 on request

Protection class specification Example: Protection class IP 65

In accordance with IEC 529, the 1st number (6):
specification of the protection class consists complete protection from accidental
of a two-digit number. contact with live elements or from moving
parts = protection from dust ingress

Meaning of the 1st number: 2nd number (5):

Protection from accidental contact and a jet of water from any direction will not
ingress of foreign particles damage the enclosure = protection against
water jets
Meaning of the 2nd number:
Protection against water ingress

289
Mechanical stability

Mechanical stability is a major factor in Material property Standard Unit Aluminium Polycarbonate ABS Polyester
determining the appropriate material. The Density DIN 53 479 g/cm3 2.65 1.2 1.05 1.8
following table specifies the essential Impact strength DIN 53 453 mJ/mm2 150–300 65 60 80
properties of aluminium, polycarbonate, Impact value DIN 53 453 mJ/mm2 90–200 20 10 4
ABS and polyester. Tensile strength DIN 53 455 N/mm2 180–300 65 43 45
Elongation at tear DIN 53 455 % 60–90 90 20 20
Young’s modules (bending test) DIN 53 457 N/mm2 75 000 2300 2100 6500
Limiting bending stress DIN 53 452 N/mm2 95 90 100
Burning behaviour UL 94 Class V2 HB V0
Spec. contact resistance DIN 53 482 o x cm 1015 1013 3 x 1014
Surface resistance DIN 53 482 o ≥ 1015 4 x 1014 > 1012
Dielectric strength DIN 53 481 kV/mm 25–40 24 25–40
Thermal conductivity (20 °C) DIN 52 612 W/mK 120–160 0.21 0.18 0.25
Electr. conduct. capacity (20 °C) m/o mm2 15–22

This diagram shows how different high

hoch
enclosure materials react under mechanical
stress and in a harsh operating environ-
ment.

Mechanische
Mechanical
stability
Festigkeit

low
niedrig Corrosions resistance
Korrosionsfestigkeit high
hoch
(Outdoor usage)
(Außeneinsatzeignung)

290
Chemical resistance

The degree of resistance to specific Chemicals ABS Polycarbonate Polyester Aluminium

chemical substances depends on the Acetic acid 10% m 10% 40% +
material used for the enclosure. The Acetone – – – +
following table specifies the resistance of Acid ó m + +
BERNSTEIN aluminium, polycarbonate, ABS Ammonia – – – +
and polyester enclosures to certain Benzene – – + +
chemicals frequently used in industrial Brake fluid ó – + +
surroundings. Please note that the table Butane ó ó +
only gives standard values, since materials Butanol ó ó + +
react differently to variations in chemical Calcium chloride ó + + +
concentration or ambient temperatures. Carbon disulphide ó – – +
Furthermore, materials may react different- Carbon tetrachloride – ó + +
ly when exposed to several chemicals Caustic soda – – 40% °
simultaneously. Appropriate preliminary Chlorobenzene – – + +
tests are therefore recommended. Citric acid 10% 10% + +
Detergent ó + ó +
Our customers also have access to our in- Diesel oil + m + +
house information service. Engine oils ó + + +
Formaldehyde + ó 30% +
Formic acid – 30% 10% °
Freon 113 ó + + +
Fruit juice ó + + +
Fuel oil m m + –
Glycerine + m + m

Enclosures
Hydraulic oil ó + + +
Hydrochloric acid 10% m 20% + +
Lactic acid + 10% + +
Linseed oil ó + + m
Lubricating oil ó + + +
Methanol ó – – m
Methylene chloride ó – – +
Mineral oil + + + +
Nitric acid 30% 10% 10% +
Oil of turpentine ó ó + m
Petrol – m + +
Potash lye ó – – +
Potassium chloride ó + + +
Potassium hydroxide + ó – +
Soda ash ó + + +
Sodium chloride ó + + +
Sodium hydrate + ó – +
Sulphuric acid 30% 50% 70% +
Tartaric ó 10% +
Toluol – – + +
Trichloroethylene – ó – +
Water (dist. water, river,
tap, sea water) + + + +
The tests were performed at room tem- Xylene – – + +
perature, if no other value is specified. If Zinc sulphate ó + + m
different substances are mixed, resistance +: resistant to all concentrations
may alter. No responsibility can therefore %: resistant to max. % concentrations
be accepted for the accuracy of specifica- m: limited resistance
tions. –: non-resistant
ó: not known

291
Customised service

Advantages The BERNSTEIN comprehensive custo- Coating

The extensive BERNSTEIN customising mising service meets all requirements We can supply enclosures in any colour or
service for standard enclosures offers some shade both RAL and non-standard colours.
distinct advantages: Drilling Standard and special colours are applied as
We can drill holes in all enclosure materials wet or powder coating.
l The custom-made enclosure can be used to meet your own specifications.
immediately in the production process. Screen-printing
l Reducing production time and range, Threading We can print your enclosure surfaces and
transferring risk to the supplier. We can cut metric screw threads from front plates in single-colour or multi-colour,
l Saving time by minimised handling and M 12 x 1.5 to M 63 x 1.5. We can, if as required, using durable colours suitable
reduced logistics expenditure. required, also provide special thread types for industrial usage.
l Economical machining by BERNSTEIN (PG threads, imperial threads and NPT
specialists, using up-to-date equipment threads). Engraving
and thereby lowering costs. Our computer-controlled engraving mach-
l The customer benefits from BERNSTEIN’s Milling ines engrave all types of fonts and outlines.
wealth of experience in providing a The experts in our CNC machining centres
customised service. can also undertake complicated milling on Assembly
your behalf. All machining procedures are Components are, of course, assembled to
What does the BERNSTEIN customised archived for each individual customer so meet your own individual requirements.
service include? that they then can be repeated whenever Just select the mounting plates, mounting
This service can save you the inconvenience necessary. This ensures that a consistently rails, terminal blocks, cable glands etc.
of machining and enables you to use the high standard is maintained. from the wide range of BERNSTEIN acces-
enclosure – as delivered by BERNSTEIN – sories.
directly in the production process. Passivating
If required, BERNSTEIN aluminium enclosu-
l Mechanical machining, even intricate res can be further protected by applying
outlines, using modern CNC machining the environmentally-friendly C 6100 Alo-
centres dine yellow-passivating method, for use in
l Special coatings in accordance with corrosive surroundings. The application of
customer specifications an additional primer and final coat further
l HF-proof designs, given special coatings guarantee resistance to corrosion.
and conductive gaskets
l Screen-printings and engravings on the
enclosure surface
l Mounting of individual components
from the wide range of BERNSTEIN
accessories (external and internal hinges,
mounting plates, mounting rails, termi-
nals, cable glands)

292
BERNSTEIN Reference edges Minimum quantities
manufacturing standard for BERNSTEIN
machining standards

Technical information Series In order to keep enclosure machining as

for enclosure machining CA-020 to CA-240, CA-270 to CA-300 cost-effective for the user as possible, the
As an ISO 9001 certified company, CT-50 to CT-82, CP-140 to CP-300 following minimum purchase quantities are
BERNSTEIN has defined a manufacturing suggested:
standard that is applied to all machining
orders without alternative customer Name Minimum
specification. CA-020 … CA-080 20 pieces
Side E
CA-100 … CA-190 10 pieces
(Base)
Dimension tolerances CA-210 … CA-310 10 pieces
When preparing details for enclosure CA-330 … CA-480 5 pieces
machining (see following drawings, show- CC-280 … CC-480 5 pieces
ing orientation of enclosure when set up CP-140 … CP-195 20 pieces
for machining), tolerances used for the first CP-220 … CP-320 10 pieces
machining operation on each set up, are CP-330 … CP-460 5 pieces
according to ISO 2768-mH. CT-50 … CT-76 20 pieces
CT-78 … CT-89 10 pieces
If other dimensions or reference edges are Side B (A, C, D)
used, the following maximum general (Base)
These quantities should be regarded as the
tolerances are applicable for the first minimum, if the customised enclosures are
machining operation on each enclosure to be produced economically. Production
per set up (see table below). includes mechanical machining, special
coating, screen-printing, engraving or
Side F
Tolerances between further machining (Lid)
assembly of accessories. BERNSTEIN
operations compared to each other can be distributors will of course be pleased to
limited to ± 0.1 mm. advise you.

General tolerances
Standard programme
Series
Die-casting (dc) DIN 1688 CA-250, CA-310 to CA-480
CA-020 to CA-310 Part 4 GTA 13/5 CT-84 to CT-91, CP-320 to CPS-590
CA-350, CA-370, (August 1986)

Enclosures
CA-380, CA-400,
CA-450
Chilled casting (cc) DIN 1688
CA-330, CA-360 Part 3 GTA 14/5
CA-390, CA-420, (October 1980) Side E
CA-460, CA-470, (Base)
CA-480
Resin-impregnated DIN 16901-130
polyester moulding (November 1982)
compounds
CP-140 to CP-280
Resin-impregnated DIN 16901-140
polyester mats (November 1982)
CP-300 to CPS-590
PC/ABS DIN 16901-130
CT-50 to CT-91 (November 1982)
Sand casting (G) DIN 1688 Side B (A, C, D)

Part 1 GTA 15/5

(October 1980)

Side F
(Lid)

293
Aluminium enclosures
CA series

BERNSTEIN aluminium enclosures are

ideally suited to housing electrical,
electronic or pneumatic components.
Their high mechanical strength ensures
excellent protection against impact and all
sizes are sealed to IP 65, according to
IEC 529.

BERNSTEIN aluminium enclosures are fitted

with copper earthing screws (M4 or M6) in
both the base and lid, the surface below
the screws is unpainted allowing a good
earth connection to be made. The captive
lid screws are made of stainless steel and
are held in place by a lock integrated in the
lid. A gasket (for standard enclosures) is
factory-fitted, and ensures conformance Attachment points inside the enclosure can Gasket
with the protection class. BERNSTEIN be used to hold equipment in place Neoprene round seal (siliconised)
aluminium enclosures are surface-coated in (mounting rail, mounting plate, printed alternative:
RAL 7001 (silver-grey), as standard. circuit board etc.). Alternatively, the Neoprene round seal
earthing points may be used. These inner (silicone-free)
BERNSTEIN aluminium enclosures are either attachment points are situated at different Silicone round seal
die-cast or chill-cast. The dimension table heights and positions. (Refer to the
shows the production method used for illustrations for detailed positions.) Lid screws
each respective enclosure. Stainless steel, captive, multi-purpose cross
Technical data head
Material alternative:
Die-cast aluminium or AlSi 12 (Cu) chill- – Stainless steel quarter turn quick release
cast (die-cast types only)
– Stainless steel hexagonal
socket head screws
– Lead-sealed steel lid screws
(9 S 20 K), slotted head

Coating
RAL 7001 (silver-grey)
alternative:
– Special RAL colours
– Special coatings

Temperature range
-40 °C to +80 °C (neoprene gasket)
alternative:
-50 °C to +130 °C (silicone gasket)
or -30 °C to +100 °C
(explosion-hazardous area)

Protection class
IP 65
alternative:
higher protection class by request

Approval
PTB No. Ex 83/3120
PTB No. Ex-90C.3119
PTB No. Ex-90.C.3117 U
German Lloyd: No. 91 187-84HH
SEV 97.1 10396
UL: File E 168772 (N)

294
Accessories for
aluminium enclosures

External hinges
For hinged attachment of the enclosure lid. Swivelling
angle of lid approx. 155°. Aluminium casting,
RAL 7001 coating. Machining required to fit.
Drill template is supplied.

Mounting plates Internal hinges Silicone lid gasket

Galvanised sheet steel (thickness: For hinged attachment of the enclosure lid. Swivelling Improved temperature range (-50 °C to +130 °C).
CA-060 to CA-310, CA-350 to CA-400: angle of lid approx. 95°. Made of stainless steel. Standard type made of silicone foam.
1.5 mm; CA-330, CA-420 to CA-480: 2.5 mm) allows Machining required to fit.
mounting of additional equipment.

Aluminium enclosures – product line

Dimensions/mm Aluminium enclosures Cast type
dc = die casting
L x W x H Part number Type cc = chilled casting
50 x 45 x 30 102.0.0000.00 CA-020 dc
58 x 64 x 36 106.0.0000.00 CA-060 dc
Mounting rails 98 x 64 x 36 108.0.0000.00 CA-080 dc
Standard rails TS-15, TS-32 or TS-35 (steel),
150 x 64 x 36 110.0.0000.00 CA-100 dc
yellow-passivated for attachment of terminal blocks.
75 x 80 x 57 113.0.0000.00 CA-130 dc
75 x 80 x 57 114.0.0000.00 CA-140 dc

Enclosures
125 x 80 x 57 115.0.0000.00 CA-150 dc
125 x 80 x 57 116.0.0000.00 CA-160 dc
175 x 80 x 57 117.0.0000.00 CA-170 dc
175 x 80 x 57 118.0.0000.00 CA-180 dc
250 x 80 x 57 119.0.0000.00 CA-190 dc
122 x 122 x 80 121.0.0000.00 CA-210 dc
122 x 122 x 90 121.0.0000.50 CA-215 dc
122 x 122 x 80 122.0.0000.00 CA-220 dc
220 x 122 x 80 123.0.0000.00 CA-230 dc
220 x 122 x 90 123.0.0000.50 CA-235 dc
Earthing rails 220 x 122 x 80 124.0.0000.00 CA-240 dc
Galvanised steel for connecting and
360 x 122 x 80 125.0.0000.00 CA-250 dc
routing of protective earth connection.
160 x 160 x 90 127.0.0000.00 CA-270 dc
160 x 160 x 90 128.0.0000.00 CA-280 dc
260 x 160 x 90 129.0.0000.00 CA-290 dc
260 x 160 x 90 130.0.0000.00 CA-300 dc
360 x 160 x 90 131.0.0000.00 CA-310 dc
560 x 160 x 90 133.0.0000.00 CA-330 cc
200 x 230 x 110 135.0.0000.00 CA-350 dc
200 x 230 x 180 136.0.0000.00 CA-360 cc
280 x 230 x 110 137.0.0000.00 CA-370 dc
330 x 230 x 110 138.0.0000.00 CA-380 dc
330 x 230 x 180 139.0.0000.00 CA-390 cc
External attachment brackets 401 x 230 x 110 140.0.0000.00 CA-400 dc
Stainless steel for mounting enclosures without opening
600 x 230 x 110 142.0.0000.00 CA-420 cc
the lid.
Can be mounted in 90° steps at the base of the 402 x 310 x 110 145.0.0000.00 CA-450 dc
enclosure. 402 x 310 x 180 146.0.0000.00 CA-460 cc
600 x 310 x 110 147.0.0000.00 CA-470 cc
600 x 310 x 180 148.0.0000.00 CA-480 cc

295
Component overview
for aluminium enclosures
CA series
**) Assembled on 2 mounting rails
**) Assembled on 3 mounting rails
The number of terminals is reduced
when partitions are used.

Model Weidmüller Phoenix Wieland Entrelec Phoenix

Block terminal Block terminal Block terminal Terminal block Terminal block
Terminal width (mm): 5.2 6.2 5.2 6.2 8.2 10.2 12.2 5.2 6.2 7.5 5.2 6.2 8.2 10.2
Single core mm2 4 4 4 2.5 4 4 4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 4 10 16 25 2.5 4 10 4 4 10 16
Stranded mm2 4 4 4 2.5 4 4 4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 4 2.5 4 6 10 16 1.5 4 6 2.5 4 6 10
Nominal voltage V 380 380 380 380 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 250 380 750 750 750 750 750 500 500 500 750 750 750 750
Loading capacityt A 36 36 36 25 36 36 36 25 25 25 25 20 35 26 35 46 63 85 27 36 65 36 36 65 87
Terminal bridging – – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m m m – m – m m m m
Mounting rail TS 15 – – – – – – – – – – – m m – m – – – m m m – – – –
TS 32 m – – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m m – – – m m m m
TS 35 m – – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m m – – – m m m m
9.40.1.0100.00

9.40.1.0090.00

9.40.1.0130.00

9.40.1.0010.00

9.40.1.0020.00

9.40.1.0030.00

9.40.1.0040.00

9.40.1.0050.00

KL-16/12 9.40.1.0060.00

KL-16/16 9.40.1.0070.00

KL-16/20 9.40.1.0080.00

DR 1.5/5 9.40.2.1270.00

9.40.2.0940.00

MA 2.5/5 9.40.2.1090.00

9.40.2.1030.00

9.40.2.1040.00

M 10/10 9.40.2.1050.00

M 16/12 9.40.2.1060.00

9.40.2.0010.00

MBK 5/E 9.40.2.0020.00

9.40.2.0030.00

9.40.2.0050.00

9.40.2.0070.00

9.40.2.0090.00

9.40.2.0110.00
Part number

MBK 10
KL-16/8
MK 3/4

UK 3 N

UK 5 N
G 5/12

DR 4/6

UK 10

UK 16
BK 12

M 4/6

M 6/8
G 5/4

G 5/6

MBK
BK 4

BK 6

Type
CA-020 – – – 1 – – – – – – – – – – 1 – – – – – – 1 – – –
CA-060 1 – – – 1 – – – – – – 4 – – – – – – 4 – – – – – –
CA-080 – 1 – – – 1 – 1 1 – – 10 – – – – – – 12 – – – – – –
CA-100 – – 1 – – – 1 – – 1 1 20 – – – – – – 20 – – – – – –
CA-130 1 1 – – 1 1 – 1 – – – 6 4 – – – – – 6 4 – – – – –
CA-140 1 1 – – 1 1 – 1 – – – 6 4 – – – – – 6 4 4 – – – –
CA-150 – 1 1 – – 1 1 1 – – – 16 13 – – – – – 16 13 – – – – –
CA-160 – 1 1 – – 1 1 1 – – – 16 13 – – – – – 16 13 10 – – – –
CA-170 – – 1 – – – – – – 1 – 26 21 – – – – – 26 21 – – – – –
CA-180 – – 1 – – – 1 – – 1 – 26 21 – – – – – 26 21 17 – – – –
CA-190 – – 2 – – – 2 – 2 – – 39 33 – – – – – 39 33 27 – – – –
CA-210/215/220 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 12 10 8 6 5 – – – 12 10 8 6
CA-230/235/240 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 31 26 19 15 13 – – – 31 26 19 15
CA-250 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 58 49 37 29 24 – – – 58 49 37 29
CA-270/280 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 19 16 12 9 8 – – – 19 16 12 9
CA-290/300 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 38 32 24 19 16 – – – 38 32 24 19
CA-310 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 57 48 36 29 24 – – – 57 48 36 29
CA-330 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 96 80 61 48 40 – – – 96 80 61 48
CA-350 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 27 22 17 13 11 – – – 27 22 17 13
CA-350*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 54 44 34 26 – – – – 54 44 34 26
CA-360 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 27 22 17 13 11 – – – 27 22 17 13
CA-360*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 54 44 34 26 – – – – 54 44 34 –
CA-370 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 42 35 27 21 18 – – – 42 35 27 21
CA-370*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 84 70 54 42 – – – – 84 70 54 42
CA-380 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 52 43 33 26 22 – – – 52 43 33 26
CA-380*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 104 86 66 52 – – – – 104 86 66 52
CA-390 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 52 43 33 26 22 – – – 52 43 33 26
CA-390*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 104 86 66 52 – – – – 104 86 66 52
CA-400 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 66 55 41 33 27 – – – 66 55 41 33
CA-400*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 132 110 82 66 – – – – 132 110 82 66
CA-420 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 104 87 65 53 44 – – – 104 87 65 53
CA-420*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 208 174 130 106 – – – – 208 174 130 106
CA-450 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 65 55 41 33 28 – – – 65 55 41 33
CA-450*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 130 110 82 66 56 – – – 130 110 82 66
CA-450**) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 195 165 123 99 – – – – 195 165 123 99
CA-460 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 65 55 41 33 28 – – – 65 55 41 33
CA-460*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 130 110 82 66 56 – – – 130 110 82 66
CA-460**) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 195 165 123 99 – – – – 195 165 123 99
CA-470 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 104 87 65 53 44 – – – 104 87 65 53
CA-470*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 208 174 130 106 88 – – – 208 174 130 106
CA-470**) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 312 261 195 159 – – – – 312 261 195 159
CA-480 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 104 87 65 53 44 – – – 104 87 65 53
CA-480*) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 208 174 130 106 88 – – – 208 174 130 106
CA-480**) – – – – – – – – – – – – – 312 261 195 159 – – – – 312 261 195 159

296
 Siemens WAGO Weidmüller
Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block
Screw terminals Caged tension spring 6.2 10.2 6.2 10.2 4.2 5.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.2 10.2 12.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 6.5 8.2 10.2 12.2 5.2 6.2
4 4 10 25 4 4 10 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 25 4 6
2.5 4 6 16 2.5 4 6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 1.5 4 2.5 4 6 10 15 2.5 4
750 750 750 750 750 750 750 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 250 380 750 750 750 750 750 750 750
26 35 46 85 36 36 65 26 26 26 26 18 26 26 34 34 44 61 82 27 36 27 36 47 65 87 26 34
m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m
– m – – – – – m m – – – – – – – – – – m m m – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m – –
m m m m m m m – – m m m m m m m m m m – – – – – – – m m
9.40.2.4000.00

9.40.2.4010.00

9.40.2.4020.00

8WA1204 9.40.2.4030.00

9.40.2.4040.00

9.40.2.4050.00

9.40.2.4060.00

264-701 9.40.2.3020.00

264-721 9.40.2.3030.00

264-711 9.40.2.3210.00

264-731 9.40.2.3220.00

279-621 9.40.2.3230.00

280-601 9.40.2.0930.00

280-901 9.40.2.3240.00

281-601 9.40.2.3250.00

281-901 9.40.2.3260.00

282-601 9.40.2.3270.00

284-601 9.40.2.3280.00

283-601 9.40.2.3290.00

AKZ 2.5 PA 9.40.2.0500.00

9.40.2.0130.00

SAK 2.5 PA 9.40.2.0140.00

9.40.2.0150.00

SAK 6 NPA 9.40.2.0160.00

SAK 10 PA 9.40.2.0470.00

SAK 16 PA 9.40.2.0170.00

WDU 2.5 9.40.2.1460.00

9.40.2.1470.00
8WA1011-

8WA1011-

8WA1011-

8WA2011-

8WA2011-

8WA2011-

SAK 4 PA
AKZ 4 PA

WDU 4
1DG11

1DG20
1DH11

1DH20
1DF11

1DF20

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 5 3 – – – – – – – – – – 6 4 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 5 3 – – – – – – – – – – 6 4 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 13 8 – – – – – – – – – – 16 12 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 13 8 – – – – – – – – – – 16 12 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 21 13 – – – – – – – – – – 26 20 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 21 13 – – – – – – – – – – 26 20 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 34 20 – – – – – – – – – – 41 33 – – – – – – –
10 10 8 6 12 10 8 – – 12 7 18 – – – – – – – – – 10 9 7 6 5 12 10
27 25 20 16 31 26 20 – – 28 17 43 – – – – – – – – – 26 24 20 15 12 31 26
50 46 37 30 58 49 37 – – 51 31 43 – – – – – – – – – 48 45 37 29 24 58 48

Enclosures
16 15 12 9 19 16 12 – – 10 17 25 20 20 17 17 12 10 8 – – 16 15 12 9 8 19 16
32 30 24 19 38 32 24 – – 33 20 50 40 40 33 33 25 20 16 – – 33 30 25 19 16 38 32
49 45 37 29 57 48 36 – – 50 30 76 60 60 50 50 37 30 28 – – 48 45 36 29 24 57 48
83 76 62 49 96 80 60 – – 83 50 125 100 100 83 83 62 50 41 – – 86 74 61 48 40 96 80
22 21 17 13 26 22 17 – – 23 14 35 28 28 23 23 17 14 11 – – 22 20 17 13 11 26 22
44 42 34 26 52 44 34 – – 46 28 70 56 56 46 46 34 28 – – – 44 40 34 26 – 52 44
22 20 17 13 26 22 10 – – 23 14 35 28 28 23 23 17 14 11 – – 22 20 17 13 11 26 22
44 40 34 26 52 49 32 – – 46 28 70 56 56 46 46 34 28 – – – 44 40 34 26 – 52 44
36 33 27 21 42 35 26 – – 36 22 55 44 44 37 37 27 22 18 – – 35 32 26 21 18 42 35
72 66 54 42 84 70 52 – – 72 44 110 88 88 74 74 54 44 – – – 70 64 52 42 – 84 70
44 51 33 26 51 43 32 – – 45 27 68 54 54 45 45 33 27 22 – – 43 40 32 26 22 51 43
88 82 66 52 102 86 64 – – 90 54 136 108 108 90 90 66 54 – – – 86 86 64 52 – 102 86
44 40 33 26 51 43 32 – – 45 27 68 54 54 45 45 33 27 22 – – 43 40 32 26 22 51 43
88 80 66 52 102 86 64 – – 90 54 136 108 108 90 90 66 54 – – – 86 86 64 52 – 102 86
56 52 42 33 65 54 41 – – 57 34 86 68 68 57 57 42 34 28 – – 54 50 41 33 27 65 54
112 104 84 66 130 108 82 – – 114 68 172 136 136 114 114 84 68 – – – 108 100 – 66 – 130 108
89 82 67 53 103 86 65 – – 90 54 135 108 108 90 90 67 54 45 – – 87 80 65 52 44 103 86
178 164 134 106 206 172 130 – – 180 108 270 216 216 180 180 134 108 – – – 174 160 – 104 – 206 172
56 52 42 34 65 55 41 – – 57 34 86 69 69 57 57 43 34 28 – – 54 50 41 33 27 65 54
112 104 84 68 130 110 82 – – 114 68 172 138 138 114 114 86 68 56 – – 108 100 82 66 54 130 108
163 156 126 102 195 165 123 – – 171 102 258 207 207 171 171 129 102 – – – 162 150 – 99 – 195 162
56 52 42 33 65 54 41 – – 57 34 86 68 68 57 57 42 34 28 – – 54 50 41 33 27 65 54
112 104 84 66 130 108 82 – – 114 68 172 136 136 114 114 84 68 56 – – 108 100 82 66 54 130 108
163 156 126 99 195 162 123 – – 171 102 258 204 204 171 171 126 102 – – – 162 150 – 99 – 195 162
89 82 67 53 103 68 65 – – 90 54 135 108 108 90 90 67 54 45 – – 87 80 65 52 44 103 86
178 164 134 106 206 172 130 – – 180 108 270 216 216 180 180 134 108 90 – – 174 160 130 104 88 206 172
267 246 201 159 309 258 195 – – 270 162 405 324 324 270 270 201 162 – – – 261 240 – 156 – 309 258
89 82 67 53 103 86 65 – – 90 54 135 108 108 90 90 67 54 45 – – 87 80 65 52 44 103 86
178 164 134 106 206 172 130 – – 180 108 270 216 216 180 180 134 108 90 – – 174 160 130 104 88 206 172
267 246 201 159 309 258 195 – – 270 162 405 324 324 270 270 201 162 – – – 261 240 – 156 – 309 258

297
 50 x 45 x 30 mm 58 x 64 x 36 mm
CA-020 CA-060
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID
D EC K EL
LID

U NTBASE
ER T EI L

BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CA-020 CA-060

Weight (g) 70 160
External dimensions (mm) 50 x 45 x 30 58 x 64 x 36
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Coated, with gasket and lid screws 102.0.0000.00 l 106.0.0000.00 l
Coated, with gasket and hex. socket head screws – –
Coated, with silicone gasket and lid screws – 106.0.0940.00
Coated, with HF gasket and lid screws – 106.0.0080.00
Saltwater-proof coating, with gasket and lid screws 102.0.0100.00 106.0.0100.00
Saltwater-proof coating, passivated, lid screws with gasket 102.0.0060.00 106.0.0060.00
Unwashed, unpainted, no accessories 102.0.0340.00 106.0.0380.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate – 951.1.0010.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – 982.0.0000.00 l
TS 32 mounting rail – –
TS 35 mounting rail – –
Grounding rail – –
External attachment brackets – –
External hinges side – –
Internal hinges with lid guiding** – –
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) – 923.1.0050.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Side C/D 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

298
98 x 64 x 36 mm 150 x 64 x 36 mm 75 x 80 x 57 mm
CA-080 CA-100 CA-130
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID

LID LID

BASE
BASE
BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CA-080 CA-100 CA-130
220 330 280
98 x 64 x 36 150 x 64 x 36 75 x 80 x 57
Part number Part number Part number
108.0.0000.00 l 110.0.0000.00 l 113.0.0000.00 l
– – –
108.0.0090.00 110.0.0760.00 113.0.0820.00
108.0.0080.00 110.0.0080.00 113.0.0080.00
108.0.0100.00 110.0.0100.00 113.0.0100.00
108.0.0060.00 110.0.0060.00 113.0.0060.00
108.0.0420.00 110.0.0530.00 113.0.0570.00

951.1.0020.00 l 951.1.0030.00 l 982.3.0150.00 l

982.0.0050.00 l 982.0.0110.00 l 982.0.0020.00 l
– – –
– – –
– – –
– – –
– – 980.1.0440.00 l
– – –
923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 6 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 5 2 1 0 0 0 0 0
Side C/D 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

299
 75 x 80 x 57 mm 125 x 80 x 57 mm
CA-140 CA-150
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID LID

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CA-140 CA-150

Weight (g) 280 435
External dimensions (mm) 75 x 80 x 57 125 x 80 x 57
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Coated, with gasket and lid screws 114.0.0000.00 l 115.0.0000.00 l
Coated, with gasket and hex. socket head screws – –
Coated, with silicone gasket and lid screws 114.0.0860.00 115.0.0090.00
Coated, with HF gasket and lid screws 114.0.0080.00 115.0.0080.00
Saltwater-proof coating, with gasket and lid screws 114.0.0100.00 115.0.0100.00
Saltwater-proof coating, passivated, lid screws with gasket 114.0.0060.00 115.0.0060.00
Unwashed, unpainted, no accessories 114.0.0800.00 115.0.0190.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 951.1.0040.00 l 982.3.0160.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail 982.0.0350.00 l 982.0.0100.00 l
TS 32 mounting rail – –
TS 35 mounting rail – –
Grounding rail – –
External attachment brackets – –
External hinges side 980.1.0440.00 l 980.1.0440.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** – –
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 5 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 10 4 3 2 0 0 0 0
Side C/D 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

300
125 x 80 x 57 mm 175 x 80 x 57 mm 175 x 80 x 57 mm
CA-160 CA-170 CA-180
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID LID LID

BASE BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CA-160 CA-170 CA-180
435 530 530
125 x 80 x 57 175 x 80 x 57 175 x 80 x 57
Part number Part number Part number
116.0.0000.00 l 117.0.0000.00 l 118.0.0000.00 l
– – –
116.0.1380.00 117.0.0090.00 118.0.0440.00
116.0.0080.00 117.0.0080.00 118.0.0080.00
116.0.0100.00 117.0.0100.00 118.0.0100.00
116.0.0060.00 117.0.0060.00 118.0.0060.00
116.0.0450.00 117.0.0160.00 118.0.0400.00

951.1.0050.00 l 982.3.0170.00 l 951.1.0060.00 l

982.0.0360.00 l 982.0.0140.00 l 982.0.0370.00 l
– – –
– – –
– – –
– – –
980.1.0440.00 l 980.1.0440.00 l 980.1.0440.00 l
– – –
923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 10 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 14 6 4 4 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 14 6 4 4 0 0 0 0
Side C/D 4 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 4 2 1 1 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

301
 250 x 80 x 57 mm 122 x 122 x 80 mm
CA-190 CA-210
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID

LID

BASE
BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CA-190 CA-210

Weight (g) 710 940
External dimensions (mm) 250 x 80 x 57 122 x 122 x 80
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Coated, with gasket and lid screws 119.0.0000.00 l 121.0.0000.00 l
Coated, with gasket and hex. socket head screws – 121.0.0010.00
Coated, with silicone gasket and lid screws 119.0.0480.00 121.0.0150.00
Coated, with HF gasket and lid screws 119.0.0080.00 121.0.0080.00
Saltwater-proof coating, with gasket and lid screws 119.0.0100.00 121.0.0100.00
Saltwater-proof coating, passivated, lid screws with gasket 119.0.0060.00 121.0.0060.00
Unwashed, unpainted, no accessories 119.0.0260.00 121.0.0160.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 982.3.0210.00 l 951.1.1500.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail 982.0.0190.00 l –
TS 32 mounting rail – 982.1.0000.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail – 982.2.0010.00
Grounding rail – 981.0.0020.00
External attachment brackets – 982.4.0240.00 l
External hinges side 980.1.0440.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** – 980.1.0310.00
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 22 9 7 5 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 12 6 4 2 2 0 0 0
Side C/D 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 5 2 2 1 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

302
122 x 122 x 90 mm 122 x 122 x 80 mm 220 x 122 x 80 mm
CA-215 CA-220 CA-230
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID LID
LID

BASE
BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CA-215 CA-220 CA-230
920 940 1410
122 x 122 x 90 122 x 122 x 80 220 x 122 x 80
Part number Part number Part number
121.0.0000.50 l 122.0.0000.00 l 123.0.0000.00 l
121.0.0010.50 122.0.0010.00 123.0.0010.00
121.0.0110.50 122.0.0270.00 123.0.0160.00
121.0.0080.50 122.0.0080.00 123.0.0080.00
121.0.0100.50 122.0.0100.00 123.0.0100.00
121.0.0060.50 122.0.0060.00 123.0.0060.00
121.0.0120.50 122.0.0610.00 123.0.0150.00

951.1.1500.00 l 951.1.0080.00 l 951.1.0950.00 l

– – –
982.1.0000.00 l 982.1.0000.00 l 982.1.0050.00 l
982.2.0010.00 l 982.2.0010.00 l 982.2.0070.00 l
981.0.0020.00 l 981.0.0020.00 l 981.0.0080.00 l
982.4.0240.00 l 982.4.0240.00 l 982.4.0240.00 l
980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l
980.1.0310.00 l 980.1.0310.00 980.1.0310.00
923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 12 6 4 2 2 0 0 0 Side A/B 12 6 4 2 2 0 0 0 Side A/B 27 12 8 5 4 0 0 0
Side C/D 5 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 5 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 5 2 2 1 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

303
 220 x 122 x 90 mm 220 x 122 x 80 mm
CA-235 CA-240
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID LID

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CA-235 CA-240

Weight (g) 1410 1410
External dimensions (mm) 220 x 122 x 90 220 x 122 x 80
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Coated, with gasket and lid screws 123.0.0000.50 l 124.0.0000.00 l
Coated, with gasket and hex. socket head screws 123.0.0010.50 124.0.0010.00
Coated, with silicone gasket and lid screws 123.0.0110.50 124.0.0970.00
Coated, with HF gasket and lid screws 123.0.0080.50 124.0.0080.00
Saltwater-proof coating, with gasket and lid screws 123.0.0100.50 124.0.0100.00
Saltwater-proof coating, passivated, lid screws with gasket 123.0.0060.50 124.0.0060.00
Unwashed, unpainted, no accessories 123.0.0120.50 124.0.0820.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 951.1.0950.00 l 951.1.0090.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – –
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0050.00 l 982.1.0050.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0070.00 l 982.2.0070.00 l
Grounding rail 981.0.0080.00 l 981.0.0080.00 l
External attachment brackets 982.4.0240.00 l 982.0.0240.00 l
External hinges side 980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** 980.1.0310.00 l 980.1.0310.00 l
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 27 12 8 5 4 0 0 0 Side A/B 27 12 8 5 4 0 0 0
Side C/D 5 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 5 2 2 1 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

304
360 x 122 x 80 mm 160 x 160 x 90 mm 160 x 160 x 90 mm
CA-250 CA-270 CA-280
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID LID LID

BASE BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CA-250 CA-270 CA-280
1860 1410 1410
360 x 122 x 80 160 x 160 x 90 160 x 160 x 90
Part number Part number Part number
125.0.0000.00 l 127.0.0000.00 l 128.0.0000.00 l
125.0.0010.00 127.0.0010.00 128.0.0010.00
125.0.1240.00 127.0.0120.00 128.0.0590.00
125.0.0080.00 127.0.0080.00 128.0.0080.00
125.0.0100.00 127.0.0100.00 128.0.0100.00
125.0.0060.00 127.0.0060.00 128.0.0060.00
125.0.0110.00 127.0.0130.00 128.0.0330.00

951.1.1740.00 l 951.1.1490.00 l 951.1.0110.00 l

– – –
982.1.0120.00 l 982.1.0020.00 l 982.1.0020.00 l
982.2.0150.00 l 982.2.0030.00 l 982.2.0030.00 l
981.0.0140.00 l 981.0.0040.00 l 981.0.0040.00 l
982.4.0240.00 l 982.4.0240.00 l 982.4.0240.00 l
980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l
980.1.0310.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l
923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 48 21 16 9 6 0 0 0 Side A/B 20 9 6 4 2 2 1 0 Side A/B 20 9 6 4 2 2 1 0
Side C/D 5 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 8 4 3 2 2 0 0 0 Side C/D 8 4 3 2 2 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

305
 260 x 160 x 90 mm 260 x 160 x 90 mm
CA-290 CA-300
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID LID

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CA-290 CA-300

Weight (g) 1960 1960
External dimensions (mm) 260 x 160 x 90 260 x 160 x 90
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Coated, with gasket and lid screws 129.0.0000.00 l 130.0.0000.00 l
Coated, with gasket and hex. socket head screws 129.0.0010.00 130.0.0010.00
Coated, with silicone gasket and lid screws 129.0.0470.00 130.0.0640.00
Coated, with HF gasket and lid screws 129.0.0080.00 130.0.0080.00
Saltwater-proof coating, with gasket and lid screws 129.0.0100.00 130.0.0100.00
Saltwater-proof coating, passivated, lid screws with gasket 129.0.0060.00 130.0.0060.00
Unwashed, unpainted, no accessories 129.0.0110.00 130.0.0410.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 951.1.0960.00 l 951.1.0120.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – –
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0080.00 l 982.1.0080.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0110.00 l 982.2.0110.00 l
Grounding rail 981.0.0100.00 l 981.0.0100.00 l
External attachment brackets 982.4.0240.00 l 982.4.0240.00 l
External hinges side 980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** 980.1.0300.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 36 17 12 7 4 3 3 0 Side A/B 36 17 12 7 4 3 3 0
Side C/D 8 4 3 2 2 0 0 0 Side C/D 8 4 3 2 2 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

306
360 x 160 x 90 mm 560 x 160 x 90 mm 200 x 230 x 110 mm
CA-310 CA-330 CA-350
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID

LID LID

BASE

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CA-310 CA-330 CA-350
2550 4310 2730
360 x 160 x 90 560 x 160 x 90 200 x 230 x 110
Part number Part number Part number
131.0.0000.00 l 133.0.0000.00 l 135.0.0000.00 l
131.0.0010.00 133.0.0010.00 135.0.0010.00
131.0.1580.00 133.0.0560.00 135.0.0780.00
131.0.0080.00 133.0.0080.00 135.0.0080.00
131.0.0100.00 133.0.0100.00 135.0.0100.00
131.0.0060.00 133.0.0060.00 135.0.0060.00
131.0.0710.00 133.0.0220.00 135.0.0170.00

951.1.1750.00 l 951.1.0140.00 l 951.1.0150.00 l

– – –
982.1.0120.00 l 982.1.0150.00 l 982.1.0030.00 l
982.2.0150.00 l 982.2.0180.00 l 982.2.0050.00 l
981.0.0420.00 l 981.0.0160.00 l 981.0.0070.00 l
982.4.0240.00 l 982.4.0240.00 l 982.4.0230.00 l
980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l
980.1.0300.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l
923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0090.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 54 26 18 11 6 5 4 0 Side A/B 84 40 28 16 10 8 6 0 Side A/B 35 15 12 8 4 3 2 2
Side C/D 8 4 3 2 2 0 0 0 Side C/D 8 4 3 2 2 0 0 0 Side C/D 26 12 8 5 3 2 2 1
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

307
 200 x 230 x 180 mm 280 x 230 x 110 mm
CA-360 CA-370
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID

LID

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CA-360 CA-370

Weight (g) 3680 3840
External dimensions (mm) 200 x 230 x 180 280 x 230 x 110
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Coated, with gasket and lid screws 136.0.0000.00 l 137.0.0000.00 l
Coated, with gasket and hex. socket head screws 136.0.0010.00 137.0.0010.00
Coated, with silicone gasket and lid screws 136.0.0440.00 137.0.0730.00
Coated, with HF gasket and lid screws 136.0.0080.00 137.0.0080.00
Saltwater-proof coating, with gasket and lid screws 136.0.0100.00 137.0.0100.00
Saltwater-proof coating, passivated, lid screws with gasket 136.0.0060.00 137.0.0060.00
Unwashed, unpainted, no accessories 136.0.0430.00 137.0.0150.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 951.1.0150.00 l 951.1.0160.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – –
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0030.00 l 982.1.0090.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0050.00 l 982.2.0120.00 l
Grounding rail 981.0.0070.00 l 981.0.0110.00 l
External attachment brackets 982.4.0230.00 l 982.4.0230.00 l
External hinges side 980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** 980.1.0300.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 56 32 20 13 9 5 4 4 Side A/B 53 25 18 11 7 4 3 3
Side C/D 52 27 18 12 8 5 3 3 Side C/D 26 12 8 5 3 2 2 1
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

308
330 x 230 x 110 mm 330 x 230 x 180 mm 400 x 230 x 110 mm
CA-380 CA-390 CA-400
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID

LID LID

BASE BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CA-380 CA-390 CA-400
4270 5300 4870
330 x 230 x 110 330 x 230 x 180 400 x 230 x 110
Part number Part number Part number
138.0.0000.00 l 139.0.0000.00 l 140.0.0000.00 l
138.0.0010.00 139.0.0010.00 140.0.0010.00
138.0.0520.00 139.0.0200.00 140.0.0620.00
138.0.0080.00 139.0.0080.00 140.0.0080.00
138.0.0100.00 139.0.0100.00 140.0.0100.00
138.0.0060.00 139.0.0060.00 140.0.0060.00
138.0.0140.00 139.0.0120.00 140.0.0130.00

951.1.0170.00 l 951.1.0170.00 l 951.1.2940.00 l

– – –
982.1.0110.00 l 982.1.0110.00 l 982.1.0140.00 l
982.2.0140.00 l 982.2.0140.00 l 982.2.0170.00 l
981.0.0130.00 l 981.0.0130.00 l 981.0.0150.00 l
982.4.0230.00 l 982.4.0230.00 l 982.4.0230.00 l
980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l
980.1.0300.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l
923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 65 30 23 12 9 5 4 3 Side A/B 108 54 40 25 15 9 8 6 Side A/B 80 38 27 17 11 6 5 4
Side C/D 24 12 8 5 3 2 2 1 Side C/D 52 27 18 12 8 5 3 3 Side C/D 26 12 8 5 3 2 2 1
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

309
 600 x 230 x 110 mm 402.5 x 310 x 110 mm
CA-420 CA-450
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID

LID

BASE

BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CA-420 CA-450

Weight (g) 6380 5810
External dimensions (mm) 600 x 230 x 110 402.5 x 310 x 110
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Coated, with gasket and lid screws 142.0.0000.00 l 145.0.0000.00 l
Coated, with gasket and hex. socket head screws 142.0.0010.00 145.0.0010.00
Coated, with silicone gasket and lid screws 142.0.0550.00 145.0.0520.00
Coated, with HF gasket and lid screws 142.0.0080.00 145.0.0080.00
Saltwater-proof coating, with gasket and lid screws 142.0.0100.00 145.0.0100.00
Saltwater-proof coating, passivated, lid screws with gasket 142.0.0060.00 145.0.0060.00
Unwashed, unpainted, no accessories 142.0.0110.00 145.0.0250.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 951.1.0190.00 l 951.1.0200.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – –
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0160.00 l 982.1.0140.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0190.00 l 982.2.0170.00 l
Grounding rail 981.0.0170.00 l 981.0.0150.00 l
External attachment brackets 982.4.0230.00 l 982.4.0230.00 l
External hinges side 980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** 980.1.0300.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0090.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 120 56 42 24 16 8 8 6 Side A/B 80 38 27 17 11 6 5 4
Side C/D 28 13 8 5 3 2 2 1 Side C/D 38 21 13 7 5 4 3 2
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

310
402.5 x 310 x 180 mm 600 x 310 x 110 mm 600 x 310 x 180 mm
CA-460 CA-470 CA-480
Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure Aluminium enclosure

LID
LID

LID

BASE BASE
BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CA-460 CA-470 CA-480
7420 8480 10840
402.5 x 310 x 180 600 x 310 x 110 600 x 310 x 180
Part number Part number Part number
146.0.0000.00 l 147.0.0000.00 l 148.0.0000.00 l
146.0.0010.00 147.0.0010.00 148.0.0010.00
146.0.0130.00 147.0.0560.00 148.0.0450.00
146.0.0080.00 147.0.0080.00 148.0.0080.00
146.0.0100.00 147.0.0100.00 148.0.0100.00
146.0.0060.00 147.0.0060.00 148.0.0060.00
146.0.0490.00 147.0.0620.00 148.0.0170.00

951.1.0200.00 l 951.1.0210.00 l 951.1.0210.00 l

– – –
982.1.0140.00 l 982.1.0160.00 l 982.1.0160.00 l
982.2.0170.00 l 982.2.0190.00 l 982.2.0190.00 l
981.0.0150.00 l 981.0.0170.00 l 981.0.0170.00 l
982.4.0230.00 l 982.4.0230.00 l 982.4.0230.00 l
980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l 980.1.0470.00 l
980.1.0300.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l 980.1.0300.00 l
923.1.0090.00 l 923.1.0090.00 l 923.1.0090.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 136 68 50 30 21 12 10 8 Side A/B 120 56 42 24 16 8 8 6 Side A/B 200 100 76 46 30 18 14 12
Side C/D 74 38 28 18 12 8 6 3 Side C/D 38 17 13 7 5 4 3 2 Side C/D 74 38 28 18 12 8 6 5
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

311
Polycarbonate
and ABS enclosures
with quick release lid screws
CT series

The CT series of BERNSTEIN plastic enclo-

sures are made from high-quality Polycar-
bonate or ABS. They are especially suitable
for encapsulating electrical and electronic
components or for use as complete
compact control housings. All enclosures
are optionally available with a transparent
Polycarbonate lid. The enclosures meet
protection class IP 65 as standard.

All CT enclosures are provided with moun-

ting bosses moulded directly into the base.
Components, mounting rails or other
assemblies may be easily secured using the BERNSTEIN enclosures are also supplied Technical data
self-tapping screws provided. with patented stainless steel quick release
BERNSTEIN CT enclosures always contain screws as standard (a unique BERNSTEIN Material
centrally positioned bosses to attach innovation). The screw is simply pressed Polycarbonate, transparent
DIN rails. into the holes in the lid where they are Polycarbonate or ABS
automatically retained and a quarter turn
firmly secures the lid to the base. A gasket Gasket
is factory-fitted (for standard enclosures) to Neoprene round seal
ensure IP 65 protection. BERNSTEIN (siliconised)
Polycarbonate and ABS enclosures are alternative:
supplied in RAL 7035 (light grey) as Neoprene round seal
standard. (silicone-free)
Silicone round seal

Quick release screws

Stainless steel, self-locking,
multi-purpose cross-head
alternative:
Stainless steel lid screw, multi-purpose
cross-head
Lead-sealed steel lid screws
(9 S 20 K) galvanised, slotted head

Colour
RAL 7035 (light grey)
alternative:
other colours on request

Temperature
-40 °C to +80 °C (neoprene gasket)
alternative:
-40 °C to +120 °C (silicone gasket)

Protection class
IP 65
alternative:
higher protection classes on request

Approval
UL: File E 182264 (only Polycarbonate
enclosures)

312
Accessories
Polycarbonate and
ABS enclosure

Mounting plates Mounting rails

Laminated paper (Pertinax) (thickness: CT-50 to CT-60: Standard TS-15, TS-32 and TS-35 rails (steel); yellow-
1.5 mm; CT-62 to CT-78: 2.0 mm; CT-80 to CT-91: passivated for terminal block attachment.
2.5 mm), can be used for subsequent mounting of
equipment.

Earthing rails External hinges External attachment brackets

Galvanised steel for connecting and Polycarbonate, for the hinged mounting of enclosure Polycarbonate, for mounting enclosures without
routing protective earth connections. lids. Opening angle of lid approx. 195°, easy lock-in opening the lid. Colour: RAL 7035.
mechanism at 170°, easy assembly press-fit hinges.
(CT-88: screw attachment).

Silicone lid gasket Flexible quick-release internal hinges Brass press-fit bushes
Improved temperature range (-40 °C to +120 °C). For enclosure lids, captive and strain-relieved. Opening With metric M3 attachment screws for mounting
Standard type made of silicone foam. angle of lid > 180°. Stainless steel with polyamide ends. equipment with metric screws in the mounting bosses
of the base (M4 for CT-88).

Enclosures
Product line overview of polycarbonate and ABS enclosures
Polycarbonate enclosures Polycarbonate enclosures ABS enclosures ABS enclosures
with transparent lid (PC) with transparent lid (PC)
Dimensions/mm Part number Type Part number Type Part number Type Part number Type
L x Wx H
52 x 50 x 35 250.0.0000.00 CT-501 250.1.0000.00 CT-501 T 350.0.0000.00 CT-502 350.1.0000.00 CT-502 T
65 x 50 x 35 252.0.0000.00 CT-521 252.1.0000.00 CT-521 T 352.0.0000.00 CT-522 352.1.0000.00 CT-522 T
82 x 80 x 55 254.0.0000.00 CT-541 254.1.0000.00 CT-541 T 354.0.0000.00 CT-542 354.1.0000.00 CT-542 T
82 x 80 x 85 256.0.0000.00 CT-561 256.1.0000.00 CT-561 T 356.0.0000.00 CT-562 356.1.0000.00 CT-562 T
120 x 80 x 55 258.0.0000.00 CT-581 258.1.0000.00 CT-581 T 358.0.0000.00 CT-582 358.1.0000.00 CT-582 T
120 x 80 x 85 260.0.0000.00 CT-601 260.1.0000.00 CT-601 T 360.0.0000.00 CT-602 360.1.0000.00 CT-602 T
160 x 80 x 55 262.0.0000.00 CT-621 262.1.0000.00 CT-621 T 362.0.0000.00 CT-622 362.1.0000.00 CT-622 T
160 x 80 x 85 264.0.0000.00 CT-641 264.1.0000.00 CT-641 T 364.0.0000.00 CT-642 364.1.0000.00 CT-642 T
122 x 120 x 55 266.0.0000.00 CT-661 266.1.0000.00 CT-661 T 366.0.0000.00 CT-662 366.1.0000.00 CT-662 T
122 x 120 x 85 268.0.0000.00 CT-681 268.1.0000.00 CT-681 T 368.0.0000.00 CT-682 368.1.0000.00 CT-682 T
160 x 120 x 90 272.0.0000.00 CT-721 272.1.0000.00 CT-721 T 372.0.0000.00 CT-722 372.1.0000.00 CT-722 T
200 x 120 x 75 276.0.0000.00 CT-761 276.1.0000.00 CT-761 T 376.0.0000.00 CT-762 376.1.0000.00 CT-762 T
200 x 120 x 90 278.0.0000.00 CT-781 278.1.0000.00 CT-781 T 378.0.0000.00 CT-782 378.1.0000.00 CT-782 T
240 x 120 x 100 280.0.0000.00 CT-801 280.1.0000.00 CT-801 T 380.0.0000.00 CT-802 380.1.0000.00 CT-802 T
200 x 150 x 75 282.0.0000.00 CT-821 282.1.0000.00 CT-821 T 382.0.0000.00 CT-822 382.1.0000.00 CT-822 T
240 x 160 x 90 284.0.0000.00 CT-841 284.1.0000.00 CT-841 T 384.0.0000.00 CT-842 384.1.0000.00 CT-842 T
240 x 160 x 120 286.0.0000.00 CT-861 286.1.0000.00 CT-861 T 386.0.0000.00 CT-862 386.1.0000.00 CT-862 T
250 x 160 x 90 290.0.0000.00 CT-901 290.1.0000.00 CT-901 T 390.0.0000.00 CT-902 390.1.0000.00 CT-902 T
250 x 160 x 120 291.0.0000.00 CT-911 291.1.0000.00 CT-911 T 391.0.0000.00 CT-912 391.1.0000.00 CT-912 T
360 x 200 x 150 288.0.0000.00 CT-881 288.1.0000.00 CT-881 T 388.0.0000.00 CT-882 388.1.0000.00 CT-882 T
300 x 230 x 86 287.0.0000.00 CT-871 287.1.0000.00 CT-871 T 387.0.0000.00 CT-872 387.1.0000.00 CT-872 T
300 x 230 x 110 289.0.0000.00 CT-891 289.1.0000.00 CT-891 T 389.0.0000.00 CT-892 389.1.0000.00 CT-892 T

313
Component overview
polycarbonate/ABS enclosures

Model Weidmüller Phoenix Wieland Entrelec Phoenix

Block terminal Block terminal Block terminal Terminal block Terminal block
Terminal width (mm): 5.2 6.2 5.2 6.2 8.2 10.2 5.2 6.2 7.5 5.2 6.2 8.2
Single-core mm2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 4 10 16 2.5 4 10 4 4 10
Stranded mm2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 4 2.5 4 6 10 1.5 4 6 2.5 4 6
Nominal voltage V 380 380 380 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 250 380 750 750 750 750 500 500 500 750 750 750
Loading capacity A 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 25 25 25 25 25 20 35 26 35 46 85 27 36 65 36 36 65
Terminal bridging – – – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m m – m – m m m
Mounting rail TS 15 – – – – – – – – – – – – m m – – – – m m m – – –
TS 32 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m – – – m m m
TS 35 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m – – – m m m
9.40.1.0100.00

9.40.1.0090.00

9.40.1.0130.00

9.40.1.0180.00

9.40.1.0020.00

9.40.1.0030.00

9.40.1.0040.00

9.40.1.0140.00

9.40.1.0050.00

KL-16/12 9.40.1.0060.00

KL-16/16 9.40.1.0070.00

KL-16/20 9.40.1.0080.00

DR 1.5/5 9.40.2.1270.00

9.40.2.0940.00

MA 2.5/5 9.40.2.1090.00

9.40.2.1030.00

9.40.2.1040.00

M 10/10 9.40.2.1050.00

9.40.2.0010.00

MBK 5/E 9.40.2.0020.00

9.40.2.0030.00

9.40.2.0050.00

9.40.2.0070.00

9.40.2.0090.00
Part number

MBK 10
KL-16/4

KL-16/8

UK 3 N

UK 5 N
G 5/12

DR 4/6

UK 10
BK 12

M 4/6

M 6/8
G 5/3

G 5/4

G 5/6

MBK
BK 4

BK 6

Type
CT-50 – – – 1 – – – 1 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
CT-52 1 – – – 1 – – 1 1 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
CT-54 – 1 – – – 1 – 1 1 – – – 7 6 – – – – 7 6 5 – – –
CT-56 – – – – – 1 – 1 1 – – – 7 6 4 4 – – 7 6 5 4 4 –
CT-58 – – – – – – 1 – 1 1 – – 15 12 – – – – 15 12 10 – – –
CT-60 – – – – – – 1 – 1 1 – – 15 12 10 10 6 6 15 12 10 10 10 6
CT-62 – – – – – – – – – 1 1 1 22 19 – – – – 22 18 15 – – –
CT-64 – – – – – – – – – 1 1 1 22 19 16 16 10 10 22 19 15 16 16 10
CT-66 – – – – – – – – 1 1 1 1 15 13 – – – – 15 13 11 – – –
CT-68 – – – – – – – – 1 1 1 1 15 13 15 13 10 8 15 13 11 15 13 10
CT-72 – – – – – – – – – 1 1 1 22 19 22 19 4 11 22 19 15 22 19 14
CT-76 – – – – – – – – – – – 1 30 25 30 25 19 15 30 25 21 30 25 19
CT-78 – – – – – – – – – – – – 30 25 30 25 19 15 30 25 21 30 25 19
CT-80 – – – – – – – – – – – – 38 32 38 32 24 19 38 32 26 38 32 24
CT-82 – – – – – – – – – – – – 27 23 27 23 17 14 27 23 19 27 23 17
CT-84 – – – – – – – – – – – – 38 32 38 32 24 19 38 32 26 38 32 24
CT-86 – – – – – – – – – – – – 38 32 38 32 24 19 38 32 26 38 32 24
CT-87 – – – – – – – – – – – – 50 40 50 40 31 25 50 40 34 50 40 31
CT-87*) – – – – – – – – – – – – 100 80 10 80 62 50 100 80 68 100 80 62
CT-88 – – – – – – – – – – – – 60 50 60 50 38 30 60 49 40 47 47 29
CT-88*) – – – – – – – – – – – – 120 100 120 100 76 60 120 98 80 94 94 58
CT-89 – – – – – – – – – – – – 50 40 50 40 31 25 50 40 32 50 46 31
CT-89*) – – – – – – – – – – – – 100 80 10 80 31 25 100 80 64 100 – 62
CT-90/91 – – – – – – – – – – – – 38 32 38 32 24 19 38 32 26 38 32 24

**) Assembled on 2 mounting rails

**) Assembled on 3 mounting rails
The number of terminals is reduced
when partitions are used.

314
 Siemens WAGO Weidmüller
Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block
Screw terminals Caged tension spring 6.2 10.2 6.2 10.2 4.2 5.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.2 10.2 12.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 6.5 8.2 10.2 5.2 6.2
4 4 10 25 4 4 10 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 4 6
2.5 4 6 16 2.5 4 6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 1.5 4 2.5 4 6 10 2.5 4
750 750 750 750 750 750 750 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 250 380 750 750 750 750 750 750
26 35 46 85 36 36 65 26 26 26 26 18 26 26 34 34 44 61 82 27 36 27 36 47 65 26 34
m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m
– – – – – – – m m – – – – – – – – – – m m – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m – –
m m m m m m m – – m m m m m m m m m m – – – – – – m m
9.40.2.4000.00

9.40.2.4010.00

9.40.2.4020.00

8WA1204 9.40.2.4030.00

9.40.2.4040.00

9.40.2.4050.00

9.40.2.4060.00

264-701 9.40.2.3020.00

264-721 9.40.2.3030.00

264-711 9.40.2.3210.00

264-731 9.40.2.3220.00

279-621 9.40.2.3230.00

280-601 9.40.2.0930.00

280-901 9.40.2.3240.00

281-601 9.40.2.3250.00

281-901 9.40.2.3260.00

282-601 9.40.2.3270.00

284-601 9.40.2.3280.00

283-601 9.40.2.3290.00

AKZ 2.5 PA 9.40.2.0500.00

9.40.2.0130.00

SAK 2.5 PA 9.40.2.0140.00

9.40.2.0150.00

SAK 6 NPA 9.40.2.0160.00

SAK 10 PA 9.40.2.0470.00

WDU 2.5 9.40.2.1460.00

9.40.2.1470.00
8WA1011-

8WA1011-

8WA1011-

8WA2011-

8WA2011-

8WA2011-

AKZ 4 PA

SAK 4 PA

WDU 4
1DG11

1DG20
1DH11

1DH20
1DF11

1DF20

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 7 4 – – – – – – – – – – 7 6 – – – – – –
6 5 – – 7 6 – 7 4 – – – – – – – – – – 7 6 4 – – – – –
– – – – – – – 13 8 – – – – – – – – – – 15 12 – – – – – –
12 11 – – 15 12 – 13 8 – – – – – – – – – – 15 12 10 9 6 6 – –
– – – – – – – 20 12 – – – – – – – – – – 22 19 – – – – – –
19 18 14 11 22 18 14 20 12 – – – – – – – – – – 22 19 16 15 10 10 – –
– – – – – – – 13 8 – – – – – – – – – – 15 13 – – – – – –
13 12 10 8 15 13 10 – – 13 8 21 16 16 13 14 10 8 6 15 13 13 12 10 8 15 13
19 17 14 11 22 19 14 – – 19 11 30 24 24 20 20 14 12 9 22 19 19 17 14 11 22 19
26 24 19 15 30 25 19 – – 26 15 40 32 32 26 26 19 16 13 30 25 25 24 19 15 30 25
26 24 19 15 30 25 19 – – 26 15 40 32 32 26 26 19 16 13 30 25 25 24 19 15 30 25
33 30 24 19 38 32 24 – – 33 20 50 40 40 33 33 25 20 16 38 32 32 30 24 19 38 32

Enclosures
23 21 17 14 27 22 17 – – 26 16 40 32 32 26 27 20 16 13 27 23 23 21 17 14 27 23
32 30 24 19 38 31 24 – – 33 20 50 40 40 33 33 25 20 16 38 32 32 30 24 19 38 32
32 30 24 19 38 31 24 – – 33 20 50 40 40 33 33 25 20 16 38 32 32 30 24 19 38 32
42 39 31 25 49 41 31 – – – 43 25 65 52 52 43 43 32 26 21 50 40 40 39 31 25 50 40
84 78 62 50 98 82 62 – – 86 50 130 104 104 86 86 64 52 – 100 80 80 78 62 50 100 80
50 46 37 32 58 48 36 – – 51 30 77 61 61 51 51 38 30 25 60 50 50 47 38 30 60 50
100 92 74 64 116 96 72 – – 102 60 144 122 122 102 102 76 60 – 120 100 100 94 76 60 – –
42 39 31 25 49 41 31 – – 43 25 65 52 52 43 43 32 26 21 50 40 40 39 31 25 50 40
84 78 62 50 98 82 62 – – 86 50 130 104 104 86 86 64 52 – 100 80 80 78 62 50 100 80
32 30 24 19 38 31 24 – – 33 20 50 40 40 33 33 25 20 16 38 32 32 30 24 19 38 32

315
 52 x 50 x 35 mm 65 x 50 x 35 mm
CT-501 CT-521
Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure
CT-502 CT-522
ABS enclosure ABS enclosure

LID LID

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CT-501 CT-502 CT-521 CT-522

Weight (g) 40 38 50 47
External dimensions (mm) 52 x 50 x 35 65 x 50 x 35
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
PC, with gasket and quick release 250.0.0000.00 l 252.0.0000.00 l
PC, with gasket and screw release 250.0.0010.00 252.0.0010.00
PC, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and quick release 250.1.0000.00 l 252.1.0000.00 l
PC, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and screw release 250.1.0010.00 252.1.0010.00
ABS, with gasket and quick release 350.0.0000.00 l 352.0.0000.00 l
ABS, with gasket and screw release 350.0.0010.00 352.0.0010.00
ABS, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and quick release 350.1.0000.00 l 352.1.0000.00 l
ABS, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and screw release 350.1.0010.00 352.1.0010.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 951.2.0090.00 l 951.2.0100.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – 982.0.0010.00 l
TS 32 mounting rail – –
TS 35 mounting rail – –
Grounding rail (attachment on central C/D cams – –
External attachment brackets – –
External hinges** – –
Internal hinges, flexible, for quick-release enclosures – –
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) – –
Mounting bushes with metr. M 3 x 8 screws (4 pcs.) – 980.0.0250.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Side C/D 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

316
82 x 80 x 55 mm 82 x 80 x 85 mm 120 x 80 x 55 mm
CT-541 CT-561 CT-581
Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure
CT-542 CT-562 CT-582
ABS enclosure ABS enclosure ABS enclosure

LID

LID
LID

BASE
BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CT-541 CT-542 CT-561 CT-562 CT-581 CT-582
140 116 175 150 180 135
82 x 80 x 55 82 x 80 x 85 120 x 80 x 55
Part number Part number Part number
254.0.0000.00 l 256.0.0000.00 l 258.0.0000.00 l
254.0.0010.00 256.0.0010.00 258.0.0010.00
254.1.0000.00 l 256.1.0000.00 l 258.1.0000.00 l
254.1.0010.00 256.1.0010.00 258.1.0010.00
354.0.0000.00 l 356.0.0000.00 l 358.0.0000.00 l
354.0.0010.00 356.0.0010.00 358.0.0010.00
354.1.0000.00 l 356.1.0000.00 l 358.1.0000.00 l
354.1.0010.00 356.1.0010.00 358.1.0010.00

951.2.0110.00 l 951.2.0110.00 l 951.2.0120.00 l

982.0.0040.00 l 982.0.0040.00 l 982.0.0090.00 l
– – –
982.2.0000.00 l 982.2.0000.00 l 982.2.0020.00 l
– 981.0.0010.00
980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l
980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l
980.1.0760.00 l 980.1.0760.00 l 980.1.0760.00 l
923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l
980.0.0250.00 l 980.0.0250.00 l 980.0.0400.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 5 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 10 5 3 2 1 1 1 0 Side A/B 9 4 3 2 0 0 0 0
Side C/D 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 5 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 Side C/D 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

317
 120 x 80 x 85 mm 160 x 80 x 55 mm
CT-601 CT-621
Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure
CT-602 CT-622
ABS enclosure ABS enclosure

LID
LID

BASE
BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CT-601 CT-602 CT-621 CT-622

Weight (g) 225 192 225 199
External dimensions (mm) 120 x 80 x 85 160 x 80 x 55
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
PC, with gasket and quick release 260.0.0000.00 l 262.0.0000.00 l
PC, with gasket and screw release 260.0.0010.00 262.0.0010.00
PC, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and quick release 260.1.0000.00 l 262.1.0000.00 l
PC, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and screw release 260.1.0010.00 262.1.0010.00
ABS, with gasket and quick release 360.0.0000.00 l 362.0.0000.00 l
ABS, with gasket and screw release 360.0.0010.00 362.0.0010.00
ABS, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and quick release 360.1.0000.00 l 362.1.0000.00 l
ABS, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and screw release 360.1.0010.00 362.1.0010.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 951.2.0120.00 l 951.2.0130.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail 982.0.0090.00 l 982.0.0130.00 l
TS 32 mounting rail – –
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0020.00 l 982.2.0280.00 l
Grounding rail (attachment on central C/D cams 981.0.0010.00 981.0.0050.00
External attachment brackets 980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l
External hinges** 980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l
Internal hinges, flexible, for quick-release enclosures 980.1.0760.00 l 980.1.0760.00 l
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l
Mounting bushes with metr. M 3 x 8 screws (4 pcs.) 980.0.0250.00 l 980.0.0400.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 15 6 6 3 2 1 1 0 Side A/B 11 5 4 3 0 0 0 0
Side C/D 5 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 Side C/D 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

318
160 x 80 x 85 mm 122 x 120 x 55 mm 122 x 120 x 85 mm
CT-641 CT-661 CT-681
Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure
CT-642 CT-662 CT-682
ABS enclosure ABS enclosure ABS enclosure

LID

LID

LID

BASE BASE

BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CT-641 CT-642 CT-661 CT-662 CT-681 CT-682
240 225 240 218 295 269
160 x 80 x 85 122 x 120 x 55 122 x 120 x 85
Part number Part number Part number
264.0.0000.00 l 266.0.0000.00 l 268.0.0000.00 l
264.0.0010.00 266.0.0010.00 268.0.0010.00
264.1.0000.00 l 266.1.0000.00 l 268.1.0000.00 l
264.1.0010.00 266.1.0010.00 268.1.0010.00
364.0.0000.00 l 366.0.0000.00 l 368.0.0000.00 l
364.0.0010.00 366.0.0010.00 368.0.0010.00
364.1.0000.00 l 366.1.0000.00 l 368.1.0000.00 l
364.1.0010.00 366.1.0010.00 368.1.0010.00

951.2.0130.00 l 951.2.0140.00 l 951.2.0140.00 l

982.0.0130.00 l 982.0.0080.00 l –
– – 982.1.0010.00 l
982.2.0280.00 l 982.2.0020.00 l 982.2.0020.00 l
981.0.0050.00 981.0.0030.00 981.0.0030.00
980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l
980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l
980.1.0760.00 l 980.1.0760.00 l 980.1.0760.00 l
923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l
980.0.0250.00 l 980.0.0250.00 l 980.0.0250.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 22 10 8 5 3 2 2 0 Side A/B 9 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 15 6 6 3 20 1 1 0
Side C/D 5 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 Side C/D 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 10 3 3 2 1 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

319
 160 x 120 x 90 mm 200 x 120 x 75 mm
CT-721 CT-761
Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure
CT-722 CT-762
ABS enclosure ABS enclosure

LID

LID

BASE
BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CT-721 CT-722 CT-761 CT-762

Weight (g) 360 310 400 373
External dimensions (mm) 160 x 120 x 90 200 x 120 x 75
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
PC, with gasket and quick release 272.0.0000.00 l 276.0.0000.00 l
PC, with gasket and screw release 272.0.0010.00 276.0.0010.00
PC, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and quick release 272.1.0000.00 l 276.1.0000.00 l
PC, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and screw release 272.1.0010.00 276.1.0010.00
ABS, with gasket and quick release 372.0.0000.00 l 376.0.0000.00 l
ABS, with gasket and screw release 372.0.0010.00 376.0.0010.00
ABS, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and quick release 372.1.0000.00 l 376.1.0000.00 l
ABS, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and screw release 372.1.0010.00 376.1.0010.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 951.2.0360.00 l 951.2.0150.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – –
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0250.00 l 982.1.0040.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0280.00 l 982.2.0060.00 l
Grounding rail (attachment on central C/D cams 981.0.0400.00 981.0.0060.00
External attachment brackets 980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l
External hinges** 980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l
Internal hinges, flexible, for quick-release enclosures 980.1.0790.00 l 980.1.0760.00 l
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l
Mounting bushes with metr. M 3 x 8 screws (4 pcs.) 980.0.0250.00 l 980.0.0400.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 18 10 7 3 3 0 0 0 Side A/B 26 12 8 5 3 0 0 0
Side C/D 9 5 2 2 1 0 0 0 Side C/D 10 5 2 2 1 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

320
200 x 120 x 90 mm 240 x 120 x 100 mm 200 x 150 x 75 mm
CT-781 CT-801 CT-821
Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure
CT-782 CT-802 CT-822
ABS enclosure ABS enclosure ABS enclosure

LID

LID

LID

BASE

BASE
BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CT-781 CT-782 CT-801 CT-802 CT-821 CT-822
420 365 540 478 475 425
200 x 120 x 90 240 x 120 x 100 200 x 150 x 75
Part number Part number Part number
278.0.0000.00 l 280.0.0000.00 l 282.0.0000.00 l
278.0.0010.00 280.0.0010.00 282.0.0010.00
278.1.0000.00 l 280.1.0000.00 l 282.1.0000.00 l
278.1.0010.00 280.1.0010.00 282.1.0010.00
378.0.0000.00 l 380.0.0000.00 l 382.0.0000.00 l
378.0.0010.00 380.0.0010.00 382.0.0010.00
378.1.0000.00 l 380.1.0000.00 l 382.1.0000.00 l
378.1.0010.00 380.1.0010.00 382.1.0010.00

951.2.0150.00 l 951.2.0160.00 l 951.2.0170.00 l

– – –
982.1.0040.00 l 982.1.0060.00 l 982.1.0170.00 l
982.2.0060.00 l 982.2.0080.00 l 982.2.0200.00 l
981.0.0060.00 981.0.0090.00 981.0.0060.00
980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l
980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l
980.1.0790.00 l 980.1.0780.00 l 980.1.0760.00 l
923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l
980.0.0400.00 l 980.0.0250.00 l 980.0.0250.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 26 12 8 5 3 0 0 0 Side A/B 34 17 12 6 5 3 3 2 Side A/B 22 12 9 5 3 0 0 0
Side C/D 10 5 2 2 1 0 0 0 Side C/D 10 6 3 2 1 1 0 0 Side C/D 12 6 3 2 2 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

321
 240 x 160 x 90 mm 240 x 160 x 120 mm
CT-841 CT-861
Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure
CT-842 CT-862
ABS enclosure ABS enclosure

LID

LID

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CT-841 CT-842 CT-861 CT-862

Weight (g) 650 528 785 636
External dimensions (mm) 240 x 160 x 90 240 x 160 x 120
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
PC, with gasket and quick release 284.0.0000.00 l 286.0.0000.00 l
PC, with gasket and screw release 284.0.0010.00 286.0.0010.00
PC, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and quick release 284.1.0000.00 l 286.1.0000.00 l
PC, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and screw release 284.1.0010.00 286.1.0010.00
ABS, with gasket and quick release 384.0.0000.00 l 386.0.0000.00 l
ABS, with gasket and screw release 384.0.0010.00 386.0.0010.00
ABS, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and quick release 384.1.0000.00 l 386.1.0000.00 l
ABS, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and screw release 384.1.0010.00 386.1.0010.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 951.2.0180.00 l 951.2.0180.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – –
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0060.00 l 982.1.0060.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0080.00 l 982.2.0080.00 l
Grounding rail (attachment on central C/D cams 981.0.0090.00 981.0.0090.00
External attachment brackets 980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l
External hinges** 980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l
Internal hinges, flexible, for quick-release enclosures 980.1.0760.00 l 980.1.0800.00 l
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l
Mounting bushes with metr. M 3 x 8 screws (4 pcs.) 980.0.0400.00 l 980.0.0400.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 36 16 12 8 4 2 2 2 Side A/B 36 16 12 8 4 2 2 2
Side C/D 17 8 5 3 2 2 1 0 Side C/D 17 8 5 3 2 2 1 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

322
250 x 160 x 90 mm 250 x 160 x 120 mm 360 x 200 x 150 mm
CT-901 CT-911 CT-881
Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure
CT-902 CT-912 CT-882
ABS enclosure ABS enclosure ABS enclosure

LID
LID
LID

BASE BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CT-901 CT-902 CT-911 CT-912 CT-881 CT-882
680 550 830 660 1550 1375
250 x 160 x 90 250 x 160 x 120 360 x 200 x 150
Part number Part number Part number
290.0.0000.00 l 291.0.0000.00 l 288.0.0000.00 l
290.0.0010.00 291.0.0010.00 288.0.0010.00
290.1.0000.00 l 291.1.0000.00 l 288.1.0000.00 l
290.1.0010.00 291.1.0010.00 288.1.0010.00
390.0.0000.00 l 391.0.0000.00 l 388.0.0000.00 l
390.0.0010.00 391.0.0010.00 388.0.0010.00
390.1.0000.00 l 391.1.0000.00 l 388.1.0000.00 l
390.1.0010.00 391.1.0010.00 388.1.0010.00

951.2.1870.00 l 951.2.1870.00 l 951.2.0200.00 l

– – –
982.1.0060.00 l 982.1.0060.00 l 982.1.0130.00
982.2.0080.00 l 982.2.0080.00 l 982.2.0160.00
981.0.0090.00 981.0.0090.00 981.0.0340.00
980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l –
980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0260.00 l
980.1.0760.00 l 980.1.0800.00 l –
923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0050.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l
980.0.0400.00 l 980.0.0400.00 l 980.0.0260.00 l (M 4 x 8)

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 38 16 12 8 4 2 2 2 Side A/B 38 16 12 8 4 2 2 2 Side A/B 70 32 24 16 10 6 4 4
Side C/D 17 8 5 3 2 2 1 0 Side C/D 17 8 5 3 2 2 1 0 Side C/D 26 11 8 5 3 2 2 1
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

323
 300 x 230 x 86 mm 300 x 230 x 111 mm
CT-871 CT-891
Polycarbonate enclosure Polycarbonate enclosure
CT-872 CT-892
ABS enclosure ABS enclosure

LID
LID

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CT-871 CT-872 CT-891 CT-892

Weight (g) 915 850 1155 1000
External dimensions (mm) 300 x 230 x 86 300 x 230 x 110
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
PC, with gasket and quick release 287.0.0000.00 l 289.0.0000.00 l
PC, with gasket and screw release 287.0.0010.00 289.0.0010.00
PC, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and quick release 287.1.0000.00 l 289.1.0000.00 l
PC, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and screw release 287.1.0010.00 289.1.0010.00
ABS, with gasket and quick release 387.0.0000.00 l 389.0.0000.00 l
ABS, with gasket and screw release 387.0.0010.00 389.0.0010.00
ABS, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and quick release 387.1.0000.00 l 389.1.0000.00 l
ABS, with gasket, transparent lid (PC) and screw release 387.1.0010.00 389.1.0010.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 951.2.0190.00 l 951.2.0190.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – –
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0100.00 l 982.1.0100.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0130.00 l 982.2.0130.00 l
Grounding rail (attachment on central C/D cams 981.0.0120.00 981.0.0120.00
External attachment brackets 980.2.0020.00 l 980.2.0020.00 l
External hinges** 980.2.0250.00 l 980.2.0250.00 l
Internal hinges, flexible, for quick-release enclosures 980.1.0790.00 l 980.1.0820.00 l
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) – –
Mounting bushes with metr. M 3 x 8 screws (4 pcs.) 980.0.0250.00 l 980.0.0250.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 34 14 10 6 4 0 0 0 Side A/B 34 14 10 6 4 0 0 0
Side C/D 21 13 5 4 2 0 0 0 Side C/D 21 13 5 4 2 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

324
325
Enclosures
CT-Module
Plastic Enclosures

Universal applications

l Adaptable before, during and

after installation
l Variety of options
l No machining required
l Reduced stock holding

Knock-outs CT-S Flange CT-C Quick release latch CT-W

326
CT-Module

Application areas
and features

Technical features of PC and ABS

Standard Unit PC PC + ABS
fibre glass
Mechanical properties
Impact strength +23°C ISO 179-1eU kJ/m2 good good good
–30°C ISO 179-1eU kJ/m2 good good –
Elastic Modulus ISO 527 Mpa 2400 4000 2100
Temperature properties
Vicat softening point B50 ISO 306 °C 145 144 94
Longterm use, heat UL 7468 °C 125 120 60
Longterm use, cold °C –50 –50 – 40
Flammability UL 94 class V-2 V-0 HB
Electrical properties
Disruptive strength EC 243-1 kV/mm 30 30 32
Creeping current limit IEC 112 V 275 175 525
Physical properties
Moisture absorption ISO 62 % 0.15 0.13
Density ISO 1183 g/cm3 1.20 1.25 1.04

Enclosures
CT-Module Plastic enclosures are Gasket material: Polyurethane (PUR)
manufactured from high-quality poly-
carbonate or ABS. Technical properties of PUR
They are particularly suitable for housing Unit PUR
electrical and electronic components as Temperature °C –50 – +130
well as small control devices. Tensile strength Mpa 0.4
All enclosures are offered with a transpa- Elongation at break % 110
rent polycarbonate. Hardness Shore A 6
The enclosures protection class IP 66/67. Specific weight g/cm3 0.4
Standard colour is RAL 7035. Permanent compression % 5

Extension frame

327
CT-Module
Plastic Enclosures

Type: CT-S

Features

l 17 sizes in ABS or polycarbonate

l Grey or transparent
polycarbonate lid
l Captive lid screws (with wire
seal option)
l Foam (PUR) gasket, IP 66/67
l Metric or PG ‘knock-outs’
option on polycarbonate bases
l Base depth 50 mm
l Lid depth 25, 50, 75 or 100 mm

328
CT-Module 75 x 125 x 75 mm 75 x 125 x 100 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-S 201 PC-Enclosure CT-S 202 PC-Enclosure
CT-S 301 ABS-Enclosure CT-S 302 ABS-Enclosure
Type: CT-S

75
64.5
75 40.5
65.5
41

114.5
90.5
125
115.5
125

91

100

75 75
68.5 75 68.5
60 49 25 60 49 50
44 44

4.5
3
ø 3.4
4.5
3
ø 3.4

60.5 85.5
118.5
118.5

125

110
125

110

94

75
90
75
94

90

5.2 5.2
ø 4.5

ø 4.5
40 40
ø8

ø8
3.1 3.5 3.1 3.5

Enclosures
Type CT-S 201 CT-S 301 CT-S 202 CT-S 302
Material PC ABS PC ABS
Weight (g) 209 184 274 243
External dimensions (mm) 75 x 125 x 75 75 x 125 x 75 75 x 125 x 100 75 x 125 x 100
Part number Part number Part number Part number
Metric knock-outs (grey lid) 212.0010.000 212.0020.000
Metric knock-outs (transparent lid) 212.1010.000 212.1020.000
PG knock-outs (grey lid) 213.0010.000 213.0020.000
PG knock-outs (transparent lid) 213.1010.000 213.1020.000
Without knock-outs (grey lid) 211.0010.000 311.0010.000 211.0020.000 311.0020.000
Without knock-outs (transparent lid) 211.1010.000 311.1010.000 211.1020.000 311.1020.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Mounting plate 48 x 98 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5001.000 929.5001.000 48 x 98 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5001.000 929.5001.000
DIN rail 35 x 50 St, Zn 929.2001.000 929.2001.000 35 x 50 St, Zn 929.2001.000 929.2001.000
DIN rail 35 x 100 St, Zn 929.2002.000 929.2002.000 35 x 100 St, Zn 929.2002.000 929.2002.000
Hinges (pair) PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000 PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000 PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000
Lid screws (Set of 4) 35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000 60 PA 929.3012.000 929.3012.000
Internal mounting screws 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000
Threaded inserts (Set of 4) M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000 M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000

Knock-outs (only PC-Enclosures)

Metric 1 x M16/25 + 3 x M12/20 1 x M16/25 + 3 x M12/20
PG 8 x PG 9/13.5 8 x PG 9/13.5

329
CT-Module 75 x 125 x 125 mm 125 x 125 x 75 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-S 203 PC-Enclosure CT-S 204 PC-Enclosure
CT-S 303 ABS-Enclosure CT-S 304 ABS-Enclosure
Type: CT-S

75 125
63.5 115.5
39 91
113.5

115.5
125

125
89

91
75 125
68.5 125 118.5 75
60 49 75 110 49 25
44 94
4.5

4.5
ø 3.4

3
ø 3.4

110.5 60.5
118.5
118.5

125

110
125

110

94

75
90
94

75
90

5.2 5.2
ø 4.5

ø 4.5
40 90
ø8

ø8
3.1 3.5 3.1 3.5

Type CT-S 203 CT-S 303 CT-S 204 CT-S 304

Material PC ABS PC ABS
Weight (g) 300 266 283 250
External dimensions (mm) 75 x 125 x 125 75 x 125 x 125 125 x 125 x 75 125 x 125 x 75
Part number Part number Part number Part number
Metric knock-outs (grey lid) 212.0030.000 – 212.0040.000 –
Metric knock-outs (transparent lid) 212.1030.000 – 212.1040.000 –
PG knock-outs (grey lid) 213.0030.000 – 213.0040.000 –
PG knock-outs (transparent lid) 213.1030.000 – 213.1040.000 –
Without knock-outs (grey lid) 211.0030.000 311.0030.000 211.0040.000 311.0040.000
Without knock-outs (transparent lid) 211.1030.000 311.1030.000 211.1040.000 311.1040.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Mounting plate 48 x 98 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5001.000 929.5001.000 98 x 98 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5002.000 929.5002.000
DIN rail 35 x 50 St, Zn 929.2001.000 929.2001.000
DIN rail 35 x 100 St, Zn 929.2002.000 929.2002.000 35 x 100 St, Zn 929.2002.000 929.2002.000
Hinges (pair) PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000 PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000 PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000
Lid screws (Set of 4) 35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000 60 PA 929.3012.000 929.3012.000
Internal mounting screws 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000
Threaded inserts (Set of 4) M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000 M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000

Knock-outs (only PC-Enclosures)

Metric 1 x M16/25 + 3 x M12/20 2 x M16/25 + 3 x M12/20
PG 8 x PG 9/13.5 4 x PG 16/21 + 4 x PG 9/13.5

330
125 x 125 x 100 mm 125 x 125 x 125 mm 125 x 175 x 75 mm
CT-S 205 PC-Enclosure CT-S 206 PC-Enclosure CT-S 207 PC-Enclosure
CT-S 305 ABS-Enclosure CT-S 306 ABS-Enclosure CT-S 307 ABS-Enclosure

125
115.5
91

125 125
114.5 113.5
90.5 89

165.5
175

141
113.5
114.5

125
90.5
125

89

125
118.5 75
110 49 25
125 125 94
118.5 100 125

4.5
118.5

ø 3.4

3
110 49 50 110 49 75
94 94
4.5
4.5
ø 3.4

ø 3.4

3
3

168.5 60.5
85.5
175

160
144

100
140
110.5
118.5

118.5
125

110

125

110
94

75
90

94

75
90

5.2 5.2
ø 4.5

ø 4.5

ø 4.5
5.2

90 90
ø8

3.1 3.5 90
ø8

ø8
3.1 3.5 3.1 3.5

Enclosures
CT-S 205 CT-S 305 CT-S 206 CT-S 306 CT-S 207 CT-S 307
PC ABS PC ABS PC ABS
357 317 398 353 381 328
125 x 125 x 100 125 x 125 x 100 125 x 125 x 125 125 x 125 x 125 125 x 175 x 75 125 x 175 x 75
Part number Part number Part number Part number Part number Part number
212.0050.000 – 212.0060.000 – 212.0070.000 –
212.1050.000 – 212.1060.000 – 212.1070.000 –
213.0050.000 – 213.0060.000 – 213.0070.000 –
213.1050.000 – 213.1060.000 – 213.1070.000 –
211.0050.000 311.0050.000 211.0060.000 311.0060.000 211.0070.000 311.0070.000
211.1050.000 311.1050.000 211.1060.000 311.1060.000 211.1070.000 311.1070.000

Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material

98 x 98 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5002.000 929.5002.000 98 x 98 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5002.000 929.5002.000 98 x 148 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5003.000 929.5003.000
35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000
35 x 100 St, Zn 929.2002.000 929.2002.000 35 x 100 St, Zn 929.2002.000 929.2002.000 35 x 100 St, Zn 929.2002.000 929.2002.000
PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000 PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000 PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000
PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000 PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000 PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000
60 PA 929.3012.000 929.3012.000 35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000 35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000
4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000
M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000 M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000 M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000

2 x M16/25 + 3 x M12/20 2 x M16/25 + 3 x M12/20 2 x M16/25 + 4 x M12/20

4 x PG 16/21 + 4 x PG 9/13.5 4 x PG 16/21 + 4 x PG 9/13.5 4 x PG 16/21 + 8 x PG 9/13.5

331
CT-Module 125 x 175 x 100 mm 125 x 175 x 125 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-S 208 PC-Enclosure CT-S 209 PC-Enclosure
CT-S 308 ABS-Enclosure CT-S 309 ABS-Enclosure
Type: CT-S

125 125
114.5 113.5
90.5 89

163.5
175

139
164.5
140.5
175

125 125
118.5 100 118.5 125
110 49 50 110 49 75
94 94
4.5

4.5
ø 3.4
ø 3.4

3
85.5 110.5
168.5
168.5

175

160
144

100
140
175

160
144

100
140

5.2

ø 4.5
5.2
ø 4.5

90 90

ø8
ø8

3.1 3.5 3.1 3.5

Type CT-S 208 CT-S 308 CT-S 209 CT-S 309

Material PC ABS PC ABS
Weight (g) 465 401 530 459
External dimensions (mm) 125 x 175 x 100 125 x 175 x 100 125 x 175 x 125 125 x 175 x 125
Part number Part number Part number Part number
Metric knock-outs (grey lid) 212.0080.000 – 212.0090.000 –
Metric knock-outs (transparent lid) 212.1080.000 – 212.1090.000 –
PG knock-outs (grey lid) 213.0080.000 – 213.0090.000 –
PG knock-outs (transparent lid) 213.1080.000 – 213.1090.000 –
Without knock-outs (grey lid) 211.0080.000 311.0080.000 211.0090.000 311.0090.000
Without knock-outs (transparent lid) 211.1080.000 311.1080.000 211.1090.000 311.1090.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Mounting plate 98 x 148 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5003.000 929.5003.000 98 x 148 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5003.000 929.5003.000
DIN rail 35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000 35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000
DIN rail 35 x 100 St, Zn 929.2002.000 929.2002.000 35 x 100 St, Zn 929.2002.000 929.2002.000
Hinges (pair) PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000 PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000 PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000
Lid screws (Set of 4) 60 PA 929.3012.000 929.3012.000 35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000
Internal mounting screws 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000
Threaded inserts (Set of 4) M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000 M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000

Knock-outs (only PC-Enclosures)

Metric 2 x M16/25 + 4 x M12/20 2 x M16/25 + 4 x M12/20
PG 4 x PG 16/21 + 8 x PG 9/13.5 4 x PG 16/21 + 8 x PG 9/13.5

332
125 x 175 x 150 mm 175 x 175 x 75 mm 175 x 175 x 100 mm
CT-S 210 PC-Enclosure CT-S 211 PC-Enclosure CT-S 212 PC-Enclosure
CT-S 310 ABS-Enclosure CT-S 311 ABS-Enclosure CT-S 312 ABS-Enclosure

175
175
164.5
165.5
140.5
141

125
112.5
88

164.5
140.5
175
165.5
175

141
162.5
175

138

175 175
168.5 75 168.5 100
160 49 25 160 49 50
125
118.5 150 144 144

4.5
3
4.5

ø 3.4
3

110 49 100
ø 3.4

94
4.5
3
ø 3.4

85.5
60.5
168.5

135.5
175

160
144

125
140
168.5
175

160
144

125
140
168.5
175

160
144

100
140

5.2 5.2

ø 4.5
ø 4.5

5.2
ø 4.5

90 140
ø8

140

ø8
ø8

3.1 3.5 3.1 3.5 3.1 3.5

Enclosures
CT-S 210 CT-S 310 CT-S 211 CT-S 311 CT-S 212 CT-S 312
PC ABS PC ABS PC ABS
603 521 461 392 573 490
125 x 175 x 150 125 x 175 x 150 175 x 175 x 75 175 x 175 x 75 175 x 175 x 100 175 x 175 x 100
Part number Part number Part number Part number Part number Part number
212.0100.000 – 212.0110.000 – 212.0120.000 –
212.1100.000 – 212.1110.000 – 212.1120.000 –
213.0100.000 – 213.0110.000 – 213.0120.000 –
213.1100.000 – 213.1110.000 – 213.1120.000 –
211.0100.000 311.0100.000 211.0110.000 311.0110.000 211.0120.000 311.0120.000
211.1100.000 311.1100.000 211.1110.000 311.1110.000 211.1120.000 311.1120.000

Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material

98 x 148 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5003.000 929.5003.000 148x148x1.5 St, Zn 929.5004.000 929.5004.000 148 x 148 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5004.000 929.5004.000
35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000 35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000 35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000
35 x 100 St, Zn 929.2002.000 929.2002.000
PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000 PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000 PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000
PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000 PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000 PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000
35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000 35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000 60 PA 929.3012.000 929.3012.000
4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000
M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000 M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000 M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000

2 x M16/25 + 4 x M12/20 2 x M12/20 + 2 x M16/25 + 5 x M12/20 2 x M12/20 + 2 x M16/25 + 5 x M12/20

4 x PG 16/21 + 8 x PG 9/13.5 4 x PG 16/21 + 4 x PG 9/16 + 10 x PG 9/13.5 4 x PG 16/21 + 4 x PG 9/16 + 10 x PG 9/13.5

333
CT-Module 175 x 175 x 125 mm 175 x 175 x 150 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-S 213 PC-Enclosure CT-S 214 PC-Enclosure
CT-S 313 ABS-Enclosure CT-S 314 ABS-Enclosure
Type: CT-S

175 175
163.5 162.5
139 138
163.5
175

139

162.5
175

138
175 175
168.5 125 168.5 150
160 49 75 160 49 100
144 144

4.5
3
3

4.5

ø 3.4
ø 3.4

110.5 135.5
168.5
175

160
144

125
140
168.5
175

160
144

125
140

5.2 5.2

ø 4.5
ø 4.5

140 140

ø8
ø8

3.1 3.5 3.1 3.5

Type CT-S 213 CT-S 313 CT-S 214 CT-S 314

Material PC ABS PC ABS
Weight (g) 640 557 717 616
External dimensions (mm) 175 x 175 x 125 175 x 175 x 125 175 x 175 x 150 175 x 175 x 150
Part number Part number Part number Part number
Metric knock-outs (grey lid) 212.0130.000 – 212.0140.000 –
Metric knock-outs (transparent lid) 212.1130.000 – 212.1140.000 –
PG knock-outs (grey lid) 213.0130.000 – 213.0140.000 –
PG knock-outs (transparent lid) 213.1130.000 – 213.1140.000 –
Without knock-outs (grey lid) 211.0130.000 311.0130.000 211.0140.000 311.0140.000
Without knock-outs (transparent lid) 211.1130.000 311.1130.000 211.1140.000 311.1140.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Mounting plate 148 x 148 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5004.000 929.5004.000 148x148 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5004.000 929.5004.000
DIN rail 35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000 35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000
DIN rail
Hinges (pair) PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000 PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000 PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000
Lid screws (Set of 4) 35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000 35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000
Internal mounting screws 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000
Threaded inserts (Set of 4) M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000 M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000

Knock-outs (only PC-Enclosures)

Metric 2 x M12/20 + 2 x M16/25 + 5 x M12/20 2 x M12/20 + 2 x M16/25 + 5 x M12/20
PG 4 x PG 16/21 + 4 x PG 9/16 + 10 x PG 9/13.5 4 x PG 16/21 + 4 x PG 9/16 + 10 x PG 9/13.5

334
175 x 250 x 75 mm 175 x 250 x 100 mm 175 x 250 x 150 mm
CT-S 215 PC-Enclosure CT-S 216 PC-Enclosure CT-S 217 PC-Enclosure
CT-S 315 ABS-Enclosure CT-S 316 ABS-Enclosure CT-S 317 ABS-Enclosure

175
175 175
164.5
165.5 162.5
140.5
141 138
239.5
215.5
250
240.5

237.5
250

216

250

213
175 175
175
168.5 168.5 168.5
160 75 160 100 160 150
144 49 25 144 49 50 144 49 100
100 100

4.5
100

4.5
4.5

3
ø 3.4

3
ø 3.4
3
ø 3.4

140 140 140

60.5 85.5 135.5
243.5

201.6

243.5

201.6
243.5

201.6

250

235
219

125

215

250

235
219

125

215
250

235
219

125

215

35

35
35

5.2 5.2 5.2

ø 4.5
ø 4.5
ø 4.5

138.5 138.5 138.5

ø8
ø8

ø8

3.1 3.5 3.1 3.5 3.1 3.5

Enclosures
CT-S 215 CT-S 315 CT-S 216 CT-S 316 CT-S 217 CT-S 317
PC ABS PC ABS PC ABS
631 553 743 666 947 842
175 x 250 x 75 175 x 250 x 75 175 x 250 x 100 175 x 250 x 100 175 x 250 x 150 175 x 250 x 150
Part number Part number Part number Part number Part number Part number
212.0150.000 – 212.0160.000 – 212.0170.000 –
212.1150.000 – 212.1160.000 – 212.1170.000 –
213.0150.000 – 213.0160.000 – 213.0170.000 –
213.1150.000 – 213.1160.000 – 213.1170.000 –
211.0150.000 311.0150.000 211.0160.000 311.0160.000 211.0170.000 311.0170.000
211.1150.000 311.1150.000 211.1160.000 311.1160.000 211.1170.000 311.1170.000

Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material

148 x 223 x1.5 St, Zn 929.5005.000 929.5005.000 148 x 223 x 1.5 St, Zn 929.5005.000 929.5005.000 148 x223x1.5 St, Zn 929.5005.000 929.5005.000
35 x 225 St, Zn 929.2005.000 929.2005.000 35 x 225 St, Zn 929.2005.000 929.2005.000 35 x 225 St, Zn 929.2005.000 929.2005.000
35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000 35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000 35 x 150 St, Zn 929.2004.000 929.2004.000
PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000 PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000 PA 929.3001.000 929.3001.000
PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000 PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000 PC 929.3002.000 929.3002.000
35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000 35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000 35 PA 929.3011.000 929.3011.000
4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000 4x8 St, Zn 929.3005.000 929.3005.000
M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000 M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000 M2 Ms 929.3004.000 929.3004.000

2 x M12/20 + 2 x M16/25 + 6 x M12/20 2 x M12/20 + 2 x M16/25 + 6 x M12/20 2 x M12/20 + 2 x M16/25 + 6 x M12/20

4 x PG 16/21 + 4 x PG 9/16 + 12 x PG 9/13.5 4 x PG 16/21 + 4 x PG 9/16 + 12 x PG 9/13.5 4 x PG 16/21 + 4 x PG 9/16 + 12 x PG 9/13.5

335
CT-Module
Plastic Enclosures

Type: CT-C

Features

l Polycarbonate enclosure range

can be linked ‘side-by-side’ to
form larger units
l Pre-formed flange knock-outs
on all base sides
l Variety of flange plate options
(full details P 359)
l Grey or transparent lid
l Foam (PUR) gasket, IP 66/67
l 132 or 187 mm depth (using
55 mm extension frame)
l Corner elevator brackets allow
height adjustment of optional
internal front plate

336
CT-Module 200 x 200 x 130 mm 200 x 200 x 185 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-C 201 PC-Enclosure CT-C 202 PC-Enclosure

Type: CT-C

199
199

180

199
180

199 180
180

3.5
60 60 3.5
3.5

60 60 3.5

55 30

187
132

102
102

30

33
30

33

16
16

11.5 x 45fl 4.2 x 10 11.5 x 45fl 4.2 x 10

16 x 200 28x 16 x 28 x
200
150 27 150 27
140 140
120 120
10.5

10.5
ø 7.5

ø 7.5
4x25=100 4x25=100

115 170
4x25=100

4x25=100
16 16
180
140
120

150

188
200

180
140
120

150

184
200
33 33
60

180 180

60
5.4

5.4
188 30 7 16 x 184 30 7 16 x

Enclosures
Type CT-C 201 CT-C 202
Material PC PC
Weight (g) 1039 1367
External dimensions (mm) 200 x 200 x 130 200 x 200 x 185
Part number Part number
Grey lid 224.0010.000 224.0020.000
Transparent lid 224.1010.000 224.1020.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 186 x 166 x 1.5 Al 929.4001.000 186 x 166 x 1.5 Al 929.4001.000
Mounting plate 160 x 160 x 1.5 St 929.5010.000 160 x 160 x 1.5 St 929.5010.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000
DIN rail (V) 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000
Hinges (pair) PA 929.3061.000 PA 929.3061.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000
Flange Plates 4 x F1 4 x F1

337
CT-Module 200 x 300 x 130 mm 200 x 300 x 185 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-C 203 PC-Enclosure CT-C 204 PC-Enclosure

Type: CT-C

299

299

180

199
180

199
280

280
9.5 8 x

3.5
98 97 3.5
9.5 8 x
98 97 3.5
3.5

55 30

187
132
102

102
62

62
20.5

20.5
63

63
14 x 45fl 4.2 x 10 14 x 45fl 4.2 x 10
40 x 40 x
8x 8x
300 300
250 250
240 27 240 27
210 210
8 x 25 = 200 8 x 25 = 200

10.5
10.5

ø 7.5
ø 7.5

125 125

115 4x25=100 170

16
4x25=100

16
180
140

120
150

200
184
180
140

120
150

188
200

33 33
60

280 280

60
5.4
30
5.4

288 30 7 8x 284 7 8x
11.5 x 45fl 8 x 11.5 x 45fl 8 x

Type CT-C 203 CT-C 204

Material PC PC
Weight (g) 1349 1733
External dimensions (mm) 200 x 300 x 130 200 x 300 x 185
Part number Part number
Grey lid 224.0030.000 224.0040.000
Transparent lid 224.1030.000 224.1040.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 186 x 286 x 1.5 Al 929.4003.000 186 x 286 x 1.5 Al 929.4003.000
Mounting plate 160 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5011.000 160 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5011.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000
DIN rail (V) 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000
Hinges (pair) PA 929.3061.000 PA 929.3061.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000
Flange Plates 2 x F1 + 2 x F2 2 x F1 + 2 x F2

338
200 x 400 x 130 mm 200 x 400 x 185 mm 300 x 300 x 130 mm
CT-C 205 PC-Enclosure CT-C 206 PC-Enclosure CT-C 207 PC-Enclosure

299

398 398

280

298
199
180
199
180

280
380 380
98 97 3.5

3.5
9.5 8 x
9.5 8 x
98 97 3.5 98 97 3.5
3.5
3.5

132
102
62
55 30
132

20.5
102
62

187

63
14 x 45fl
102
62

16 x 4.2 x 10
300
63

20.5

14 x 45fl 52 x
63

20.5

250
8x 4.2 x 10 14 x 45fl
400 8x 4.2 x 10 240 27
48 x 400
350 48 x 210
350
340 8 x 25 = 200
27

10.5
340

ø 7.5
310 27 125
310
12 x 25 = 300
10.5

12 x 25 = 300
ø 7.5

10.5

125
ø 7.5

125
115
20.5

8 x 25 = 200
115
280
240

210
250

125

288
300
170
4x25=100

4x25=100

16 16
180
140

120

150

188
200

33 63
180
140

120
150

200
184

97
33
60

98
380 380
60

280
5.4

30
5.4

388 7 8x 384 30

5.4
7 8x 288 62
11.5 x 45fl 9.5 16 x
11.5 x 45fl 8 x

Enclosures
CT-C 205 CT-C 206 CT-C 207
PC PC PC
1674 2131 1738
200 x 400 x 130 200 x 400 x 185 300 x 300 x 130
Part number Part number Part number
224.0050.000 224.0060.000 224.0070.000
224.1050.000 224.1060.000 224.1070.000

Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material

186 x 386 x 1.5 Al 929.4005.000 186 x 386 x 1.5 Al 929.4005.000 286 x 286 x 1.5 Al 929.4006.000
160 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5012.000 160 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5012.000 260 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5013.000
35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000
35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000
PA 929.3061.000 PA 929.3061.000 PA 929.3061.000
PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000
2 x F1 + 2 x F2 2 x F1 + 2 x F2 4 x F2

339
CT-Module 300 x 300 x 185 mm 300 x 400 x 130 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-C 208 PC-Enclosure CT-C 209 PC-Enclosure

Type: CT-C

299

398

280

298

280

299
280

98 97 3.5
3.5

380
55 30

98 97 3.5
187

3.5
102
62

132
102
62
20.5
63

14 x 45fl
16 x 4.2 x 10
300

20.5
14 x 45fl

63
52 x
250 16 x 4.2 x 10
400 60 x
240 27 350
210 340 27
8 x 25 = 200 310
10.5
ø 7.5

125 12 x 25 = 300

10.5
ø 7.5
125

170
114
20.5
8 x 25 = 200

8 x 25 = 200
20.5
280
240

210
250

125

300
284

280
240

210
250

125

288
300
63
97

63

97
98
98

280 380

5.4
62
5.4

284 62 388
9.5 16 x 9.5 16 x

Type CT-C 208 CT-C 209

Material PC PC
Weight (g) 2188 2199
External dimensions (mm) 300 x 300 x 185 300 x 400 x 130
Part number Part number
Grey lid 224.0080.000 224.0090.000
Transparent lid 224.1080.000 224.1090.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 286 x 286 x 1.5 Al 929.4006.000 286 x 386 x 1.5 Al 929.4008.000
Mounting plate 260 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5013.000 260 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5014.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000
DIN rail (V) 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000
Hinges (pair) PA 929.3061.000 PA 929.3061.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000
Flange Plates 4 x F2 4 x F2

340
300 x 400 x 185 mm 300 x 600 x 130 mm 300 x 600 x 185 mm
CT-C 210 PC-Enclosure CT-C 211 PC-Enclosure CT-C 212 PC-Enclosure

398

598
598
280

299

280

299
252
380
280

299
252

98 97 3.5
3.5

580
580
55 30

194
3.5
187

194 196 53

3.5
102
62

196 53 3.5
3.5

55 30
20.5

14 x 45fl
63

187
16 x
132

4.2 x 10

102
62
102
62

400 60 x 4.2 x 10 4.2 x 10

350 82 x 14 x 45fl 82 x

20.5
14 x 45fl

63
20.5
63

340 27 24 x 24 x
600 27 600 27
310
240 240
12 x 25 = 300
10.5

8 x 25 = 200 8 x 25 = 200

10.5
ø 7.5

10.5

ø 7.5
ø 7.5

125 210 210 125

125

169 125 69 125 69

115 170

8 x 25 = 200
8 x 25 = 200
8 x 25 = 200

20.5 20.5 20.5

280
240

210

255
250

125

300
284
255
280
240

210
250

125

300

280
240

250

125

288
300
210
284

63 63

97
63
97

97

98
98

300 Group 1 300

98

380 Group 1 Group 2 Group 2

5.4
62
5.4

580 62 580
5.4

384 62 9.5 24 x
9.5 16 x 588 9.5 24 x 584

Enclosures
CT-C 210 CT-C 211 CT-C 212
PC PC PC
2703 3000 3703
300 x 400 x 185 300 x 600 x 130 300 x 600 x 185
Part number Part number Part number
224.0100.000 224.0110.000 224.0120.000
224.1100.000 224.1110.000 224.1120.000

Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material

286 x 386 x 1.5 Al 929.4008.000 286 x 586 x 1.5 Al 929.4010.000 286 x 586 x 1.5 Al 929.4010.000
260 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5014.000 260 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5016.000 260 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5016.000
35 x 360 St 929.2014.000
35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000
PA 929.3061.000 PA 929.3061.000 PA 929.3061.000
PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000
4 x F2 6 x F2 6 x F2

341
CT-Module 400 x 600 x 130 mm 400 x 600 x 185 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-C 213 PC-Enclosure CT-C 214 PC-Enclosure

Type: CT-C

598
598

352

380

398
352

380

398
580
580
194
196 53 3.5
194

3.5
196 53 3.5
3.5

55 30

187
132
102
62

102
62
4.2 x 10 4.2 x 10
14 x 45fl 90 x 90 x
20.5

14 x 45fl

20.5
63

63
24 x 24 x
600 27 600 27
240 240
8 x 25 = 200
10.5

8 x 25 = 200

10.5
ø 7.5

ø 7.5
210 125 210 125

125 69 115 125 69 170

12 x 25 = 300

12 x 25 = 300
20.5 20.5
380
340

350

125

388
400
310

355

380
340

310

355
350

125

400
384
63 63
97

97
98

98
Group 1 300 Group 2 62 Group 1 300 Group 2 62

5.4
5.4

580 9.5 24 x 580 9.5 24 x

588 584

Type CT-C 213 CT-C 214

Material PC PC
Weight (g) 3964 4730
External dimensions (mm) 400 x 600 x 130 400 x 600 x 185
Part number Part number
Grey lid 224.0130.000 224.0140.000
Transparent lid 224.1130.000 224.1140.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 386 x 586 x 1.5 Al 929.4012.000 386 x 586 x 1.5 Al 929.4012.000
Mounting plate 360 x560 x 1.5 St 929.5018.000 360 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5018.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000
DIN rail (V)
Hinges (pair) PA 929.3061.000 PA 929.3061.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000
Flange Plates 6 x F2 6 x F2

342
343
Enclosures
CT-Module
Plastic Enclosures

Type: CT-W

Features

l Hinged lid with robust hinges

l Quick release lid latches
(can be padlocked)
l Grey or transparent lid
l Foam (PUR) gasket, IP 66/67
l 132 or 187 mm depth (using
55 mm extension frame)
l Corner elevator brackets allow
height adjustment of optional
internal front plate

344
CT-Module 200 x 200 x 130 mm 200 x 200 x 185 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-W 201 PC-Enclosure CT-W 202 PC-Enclosure

Type: CT-W

3.5
3.5

55 30
3.5

187
102
132
102

200
200
199 199
180 180

27 27

220
198

180

10.5
220
199

180

10.5

ø 7.5
74
ø 7.5

74

4x25=100
4x25=100

180
140
120

150

184
200
180
140
120

150

188
200

115 170

4x25=100 320 4x25=100 375

5.4
5.4

120 120
140 2:1
140 2:1
150 4.2 x 10 150 4.2 x 10
180 28 x 180 28 x
188 184
51

51

Enclosures
Type CT-W 201 CT-W 202
Material PC PC
Weight (g) 1149 1453
External dimensions (mm) 200 x 200 x 130 200 x 200 x 185
Part number Part number
Grey lid 234.0010.000 234.0020.000
Transparent lid 234.1010.000 234.1020.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 186 x 166 x 1.5 Al 929.4001.000 186 x 166 x 1.5 Al 929.4001.000
Mounting plate 160 x 160 x 1.5 St 929.5010.000 160 x 160 x 1.5 St 929.5010.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000
DIN rail (V) 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000

345
CT-Module 200 x 300 x 130 mm 200 x 300 x 185 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-W 203 PC-Enclosure CT-W 204 PC-Enclosure

Type: CT-W

3.5

3.5
3.5
3.5

55 30

187
132
102

102
300 300
299 299
280 280
27 27
220
199

180

180
10.5

10.5
220
199
174
ø 7.5

ø 7.5
174
4x25=100

4x25=100
180
140

120
150

188
200

115
180
140

120
150

184
200
170

125 125
320 375
5.4

5.4
8 x 25 = 200 8 x 25 = 200
210 2:1 210 2:1
240 240
250 250
4.2 x 10 4.2 x 10
51

280 40 x 280 40 x

51
288 284

Type CT-W 203 CT-W 204

Material PC PC
Weight (g) 1459 1819
External dimensions (mm) 200 x 300 x 130 200 x 300 x 185
Part number Part number
Grey lid 234.0030.000 234.0040.000
Transparent lid 234.1030.000 234.1040.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 186 x 286 x 1.5 Al 929.4003.000 186 x 286 x 1.5 Al 929.4003.000
Mounting plate 160 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5011.000 160 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5011.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000
DIN rail (V) 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000

346
 200 x 400 x 130 mm 200 x 400 x 185 mm 300 x 300 x 130 mm
CT-W 205 PC-Enclosure CT-W 206 PC-Enclosure CT-W 207 PC-Enclosure

3.5

3.5

132
102
3.5
3.5
3.5

300
3.5
55 30

299
132
102

280
187
102

400
400
398
380 398 27
380

320
299

280
27

10.5
27 174

ø 7.5
220
199

180

10.5

220

274
199

180
ø 7.5

10.5

274
ø 7.5

8 x 25 = 200
280
240

210
250

125

288
300
115
4x25=100

4x25=100
180
140

120

150

188
200

115
180
140

120
150

184
200

170

125 125 125

320 375
420
5.4
5.4

5.4
12 x 25 = 300 12 x 25 = 300 8 x 25 = 200
310 310 2:1
210 2:1
340 2:1 340
4.2 x 10 4.2 x 10 240
350 350 48 x 4.2 x 10
48 x 250 52 x
380 380
51

280

51
384
51

388 288

Enclosures
CT-W 205 CT-W 206 CT-W 207
PC PC PC
1784 2217 1848
200 x 400 x 130 200 x 400 x 185 300 x 300 x 130
Part number Part number Part number
234.0050.000 234.0060.000 234.0070.000
234.1050.000 234.1060.000 234.1070.000

Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material

186 x 386 x 1.5 Al 929.4005.000 186 x 386 x 1.5 Al 929.4005.000 286 x 286 x 1.5 Al 929.4006.000
160 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5012.000 160 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5012.000 260 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5013.000
35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000
35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000
PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000

347
CT-Module 300 x 300 x 185 mm 300 x 400 x 130 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-W 208 PC-Enclosure CT-W 209 PC-Enclosure

Type: CT-W

3.5
3.5
55 30

3.5

3.5
187
102

132
102
300
400
299
280 398
380

27
27
280
320
299

280
320
299
10.5

174 274
ø 7.5

10.5
ø 7.5
8 x 25 = 200

8 x 25 = 200
280
240

210
250

125

284
300

280
240

210
250

125

288
300
114
170

125 125
475 420

5.4
5.4

8 x 25 = 200 12 x 25 300
210 2:1 310
2:1
240 340
4.2 x 10 350 4.2 x 10
250 40 x 60 x
280 380

51
51

284 388

Type CT-W 208 CT-W 209

Material PC PC
Weight (g) 2298 2257
External dimensions (mm) 300 x 300 x 185 300 x 400 x 130
Part number Part number
Grey lid 234.0080.000 234.0090.000
Transparent lid 234.1080.000 234.1090.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 286 x 286 x 1.5 Al 929.4006.000 286 x 386 x 1.5 Al 929.4008.000
Mounting plate 260 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5013.000 260 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5014.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000
DIN rail (V) 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000

348
 300 x 400 x 185 mm 300 x 600 x 130 mm 300 x 600 x 185 mm
CT-W 210 PC-Enclosure CT-W 211 PC-Enclosure CT-W 212 PC-Enclosure

3.5
3.5
55 30

187
102

3.5 3.5
3.5

3.5
400

102 55 30
132
102

398

187
380 600 2:1
600
598
580 598
51
580
27
320
299

280

274 27
27
10.5

240
299
280

320
252
ø 7.5

474

299
280

320
252
8 x 25 = 200 474 240
10.5
ø 7.5

174 8 x 25 = 200

10.5
ø 7.5
125 174 125

125 69
8 x 25 = 200

125 69
8 x 25 = 200
280
240

210
250

125

284
300

8 x 25 = 200
210
280
240

255
250

125

288
300

115

210
280
240

255
250

125

284
300
169 210 210 170

125 Group 1 300 Group 2 Group 1 300

475 Group 2
5.4

420 475

5.4
580
5.4

12 x 25 = 300 580
2:1 588 4.2 x 10 584 2:1
310 4.2 x 10
340 82 x 82 x
350

51
380 4.2 x 10
60 x
51

384

Enclosures
CT-W 210 CT-W 211 CT-W 212
PC PC PC
2737 3212 3703
300 x 400 x 185 300 x 600 x 130 300 x 600 x 185
Part number Part number Part number
234.0100.000 234.0110.000 234.0120.000
234.1100.000 234.1110.000 234.1120.000

Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material

286 x 386 x 1.5 Al 929.4008.000 286 x 586 x 1.5 Al 929.4010.000 286 x 586 x 1.5 Al 929.4010.000
260 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5014.000 260 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5016.000 260 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5016.000
35 x 360 St 929.2014.000
35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000
PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000

349
CT-Module 400 x 600 x 130 mm 400 x 600 x 185 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-W 213 PC-Enclosure CT-W 214 PC-Enclosure

Type: CT-W

3.5

3.5
3.5

102 55 30
3.5

187
132
102

600
600
598 598 2:1
2:1 580
580

51
51

420
398
380

352
27
420
398
380

352

27
240 474 240
474

10.5
8 x 25 = 200 8 x 25 = 200

ø 7.5
10.5

174 174
ø 7.5

125 125

125 69 125 69

12 x 25 = 300
12 x 25 = 300

380
340

355
350

125

384
400
310
380
340

355
350

125

388
400
310

210 115 210 170

Group 1 300 Group 2 520 Group 1 300 Group 2 575

5.4
580
5.4

580
588 4.2 x 10 584 4.2 x 10
90 x 90 x

Type CT-W 213 CT-W 214

Material PC PC
Weight (g) 4176 4942
External dimensions (mm) 400 x 600 x 130 400 x 600 x 185
PC-Enclosures Part number Part number
Grey lid 234.0130.000 234.0140.000
Transparent lid 234.1130.000 234.1140.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 386 x 586 x 1.5 Al 929.4012.000 386 x 586 x 1.5 Al 929.4012.000
Mounting plate 360 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5018.000 360 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5018.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000
DIN rail (V)
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000

350
351
Enclosures
CT-Module
Plastic Enclosures

Type: CT-O

Features

l Grey or transparent lid

l Foam (PUR) gasket, IP 66/67
l 132 or 187 mm depth (using
55 mm extension frame)
l Optional corner elevator
brackets allow height
adjustment of internal
mounting plate.

352
CT-Module 200 x 200 x 130 mm 200 x 200 x 185 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-O 201 PC-Enclosure CT-O 202 PC-Enclosure
CT-O 301 ABS-Enclosure CT-O 302 ABS-Enclosure
Type: CT-O

199 199

180

199
180

199
180
180
3.5

3.5
3.5
3.5

55 30

187
132
102

102
200 4.2 x 10 200 4.2 x 10
28 x 28 x
150 27 150 27
140 140
120 120

10.5
10.5

ø 7.5
ø 7.5

4x25=100 4x25=100

4x25=100
4x25=100

180
140
120

150

184
200
180
140
120

150

188
200

115 170

180 180

5.4
184
5.4

188

Enclosures
Type CT-O 201 CT-O 301 CT-O 202 CT-O 302
Material PC ABS PC ABS
Weight (g) 1039 894 1367 1222
External dimensions (mm) 200 x 200 x 130 200 x 200 x 130 200 x 200 x 185 200 x 200 x 185
Part number Part number Part number Part number
Grey lid 244.0010.000 344.0010.000 244.0020.000 344.0020.000
Transparent lid 244.1010.000 344.1010.000 244.1020.000 344.1020.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 186 x 166 x 1.5 Al 929.4001.000 929.4001.000 186 x 166 x 1.5 Al 929.4001.000 929.4001.000
Mounting plate 160 x 160 x 1.5 St 929.5010.000 929.5010.000 160 x 160 x 1.5 St 929.5010.000 929.5010.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 929.2010.000
DIN rail (V) 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 929.2010.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000
Threaded inserts M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000 M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000

353
CT-Module 200 x 300 x 130 mm 200 x 300 x 185 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-O 203 PC-Enclosure CT-O 204 PC-Enclosure
CT-O 303 ABS-Enclosure CT-O 304 ABS-Enclosure
Type: CT-O

299 299
180

199

180

199
280 280

3.5 3.5

3.5
3.5

55 30
132

187
102

4.2 x 10

102
40 x 4.2 x 10
300 40 x
300
250
250
240 27
240 27
210
210
8 x 25 = 200
10.5
ø 7.5

8 x 25 = 200

10.5
ø 7.5
125
125
4x25=100

4x25=100
180
140

120
150

188
200

115
180
140

120
150

200
184
170

280 280
5.4

288
5.4
284

Type CT-O 203 CT-O 303 CT-O 204 CT-O 304

Material PC ABS PC ABS
Weight (g) 1349 1176 1733 1560
External dimensions (mm) 200 x 300 x 130 200 x 300 x 130 200 x 300 x 185 200 x 300 x 185
Part number Part number Part number Part number
Grey lid 244.0030.000 344.0030.000 244.0040.000 344.0040.000
Transparent lid 244.1030.000 344.1030.000 244.1040.000 344.1040.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 186 x286 x 1.5 Al 929.4003.000 929.4003.000 186 x286 x 1.5 Al 929.4003.000 929.4003.000
Mounting plate 160 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5011.000 929.5011.000 160 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5011.000 929.5011.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 929.2012.000
DIN rail (V) 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 929.2010.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000
Threaded inserts M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000 M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000

354
200 x 400 x 130 mm 200 x 400 x 185 mm 300 x 300 x 130 mm
CT-O 205 PC-Enclosure CT-O 206 PC-Enclosure CT-O 207 PC-Enclosure
CT-O 305 ABS-Enclosure CT-O 306 ABS-Enclosure CT-O 307 ABS-Enclosure

299

398
398

280

299
199
180
199
180

280
380
380 3.5

3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5

132
55 30

102
132

187

300
102

4.2 x 10
102

52 x
400 4.2 x 10 250
400 4.2 x 10
350 48 x 240 27
350 48 x
210
340 340
27 27 8 x 25 = 200

10.5
310

ø 7.5
310 125
12 x 25 = 300 12 x 25 = 300
10.5

10.5
ø 7.5

ø 7.5

125 125

8 x 25 = 200
280
240

210
250

125

288
300
115
4x25=100

4x25=100
180
140

120

150

188
200

115
180
140

120

150

200
184

170

380 380 280

5.4

5.4

5.4
388 384 288

Enclosures
CT-O 205 CT-O 305 CT-O 206 CT-O 306 CT-O 207 CT-O 307
PC ABS PC ABS PC ABS
1674 1467 2131 1924 1738 1510
200 x 400 x 130 200 x 400 x 130 200 x 400 x 185 200 x 400 x 185 300 x 300 x 130 300 x 300 x 130
Part number Part number Part number Part number Part number Part number
244.0050.000 344.0050.000 244.0060.000 344.0060.000 244.0070.000 344.0070.000
244.1050.000 344.1050.000 244.1060.000 344.1060.000 244.1070.000 344.1070.000

Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material

186 x386 x 1.5 Al 929.4005.000 929.4005.000 186 x386 x 1.5 Al 929.4005.000 929.4005.000 286 x286 x 1.5 Al 929.4006.000 929.4006.000
160 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5012.000 929.5012.000 160 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5012.000 929.5012.000 260 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5013.000 929.5013.000
35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 929.2010.000 35 x 160 St 929.2010.000 929.2010.000
35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 929.2014.000 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 929.2014.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 929.2012.000
PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000
42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000
M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000 M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000 M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000

355
CT-Module 300 x 300 x 185 mm 300 x 400 x 130 mm
Plastic Enclosures CT-O 208 PC-Enclosure CT-O 209 PC-Enclosure
CT-O 308 ABS-Enclosure CT-O 309 ABS-Enclosure
Type: CT-O

299
398

280

299

280

299
280
380

3.5
3.5

3.5

3.5
55 30

187

132
102
102

300 400 4.2 x 10

4.2 x 10
52 x 60 x
250 350
240 340 27
27
210 310
8 x 25 = 200 12 x 25 = 300

10.5
10.5

ø 7.5
ø 7.5

125 125

8 x 25 = 200
8 x 25 = 200

280
240

210
250

125

288
300
280
240

210
250

125

300
284

114
170

280 380
5.4

5.4
284 388

Type CT-O 208 CT-O 308 CT-O 209 CT-O 309

Material PC ABS PC ABS
Weight (g) 2188 1960 2199 1950
External dimensions (mm) 300 x 300 x 185 300 x 300 x 185 300 x 400 x 130 300 x 400 x 130
Part number Part number Part number Part number
Grey lid 244.0080.000 344.0080.000 244.0090.000 344.0090.000
Transparent lid 244.1080.000 344.1080.000 244.1090.000 344.1090.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 286 x286 x 1.5 Al 929.4006.000 929.4006.000 286 x386 x 1.5 Al 929.4008.000 929.4008.000
Mounting plate 260 x 260 x 1.5 St 929.5013.000 929.5013.000 260 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5014.000 929.5014.000
DIN rail (H) 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 929.2014.000
DIN rail (V) 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 929.2012.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000
Threaded inserts M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000 M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000

356
300 x 400 x 185 mm 300 x 600 x 130 mm 300 x 600 x 185 mm
CT-O 210 PC-Enclosure CT-O 211 PC-Enclosure CT-O 212 PC-Enclosure
CT-O 310 ABS-Enclosure CT-O 311 ABS-Enclosure CT-O 312 ABS-Enclosure

398

598
598
280

299

280

299
252
280

299
252

380
580
3.5 580
3.5

3.5
55 30

3.5

3.5
3.5
187

55 30
102

132

187
102

400 4.2 x 10 4.2 x 10

102
82 x 4.2 x 10
60 x 600 82 x
350 600
340 27 27 27
240
310 240
8 x 25 = 200
10.5

12 x 25 = 300 8 x 25 = 200

10.5
ø 7.5
10.5

ø 7.5
210
ø 7.5

125 125 210 125

125 69 125 69
8 x 25 = 200

8 x 25 = 200
280
240

210

255
250

125

288
300

280
240

210

255
250

125

300
284
115
8 x 25 = 200
280
240

210
250

125

300
284

170
169

Group 1 300 Group 2 Group 1 300 Group 2

5.4
380
5.4

580 580
5.4

384 588 584

Enclosures
CT-O 210 CT-O 310 CT-O 211 CT-O 311 CT-O 212 CT-O 312
PC ABS PC ABS PC ABS
2703 2454 3000 2696 3703 3399
300 x 400 x 185 300 x 400 x 185 300 x 600 x 130 300 x 600 x 130 300 x 600 x 185 300 x 600 x 185
Part number Part number Part number Part number Part number Part number
244.0100.000 344.0100.000 244.0110.000 344.0110.000 244.0120.000 344.0120.000
244.1100.000 344.1100.000 244.1110.000 344.1110.000 244.1120.000 344.1120.000

Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material

286 x386 x 1.5 Al 929.4008.000 929.4008.000 286 x586 x 1.5 Al 929.4010.000 929.4010.000 286 x586 x 1.5 Al 929.4010.000 929.4010.000
260 x 360 x 1.5 St 929.5014.000 929.5014.000 260 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5016.000 929.5016.000 260 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5016.000 929.5016.000
35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 929.2014.000
35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 929.2012.000 35 x 260 St 929.2012.000 929.2012.000
PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000
42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000
M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000 M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000 M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000

357
CT-Module 400 x 600 x 130 400 x 600 x 185
Plastic Enclosures CT-O 213 PC-Enclosure CT-O 214 PC-Enclosure
CT-O 313 ABS-Enclosure CT-O 314 ABS-Enclosure
Type: CT-O

598
598

352

380

398
352

380

398
580
580
3.5

3.5
3.5
3.5

55 30

187
132

102
102

4.2 x 10 4.2 x 10
600 600 90 x
90 x

27 27
240 240
8 x 25 = 200 8 x 25 = 200

10.5
10.5

Ø 7.5
Ø 7.5

210 125 210 125

125 69 125 69

12 x 25 = 300
12 x 25 = 300

380
340

310

355
350

125

400
384
380
340

310

355
350

125

388
400

115
170

Group 1 300 Group 2 Group 1 300 Group 2

5.4
580
5.4

580
588 584

Type CT-O 213 CT-O 313 CT-O 214 CT-O 314

Material PC ABS PC ABS
Weight (g) 3964 3484 4730 4250
External dimensions (mm) 400 x 600 x 130 400 x 600 x 130 400 x 600 x 185 400 x 600 x 185
Part number Part number Part number Part number
Grey lid 244.0130.000 344.0130.000 244.0140.000 344.0140.000
Transparent lid 244.1130.000 344.1130.000 244.1140.000 344.1140.000

Accessories (also see P 359) Dim’s (mm) Material Dim’s (mm) Material
Front plate (inc elevator brackets) 386 x586 x 1.5 Al 929.4012.000 929.4012.000 386 x586 x 1.5 Al 929.4012.000 929.4012.000
Mounting plate 360 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5018.000 929.5018.000 360 x 560 x 1.5 St 929.5018.000 929.5018.000
DIN rail (H)
DIN rail (V) 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 929.2014.000 35 x 360 St 929.2014.000 929.2014.000
External mounting brackets PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000 PC 929.3063.000 929.3063.000
Lid screws (std) (Set of 4) 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000 42 PA 929.3091.000 929.3091.000
Threaded inserts M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000 M3 Ms 929.3069.000 929.3069.000

358
Accessories CT-Module

e
Cover flang
ange
Knock-out fl
flange
Membrane
andle
Assembly h

Flanges & Accessories for CT-C Accessories for CT-O, C & W

Part number Cover flanges Part number
929.6022.000 Size F1 without gasket, PC/ABS 929.3040.000 Latch (pair)
929.6024.000 Size F2 with gasket (PUR), PC 929.3041.000 Latch (separate) GRP/AISI304
Threaded flanges 929.3042.000 Latch handle
Size F1 929.3043.000 Latch hook, PA
929.6006.000 3x PG 16 without gasket 929.3044.000 O-ring seal
929.6007.000 3x PG 21 without gasket 929.3045.000 Padlock plate, AISI304
929.6008.000 1x PG 29 without gasket, PC/ABS 929.3046.000 Fixing screw for hook
Size F2 with gasket 929.3047.000 Fixing screw for latch
929.6001.000 3x PG 21 + 4x PG 16 with gasket 929.3006.000 Filler plug for 25 mm lid
929.6002.000 2x PG 29 + 6x PG 16 with gasket 929.3007.000 Filler plug for 50 mm lid
929.6003.000 2x PG 36 + 4x PG 16 with gasket 929.3008.000 Filler plug for 100 mm lid
929.6004.000 8x PG 16 with gasket 929.3060.000 Screw for frame
929.6005.000 10x PG 11 with gasket 929.3061.000 Hinge (pair)
Knock-out flanges, Size F2 929.3062.000 Hinge (pair) including two lid plugs
929.6010.000 7x PG 11 + 7x PG 9/16 with gasket 929.3065.000 Mounting plate elevator brackets (Set of 4)
929.6011.000 2x PG 21/29/36 + 2x PG 9/16 + 1x PG 11 with gasket 929.3067.000 Threaded bushes & lid screw, PA
929.6012.000 5x PG 16/21 + 2x PG 11 with gasket 929.3068.000 Mounting screw for rail & plate
929.6025.000 7x M 16 + 7x M 12/20 929.3069.000 Threaded inserts
929.6026.000 2x M 20/32/50 + 2x M 12/20 + 2x M 16 929.3070.000 M 3 threaded bush (Set of 4)
929.6027.000 5x M 20/32 + 2x M 16 + 1x M 12/20 929.3071.000 Lid plugs, PE
Membrane flange, Size F1 929.3072.000 Lid padlock (inc two keys)
929.6013.000 for 5x Ø 7–30 mm, EPDM 929.3073.000 Spare key for padlock

Enclosures
929.6017.000 3x Ø 21 + 4x Ø 15 mm without gasket, TPE 929.3075.000 4x 15-mm-distance inc screw M5, St
929.6018.000 4x Ø 16 + 6x Ø 13 mm without gasket, TPE 929.3098.000 Winged lid screw
Membrane flange, Size F2 Accessories for CT-S
929.6014.000 for 25x Ø 5–26 mm, EPDM 929.3001.000 Hinges (pair)
929.6015.000 for 35x Ø 5–26 mm, EPDM 929.3002.000 External mounting brackets
929.6016.000 for 3x Ø 24–60 mm, EPDM 929.3004.000 Threaded inserts
929.6019.000 3x Ø 30 + 6x Ø 18 + 16x Ø 14 mm without gasket, TPE 929.3005.000 Internal mounting screws
929.6020.000 9x Ø 18 + 24x Ø 14 mm without gasket, TPE 929.3006.000 Filler plug for 25-mm-Lid
Flange Accessories, Size F1 & F2 929.3007.000 Filler plug for 50-mm-Lid
929.3020.000 50 mm extension frame for F2 929.3008.000 Filler plug for 100-mm-Lid
929.3021.000 Flange gasket F1 929.3011.000 Lid screw (Set of 4), 35 mm
929.3022.000 Flange gasket F2 929.3012.000 Lid screw (Set of 4), 60 mm
929.3023.000 Fixing screw set F1 (PA) Front plates with hinges for CT-C, CT-W and CT-O
929.3024.000 Fixing screw set F1 (St with PA head) 929.4001.000 186 x 166 x 1.5 Hinge side: 200 mm
929.3025.000 Fixing screw set F2 (PA) 929.4002.000 186 x 286 x 1.5 Hinge side: 200 mm
929.3026.000 Fixing screw set F2 (St with PA head) 929.4003.000 186 x 286 x 1.5 Hinge side: 300 mm
929.3027.000 Assembly handle F2 929.4004.000 186 x 386 x 1.5 Hinge side: 200 mm
929.4005.000 186 x 386 x 1.5 Hinge side: 400 mm
929.4006.000 286 x 286 x 1.5 Hinge side: 300 mm
929.4007.000 286 x 386 x 1.5 Hinge side: 300 mm
929.4008.000 286 x 386 x 1.5 Hinge side: 400 mm
929.4009.000 286 x 586 x 1.5 Hinge side: 300 mm
929.4010.000 286 x 586 x 1.5 Hinge side: 600 mm
929.4011.000 386 x 586 x 1.5 Hinge side: 400 mm
929.4012.000 386 x 586 x 1.5 Hinge side: 600 mm

359
Polyester enclosures
CP series

BERNSTEIN polyester enclosures from the

CP and CPS series are made of high-quality
glass-fibre reinforced polyester. The
reduced surface resistance (RO <109 ohms)
of the black polyester enclosures (CPS)
makes them ideally suited to use in ‘EX’
areas and in generally harsh conditions.
They can encapsulate electrical, electronic
and control components. All enclosures
comply with protection class IP 65
(according to DIN).

BERNSTEIN polyester enclosures provide

either M4 or M6 internal mounting
options, depending on the size of the base.
These galvanised brass bushes are em-
bedded in the interior of the base, permit- Technical data Colour
ting the assembly of mounting plates, RAL 7000 (grey)
mounting rails, PCBs etc. Material or RAL 9005 (deep black)
Glass-fibre reinforced polyester in grey or alternative:
The captive stainless steel lid screws are glass-fibre reinforced polyester in black other colours on request
held in place by a lock integrated in the lid.
The threaded bushes for lid attachment are Gasket Temperature
also made of stainless steel. A gasket is Neoprene round seal -40 °C to +80 °C (neoprene gasket)
factory-fitted (for standard enclosures), (siliconised) alternative:
guaranteeing the protection class. The alternative: -50 °C to +130 °C (silicone gasket)
polyester enclosures are available in grey Neoprene round seal or -30 °C to +100 °C
(RAL 7000, light grey) or black material (silicone-free) (explosion-hazardous areas)
(RAL 9005, jet black), as standard. Silicone round seal
Protection class
Lid screws IP 65
Stainless steel, captive, multi-purpose alternative:
cross-head higher protection classes on request
alternative:
Allen screws, stainless steel, captive Approval
PTB No. Ex-83/3120
PTB No. Ex-90.C.3118
PTB No. Ex-90.C.3116 U

German Lloyd: No. 91 186-84HH

SEV 97.1 10396

UL: File E 182264

360
Accessories
Polyester enclosures

Mounting plates Mounting rails

galvanised sheet steel or laminated paper (thickness: Standard rails TS-15, TS-32 or TS-35 (steel),
CP-140 to CP-195, laminated paper 1.5 mm; CP-220 to yellow-passivated for holding terminal blocks.
CP-320 and CP-370 to CP-460 sheet steel 1.5 mm;
CP-330 sheet steel 2.5 mm), permitting the extended
mounting of equipment.

Earthing rails External attachment brackets External hinges

Galvanised steel for connecting and routing of Stainless steel for mounting enclosures without lid For hinged attachment of the
protective earth connections. opening. The butt-straps always run in parallel to the enclosure lid. Opening angle of lid approx. 155°.
narrow face of the enclosures. Aluminium casting, RAL 7001 or RAL 9005. Mechanical
machining is required for mounting. Drill template is
supplied.

Internal hinges Silicone lid gasket

For hinged attachment of the enclosure lid. Opening with improved temperature range (-50 °C to +130 °C).
angle of lid approx. 95°. Stainless steel. Mechanical Standard type made of silicone foam.

Enclosures
machining is required for mounting.

Overview – polyester enclosures

Polyester enclosures (grey) Polyester enclosures (black)

Dimensions/mm Part number Type Part number Type

L x Wx H
80 x 75 x 55 414.0.0000.00 CP-140 514.0.0000.00 CPS-140
80 x 75 x 75 414.0.0000.50 CP-145 514.0.0000.50 CPS-145
110 x 75 x 55 415.0.0000.00 CP-150 515.0.0000.00 CPS-150
110 x 75 x 75 415.0.0000.50 CP-155 515.0.0000.50 CPS-155
160 x 75 x 55 417.0.0000.00 CP-170 517.0.0000.00 CPS-170
160 x 75 x 75 417.0.0000.50 CP-175 517.0.0000.50 CPS-175
190 x 75 x 55 419.0.0000.00 CP-190 519.0.0000.00 CPS-190
190 x 75 x 75 419.0.0000.50 CP-195 519.0.0000.50 CPS-195
122 x 120 x 90 422.0.0000.00 CP-220 522.0.0000.00 CPS-220
220 x 120 x 90 424.0.0000.00 CP-240 524.0.0000.00 CPS-240
160 x 160 x 90 428.0.0000.00 CP-280 528.0.0000.00 CPS-280
260 x 160 x 90 430.0.0000.00 CP-300 530.0.0000.00 CPS-300
360 x 160 x 90 432.0.0000.00 CP-320 532.0.0000.00 CPS-320
560 x 160 x 90 433.0.0000.00 CP-330 533.0.0000.00 CPS-330
255 x 250 x 120 437.0.0000.00 CP-370 537.0.0000.00 CPS-370
400 x 250 x 120 440.0.0000.00 CP-400 540.0.0000.00 CPS-400
400 x 405 x 120 445.0.0000.00 CP-450 545.0.0000.00 CPS-450
400 x 405 x 165 446.0.0000.00 CP-460 546.0.0000.00 CPS-460

361
Component overview
polyester enclosures

Model Weidmüller Phoenix Wieland Entrelec Phoenix

Block terminal Block terminal Block terminal Terminal block Terminal block
Terminal width (mm): 5.2 6.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.2 10.2 12.2 5.2 6.2 7.5 5.2 6.2 8.2 10.2
Single-core mm2 4 4 4 4 4 4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 6 4 10 16 25 2.5 4 10 4 4 10 16
Stranded mm2 4 4 4 4 4 4 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 4 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 1.5 4 6 2.5 4 6 10
Nominal voltage V 380 380 380 500 500 500 500 500 500 250 380 750 750 750 750 750 750 – 500 500 750 750 750 750
Loading capacity A 36 36 36 36 36 36 25 25 25 20 35 26 35 35 46 63 85 27 36 65 36 36 65 87
Terminal bridging – – – – – – – – – – m m m – m m m – m – m m m m
Mounting rail TS 15 – – – – – – – – – m m – – – – – – m m m – – – –
TS 32 – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m m m – – – m m m m
TS 35 – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m m m – – – m m m m
9.40.1.0100.00

9.40.1.0090.00

9.40.1.0130.00

9.40.1.0020.00

9.40.1.0030.00

9.40.1.0040.00

9.40.1.0050.00

KL-16/12 9.40.1.0060.00

KL-16/20 9.40.1.0080.00

DR 1.5/5 9.40.2.1270.00

9.40.2.0940.00

MA 2.5/5 9.40.2.1090.00

9.40.2.1030.00

9.40.2.1280.00

9.40.2.1040.00

M 10/10 9.40.2.1050.00

M 16/12 9.40.2.1060.00

9.40.2.0010.00

MBK 5/E 9.40.2.0020.00

9.40.2.0030.00

9.40.2.0050.00

9.40.2.0070.00

9.40.2.0090.00

9.40.2.0110.00
Part number

MBK 10
KL-16/8

MS 4/6

UK 3 N

UK 5 N
G 5/12

DR 4/6

UK 10

UK 16
BK 12

M 4/6

M 6/8
G 5/4

G 5/6

MBK
BK 4

BK 6

Type
CP-140/145 1 1 – 1 1 – – – – 7 6 – – – – – – 7 6 5 – – – –
CP-150/155 – 1 – – 1 – 1 1 – 13 11 – – – – 13 11 9 – – – –
CP-170/175 – – 1 – – 1 – – 1 22 19 – – – – 22 19 15 – – – –
CP-190/195 – – – – – – – 2 1 28 24 – – – – 28 24 19 – – – –
CP-220 – – – – – – – – – – – 12 10 10 8 6 5 – – – 12 10 8 6
CP-240 – – – – – – – – – – – 31 26 26 19 16 13 – – – 31 26 19 16
CP-280 – – – – – – – – – – – 19 16 16 12 10 8 – – – 19 16 12 10
CP-300 – – – – – – – – – – – 39 32 32 24 20 16 – – – 39 32 24 20
CP-320 – – – – – – – – – – – 58 48 48 37 29 24 – – – 58 48 37 29
CP-330 – – – – – – – – – – – 96 80 80 61 48 40 – – – 96 80 61 48
CP-370 – – – – – – – – – – – 38 32 32 24 19 16 – – – 38 32 24 19
CP-370*) – – – – – – – – – – – 76 64 64 48 38 – – – – 76 64 48 38
CP-400 – – – – – – – – – – – 66 55 55 41 33 28 – – – 66 55 41 33
CP-400*) – – – – – – – – – – – 132 110 110 82 106 – – – – 132 110 82 66
CP-450 – – – – – – – – – – – 66 55 55 41 33 28 – – – 66 55 41 33
CP-450*) – – – – – – – – – – – 132 110 110 82 66 56 – – – 132 110 82 66
CP-450**) – – – – – – – – – – – 198 165 165 123 99 84 – – – 198 165 123 99
CP-460 – – – – – – – – – – – 66 55 55 41 33 28 – – – 66 55 41 33
CP-460*) – – – – – – – – – – – 132 110 110 82 66 56 – – – 132 110 82 66
CP-460**) – – – – – – – – – – – 198 165 165 123 99 84 – – – 198 165 123 99

**) Assembled on 2 mounting rails

**) Assembled on 3 mounting rails
The number of terminals is reduced
when partitions are used.

362
 Siemens WAGO Weidmüller
Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block
Screw terminals Caged tension spring 6.2 10.2 6.2 10.2 4.2 5.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.2 10.2 12.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 6.5 8.2 10.2 12.2 5.2 6.2
4 6 10 25 4 4 10 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 25 4 6
2.5 4 6 16 2.5 4 6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 1.5 4 2.5 4 6 10 15 2.5 4
750 750 750 750 750 750 750 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 250 380 750 750 750 750 750 750 750
26 35 46 85 36 36 65 26 26 26 26 18 26 26 34 34 44 61 82 27 36 27 36 47 65 87 26 34
m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m
– m – – – – – m m – – – – – – – – – – m m – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – m m m m m – –
m m m m m m m – – m m m m m m m m m m – – – – – – – m m
9.40.2.4000.00

9.40.2.4010.00

9.40.2.4020.00

8WA1204 9.40.2.4030.00

9.40.2.4040.00

9.40.2.4050.00

9.40.2.4060.00

264-701 9.40.2.3020.00

264-721 9.40.2.3030.00

264-711 9.40.2.3210.00

264-731 9.40.2.3220.00

279-621 9.40.2.3230.00

280-601 9.40.2.0930.00

280-901 9.40.2.3240.00

281-601 9.40.2.3250.00

281-901 9.40.2.3260.00

282-601 9.40.2.3270.00

284-601 9.40.2.3280.00

283-601 9.40.2.3290.00

AKZ 2.5 PA 9.40.2.0500.00

9.40.2.0130.00

SAK 2.5 PA 9.40.2.0140.00

9.40.2.0150.00

SAK 6 NPA 9.40.2.0160.00

SAK 10 PA 9.40.2.0470.00

SAK 16 PA 9.40.2.0170.00

WDU 2.5 9.40.2.1460.00

9.40.2.1470.00
8WA1011-

8WA1011-

8WA1011-

8WA2011-

8WA2011-

8WA2011-

SAK 4 PA
AKZ 4 PA

WDU 4
1DG11

1DG20
1DH11

1DH20
1DF11

1DF20

– – – – – – – 7 4 – – – – – – – – – – 7 6 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 12 7 – – – – – – – – – – 13 11 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 20 12 – – – – – – – – – – 22 19 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 25 15 – – – – – – – – – – 28 24 – – – – – – –
12 11 9 17 14 12 9 – – 13 7 20 16 16 13 13 9 8 6 – – 10 10 8 6 5 12 10
28 26 21 17 33 28 21 – – 29 17 44 35 35 29 29 22 17 14 – – 26 25 19 16 13 31 26
16 15 12 9 19 16 12 – – 17 10 26 20 20 17 17 12 10 8 – – 16 15 12 10 8 19 16
35 32 26 21 41 34 26 – – 33 20 51 40 40 33 13 25 20 16 – – 32 31 24 20 16 39 32
52 48 39 31 60 50 38 – – 50 30 76 60 60 50 50 37 30 25 – – 48 46 37 29 24 58 48
85 78 64 51 98 82 62 – – 83 50 125 100 100 83 83 62 50 41 – – 86 74 61 48 40 96 80
34 32 26 20 40 33 25 – – 33 21 53 42 42 35 35 26 21 17 – – 32 30 24 19 16 38 32
68 64 52 40 80 66 50 – – 66 42 106 84 84 70 70 52 42 37 – – 64 60 48 38 – 76 64
58 54 44 35 68 57 43 – – 59 35 89 71 71 59 59 44 35 29 – – 55 52 41 33 28 66 55
116 108 88 70 136 114 86 – – 118 70 178 142 142 118 118 88 70 58 – – 110 104 82 106 – 132 110

Enclosures
59 54 44 35 68 57 43 – – 59 35 90 71 71 59 59 44 35 29 – – 55 52 41 33 28 66 55
118 108 88 70 136 114 86 – – 118 70 180 142 142 118 118 88 70 58 – – 110 104 82 66 56 132 110
177 162 132 205 204 171 129 – – 117 105 270 213 213 177 177 132 105 87 – – 165 156 123 99 84 198 165
59 54 44 35 68 57 43 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 55 52 41 33 28 66 55
118 108 88 70 136 114 86 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 110 104 82 66 56 132 110
177 162 132 205 204 171 129 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 165 156 123 99 84 198 165

363
 80 x 75 x 55 mm 80 x 75 x 75 mm
CP-140 CP-145
Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey
CPS-140 CPS-145
Polyester enclosure, black Polyester enclosure, black

LID
LID

BASE
BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CP-140 CPS-140 CP-145 CPS-145

Weight (g) 230 230 300 300
External dimensions (mm) 80 x 75 x 55 80 x 75 x 75
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Grey (CP), with gasket and lid screws 414.0.0000.00 l 414.0.0000.50 l
Grey (CP), with gasket, hex. socket head screws 414.0.0010.00 414.0.0010.50
Grey (CP), with silicone gasket and lid screws 414.0.0140.00 414.0.0100.50
Black (CPS), with gasket and lid screws 514.0.0000.00 l 514.0.0000.50 l
Black (CPS), with gasket, hex. socket head screws 514.0.0010.00 514.0.0010.50
Black (CPS), with silicone gasket and lid screws 514.0.0170.00 514.0.0100.50
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 982.3.0000.00 l 982.3.0000.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail 982.0.0030.00 l 982.0.0030.00 l
TS 32 mounting rail – –
TS 35 mounting rail – –
Grounding rail – –
External attachment brackets 982.4.0000.00 l 982.4.0000.00 l
External hinges for CP enclosure (grey)** – –
External hinges for CPS enclosure (black)** – –
Internal hinges with lid guiding** – –
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 5 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 8 4 2 1 1 0 0 0
Side C/D 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 4 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

364
110 x 75 x 55 mm 110 x 75 x 75 mm 160 x 75 x 55 mm
CP-150 CP-155 CP-170
Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey
CPS-150 CPS-155 CPS-170
Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey

LID

LID LID

BASE
BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CP-150 CPS-150 CP-155 CPS-155 CP-170 CPS-170
295 295 360 360 405 405
110 x 75 x 55 110 x 75 x 75 160 x 75 x 55
Part number Part number Part number
415.0.0000.00 l 415.0.0000.50 l 417.0.0000.00 l
415.0.0010.00 415.0.0010.50 417.0.0010.00
415.0.0250.00 415.0.0100.50 417.0.0160.00
515.0.0000.00 l 515.0.0000.50 l 517.0.0000.00 l
515.0.0010.00 515.0.0010.50 517.0.0010.00
515.0.0310.00 515.0.0100.50 517.0.0100.00

982.3.0010.00 l 982.3.0010.00 l 982.3.0020.00 l

982.0.0060.00 l 982.0.0060.00 l 982.0.0120.00 l
– – –
– – –
– – –
982.4.0000.00 l 982.4.0000.00 l 982.4.0000.00 l
– – –
– – –
– – –
923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 8 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 Side A/B 12 6 3 2 2 0 0 0 Side A/B 12 5 4 3 0 0 0 0
Side C/D 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Side C/D 4 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Side C/D 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

365
 160 x 75 x 75 mm 190 x 75 x 55 mm
CP-175 CP-190
Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey
CPS-175 CPS-190
Polyester enclosure, black Polyester enclosure, black

LID LID

BASE
BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CP-175 CPS-175 CP-190 CPS-190

Weight (g) 460 460 450 450
External dimensions (mm) 160 x 75 x 75 190 x 75 x 55
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Grey (CP), with gasket and lid screws 417.0.0000.50 l 419.0.0000.00 l
Grey (CP), with gasket, hex. socket head screws 417.0.0010.50 419.0.0010.00
Grey (CP), with silicone gasket and lid screws 417.0.0100.50 419.0.0150.00
Black (CPS), with gasket and lid screws 517.0.0000.50 l 519.0.0000.00 l
Black (CPS), with gasket, hex. socket head screws 517.0.0010.50 519.0.0010.00
Black (CPS), with silicone gasket and lid screws 517.0.0100.50 519.0.0100.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 982.3.0020.00 l 982.3.0030.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail 982.0.0120.00 l 982.0.0150.00 l
TS 32 mounting rail – –
TS 35 mounting rail – –
Grounding rail – –
External attachment brackets 982.4.0000.00 l 982.4.0000.00 l
External hinges for CP enclosure (grey)** – –
External hinges for CPS enclosure (black)** – –
Internal hinges with lid guiding** – –
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 18 10 6 4 3 0 0 0 Side A/B 16 7 5 4 0 0 0 0
Side C/D 4 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Side C/D 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

366
190 x 75 x 75 mm 122 x 120 x 90 mm 220 x 120 x 90 mm
CP-195 CP-220 CP-240
Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey
CPS-195 CPS-220 CPS-240
Polyester enclosure, black Polyester enclosure, black Polyester enclosure, black

LID

LID

LID

BASE BASE

BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CP-195 CPS-195 CP-220 CPS-220 CP-240 CPS-240
530 530 750 750 1060 1060
190 x 75 x 75 122 x 120 x 90 220 x 120 x 90
Part number Part number Part number
419.0.0000.50 l 422.0.0000.00 l 424.0.0000.00 l
419.0.0010.50 422.0.0010.00 424.0.0010.00
419.0.0100.50 422.0.0180.00 424.0.0470.00
519.0.0000.50 l 522.0.0000.00 l 524.0.0000.00 l
519.0.0010.50 522.0.0010.00 524.0.0010.00
519.0.0100.50 522.0.0400.00 524.0.0400.00

982.3.0030.00 l 982.3.0040.00 l 982.3.0050.00 l

982.0.0150.00 l – –
– 982.1.0000.00 l 982.1.0050.00 l
– 982.2.0010.00 l 982.2.0070.00 l
– 981.0.0020.00 l 981.0.0080.00 l
982.4.0000.00 l 982.4.0010.00 l 982.4.0010.00 l
– 980.1.0450.00 l 980.1.0450.00 l
– 980.1.0460.00 l 980.1.0460.00 l
– – –
923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 24 12 8 4 3 0 0 0 Side A/B 13 6 4 3 2 1 0 0 Side A/B 27 12 9 6 4 3 0 0
Side C/D 14 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Side C/D 6 3 2 2 1 0 0 0 Side C/D 6 3 2 2 1 0 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

367
 160 x 160 x 91 mm 260 x 160 x 91 mm
CP-280 CP-300
Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey
CPS-280 CPS-300
Polyester enclosure, black Polyester enclosure, black

LID LID

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CP-280 CPS-280 CP-300 CPS-300

Weight (g) 1130 1130 1710 1710
External dimensions (mm) 160 x 160 x 91 260 x 160 x 91
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Grey (CP), with gasket and lid screws 428.0.0000.00 l 430.0.0000.00 l
Grey (CP), with gasket, hex. socket head screws 428.0.0010.00 430.0.0010.00
Grey (CP), with silicone gasket and lid screws 428.0.0200.00 430.0.0140.00
Black (CPS), with gasket and lid screws 528.0.0000.00 l 530.0.0000.00 l
Black (CPS), with gasket, hex. socket head screws 528.0.0010.00 530.0.0010.00
Black (CPS), with silicone gasket and lid screws 528.0.0100.00 530.0.0340.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 982.3.0060.00 l 982.3.0070.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – –
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0020.00 l 982.1.0080.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0030.00 l 982.2.0110.00 l
Grounding rail 981.0.0040.00 l 981.0.0100.00 l
External attachment brackets 982.4.0040.00 l 982.4.0040.00 l
External hinges for CP enclosure (grey)** 980.1.0450.00 l 980.1.0450.00 l
External hinges for CPS enclosure (black)** 980.1.0460.00 l 980.1.0460.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** 980.1.0320.00 l 980.1.0320.00 l
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0090.00 l 923.1.0090.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 18 8 6 4 2 2 1 0 Side A/B 33 15 12 8 4 3 3 0
Side C/D 9 4 3 2 2 1 0 0 Side C/D 9 4 3 2 2 1 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

368
360 x 160 x 91 mm 560 x 160 x 91 mm 255 x 250 x 120 mm
CP-320 CP-330 CP-370
Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey
CPS-320 CPS-330 CPS-370
Polyester enclosure, black Polyester enclosure, black Polyester enclosure, black

LID

LID LID

BASE

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CP-320 CPS-320 CP-330 CPS-330 CP-370 CPS-370
2150 2150 3185 3185 2650 2650
360 x 160 x 91 560 x 160 x 91 255 x 250 x 120
Part number Part number Part number
432.0.0000.00 l 433.0.0000.00 l 437.0.0000.00 l
432.0.0010.00 433.0.0010.00 437.0.0010.00
432.0.0310.00 433.0.0100.00 437.0.0100.00
532.0.0000.00 l 533.0.0000.00 l 537.0.0000.00 l
532.0.0010.00 533.0.0010.00 537.0.0010.00
532.0.0210.00 533.0.0100.00 537.0.0230.00

982.3.0080.00 l 982.3.0850.00 l 982.3.0090.00 l

– – –
982.1.0120.00 l 982.1.0150.00 l 982.1.0070.00 l
982.2.0150.00 l 982.2.0180.00 l 982.2.0100.00 l
981.0.0140.00 l 981.0.0160.00 l 981.0.0350.00 l
982.4.0040.00 l 982.4.0040.00 l 982.4.0110.00 l
980.1.0450.00 l 980.1.0450.00 l 980.1.0450.00 l
980.1.0460.00 l 980.1.0460.00 l 980.1.0460.00 l
980.1.0320.00 l 980.1.0320.00 l 980.1.0320.00 l
923.1.0090.00 l 923.1.0090.00 l 923.1.0090.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 48 23 18 11 7 5 4 0 Side A/B 76 40 28 18 10 8 6 0 Side A/B 42 23 17 11 7 4 3 3
Side C/D 9 4 3 2 2 1 0 0 Side C/D 9 4 3 2 2 1 0 0 Side C/D 32 14 10 16 4 3 2 2
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

369
 400 x 250 x 120 mm 400 x 405 x 120 mm
CP-400 CP-450
Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, grey
CPS-400 CPS-450
Polyester enclosure, black Polyester enclosure, black

LID

LID

BASE

BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CP-400 CPS-400 CP-450 CPS-450

Weight (g) 3650 3650 5580 5580
External dimensions (mm) 400 x 250 x 120 400 x 405 x 120
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Grey (CP), with gasket and lid screws 440.0.0000.00 l 445.0.0000.00 l
Grey (CP), with gasket, hex. socket head screws 440.0.0010.00 445.0.0010.00
Grey (CP), with silicone gasket and lid screws 440.0.0770.00 445.0.0130.00
Black (CPS), with gasket and lid screws 540.0.0000.00 l 545.0.0000.00 l
Black (CPS), with gasket, hex. socket head screws 540.0.0010.00 545.0.0010.00
Black (CPS), with silicone gasket and lid screws 540.0.0100.00 545.0.0100.00
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate 982.3.0100.00 l 982.3.0110.00 l
TS 15 mounting rail – –
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0140.00 l 982.1.0140.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0170.00 l 982.2.0170.00 l
Grounding rail 981.0.0150.00 l 981.0.0150.00 l
External attachment brackets 982.4.0110.00 l 982.4.0120.00 l
External hinges for CP enclosure (grey)** 980.1.0450.00 l 980.1.0450.00 l
External hinges for CPS enclosure (black)** 980.1.0460.00 l 980.1.0460.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** 980.1.0320.00 l 980.1.0320.00 l
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0090.00 l 923.1.0090.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 74 38 27 17 13 6 5 4 Side A/B 74 38 27 17 13 6 5 4
Side C/D 32 14 10 8 4 3 2 2 Side C/D 57 29 20 15 7 5 4 4
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

370
400 x 405 x 165 mm 170 x 170 x 92 mm 340 x 170 x 92 mm
CP-460 CPS-530 CPS-550
Polyester enclosure, grey Polyester enclosure, black Polyester enclosure, black
CPS-460
Polyester enclosure, black

LID

LID LID

BASE

BASE BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Enclosures
CP-460 CPS-460 CPS-530 CPS-550
7740 7740 850 1800
400 x 405 x 165 170 x 170 x 92 340 x 170 x 92
Part number Part number Part number
446.0.0000.00 l – –
446.0.0010.00 – –
446.0.0100.00 – –
546.0.0000.00 l 553.0.0000.00 l 555.0.0000.00 l
546.0.0010.00 – –
546.0.0100.00 – –

982.3.0110.00 l – –
– – –
982.1.0140.00 l 982.1.0440.00 982.1.0450.00
982.2.0170.00 l – –
981.0.0150.00 l 981.0.0440.00 981.0.0450.00
982.4.0120.00 l – –
980.1.0450.00 l – –
980.1.0460.00 l – –
980.1.0320.00 l – –
923.1.0090.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Side A/B 105 56 40 27 20 10 9 8 Side A/B 22 11 8 4 3 2 2 0 Side A/B 48 22 15 9 6 5 3 0
Side C/D 92 45 30 23 12 9 6 5 Side C/D 10 4 3 2 2 2 1 0 Side C/D 10 4 3 2 2 1 0 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

371
 340 x 340 x 92 mm 340 x 340 x 192 mm
CPS-570 CPS-590
Polyester enclosure, black Polyester enclosure, black

LID

LID

BASE
BASE

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate support

Type CPS-570 CPS-590

Weight (g) 2000 2600
External dimensions (mm) 340 x 340 x 92 340 x 340 x 192
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
Grey (CP), with gasket and lid screws – –
Grey (CP), with gasket, hex. socket head screws – –
Grey (CP), with silicone gasket and lid screws – –
Black (CPS), with gasket and lid screws 557.0.0000.00 l 559.0.0000.00 l
Black (CPS), with gasket, hex. socket head screws – –
Black (CPS), with silicone gasket and lid screws – –
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Mounting plate – –
TS 15 mounting rail – –
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0450.00 982.1.0450.00
TS 35 mounting rail – –
Grounding rail 981.0.0450.00 981.0.0450.00
External attachment brackets – –
External hinges for CP enclosure (grey)** – –
External hinges for CPS enclosure (black)** – –
Internal hinges with lid guiding** – –
Silicone gasket for wider temperature range (piece goods) 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l

Max. Pg threads
ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ISO M 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Side A/B 48 22 15 9 6 5 3 0 Side A/B 48 22 15 9 6 5 3 0
Side C/D 31 16 8 6 5 4 1 0 Side C/D 31 16 8 6 5 4 1 0
** mechanical enclosure machining required ** mechanical enclosure machining required
l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

372
EExe and EExi terminal boxes
in polyester and aluminium
for ‘Ex’ areas

All BERNSTEIN polyester and alumi- Special conditions for EExe and EExi l Only enclosure materials and component
nium enclosures are available in EExe terminal boxes in explosion-hazardous materials adhering to the temperature
and EExi versions. areas range required for Ex devices are used.
For further details please refer to the Electric distribution boards or terminal l Enclosures and cable glands correspond
BERNSTEIN Ex products catalogue. boxes are required for connecting and to the protection class IP 65 - (minimum
branching cables. For terminal boxes in specified ingress protection is IP 54), and
explosion-hazardous areas, special are therefore well protected from dust

Enclosures
measures must be taken to prevent and liquids.
unacceptably high temperatures and the l All enclosures and cable insertions are
possibility of sparks or electrical arcing tested to ensure resistance to an impact
within the enclosure. force of 7 Nm - without affecting the
protection class. All protective earth and
ground connections are high reliability
parts.
l All lid screws are captive and are located
outside the working space. Lid screws
and spring rings are stainless steel and
type tags are made of polyester (self-
adhesive, no corrosion problems).
l All fittings (terminals, cable glands, etc.)
supplied by the manufacturer must be
Ex compliant.
l The surface resistance of black polyester
Enclosures is decreased to < 109 ohm in
order to prevent damaging electrostatic
discharge. As an enclosure material,
polyester is especially resistant to chemi-
cally aggressive ambient conditions.
l Polyester enclosures in selfextinguishing
material, regulation Vb0 according to UL
- Subj. 94.

373
CC-10 compact control Application fields and
enclosures characteristics

Technical data Material

BERNSTEIN compact control enclosures
Material feature a high mechanical resistance. Their
Aluminium, die-casting AlSi12 (copper) excellent chemical and petro-chemical
resistance makes them suitable for a wide
Gasket range of applications. The enclosures are
Neoprene round seal for lid and front plate supplied with a standard coating, affording
alternative: a good resistance to corrosion. This
Silicone round seal resistance can be further improved by the
application of an additional protective
Lid screws coating. Alternatively, they can be passivat-
Stainless steel, captive screw, multi-purpose ed, or a special protective coating resistant
cross-head with plastic covering to saltwater and ideal for external use, can
be applied. Aluminium has excellent heat
Coating dissipation and HF radio shielding
Base RAL 7035 (light grey) properties.
BERNSTEIN compact control enclosures from Frame RAL 7035 (light grey)
the CC-10 product line are ideal for use as Frame screw coverings A special gasket (silicon or conductive
remote operator control stations. RAL 7035 (light grey) material) can be used to further increase
Made from die-cast aluminium these alternative: heat and EMC resistance.
enclosures are available from stock in Special colours according to RAL,
11 standard sizes. All sizes have an earthing special coatings Applications
point in the lid and the base for protective As compact control enclosures in auto-
earth connection. The captive lid screws are Temperature range mation, machine and installation engineer-
stainless steel and are concealed by push fit – 40 °C to + 80 °C (neoprene gasket) ing, in utility vehicles, construction or
corner pieces. The anodised aluminium alternative: agricultural machinery, in mechanical and
frontplate (ordered separately) is fixed – 50 °C to + 130 °C (silicone gasket) plant engineering. Suitable for all uses
internally and sealed to the frame with a where operating and indicator controls
neoprene gasket maintaining an IP 65 rating Protection class with a high corrosion resistance and in a
for the complete enclosure. IP 65 high protection class are to be encapsu-
lated with a high mechanical resistance.
Attachment points provided inside the The front plate is supplied separately,
enclosure facilitate easy mounting of facilitating mounting of fittings. The high
components (mounting rail, mounting plate, industrial standards achieved by
PCBs etc.). BERNSTEIN, allow their enclosures to be
effective in a wide range of automation
control and instrumentation applications.

Angled adaptor
BERNSTEIN offers a wide range of acces-
sories for the CC-10. These include angled
adaptors which allow the enclosure to be
inclined. This makes it possible to install
the enclosure in an ergonomic inclined
position on a wall or machine. The angled
adaptors for the CC-10 compact control
enclosure are available in 15° and 30°
angles.

374
Complete enclosures
and accessories

CC-10 series

Standard type Front plate

enclosure in RAL 7035, light grey, caps in clear-anodised aluminium, 3 mm thick, for holding
RAL 7035 (light grey), gasket mounted, packaged. operating controls or indicator panels.

Handles Angled adaptor Mounting plates

made from naturally-anodised aluminium profile with with 15°- or 30° angle, RAL 7035, light grey, including. from galvanised sheet metal (thickness: CC-270
plastic corner shoulders in RAL 7035 for subsequent gaskets and mounting screws. Mechanical machining to CC-400: 1.5 mm; CC-450 and CC-460: 2.5 mm)
attachment to the frame and base. required. allows for further addition of mounted fittings.

Mounting rails External hinges Internal hinges

TS-32 and TS-35, steel, yellow-passivated for terminal for hinged mounting of enclosure frames. Opening for hinge attachment of the enclosure lid. Opening angle

Enclosures
block attachment. angle of frame approx. 155°. Aluminium casting, RAL of lid approx. 95°. Stainless steel. Mechanical machining
7035. Mechanical machining required for mounting. is required for enclosure mounting.
Drill template is supplied.

Overview – CC-10 compact control enclosures

CC-10 aluminium enclosures Frame Base

Dimensions/mm with crimped protective frames dc = die cast
L x Wx H Part number Type cc = chilled casting
160 x 160 x 105 127.3.0010.00 CC-270 dc dc
260 x 160 x 105 129.3.0010.00 CC-290 dc dc
360 x 160 x 105 131.3.0010.00 CC-310 dc dc
200 x 230 x 125 135.3.0010.00 CC-350 dc dc
Frame gasket, front plate gasket 200 x 230 x 195 136.3.0010.00 CC-360 dc cc
silicone; improved temperature range (-50 °C
to +130 °C). Standard type made of silicone foam. 280 x 230 x 125 137.3.0010.00 CC-370 dc dc
330 x 230 x 125 138.3.0010.00 CC-380 dc dc
330 x 230 x 195 139.3.0010.00 CC-390 dc cc
400 x 230 x 125 140.3.0010.00 CC-400 dc dc
402 x 310 x 125 145.3.0010.00 CC-450 dc dc
402 x 310 x 195 146.3.0010.00 CC-460 dc cc

Customising service
The range of accessories for individual components) are included in the service, as
enclosures can be supplied separately or is the individual finishing of enclosures.
pre-assembled. The BERNSTEIN customising The custom-made front plates (supplied
service provides complete mechanical separately) can also be mechanically
machining. The fittings (terminals, cable machined and supplied with individual
glands or customised mounting screen-printing or engraving.

375
 160 x 160 x 105 mm 260 x 160 x 105 mm
CC-270 aluminium control enclosure CC-290 aluminium control enclosure

CC-270 frame
CC-290 frame

Base Base

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate
support support
Type CC-270 CC-290
Weight (g) 1800 2300
External dimensions (mm) 160 x 160 x 105 260 x 160 x 105
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
coated, with gasket and lid screws 127.3.0010.00 l 129.3.0010.00 l
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Front plate 951.1.7580.00 l 951.1.7590.00 l
Mounting plate 951.1.1490.00 l 951.1.0490.00 l
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0020.00 l 982.1.0080.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0030.00 l 982.2.0110.00 l
External hinges** 980.1.0990.00 l 980.1.0990.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** 980.1.0390.00 l 980.1.0390.00 l
Frame gasket for extended temp. range (piece goods)** 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l
Front plate gasket for extended temp. range (piece goods)*** 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l
Corner handles (C-B/D-B)** – –
Corner handles (B-D/A-D)** – –
Side handles (A/B)** – –
Side handles (C/D)** – –
Angled adaptor 15° (RAL 7035) 101.6.6300.00 only side C/D 101.6.6300.00
Angle adaptor 30° (RAL 7035) – 101.6.6310.00 only side A/B
A -0.3

33 dick
thick 18.5 x 45°
B -0.3
22 -0.2

C
Front lid dimensions A x B: 125.5 x 125.5 mm A x B: 225.5 x 125.5 mm
attachment area C x D: 115 x 115 mm C x D: 215 x 115 mm
22 -0.2

** mechanical enclosure machining required l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

*** piece goods

376
360 x 160 x 105 mm 200 x 230 x 125 mm 200 x 230 x 195 mm
CC-310 aluminium control enclosure CC-350 aluminium control enclosure CC-360 aluminium control enclosure

CC-350 frame CC-360 frame

CC-310 frame

Base

Base
Base

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate
support support support

Enclosures
CC-310 CC-350 CC-360
2500 2800 4100
360 x 160 x 105 200 x 230 x 125 200 x 230 x 195
Part number Part number Part number
131.3.0010.00 l 135.3.0010.00 l 136.3.0010.00 l

951.1.7600.00 l 951.1.7610.00 l 951.1.7610.00 l

951.1.1750.00 l 951.1.0150.00 l 951.1.0150.00 l
982.1.0120.00 l 982.1.0030.00 l 982.1.0030.00 l
982.2.0150.00 l 982.2.0050.00 l 982.2.0050.00 l
980.1.0990.00 l 980.1.0990.00 l 980.1.0990.00 l
980.1.0390.00 l 980.1.0390.00 l 980.1.0390.00 l
923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l
923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l
– – –
– – –
– 981.4.0920.00 l 981.4.0920.00 l
– 981.4.0920.00 l 981.4.0920.00 l
101.6.6300.00 101.6.6300.00 101.6.6300.00 l
101.6.6310.00 101.6.6310.00 101.6.6310.00 l

A x B: 325.5 x 125.5 mm A x B: 165.5 x 195.5 mm A x B: 165.5 x 195.5 mm

C x D: 315 x 115 mm C x D: 155 x 185 mm C x D: 155 x 185 mm

l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

377
 280 x 230 x 125 mm 330 x 230 x 125 mm
CC-370 aluminium control enclosure CC-380 aluminium control enclosure

CC-380 frame
CC-370 frame

Base
Base

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate
support support
Type CC-370 CC-380
Weight (g) 3400 3400
External dimensions (mm) 280 x 230 x 125 330 x 230 x 125
Complete enclosures Part number Part number
coated, with gasket and lid screws 137.3.0010.00 l 138.3.0010.00 l
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Front plate 951.1.7620.00 l 951.1.7630.00 l
Mounting plate 951.1.0160.00 l 951.1.0170.00 l
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0090.00 l 982.1.0110.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0120.00 l 982.2.0140.00 l
External hinges** 980.1.0990.00 l 980.1.0990.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** 980.1.0390.00 l 980.1.0390.00 l
Frame gasket for extended temp. range (piece goods)** 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l
Front plate gasket for extended temp. range (piece goods)*** 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l
Corner handles (C-B/D-B)** – –
Corner handles (B-D/A-D)** – –
Side handles (A/B)** 981.4.0930.00 l 981.4.0930.00 l
Side handles (C/D)** 981.4.0920.00 l 981.4.0920.00 l
Angled adaptor 15° (RAL 7035) 101.6.6300.00 l 101.6.6300.00 l
Angle adaptor 30° (RAL 7035) 101.6.6310.00 l 101.6.6310.00 l
A -0.3

33 dick
thick 18.5 x 45°
B -0.3
22 -0.2

C
Front lid dimensions A x B: 245.5 x 195.5 mm A x B: 295.5 x 195.5 mm
attachment area C x D: 235 x 185 mm C x D: 285 x 185 mm
22 -0.2

** mechanical enclosure machining required l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

*** piece goods

378
330 x 230 x 195 mm 400 x 230 x 125 mm 402 x 310 x 125 mm
CC-390 aluminium control enclosure CC-400 aluminium control enclosure CC-450 aluminium control enclosure

CC-390 frame CC-450 frame

CC-400 frame

Base
Base
Base

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate * minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate
support support support

Enclosures
CC-390 CC-400 CC-450
5300 4900 5600
330 x 230 x 195 400 x 230 x 125 402 x 310 x 125
Part number Part number Part number
139.3.0010.00 l 140.3.0010.00 l 145.3.0010.00 l

951.1.7630.00 l 951.1.7640.00 l 951.1.7650.00 l

951.1.0170.00 l 951.1.2940.00 l 951.1.0200.00 l
982.1.0110.00 l 982.1.0140.00 l 982.1.0140.00 l
982.2.0140.00 l 982.2.0170.00 l 982.2.0170.00 l
980.1.0990.00 l 980.1.0990.00 l 980.1.0990.00 l
980.1.0390.00 l 980.1.0390.00 l 980.1.0390.00 l
923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l
923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l 923.1.0060.00 l
– – –
– – –
981.4.0930.00 l 981.4.0930.00 l 981.4.0930.00 l
981.4.0920.00 l 981.4.0920.00 l 981.4.0930.00 l
101.6.6300.00 l 101.6.6300.00 l 101.6.6300.00 l
101.6.6310.00 l 101.6.6310.00 l 101.6.6310.00 l

A x B: 295.5 x 195.5 mm A x B: 365.5 x 195.5 mm A x B: 365.7 x 273.2 mm

C x D: 285 x 185 mm C x D: 355 x 185 mm C x D: 354.5 x 262 mm

l = kept in stock l = kept in stock l = kept in stock

379
 402 x 310 x 195 mm
CC-460 aluminium control enclosure

CC-460 frame

Base

* minimum dimensions at level of mounting plate

support
Type CC-460
Weight (g) 7300
External dimensions (mm) 402 x 310 x 195
Complete enclosures Part number
coated, with gasket and lid screws 146.3.0010.00 l
Accessories (separate or as a mounting set)
Front plate 951.1.7650.00 l
Mounting plate 951.1.0200.00 l
TS 32 mounting rail 982.1.0140.00 l
TS 35 mounting rail 982.2.0170.00 l
External hinges** 980.1.0990.00 l
Internal hinges with lid guiding** 980.1.0390.00 l
Frame gasket for extended temp. range (piece goods)** 923.1.0060.00 l
Front plate gasket for extended temp. range (piece goods)*** 923.1.0060.00 l
Corner handles (C-B/D-B)** –
Corner handles (B-D/A-D)** –
Side handles (A/B)** 981.4.0930.00 l
Side handles (C/D)** 981.4.0930.00 l
Angled adaptor 15° (RAL 7035) 101.6.6300.00 l
Angle adaptor 30° (RAL 7035) 101.6.6310.00 l
A -0.3

33 dick
thick 18.5 x 45°
B -0.3
22 -0.2

C
Front lid dimensions A x B: 365.7 x 273.2 mm
attachment area C x D: 354.5 x 262 mm
22 -0.2

** mechanical enclosure machining required l = kept in stock

*** piece goods

380
381
Enclosures
Modular lightweight
operator interface housing
CC-2000 SL

The BERNSTEIN Lightweight Operator Inter- The aluminium-extruded profile has Materials
face CC-2000 SL is a modular aluminium grooves running the width and height of – Aluminium
enclosure particularly suited for operator the enclosure, allowing components to be extruded profile: Al Mg Si 05
control station applications where the fitted and secured by means of simple – Aluminium
mounting of industrial computers, MMI, spring nuts, again without additional die-cast corners: Al Si 12
display and similar components is neces- enclosure machining. The profile is – Seals between profile
sary. Its height and width are variable up to designed to create a cable duct around the and corner module: CR
a recommended maximum size of approxi- inside of the housing to provide protection – Seal for front plate and
mate 600 x 600 mm. The depth is selected for cable looms and wiring entering from rear panel: CR
from the combination or individual use of the suspension system. – Hinge profile: Al Mg Si 05
the 200, 120 and 55 mm aluminium – Front plate, rear panel: Al Mg 3
profiles available.
Product advantages
The front plate may be mounted through a Colour
specically developed quick and simple l Modular system – width and height of – Housing: RAL 7035
mounting system. Secured from the inside the housing are completely variable – Front plate and
fastening clips replace both the require- l Standard rectangular front plates can be rear panel: Aluminium
ment to machine the front plate and the fitted directly (e. g. Displays, MMIs) nature anodised
time-consuming screw fitting during l Front plates can be internally or
installation or servicing. The rear panel is externally mounted and secured Availability
secured using fixing screws or hinged using l Front plate mounting from the inside is CC-2000 SL lightweight control housings in
internal hinges that do not affect the usa- particularly quick and easy standard sizes are available with short
ble depth. With the 55 mm deep extension l No external rubber gasket required delivery times or as custom versions built to
profile, hinged as a door, there is a maxi- l IP 65 protection order.
mum usable depth of 244 mm when the l Rear panel secured by screws or mount-
200 mm profile width is used. ed on integrated hinges
l No loss of usable depth due to hinges
l Internal grooves allow simple fastening
with spring nuts
l Single-wall aluminium extruded profile
incorporates a built-in cable channel
l Excellent heat dissipation
l Modern industrial design

382
(A)
Front plate
Fitted from inside A A (A)
Back plate
Fixed or hinged
System variations

As a result of the various fitting and profile

combinations, usable depths between the
front plate and the back plate (each 3 mm
thick) vary between 101 und 244 mm:

Profile 120/Profile 200

(B) Usable depth Housing construction

Front plate Profile Profile
Fitted from the outside
(B) 120 200
Front plate [mm] [mm]
B Fitted from the outside
B 101 181 Front plate from the inside.
Back plate fixed or
hinged (A)
109 189 Front plate from the outside.
Back plate fixed or
hinged (B)

Profile 120 + 55 as a door extension

Profile 200 + 55 as a door extension

(C) Usable depth Housing construction

Front plate C Profile Profile
Fitted from the inside 120+55 200+55
(C)
Back plate [mm] [mm]
Fitted from the inside 147 227 Front plate from the inside.
C Back plate from the
inside (C)
155 235 Front plate from the outside.
Back plate from the

Enclosures
inside (D)
155 235 Front plate from the inside.
Back plate from the
(D) outside (E)
Front plate
164 244 Front plate from the outside.
Fitted from the outside
(D) Back plate from the
Back plate
outside (F)
(E) D Fitted from the inside
Front plate E
Fitted from the inside
(E)
Back plate
D Fitted from the outside

(F)
Front plate
Fitted from the outside
(F)
Back plate
Fitted from the outside
F

383
 60

200
45° position

Dimensions
at aStellung

109
The BERNSTEIN CC-2000 SL is available
with a selection of front and back plates
bei 45°

85 24 Internal usable depth

Einbautiefe
and various combinations of profile width,
opening
M4-M6

17
including:
7,5

10,5/6

M4-M6
7,5
37
3

3
10.5/6

Profile widths
120 mm
27
20

19

27

19
20
12

175 mm (120 + 55 mm)

12
120
200 mm
255 mm (200 + 55 mm)
60

allowing the following different internal

depths:
a 45° position

200

Internal usable depths

at Stellung

101 mm
109 mm 101
Internal usable depth
Einbautiefe
bei 45°

147 mm
opening

17 24
155 mm
M4-M6
10,5/6

7,5

164 mm 60 17
10.5/6

37

181 mm
42
189 mm
27
20

3,5 19

20
27

19
12

227 mm
12

120
235 mm
244 mm 255
180°)
180° max. opening
max. 10

Width and height of the CC-2000 SL

(Schwenkwinkel:

control interface housing are completely

max. 10

optional up to a recommended size of circa 164

600 x 600 mm.
Internal usable depth
Einbautiefe
147
2,5
2,5

55

55
175

384
Enclosure components
Light weight operator
interface housing
CC-2000 SL

Front plate Handles Separator piece

Clear (silver) anodised aluminium front plate, 3 mm Handle set, made from aluminium profile. Aluminium separator piece for direct mounting of
thick, both sides anodised, protection film one side. Fixing without machining. control and other operating panels (for example emer-
gency stop buttons and other operating-components).
Is cut to size and machined to fit individual housing.
Complete with fixing and sealing material. Order
separately or via checklist.

Enclosures
Spring nut set M4 19 ˝ fixing set CD-ROM-Cover
(Part number 980.6.0060.00) (Part number 980.6.1120.00) (Part number 980.6.2170.00)
Spring nut set M5 4 cage nuts M6 with screws and washers to fix 19˝ Dimensions (W x H x D):
(Part number 980.6.0070.00) inserts of the fixing clips enclosed in the housing. 177 x 119 x 8 mm
10 off spring nuts with metric thread M4 or M5 for Surface: possible to paint.
fixing units in the housing. The spring nuts are fitted in
the fixing rails into the aluminium housing profile and
can be pushed into position in the housing.

Keyboard holder (stirrup) Keyboard support Floppy-Cover

(Part number 980.6.1770.00) (Part number 980.6.1750.00) (Part number 980.6.2190.00)
Metal frame for PC keyboards, which can be installed Steel plate keyboard support in RAL 7035 for additional Dimensions (W x H x D): 120 x 92 x 8 mm
additionally. For assembly the machining of the housing mounting. Machining is necessary for assembly, Surface: possible to paint.
is necessary. Fixings enclosed. including fixings.

385
Standard dimensions
CC-2000 SL light weight operator interface
housing

Part number External 19" fitting Front plate Front plate Front plate Usable Back plate
housing dimensions dimensions usable area Part number depth with dimensions
dimensions overall 3 mm plate overall
thickness
WxHxD min./max. exf
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

114.5.2000.00 275 x 254 x 120 – 235 x 214 221 x 200 954.5.5410.00 101/109 268 x 247
114.5.2000.00 275 x 254 x 120 – 235 x 214 221 x 200 954.5.5410.00 101/109 266 x 245
114.5.2010.00 284 x 312 x 120 – 244 x 272 230 x 258 954.5.5420.00 101/109 277 x 305
114.5.2010.00 284 x 312 x 120 – 244 x 272 230 x 258 954.5.5420.00 101/109 275 x 303
114.5.2020.00 284 x 428 x 120 – 244 x 388 230 x 374 954.5.0120.00 101/109 277 x 421
114.5.2020.00 284 x 428 x 120 – 244 x 388 230 x 374 954.5.0120.00 101/109 275 x 419
116.5.2020.00 284 x 428 x 175 – 244 x 388 230 x 374 954.5.0120.00 147/164* 244 x 388
124.5.2020.00 284 x 428 x 200 – 244 x 388 230 x 374 954.5.0120.00 181/189 277 x 421
124.5.2020.00 284 x 428 x 200 – 244 x 388 230 x 374 954.5.0120.00 181/189 275 x 419
114.5.2030.00 395 x 345 x 120 – 355 x 305 341 x 291 954.5.0090.00 101/109 388 x 338
114.5.2030.00 395 x 345 x 120 – 355 x 305 341 x 291 954.5.0090.00 101/109 386 x 336
116.5.2030.00 395 x 345 x 175 – 355 x 305 341 x 291 954.5.0090.00 147/164* 355 x 305
124.5.2030.00 395 x 345 x 200 – 355 x 305 341 x 291 954.5.0090.00 181/189 388 x 338
124.5.2030.00 395 x 345 x 200 – 355 x 305 341 x 291 954.5.0090.00 181/189 386 x 336
114.5.2040.00 470 x 415 x 120 – 430 x 375 416 x 361 954.5.0150.00 101/109 463 x 408
114.5.2040.00 470 x 415 x 120 – 430 x 375 416 x 361 954.5.0150.00 101/109 461 x 406
116.5.2040.00 470 x 415 x 175 – 430 x 375 416 x 361 954.5.0150.00 147/164* 430 x 375
124.5.2040.00 470 x 415 x 200 – 430 x 375 416 x 361 954.5.0150.00 181/189 463 x 408
124.5.2040.00 470 x 415 x 200 – 430 x 375 416 x 361 954.5.0150.00 181/189 461 x 406
114.5.2050.00 525 x 309 x 120 84 TE x 6 HE 485 x 269 471 x 255 954.5.0060.00 101/109 518 x 302
114.5.2050.00 525 x 309 x 120 84 TE x 6 HE 485 x 269 471 x 255 954.5.0060.00 101/109 516 x 300
116.5.2050.00 525 x 309 x 175 84 TE x 6 HE 485 x 269 471 x 255 954.5.0060.00 147/164* 485 x 269
124.5.2050.00 525 x 309 x 200 84 TE x 6 HE 485 x 269 471 x 255 954.5.0060.00 181/189 518 x 302
124.5.2050.00 525 x 309 x 200 84 TE x 6 HE 485 x 269 471 x 255 954.5.0060.00 181/189 516 x 300
114.5.2060.00 525 x 354 x 120 84 TE x 7 HE 485 x 314 471 x 300 954.5.0000.00 101/109 518 x 347
114.5.2060.00 525 x 354 x 120 84 TE x 7 HE 485 x 314 471 x 300 954.5.0000.00 101/109 516 x 345
116.5.2060.00 525 x 354 x 175 84 TE x 7 HE 485 x 314 471 x 300 954.5.0000.00 147/164* 485 x 314
124.5.2060.00 525 x 354 x 200 84 TE x 7 HE 485 x 314 471 x 300 954.5.0000.00 181/189 518 x 347
124.5.2060.00 525 x 354 x 200 84 TE x 7 HE 485 x 314 471 x 300 954.5.0000.00 181/189 516 x 345
114.5.2070.00 525 x 398 x 120 84 TE x 8 HE 485 x 358 471 x 344 954.5.0030.00 101/109 518 x 391
114.5.2070.00 525 x 398 x 120 84 TE x 8 HE 485 x 358 471 x 344 954.5.0030.00 101/109 516 x 389
116.5.2070.00 525 x 398 x 175 84 TE x 8 HE 485 x 358 471 x 344 954.5.0030.00 147/164* 485 x 358
124.5.2070.00 525 x 398 x 200 84 TE x 8 HE 485 x 358 471 x 344 954.5.0030.00 181/189 518 x 391
124.5.2070.00 525 x 398 x 200 84 TE x 8 HE 485 x 358 471 x 344 954.5.0030.00 181/189 516 x 389
114.5.2080.00 356 x 377 x 120 – 316 x 337 302 x 323 954.5.3420.00 101/109 349 x 370
114.5.2080.00 356 x 377 x 120 – 316 x 337 302 x 323 954.5.3420.00 101/109 347 x 368
114.5.2090.00 542 x 495 x 120 – 502 x 455 488 x 441 954.5.5430.00 101/109 535 x 488
114.5.2090.00 542 x 495 x 120 – 502 x 455 488 x 441 954.5.5430.00 101/109 533 x 486
116.5.2090.00 542 x 495 x 175 – 502 x 455 488 x 441 954.5.5430.00 147/164* 502 x 455
124.5.2090.00 542 x 495 x 200 – 502 x 455 488 x 441 954.5.5430.00 181/189 535 x 488
124.5.2090.00 542 x 495 x 200 – 502 x 455 488 x 441 954.5.5430.00 181/189 533 x 486
124.5.2100.00 475 x 306 x 200 – 435 x 266 421 x 252 direct mounting 181/189 468 x 299
124.5.2100.00 475 x 306 x 200 – 435 x 266 421 x 252 direct mounting 181/189 466 x 297

Delivery includes: Suspension system machining

l Assembled enclosure, painted (RAL 7035 for
light grey) incl. quick fastening kit for l CS-1000 mini support system
front plate l CS-2000 SL light weight support system
l Standard 8 mm square lock on doors or l CS-2000 suspension system 50
hinged back plates, lock mounted in l CS-2000 suspension system 60
back plate l Inclination couplings of all systems
l Front plate, rear panel, handles
(optional)

386
Back plate Back plate Handles on side Handles at bottom
Housing dimensions outline
Features Part number Part number Part number
Frontplatte:
Front plate:eex xf f= =A-40
A-40x xD-40
D-40

screw mounted 954.5.0500.00 980.6.1420.00 –

hinged 980.6.1400.00 980.6.1420.00 –
screw mounted 954.5.1250.00 980.6.1430.00 –
hinged 980.6.1410.00 980.6.1430.00 –
screw mounted 954.5.0130.00 980.6.1310.00 –
hinged 980.6.1250.00 980.6.1310.00 –
from inside 954.5.0120.00 980.6.1310.00 – Front plate usable area:
Frontdurchlass: A-54 xA-54
D-54x D-54
screw mounted 954.5.0130.00 980.6.1310.00 – Housing dimension:
Gehäusemaß: AxD AxD
hinged 980.6.1250.00 980.6.1310.00 –
screw mounted 954.5.0100.00 980.6.1320.00 –
hinged 980.6.1260.00 980.6.1320.00 –
from inside 954.5.0090.00 980.6.1320.00 – Front plate dimensions
screw mounted 954.5.0100.00 980.6.1320.00 –
Front plate:eexxf f==A-40
Frontplatte: A-40x xD-40
D-40
hinged 980.6.1260.00 980.6.1320.00 –
screw mounted 954.5.0160.00 980.6.1330.00 –
hinged 980.6.1270.00 980.6.1330.00 –
from inside 954.5.0150.00 980.6.1330.00 –
Boring
Bohrungfor
fürM4-M6
M4–M6or oder Stehbolzen
screw mounted 954.5.0160.00 980.6.1330.00 – support bolts for
bei Frontplatte vonfront
vorne
hinged 980.6.1270.00 980.6.1330.00 – plate from front
10
screw mounted 954.5.0070.00 980.6.1340.00 –
hinged 980.6.1280.00 980.6.1340.00 –
from inside 954.5.0060.00 980.6.1340.00 –
screw mounted 954.5.0070.00 980.6.1340.00 –
hinged 980.6.1280.00 980.6.1340.00 –
screw mounted 954.5.0010.00 980.6.1350.00 –
hinged 980.6.1290.00 980.6.1350.00 –
from inside 954.5.0000.00 980.6.1350.00 –
Back plate dimensions

Enclosures
screw mounted 954.5.0010.00 980.6.1350.00 –
hinged 980.6.1290.00 980.6.1350.00 – (back plate screw fitted)
screw mounted 954.5.0040.00 980.6.1360.00 –
Back plate
Rückwand fixed
fest: A-7A-7 x D-7
x D-7
hinged 980.6.1300.00 980.6.1360.00 –
from inside 954.5.0030.00 980.6.1360.00 – / 12 x 45°

screw mounted 954.5.0040.00 980.6.1360.00 –

hinged 980.6.1300.00 980.6.1360.00 –
screw mounted 954.5.4840.00 980.6.1600.00 –
33thick
dick
hinged 980.6.1640.00 980.6.1600.00 –
screw mounted 954.5.4850.00 980.6.1660.00 –
hinged 980.6.1650.00 980.6.1660.00 –
from outside! 954.5.1210.00 980.6.1660.00 –
70

70 100–300
screw mounted 954.5.4850.00 980.6.1660.00 –
hinged 980.6.1650.00 980.6.1660.00 –
screw mounted 954.5.4810.00 – 980.6.1630.00
hinged 980.6.1620.00 – 980.6.1630.00 Back plate dimensions
(hinged back plate)
*) 164 mm when drilling or screwing through the rear Back plate als
Rückwand as door: A-9x xD-9
Tür: A-9 D-9
panel: otherwise 155 mm usable depth (clearance
required for internal fixing)
35,5
30

20.1+0.1
33 thick
dick
3,5
R4

36
3

387
Check list

Price enquiry, Order form Please use copies of this form.

Grey marked boxes are standard.
Lightweight control housing CC-2000 SL
Client Code Part No.

Address Cust. No.

Telephone Telefax Branch

Contact Department

Enquiry No. Date Qty.

Price enquiry
Annual need Qty.
Enquiry
Delivery date Qty.
Order

1 Enclosure orientation Horizontal Vertical Weight of

components

Square housing treat as kg

front front
horizontal

Front plate: ee xx ff == A-40

Frontplatte: A-40xxD–40
D-40
2 Dimensions (mm)
Housing
dimensions overall: A x D x

Front plate x
dimension: e x f Usable area: A-54
Belegungsfläche: x D-54
A–54 X D–54

Housing dimension:
Gehäusemaß: A xADx D

3 a Front plate – back plate Fixing accessories for customer’s own plates

none with none with For plates mounted internally: gasket, clips etc.
For plates mounted externally: gasket/washers/nuts M5
Front plate Back plate 19" fixing set (9806112000): screws and nuts M6

3 b Separating piece not mounted/standard Operating plate anodised (not mounted) s = 3 mm

mounted right
vertical
mounted left
Dimension: g x h x
mounted at bottom
horizontal (g = width, h = height)
mounted at top

4 a Housing without door profile: Back plate

Housing depth (overall): Position of front plate: fixed or hinged
usable depth (mm) with joint & lock
inside 101 mm
120 mm
outside 109 mm
inside 181 mm
200 mm outside 189 mm

4 b Housing with door profile:

*RW
FP = Frontplatte
= Rückwand
(Door with internal hinges can only be used for its own weight)
Door or Door * FP internal
and
* FP internal
and
* FP external
and
* FP external
and
front Housing depth back BP internal BP external BP internal BP external
External (mm) Usable depth (mm) Usable depth (mm) Usable depth (mm)
External joint

Internal joint

120 + 55 147 155 164

200 + 55 227 235 244
✂

388
 5 Door fixing front Variation to standard

Standard A B
(as shown)
C D

Door fixing rear Variation to standard

Standard A B
(as shown)
C D

6 Lock Square (mm) 6 7 8 Standard Handle with lock

Triangular (mm) 7 8 Daimler Benz
Double beard (mm) 3 5 Special lock
(customers specification)

7 Machining for support systems None

Standard machining 6,6

60

For swivel tilt coupling and

Side flange coupling 50, 60, 45/60 (SL)
43
A
B Flange coupling 80 (only profile 200)
C Angle adapter (only profile 200)
D Special machining to customers specifications

8 Paint Standard Customer specification

Enclosures
Main body: RAL 7035, light grey
Doors: RAL 7035, light grey
Front plates: anodised, clear
Back plates: anodised, clear

9 EMV (electro magnetic compatibility) version

Conducting connections between housing main body, housing door and front plate and back plate.

10 Handles

Not for depths 120 None

and 175 with
coupling from
below. Pre assembled – ready to fit Standard

11 Accessories, note Included in delivery: key and earth-set

Sales Techn. dept. Planning dept.

Encl. Enquiry
No encl. Order
✂

389
Control housing
CC-4000

The operator control panel is often the You want it deeper, higher & wider?
visual focus point of a machine. No problem!
The new CC-4000 control housing from Thanks to a flexible modular design, the
BERNSTEIN has a dynamic modern industri- housing depth can be matched to suit your
al design. Not only does this enhance the controller. Aluminium frame profiles: 52,
appearance of your system, machine, 80, 140, 200 & 290 mm deep, can be
controller or operator panel, but provides linked with extension profiles of 68,
functional advantages that both you and 128 & 228 to attain depths from 52 mm to
your customers will value. 646 mm. The required width and height is
precisely obtained by trimming sections to
What’s in it for you? size.
l An ultra-modern design, combined with
impressive functionality You specify the access
l High quality aluminium casting with l Flush fitting hinged rear door
smooth surface finish l Extension section as rear door
l Design enhancing coloured profiles, l Frame section as front door
optionally available in your company l Demountable front or rear door when
livery optional two part external hinge used –
l Integrated handgrips – for easy allows replacement of complete control
handling, also enhance enclosure styling module when servicing required

IP 65 protection – for peace of mind You manage heat dissipation, with

l IP 65 ingress protection is provided as three profile versions
standard. l Housing with smooth external surface
l Housing with external aluminium fins,
for increased heat dissipation
l Housing with external aluminium fins
and internal fans for maximum heat
dissipation

390
Front opening of the CC-4000 housing Rear access to the CC-4000 with Hinged and demountable front frame (also
using hinged frame section flush-fitting hinged door available for rear profile)

Enclosures
Ergonomically designed handles are Different RAL colour can be applied to Externally finned aluminium extrusion
integral to the front frame match your company livery provides excellent heat dissipation

Smooth finish aluminium profile Combination of different frame and

extension profile widths allow many
enclosure depths to be realised

391
Dimensions

Using a combination of extension widths Height and width up to 800 x 800 mm may If the front plate is installed in front then
the CC-4000 depth may be selected in the be freely chosen. Sizes outside of this range – for the profiles 52, 140, 200 and 290 the
range 52–646 mm (see drawings below). can be confirmed upon request. lay-on surface is 3.0 mm low

Frame profile 52 mm – for the profiles 52 and 80 the lay-on

80 mm surface is 6.5 mm low
140 mm
200 mm
290 mm

Extension profile 68 mm
128 mm
228 mm

Frame profile
Rahmenprofil 52 52

Extension profile 128

Erweiterungsprofil 128
18

18
48.5

48.5
H-111

H-111
H-97

H-97
Side view
H

Seitenansicht Side view

H
Seitenansicht
3 3
H-131

H-131
10

10
48.5

48.5
Frame section
Rahmenprofile
T = 140/200/290 T =180

4 24 4
25

25
55.5

55.5
25

25
42

10 10
B-125

B-125

T-14 T-14

3
(B-111)

3
(B-111)

Top view
Draufsicht
B

T-8
B-145

T-8
B-145

3 4 3 4
11

Extension profile 128

Erweiterungsprofil
10

10
25

25
55.5

55.5
15

15

30

128 52 Frame profile52

52
Rahmenprofil

392
Standard sizes

External dimensions 19˝ component Profile size Front plate External mounted Front plate Available Rear door configuration:
enclosure dimensions frame/ dimensions front plate part number: mounting depth s = hinged
WxHxD extension (mm) mounting area cut to size, with 3 mm front f = fixed;
Part number (mm) (mm) dimensions unmachined plate suspension system
(mm) min/max (mm) machining
114.4.0000.11 596 x 364 x 140 84 TE x 6 HE 140/- 485 x 267 451 x 233 954.5.9820.00 132 s; 50/60 above
124.4.0000.11 596 x 364 x 200 84 TE x 6 HE 200/- 485 x 267 451 x 233 954.5.9820.00 192 s; 50/60 above
134.4.0000.11 596 x 364 x 290 84 TE x 6 HE 290/- 485 x 267 451 x 233 954.5.9820.00 282 s; 80 above
156.4.0000.11 596 x 364 x 180 84 TE x 6 HE 52/128 485 x 267 451 x 233 954.5.9820.00 172 f; 50/60 above
114.4.0000.14 596 x 453 x 140 84 TE x 8 HE 140/- 485 x 356 451 x 322 954.5.9830.00 132 s; 50/60 above
114.4.0000.17 596 x 542 x 140 84 TE x 10 HE 140/- 485 x 445 451 x 411 954.5.9840.00 132 s; 50/60 above

Includes as standard Application samples:

l Enclosures assembled and painted
– horizontal profiles in RAL 7043 traffic
grey B. Combination of front profile 200 and back
– vertical profiles clear anodised door 68.
– all profiles smooth without cooling fins
– hinged rear door (hinge left) Directly mounted Industrial-PC with opera-
– with hinged front frame (hinge left) tor panel and keyboard drawer.
fixed rear wall
l 19˝ mounting set
(Part number 980.6.2320.00)
– screws and captive nuts M6
l 8 mm square lock on all hinged doors
l Suspension system machining for
BERNSTEIN CS-2000 (50, 60 or 80)

Accessories
l Front plate, internal mounting

Enclosures
l Front plate mounting set
(Part number 980.6.2330.00)
l Other accessories upon request

Note: Shorter lead times for standard

sizes!

Front profile 80 with hinged

back plate.

Directly mounted Industrial-PC

with operator panel.

393
Accessories enclosure

CC-4000

Keyboard drawer Keyboard drawer with keyboard Fan 24 V DC

Part number 928.6.0500.00 Part number 928.6.0610.00 Part number 942.1.2240.00
Dimensions (W x H x D): Dimensions (W x H x D): 483 x 88 x 218 mm Flow rate 30 m3/h
500 x 77 x 170 mm Layout: IBM-AT (MF2) german with trackball
Front plate: clear anodised Ingress protection: IP 65 if closed
Handle bar: black Front plate: 5 mm

Locking belt without lock Locking belt with E1-lock Integrated-push socket
Part number 942.1.6420.00 Part number 942.1.6430.00 Part number 942.1.2180.00

394
Accessories enclosure
CC-4000

CD-ROM-Cover Floppy-Cover Door angle limitation

Part number 980.6.2170.00 Part number 980.6.2190.00 Part number 980.6.2540.00
Dimensions (W x H x D): Dimensions (Wx H x D): 120 x 92 x 8 mm
177 x 119 x 8 mm Surface: possible to paint
Surface: possible to paint

Enclosures

Cover for adapter flange Cover for coupling Ground strap 200 mm
Part number 951.1.7710.00 Part number 951.7.7810.00 Part number 941.1.0480.00
Suspension system CS-2000-80 Suspension system CS-2000-80 Ribbon cable, copper
Surface: possible to paint Surface: possible to paint

395
Check list
Price enquiry, Order form Grey boxes with thick frame
refer to standard design.
Control enclosure CC-4000
Customer Code Part.-No.

Address Cust.-No.

Telephone Telefax Branch

Contact Department

Date Qty.
Price enquiry
Enquiry No. Annual need Qty.
Enquiry
Delivery date Qty.
Order
O
1 Enclosure Standard
O O = Profile top Weight of mounted
orientation L L
U = Profile bottom components
Desk version, control enclosure R
R L = Profile left
net t R = Profile right kg
Desk version, keyboard housing Fvroorn U
onne
vForr U

Front plate: e x f = B-111 x H-97

2 Dimensions (mm)
Enclosure dimensions overall:
x
Width x Height (B x H)
19˝-Enclosure BxH x
Usable area: B-125 x H-111
H = (n x HE) + 97 – 1 HE = 44.45 HE = on front plate mounted internally

Front plate dimensions: x

e x f = B-111 x H-97
Usable area: B-145 x H-131
Back plate dimensions: bxh x
on front plate mounted externally

b x h = B-61 x H-47
External enclosure dimension: B x H
b x h = B-63 x H-47 (hinged back plate)

3 Profile Profile without fins Profile with fins

4 Enclosure depth external Front profile with mounted FP 3.0 mm deep Extension *Internal depth by mounted FP
FP 3.0 mm

52 140 200 290 68 128 228 128 68 For mounted FP 6.5 mm

internal depth is reduced by
Front profile with FP 6.5
3.5 mm
mm deep
or 52 80 68 128 228 128 68
52 80 120 140 148 180 188 200 208 216 248 268 276 280 290 308 328 336 348 358 368 376 396 408 418 426 428 436 456 486 496 518 A
Profile 38 66 106 126 134 166 174 186 194 202 234 254 262 266 276 294 314 322 334 344 354 362 382 394 404 412 414 422 442 472 482 504 I*
52 l l l l l l l l l
Frame profile

80 l l & l & &  l &

140 l l l l l l l l l
200 l & l & & l l &
290 l l l l l l
68 l l l l l l & l& l& l l l & l l l &
l l l & l
Extension

68
128 l & l l & l l l l l l & l l l
128 l  l l
228 l & l l l l l l& l& l
A = External depth, I = Internal depth. With front plate mounted from the inside. Assembly from the outside – internal depth increases about 6 mm.  & = alternatively combination
Back plate
5 Door hinging Back plate Extension 2
(suspension system Extension 2

position) Extension 2 Extension 1

(from 140)

Extension 1 Frame profile

Extension 1

Position of
Profile with L R suspension
back plate Door Door
Frame profile system machining
fixed hinging hinging in profile
✂

396
 6 Separating piece not mounted Standard Operating plate anodised
(not mounted), s = 3 mm
mounted right
vertical Qty. Dimension: g x h
mounted left (g = width, h = height)
mounted at bottom Operating plate 1 x
horizontal Qty.
mounted at top x
Operating plate 2
Attention! Separating piece height for frame profile with mounted front plate 3.0 mm = 20 mm/front plate 6.5 mm = 25 mm

7 Front plate Back plate

none with 3 mm, from inside none with 3 mm, fixed from outside
3 mm, from outside 3 mm, hinged

Accessories (Front plate) For plates mounted internal: gasket and fixing material
For plates mounted external: gasket/washers/nuts M5
19˝-fixing set (980.6.1120.00): Screws and nuts M6

8 Lock Square (mm): 6 7 8 Standard Toggle without lock

Triangular (mm): 7 8 Troggle with lock
Double beard (mm): 3 5 Troggle with lock E1
Daimler Chrysler: Special lock/customer specific

9 Machining for suspension system No O U

O
Coupling System
Swivel tilt coupling (from profile 128) SL (only profile 80)
Flange (indicate profile size) 50 (from profile 128)
Angle adapter (from profile 200) 60 (from profile 128)
in the profile: U
Special machining customer specific 80 (from profile 128)

Enclosures
80/140 (from profile 290/228)

10 Paints Standard Customised design

Profile horizontal: RAL 7043, painted
Profile vertical: anodised, natural colour
Separator piece: RAL 7043, painted
Front plates: anodised, natural colour
Back plates: anodised, natural colour

11 EMV (electro magnetic compatibility) version (Protection degree IP 54)

Conducting connections between enclosure main body, enclosure door, front plate and back plate

12 Accessories, notes Included in delivery: key an earth-set

Sales Techn. dept. Planning dept.

Encl. Enquiry
No encl. Order
✂

397
Pedestal/Desk version
CC-4000

In addition to mounting the CC-4000 on

the CS-2000 and CS-2000 SL suspension
systems BERNSTEIN also offers the options
of a simple free-standing pedestal and
standing or hanging desk models.

With newly developed components this

option offers a stylish and space saving
workplace for industrial PC users. All
models feature enclosure and keyboard tilt
capabilities to facilitate an optimum user
interface regardless of the individual’s Cables may be run up the pedestal via a
height or lighting conditions. rear integrated cable channel which is
hidden through a rubber seal. In the
pedestals with integrated mounting drum
cables with plugs can be through fed for
direct connection to controllers or the
keyboard.

All pedestal or desk models are available

immediately ex-stock. Using the check list a
fully configured CC-4000 complete with Delivery includes
suspension system can be quickly configur-
ed. Accessories include roller sets which l Basic pedestal, desk pedestal, hanging
may be mounted without machining direct- desk, mounting feet and rollers are sup-
ly to the pedestal base. Height adjustable plied with fixings and instructions
feet are also available. l Ex-stock availability
l Painted RAL 7035 finish
l Special colours upon request

398
Basic pedestal Desk pedestal Hanging desk attachment
Part number 101.6.7450.00 Part number 101.6.7440.00 Part number 980.8.0131.00

Free standing pedestal with integrated Free standing pedestal with integrated desk Hanging desk attachment for all CC-4000
attachment for adjustable 0° to 30° attachment for adjustable 0° to 30° desk control enclosures attached to the
mounting of CC-4000 and CC-2000 SL mounting of CC-4000 and CC-2000 SL CC-2000 suspension system. Keyboard
control enclosures. Colour RAL 7035. control enclosures and keyboard housings housing may be tilted 0° to 30°. Colour
Complete with fixings and instructions. (0° to 20°). Colour RAL 7035. Complete RAL 7035. Complete with fixings and
Mechanical preparation of enclosure with fixings and instructions. Mechanical instructions.
necessary. preparation of enclosure and keyboard
housing necessary.
R50

R50

320
231
890
890
890

890

84
70
60
M8
M8
160 550 550
160
100

40
34
50

85 231 231
85
51

70

600

600
51

70

Enclosures

Rollers Adjustable feet

Part number 980.8.0128.00 Part number 980.8.0129.00

Rollers include 4 directional wheels for Height adjustable feet (1 Set = 4 pieces) for
desk or pedestal models. Complete with desk or pedestal use.
fixings and instructions Complete with fixings and instructions

399
Selection criteria for suspension systems

Mechanical stress/load capacity Heavy-duty

suspension
Differently assembled suspension systems system CS-2000
can cope with different levels of stress
(loads).

The mechanical stress (load) induced by the

weight of the enclosure to be supported
(with all internal components installed)
combined with the desired length of the
extension arm is an important considerati-
on when selecting the correct suspension
system.

System selection is made easier by using

the opposite diagram. If a swivel tilt cou-
pling is used to support the enclosure, a
maximum load of 300N will apply.

To determine the force f (system

stress/load) from the housing weight m:
f (N) = m (kg) x g (ms2)
system stress/load f = enclosure weight m
multiplied by the acceleration due to
gravity g
f (N) = m (kg) x 9.81 (ms2) Suspension system
for medium to heavy loads
CS-2000

Extension arm length I (in m)

System stress/load Stainless steel suspension system

force (f) in Newtons CS-600 NR
(N) CS-480 NR

Light-weight
suspension system
CS-2000 SL

400
 System stress/load
force (f)
N

System 80/140 2625

2500

2250

2000

1750

System 80 1500

System 60
1250

Enclosures
System 50 1000

750

CS-600 NR

500

CS-480 NR
Closed profile* 450

Closed profile** 350 300

Parity opened profile* 300
233,3
200

0,5
0.5 1,0
1.0 1,5
1.5 2,0
2.0 2,5
2.5 3,0
3.0 3,5
3.5
* withhout intermediate joint Extension arm length l
** with intermediate joint

401
Light weight system

CS-2000 SL 45/60

Components for mounting housings

The light weight system CS-2000 SL has

been specially designed to support com-
pact, light weight control housings over a
short distance. Unlike other suspension
systems currently on the market for similar
purposes, it has a number of clear techni- *)
cal and economic benefits.

System structure
To obtain the desired system configuration,
components can be combined either with a *)
closed or open top, aluminium link section.
The large number of different components For Part number
Coupling 101.5.1630.00
Elbow coupling 101.5.1650.00
Base bracket coupling 101.5.1670.00
Angled coupling 101.5.1640.00
Angled elbow coupling 101.5.1660.00
Angled base bracket coupling 101.5.1680.00
Adjustable angle coupling 101.5.1690.00
Adjustable angle elbow coupling 101.5.1700.00
*) The CC-2000 section 75 has a bore diameter
of 33 mm
System benefits
Machining drawing for wall joints
l Installation openings at elbow points

l Choice between the use of open and

closed link sections

l Free cable passage area with closed

system:
dia. 40 mm = 12.5 cm2 at the narrowest
point (bearing passage)
available, allows a great variety of system
configurations. Construction should follow l Free cable passage area with partially
the specifications in the load diagram. closed system: For Part number
– 2.76 cm2 at the narrowest point (whe- Wall joint with horizontal outlet 101.5.1750.00
Materials re the section enters the component) Wall joint with vertical outlet 101.5.1770.00
– Gravity-die-cast – 7.40 cm2 within an enclosed tube
aluminium Machining drawing for other elements
components: AlSi12 (Cu) l Simply added rotation limiter for
– Installation opening: POM couplings and joints
– Bearing: PA
– Seals: CR l Couplings have a small flange which can
– Aluminium be fixed to very narrow housings
link section: Al Mg Si 0.5
– Link section cover l “Overhead” installation of all compo-
with open profile: EPDM nents possible

Colours l Modern industrial design

– Suspension
system components: light grey, RAL 7035 l Protection system IP 65 For Part number
– Link section: silver, clear anodised Base bracket coupling 101.5.1670.00
Angled base bracket coupling 101.5.1680.00
Base bracket, rotating 101.5.1780.00
Set-up joint 101.5.1750.00
Base bracket/wall flange 101.5.1790.00

402
Link profile

CS-2000 SL 45/60

Installation of the link profiles Link sections Weight

The link section is an extruded aluminium Open profile: 3.76 kg/m
profile (Al Mg Si 0.5). The surface is clear Closed profile: 3.50 kg/m
anodised, so that it has a colour similar to
RAL 9006. The link section can be used
either with an open cable duct or with a
completely closed one. The partially open
section has a cover made from EPDM, simi-
lar to RAL 7042. This flexible plastic cover
can easily be pulled out and pushed back
in place.
[A] Open or closed section in couplings and
elbows:

Attach seal to link section (1), mount

link section onto suspension system
components (2, 3).

[B] Closed section in suspension system

components with 8 fastening screws:

Enclosures
Attach seal to link section (1), mount
link section into suspension system Open profile Closed profile
components (2, 3), making use of the Dimensions (mm) Part number Dimensions (mm) Part number
adjustment facility. 45 x 60 x 250 952.4.0010.00 45 x 60 x 250 952.4.3010.00
45 x 60 x 500 952.4.0020.00 45 x 60 x 500 952.4.3020.00
45 x 60 x 750 952.4.0030.00 45 x 60 x 750 952.4.3030.00
45 x 60 x 1000 952.4.0040.00 45 x 60 x 1000 952.4.3040.00
45 x 60 x 1250 952.4.0050.00 45 x 60 x 1250 952.4.3050.00
45 x 60 x 1500 952.4.0060.00 45 x 60 x 1500 952.4.3060.00
45 x 60 x 2000 952.4.0080.00 45 x 60 x 2000 952.4.3080.00

[C] Open section in suspension system

components with 8 fastening screws:

Attach seal to link section, mount link

section into suspension system compo-
nents, making sure, however, you only
mount using the 4 fastening screws
onto the closed part of the tube. Fit
cover seal.
Turn to page 344 ff + to select
– Loading capacity
– Cable routing cross-section

403
System components

Light-weight suspension
system for small loads

Type CS-2000 SL
System size 45/60

For enclosure mounting For enclosure mounting

Part Coupling CS-2000 SL Elbow coupling CS-2000 SL
Weight (g) 740 Dimensions in mm 960 Dimensions in mm
Part number 101.5.1630.00 101.5.1650.00
74.5
Angle of rotation 300° 74.5
60 M 6,10 deep
tief Cable installation access 60 M 6,10 deep
tief

with limiter with plastic clip-on cover

60
80
66
80
60
66
Complete with installa- Angle of rotation 300°
tion fixings, seals and with limiter.
instructions for installa- Complete with installa-
50 43
tion 78
tion fixings, seals and
instructions for installa-

60
78
50

136
104

tion

99
25

25
ø40
ø40

Detail
56

45
45

56
Accessories, can be retro-fitted
60
Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1290.00 980.5.1290.00

For enclosure mounting

Part Adjustable angle elbow coupling CS-2000 SL Elbow CS-2000 SL
Weight (g) 3300 Dimensions in mm 590 Dimensions in mm
Part number 101.5.1700.00 101.5.1710.00 50 43

Angle of rotation 300° Cable installation access

°
0-30

with limiter with plastic clip-on cover

50

121

Inclination angle infinite- Complete with seals and

130
111

Drehwinkel 0-300 °
ly adjustable 0–30° instructions for installa-
Complete with installa- tion
204
60

44

tion fixings and seals 100

147.5
78

Housing max. 300N 100

45

21
M 6,10 deep
tief
60
66
92

60

45

Detail 50
60
Accessories, can be retro-fitted 75

Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1300.00 – 56

404
For enclosure mounting For enclosure mounting For enclosure mounting
Angled coupling CS-2000 SL Angled elbow coupling CS-2000 SL Swivel tilt coupling CS-2000 SL
1100 Dimensions in mm 1400 Dimensions in mm 3000 Dimensions in mm
101.5.1640.00 74.5 101.5.1660.00 101.5.1690.00
60 74.5
Inclined angle 15°. deep
M 6,10 tief Inclined angle 15° 60
deep
M 6,10 tief Angle of rotation 300°
121
80

Angle of rotation 300° Cable installation access with limiter

80

°
0-30
82.5
60
66

82.5
60
66
with limiter with plastic clip-on cover Inclination angle infinite-

50
Complete with installa- Angle of rotation 300° ly adjustable 0–30°

177
0-300 °
Angle of rotation
Drehwinkel

tion fixings, seals and with limiter Complete with installa-

50
instructions for installa- 78 Complete with installa- 50 43
tion fixings and seals 44
60 45
100 100
tion tion fixings, seals and Housing max. 300 N
50

60
78
119

instructions for installa- 151

114
40

tion
15°

deep 21
M 6,10 tief
40
15°

ø40
ø40

66

60
92
60
75
56

45

45
56

60
980.5.1290.00 980.5.1290.00 980.5.1300.00

Enclosures

Elbow for moment load CS-2000 SL Intermediate join CS-2000 SL Rotation elbow CS-2000 SL
1000 Dimensions in mm 2130 Dimensions in mm 1850 Dimensions in mm
95
101.5.1720.00 75 43 101.5.1740.00 101.5.1730.00 82
245 60
Elbow with reinforced Pivoting angle 360° with 95
Ratation angle 300° with
wall strength limiter limiter
75
159

Link section adjustment Cable installation access Link section adjustment

196.5
182

95

78

Cable installation access on both sides Cable installation access

82

82

with plastic clip-on cover Link section adjustment with clip-on plastic cover
75 47.5
82
Complete with seals and Complete with seals and Complete with seals and 47.5 75
instructions for installation instructions for installa- instructions for installa- 95
60
45 tion 95
tion 45

80
106
60

60

60

45
45
– 60 980.5.1320.00 980.5.1320.00

405
System components

Light-weight suspension
system for small loads

Type CS-2000 SL
System size 45/60

Part Wall joint with vertical outlet CS-2000 SL Wall joint with horizontal outlet CS-2000 SL
Weight (g) 1840 Dimensions in mm 2090 Dimensions in mm
55
Part number 101.5.1770.00 82
60
101.5.1760.00 177.5
55 75
Pivoting angle 300° with Pivoting angle 300° with
limiter limiter

82
60
Link section adjustment Link section adjustment
17

17
Cable installation access Cable installation access
: 70

: 70
ø9

with clip-on plastic cover with clip-on plastic cover

ø9
6
Complete with seals and 15
Complete with seals and 6
15

instructions for installa- instructions for installa-

95
tion 95
60
tion 45
45

91.5
75
106

48

12.5
12.5

115
Detail

90
115
90

Accessories, can be retro-fitted 110

135
Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1320.00 110
135 980.5.1320.00

Part Base bracket coupling CS-2000 SL Angled base bracket coupling CS-2000 SL
Weight (g) 1180 Dimensions in mm 1200 Dimensions in mm
Part number 101.5.1670.00 101.5.1680.00
Integrated component ø 40
Pivoting angle of 300° ø 40
15°

Pivoting angle 300° with with limiter

25

40
110

125

limiter Fixed incline of 15°

6

Complete with installa- Complete with installa-

6
15

15

ø9 ø9

tion fixings, seals and tion fixings, seals and

instructions for installa- instructions for installa-
115
90

tion tion
90
115

74.5
60 deep
M 6,10 tief
74.5 deep
M 6,10 tief
60
82.5
66
60
115
90

60
66
80

80

Detail
90
Accessories, can be retro-fitted 115

Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1290.00 980.5.1290.00

406
Set-up joint CS-2000 SL Base bracket, turnable, CS-2000 SL Base/wall flange CS-2000 SL
1720 Dimensions in mm 1460 Dimensions in mm 690 Dimensions in mm
101.5.1750.00 101.5.1780.00 95
101.5.1790.00
Pivoting angle 300° with 47.5 75
Pivoting angle 300° with Link section adjustment

75
limiter limiter Complete with seals and

136

75
85
Link section adjustment Link section adjustment instructions for installa-

15
82
60

6
15
121.5

ø9
Cable installation access Complete with seals and ø9 ø40 tion
78

with clip-on plastic cover instructions for installa-

6

15

Complete with seals and ø9 ø 40 tion

instructions for installa-
tion
82
82
60 60
115
90

60
45

115

115
90
60
45

90
60
45
90
115
90
115 90
115
980.5.1320.00 980.5.1320.00 –

Enclosures

Free standing base CS-2000 SL

11820 Dimensions in mm
101.5.1800.00
Large surface foot for f.For SL-tube45/60
SL-Rohr 45/60

stable, free standing

80

M 10

applications
80
60
15

500
50

407
Leight-weight suspension system
CS-2000 SL

Panel components

Application areas Panel components

In many industrial applications a trend to

decentralised operate and visualisation
units can be observed. The used terminals
usually show a flat shape, because control
intelligence is no longer integrated. Flat
terminals often cannot be used close to a
machine by a suspension system, because
the building depth does not permit an
attachment of the suspension system from
top or bottom. In this case a connection
over the rear wall is necessary.

Variety of configurations

The panel components allow a rear

connection and have the advantage of
being integrated into the conventional
light-weight suspension system CS-2000 SL. Panel coupling Panel elbow coupling
For the user the complete configuration Part number 101.5.2320.00 (Standard) Part number 101.5.2330.00 (Standard)
variety of an approved suspension system is Part number 101.5.2510.00 (Beckhoff) Part number 101.5.2520.00 (Beckhoff)
so available also for this application.

Variations:

l Panel coupling with vertical connection

l Panel elbow coupling with horizontal
connection
l Panel-swivel tilt coupling horizontal
l Panel-swivel tilt coupling vertical

Quality and availability

BERNSTEIN provides a high quality

standard. All panel components are
available from stock.

Panel swivel tilt coupling V/H Panel swivel tilt coupling V

Part number 101.5.2360.00 (Standard) Part number 101.5.2350.00 (Standard)
Part number 101.5.2540.00 (Beckhoff) Part number 101.5.2530.00 (Beckhoff)

408
Technical data

Load capacity Machining drawing for enclosure rear wall

Mechanical characteristics Enclosures

Max. load capacity G 250 N
Max. system length 1500 mm

Materials
Components AlSi12 (Cu) - Chilled casting
Installation opening POM
Bearing PA
Gaskets CR

Operating and ambient conditions

Protection class IP 54 according EN 60529
Temperature range -25 °C ... + 80 °C

Scope of services
Scope of supply Panel components incl. gasket and mounting instruction
Colouring RAL 7035 (Standard) / RAL 7012 (Beckhoff)
Availability from stock

409
Suspension systems

CS-2000 50/60/80

With its large variety of components and

different system sizes (50ó, 60ó and 80ó),
the BERNSTEIN range of suspension
systems CS-2000 provides a technically
mature solution for numerous applications.

System structure
The following conditions are important for
your choice of system:

– Load-bearing capacity of the overall

system
– Free passage for cables
– Design
– System configuration

Having decided on the right size of the

system, you need to select the necessary
components and tubes, so that you can
put together the desired configuration.

System sizes
This concerns the suspension systems of Materials System benefits
the sizes 50ó, 60ó and 80ó. The figures
refer to the dimensions of steel tubes that – Gravity-die-cast l Cable installation openings at all joints
link up the components. aluminium to simplify the installation of cables
components: AlSi12 (Cu)
System 50ó – steel tube 50 x 50 mm – Steel-cast l Integrated strain relief to ease the strain
System 60ó – steel tube 60 x 60 mm components: GGG 40 on cables
System 80ó – steel tube 80 x 80 mm – Steel welded
constructions: St 37 l High variability through the large num-
– Suspension tubes: St 37 ber of available components
– Bearings: St/PTFE
– Seals: CR l Broad spectrum of applications through
– Installation opening: AlSi12 (Cu) systems with different load-bearing
– Expansion bellows: PVC capacities

l Flange coupling with clamping lever at

Colours operator face and selectable rotation
limiter
– Suspension
system components: light grey, RAL 7035 l Maintenance-free friction bearings in all
– Expansion bellows: light grey, RAL 7035 joints and couplings
– Tubes: light grey, RAL 7035
l Adjustment options for the exact adjust-
ment of suspension tubes

l Wall and intermediate joints with

clamping lever at operator face and
Selection support for different load capaci- optional rotation limiter (available as
ties are presented on pages 400/401. accessories).

410
Connecting tubes

CS-2000 50/60/80

Tubes
The steel tubes for suspension systems 50ó,
60ó and 80ó are supplied in different
lengths. The lengths of the tubes comply
with DIN 7168. The steel tubes come in
RAL 7035 (light grey) powder coated.

Enclosures

Weights Available lengths of tubes

System 50ó 6.3 kg/m Length System 50ó System 60ó System 80ó
System 60ó 8.1 kg/m (mm) Part number Part number Part number
System 80ó 11.0 kg/m 250 952.5.0520.00 952.6.0390.00 952.7.1140.00
500 952.5.0530.00 952.6.0400.00 952.7.1150.00
750 952.5.0540.00 952.6.0410.00 952.7.1160.00
1000 952.5.0550.00 952.6.0420.00 952.7.1170.00
1250 952.5.0560.00 952.6.0430.00 952.7.1180.00
1500 952.5.0570.00 952.6.0440.00 952.7.1190.00
2000 952.5.0590.00 952.6.0460.00 952.7.1210.00
3000 952.5.0610.00 952.6.0480.00 952.7.1230.00

411
System components

Suspension system for

medium loads

Type CS-2000
System size 50ó

For enclosure mounting

Part Standard coupling, flange, CS-2000
Weight (g) 1550 Dimensions in mm
Material Aluminium
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.7000.00
Angle of rotation 320°
with limiter

M12
: 50

Clamping lever at 43

63
100

93
operator face
50
Complete with seals and deep
M6/9TIEF
: 100 40

fixing screws
: 60
Detail ø 6.6
ø 50

Accessories, can be retro-fitted

Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1760.00
Light adapter (see page 426) –

Part Elbow for moment load CS-2000 Intermediate joint CS-2000

Weight (g) 4500 Dimensions in mm 4360 Dimensions in mm
Material GGG Steel 115
165 60 65
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.7090.00 35 90 101.6.4540.00 TOP
: 50

Increased strength Expansion bellows can

Access cover be zipped on at a later M 12
230
165

Complete with seals stage

125

Rotation angle 180° with

: 50
limiter on either side
Integrated rotation tor-
que setting
78 300
Detail
124

Accessories, can be retro-fitted

M12

Rotation limiter (see page 427) – 980.5.0630.00

132
Light adapter (see page 426) 980.5.1870.00 –

412
For enclosure mounting
Elbow coupling, flange CS-2000 Elbow CS-2000
2000 Dimensions in mm 1100 Dimensions in mm
– –
101.6.7030.00 101.6.7060.00 131
36 60
Angle of rotation 320° 60
Access cover
with limiter Complete with seals
: 50

Clamping lever at

131
141

63

96
106

93

M12
operator face
Complete with seals and deep
M6/9 TIEF 50 : 50
: 100 40
fixing screws 144

76

: 60

ø 6.6
ø 50

M12
980.5.1760.00 –
980.5.1870.00 980.5.1870.00

Enclosures

Wall flange CS-2000 Wall joint CS-2000 Wall joint with cable inlet CS-2000
4260 Dimensions in mm 3940 Dimensions in mm 4720 Dimensions in mm
GGG Steel 60
TOP
75
10 Steel 60
TOP
105
10

101.6.4550.00 ø 11
101.6.4560.00 101.6.4570.00
Complete with seals Expansion bellows can M 12
Expansion bellows can M 12 40 15
190 220
be zipped on at a later be zipped on at a later
:134

5
ø12

107 107
stage : 50 stage : 50

Rotation angle 180° with Rotation angle 180° with

74.3
74.3

50
50

[ : 88, 4]

limiter on either side limiter on either side ø 10.5

ø10.5
131
Integrated rotation tor- 131
Integrated rotation tor-
117
9
que setting que setting
:50

225 255

M12
104
20
124

124

– 980.5.0630.00 980.5.0630.00
– – 132 – 132

413
System components

Suspension system for

medium loads

Type CS-2000
System size 50ó

Part Set-up joint CS-2000 Base bracket CS-2000

Weight (g) 9240 Dimensions in mm 4320 Dimensions in mm
Material GGG GGG
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.7120.00 197.5
40.5 90
101.6.4580.00
:50
Angle of rotation 306° Complete with seals
with limiter

M12
132

104
117
92
Complete with seals

25

20
14

9
ø 45
: 108
: 134

[ : 88.4 ]

ø11
Detail
ø 12

ø 11
5

[ :88, 4]
ø1
25

Accessories, can be retro-fitted

:134
M12

Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1770.00 : 50

Light adapter (see page 426) 980.5.1870.00 –

414
Angle adapter CS-2000 Swivel tilt coupling CS-2000
15° = 460 30° = 600 60° = 800 Dimensions in mm 3000 Dimensions in mm
Aluminium Aluminium and PA
15° = 101.6.4590.00 30° = 101.6.4600.00 60° = 101.6.4610.00 101.6.3190.00

°
0-30
6.
Angle of rotation 300°

50
6

The angle adapter is fixed 101.6.4590.00: A = 15°, B = 39 with limiter

:80
120
148

:60
Angle of rotation 0-300°°
101.6.4600.00: A = 30°, B = 66 Inclination angle infinite-

0
Drehwinkel 0-300
firmly onto the flange or

ø8
ø8

55
angle flange coupling 101.6.4610.00: A = 60°, B = 111 ly adjustable 0–30° 44

100
Complete with seals and 64
Complete with gaskets, Tube 50 Rohr 50

fixing screws fixing screws

121

deep 21
M 6,10 tief
deep
M6/9 tief
127

182

66

60
92
80
B
A

118 60
75
980.5.1300.00 100

– –

Enclosures

415
System components

Suspension system for

medium loads

Type CS-2000
System size 60ó

For enclosure mounting

Part Standard coupling, flange CS-2000
Weight (g) 2380 Dimensions in mm
Material Aluminium
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.7010.00

M12
: 60

Angle of rotation 320°

43

63
100

93
with limiter
Clamping lever at 50
: 100 40
operator face
Complete with gaskets
and fixing screws

deep
M6/9TIEF
Detail
: 60

ø 6.6

Accessories, can be retro-fitted ø 64

Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1760.00

Light adapter (see page 426) –

Part Elbow for momentum load/stress CS-2000 Intermediate joint CS-2000

Weight (g) 6000 Dimensions in mm 5920 Dimensions in mm
Material GGG Steel
120
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.7100.00 190 101.6.4640.00 70
TOP
80
40 105 :60
Higher density Expansion bellows can
Unscrewable mounting be zipped on at a later
M 12
opening stage 240
190

145

Complete with gaskets Pivotal angle 180° with

limiter on either side
: 60 60
Rotation moment setting
88
310
Detail
134

Accessories, can be retro-fitted

M12

Rotation limiter (see page 427) – 980.5.0630.00 132

Light adapter (see page 426) 980.5.1880.00 –

416
For enclosure mounting
Elbow coupling, flange CS-2000 Elbow CS-2000
2950 Dimensions in mm 1850 Dimensions in mm
Aluminium Aluminium
70
101.6.7040.00 101.6.7070.00
: 60

Angle of rotation 320° Unscrewable installation 151

41 70
63

with limiter opening

111

93

M12

Unscrewable installation Complete with seals

151
50

111
opening : 100
154
40

Clamping lever at : 60

operator face
86
Complete with seals and
151

fixing screws
M6/9TIEF
deep

M12
: 60

ø 6.6
ø 64

980.5.1760.00 –
980.5.1880.00 980.5.1880.00

Enclosures

Wall flange CS-2000 Wall joints CS-2000 Wall joint for cable inlet CS-2000
4900 Dimensions in mm 5360 Dimensions in mm 5620 Dimensions in mm
GGG Steel 70
TOP
90
10
Steel 70 120
10
TOP
ø 11
101.6.4650.00 101.6.4660.00 101.6.4670.00
Complete with gaskets Expansion bellows can M 12
Expansion bellows can 50 15
M 12
210 240
be zipped on at a later be zipped on at a later
:140

32
ø1

115 115
:60 :60
stage stage
Pivotal angle 180° with Pivotal angle 180° with
84.3
84. 3

60
60

[ : 93. 3 ]
limiter on either side ø 10 .5
limiter on either side ø 10.5
141
141
Rotation moment setting Rotation moment setting
125
9

275
230
: 60

134

134

M12
112
– 20 980.5.0630.00 980.5.0630.00
– 132 – 132

417
System components

Suspension system for

medium loads

Type CS-2000
System size 60ó

Part Slip-on joint CS-2000 Base bracket CS-2000

Weight (g) 12740 Dimensions in mm 4800 Dimensions in mm
Material GGG GGG
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.7130.00 225.5
101.6.4680.00 : 60
45.5 105
Angle of rotation 306° Complete with seals

M12
with limiter

112
125
152

Complete with seals

97
25

20
9
14
ø 55
: 118
: 144

[ : 97 ]

Detail

ø 11
ø13

ø 11
7

[ : 93.3 ]
ø1
32

Accessories, can be retro-fitted

M12

Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1770.00 : 60

– :140

Light adapter (see page 426) 980.5.1880.00 –

Part Swivel tilt coupling CS-2000

Weight (g) 2900 Dimensions in mm
Material Aluminium und PA
°

Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.3200.00

0-30

50

Angle of rotation 300°

with limiter Angle of rotation0-300°
Drehwinkel 0-300°

Inclination angle infinite-

55

44
ly adjustable 0–30°
100
Complete with gaskets, Tube 50 Rohr 60

fixing screws 121

deep 21
M 6,10 tief
182

66

60
92

60
100 75
Detail
Accessories, can be retro-fitted
Housing:
Gehäuse: max.
max300300
N N

Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1300.00

418
Self-supporting base bracket CS-2000 Indication adapter CS-2000
14000 Dimensions in mm 15° = 460 30° = 600 60° = 800 Dimensions in mm
Aluminium Aluminium
101.6.3220.00 :60 15° = 101.6.4590.00 30° = 101.6.4600.00 60° = 101.6.4610.00
Large-surface foot for
M12

85

6.
180

6
self-supporting The inclication adapter is 101.6.4590.00: A = 15°, B = 39
90
60

applications fixed firmly onto the 101.6.4600.00: A = 30°, B = 66

:80
120
148

:60
15

0
ø8
ø8

4
flange or flange angle 101.6.4610.00: A = 60°, B = 111
coupling 64

Complete with seals and

50 x 45°

fixing screws
: 550

deep
M6/9 tief
127
80

B
A
118

Fixed rollers, guide rolls, –

Feet see page 427 –

Enclosures

419
System components

Suspension system for

medium loads

Type CS-2000
System size 80ó

For enclosure mounting

Part Standard coupling, flange CS-2000
Weight (g) 3270 Dimensions in mm
Material Aluminium
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.7020.00

M12
: 80
Angle of rotation 320°
53

63
with limiter
110

93
Clamping lever at 60
: 120
operator face 40

Complete with seals and

fixing screws

deep
M6/9TIEF
Detail
: 80

ø 6.6
ø 91
Accessories, can be retro-fitted
Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1760.00
Light adapter (see page 426) –

Part Elbow formomentum stress CS-2000 Intermediate joint CS-2000

Weight (g) 8500 Dimensions in mm 9700 Dimensions in mm
Material GGG Steel 70
120
80
TOP
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.7110.00 225 101.6.4710.00
50 120
High density Expansion bellows can
Unscrewable mounting be zipped on at a later M 12
240

opening stage 80
225

170

Complete with gaskets Pivotal angle 180° with

limiter on either side
: 80
Rotation moment setting
108

Detail
310

Accessories, can be retro-fitted

M12

134

Rotation limiter (see page 426/427) 980.5.1890.00 980.5.0620.00

Light adapter (see page 426) – – 132

420
For enclosure mounting
Elbow coupling, flange CS-2000 Elbow CS-2000
4100 Dimensions in mm 2900 Dimensions in mm (inch)
Aluminium Aluminium
90 191
101.6.7050.00 101.6.7080.00 51 90
: 80

Angle of rotation 320° Installation opening

with limiter Complete with gaskets
63
123

93

M12

191
Clamping lever at

141
60
operator face : 120 40
204 : 80
Complete with seals and
fixing screws
173

108

M6/9TIEF
deep
: 80

ø 6.6
ø 91

980.5.1760.00 –

M12
980.5.1890.00 980.5.1890.00

Enclosures

Wall flange CS-2000 Wall joint CS-2000 Wall joint for cable inlet CS-2000
9100 Dimensions in mm 9250 Dimensions in mm 9500 Dimensions in mm
GGG Steel 100
TOP
135
10
Steel 100 165
10
TOP
ø 13
101.6.4720.00 101.6.4730.00 101.6.4740.00
Complete with gaskets Expansion bellows can M 12
Expansion bellows can 60 20
300 M 12
330
: 174

be zipped on at a later be zipped on at a later

73
ø1

138 138
: 80 :80
stage stage
104. 3
104 . 3

80
80

[ :122. 3 ]
Pivotal angle 180° with Pivotal angle 180° with
limiter on either side ø 13
161
limiter on either side ø 13
161

Rotation moment setting Rotation moment setting

160
12

265 365
: 80

154
154

M12
– 143 980.5.0620.00 156
980.5.0620.00 156
25
– – –

421
System components

Suspension system for

medium loads

Type CS-2000
System size 80ó

Part Slip-on joint CS-2000 Base bracket CS-2000

Weight (g) 20620 Dimensions in mm 9240 Dimensions in mm
Material GGG GGG
262.5
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.7140.00 55.5 120
101.6.4750.00 : 80
Pivotal angle 306° with Complete with seals
limiter on either side

M12
162

143
160
107

12
25

25
12
ø 75
: 152
: 174

Detail

ø13
ø 13

[ : 122.5 ]
M12 ø17
3
[ : 122.5 ]

: 80

3
Accessories, can be retro-fitted ø17
:174
Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1770.00 –
Light adapter (see page 426) 980.5.1880.00 –

Part Swivel tilt coupling CS-2000

Weight (g) 2900 Dimensions in mm
Material Aluminium and PA
°
0-30

Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.3210.00

50

Pivotal angle 300° with

0-300° °
Angle of rotation0-300
Drehwinkel
buffer
55

Inclination continously 44
100
adjustable 0–30° Tube
Rohr 80 50
121
Complete with gaskets,
mounting screws
182

100 deep 21
M 6,10 tief

Detail
66

60
92

Accessories, can be retro-fitted

60
Rotation limiter (see page 426) 980.5.1300.00 75

422
Self-supporting base bracket CS-2000 Inclination adapter CS-2000
14300 Dimensions in mm 15° = 460 30° = 600 60° = 800 Dimensions in mm
Aluminium Aluminium
101.6.3230.00 :80
15° = 101.6.4590.00 30° = 101.6.4600.00 60° = 101.6.4610.00
6.
5
Large-surface foot for
M12

85
180

self-supporting The inclination adapter is 101.6.4590.00: A = 15°, B = 39

90

: 80
120
148

0
60

: 60
ø8
applications fixed firmly onto the 101.6.4600.00: A = 30°, B = 66
15

flange or flange angle- 101.6.4610.00: A = 60°, B = 111

coupling 64

Complete withseals and

50 x 45°

fixing screws
deep
M6/9 tief
: 550

127
80

A
B
118

Fixed rollers, guide rolls,

Feet see oage 427 –

Enclosures

423
Heavy-duty
suspension system

CS-2000 80/140

The BERNSTEIN heavy-duty suspension System benefits

system, 80/140 from the CS-2000 range of
suspension systems provides the right solu- l Installation openings
tion for even the highest loads and large Generously dimensioned cable installa-
cable looms with ready-made connectors. tion access points at all corners allow
the easy installation of cables/wiring
System structure looms.
The following conditions are important for
your choice of system: l Full use of cable ducts
within the entire suspension system
– Load-bearing capacity of the overall without reduction of the rated diameter.
system
– Free passage area for cables l Cable fixtures
– Design Fixing points in each angle to clamp
– System configuration cables.

Having decided on the right size of system, l Rotation angle limiters

you need to select the necessary compo- can simply be added to joints at a later
nents and tubes, so that you can put stage.
together the desired configuration.
l High load-bearing capacity
Extremely high overall load-bearing
capacity for applications with the highest
loads.

l Divided expansion bellows

Expansion bellows for wall and inter-
mediate joints can be installed at a later
stage.

l Ready-made connections
Option of inserting ready-made connec-
tions with heavy-duty industrial plugs.

424
Connecting tubes

CS-2000 80/140

2625
Free cable passage area in the system Tubes
Suspension tube 80/140 The steel tube for the suspension system
Outside (mm) 80/140 80/140 is available in a variety of different
Cross section (cm2) 91 lengths. Tube lengths comply with
Wall thickness (mm) 5 DIN 7168. The steel tubes are supplied in
RAL 7035 (light grey) powder coated.
1500

Materials
Weight
1000
– Gravity-die-cast aluminium per metre of tube 15 kg
components: AlSi12 (Cu)
– Cast-iron Colours
500
components: GGG 40 – Suspension
– Steel welding system components: light grey,
constructions: St 37 RAL 7035
80/140
N
– Suspension tubes: St 37 – Cable access light grey,
m
0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
– Bearings: St/PTFE covers: RAL 7035
– Seals: CR – Expansion bellows: black,
Load diagram – Cable access RAL 9005
The load diagram illustrates the maximum covers: AlSi12 (Cu) – Tubes: light grey,
load-bearing capacity for the chosen length – Expansion bellows: PVC RAL 7035
of suspension system. If for a brief period
of time (i.e. 5 seconds), a load of
75 kg is added, then this does not lead to

Enclosures
dimensional deformation or destruction of
the system.

Available lengths of tube

Length System 80/140
(mm) Part number
250 952.8.0460.00
500 952.8.0470.00
750 952.8.0480.00
1000 952.8.0490.00
1250 952.8.0500.00
1500 952.8.0510.00
2000 952.8.0530.00
3000 952.8.0550.00

425
Heavy-duty
suspension system

CS-2000
System size 80/140

For enclosure mounting For enclosure mounting

Part Standard coupling CS-2000 Elbow coupling, flange, CS-2000
Weight (g) 4600 Dimensions in mm 6900 Dimensions in mm
Material Aluminium 140 Aluminium
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.4760.00 101.6.4770.00
80
Angle of rotation 300° Angle of rotation 300°

155
with limiter with limiter 290
ø 142
Complete with seals and : 160 deep
M6/9 tief Access cover 80 100

fixing screws : 220 Complete with seals and

fixing screws

138
M 12
M 12 ø 142
:160 deep
M6/9 tief
:220

80
ø 6.6
4
ø 15
ø 6.6

140
Detail ø 154

Accessories, can be retro-fitted

Pivoting angle limit stop (see page 427) – –

Part Wall joint CS-2000 Set-up CS-2000

Weight (g) 17180 Dimensions in mm 28560 Dimensions in mm
Material Steel 155 162
12
GGG
TOP
Part number RAL 7035 light grey 101.6.4810.00 101.6.4820.00
Expansion bellows can Rotation angle 300° 370
85 155

be zipped on at a later M 12 Access cover

392
140

stage
225

141

Rotation angle 180° with 125 146

80
limiter on either side
12
34

ø 140
:260
Suspension tube
230
185

252
140

adjustment
ø13
170
: 200
110

80

426

Detail ø 13

Accessories, can be retro-fitted

Pivoting angle limit stop (see page 427) 980.5.0620.00 Available request

426
Elbow CS-2000 Intermediate joint CS-2000 Wall flange CS-2000
5400 Dimensions in mm 18080 Dimensions in mm 12920 Dimensions in mm
Aluminium Steel 155
TOP
155 GGG
80 88 175
101.6.4780.00 101.6.4790.00 101.6.4800.00 80

Access cover Expansion bellows can Suspension tube

M 12

ø 13
Complete with seals. be zipped on at a later 460 adjustment
250

185
235
stage Complete with seals
168

540

Rotation angle 180° with

125
limiter on either side
110 Suspension tube
190
80 adjustment 12
110
M 12
80 146
140

140
140

252

173
M 12 25

– 980.5.0620.00 M 12
–

Enclosures

Base bracket CS-2000 Self-supporting base bracket CS-2000 Angle adapter, 15° CS-2000
12900 Dimensions in mm 14800 Dimensions in mm 1650 Dimensions in mm
GGG Aluminium Aluminium
101.6.4830.00 101.6.3240.00 101.6.4840.00
140
Complete with seals Large surface area foot 140
For a 15° angle
M 12

ø 6.5
for self-supporting Fixed firmly onto the
85
M12

180
173
190

90

applications flange or angle flange

60
25

: 146
220
160

190
12

coupling
15

Complete with seals and

fixing screws
50 x 45°

deep
M 8 /12 tief

ø 13

189
: 550

100 76
80

80
125

15°
82

175
6

160
185 34 220

235

– – –

427
Accessories
Suspension systems

Part Rotation limiter for coupling components Rotation limiter for joint components
Systems 45/60 Systems 50ó, 60ó, 80ó Systems 45/60 Systems 50ó, 60ó, 80ó
Part number 980.5.1290.00 980.5.1760.00 980.5.1320.00 980.5.1770.00
Material PA PA
Details Rotation limiter for coupling components in the Rotation limiter for joint components in the
CS-2000 SL system or CS-2000 system. Can easily be CS-2000 SL system or CS-2000 system. Can easily be
added at a later stage. added at a later stage.
After simple installation the balls limit the rotation After simple installation the balls limit the rotation
angle. angle.
Adjustable in increments of 8.5° (CS-2000 SL) Adjustable in increments of 14° (CS-2000 SL)
11° (CS-2000 50, 60) 12° (CS 2000 50)
9° (CS-2000) 11.5°(CS-2000 60)
8.5° (CS-2000 80)

Part Rotation limiter for rotating angle couplings Light adapter

Systems 45/60, 50ó, 60ó, 80ó System 50 System 60 System 80
Part number 980.5.1300.00 980.5.1870.00 980.5.1880.00 980.5.1890.00
Material PA Aluminium Aluminium
Details Rotation limiter for rotating angle couplings in the Easy to apply light adapter.
CS-2000 SL system and CS-2000. Can easily be added Entry opening for light tubes with outside diameter of
at a later stage. 25 mm, fixing by headless screw. Colour RAL 7035.
After simple installation the balls limit the rotation
angle.
Adjustable in increments of 8.5°.

428
Accessories
Suspension systems

Part Rotation limiters Rotation limiters

System 50ó System 60ó System 80ó System 80/140
Part number 980.5.0630.00 980.5.0630.00 980.5.0620.00 980.5.0620.00
Material Steel Steel Steel Steel
Details Rotation limiters as a set of accessories for wall and Rotation limiters as a set of accessories for wall and
intermediate joints can be retro-fitted. intermediate joints can be retro-fitted.
For systems 50 and 60. Can be set in 7.5° increments. For systems 80 and 80/140. Can be set in a 15° incre-
Rotation angle range can be fixed in a given position. ments. Rotation angle range can be fixed in a given
position.

Enclosures
Part Fixed rollers (1 set = 2 rollers) Guide rolls (1 set = 2 rolls)
for the large support foot in systems 60, 80, 80 x 140 for the large support foot in systems 60, 80, 80 x 140
and 45/60 and 45/60
Part number 980.6.0430.00 980.6.0440.00
Notes Complete with installation fixings and instructions for Complete with installation fixings and instructions for
the large support foot. the large support foot.

Part Adjustment feet (1 set = 2 feet)

for the large support foot in systems 60, 80, 80 x 140
and 45/60
Part number 980.6.0450.00
Notes Complete with installation fixings and instructions for
the large support foot.

429
Front-door
control enclosures
CC-480 NR

The standard line of stainless steel Product features Surfaces

CC-480 NR front-door control enclosures is
ideal for use in hygiene environments in ● Various standard sizes Enclosure 240 grain brushed finish
the food and pharmaceutical industry. ● Modern design Front door 240 grain brushed finish
● Front door hinged on right as standard -
Customised apertures in the front door can at top where pre-configured for suspen- CC-480 NR front-door control enclosures
be provided by the BERNSTEIN customising sion system attachment are supplied in the form of standard
service. The aperture in the front door can ● Foamed gaskets enclosures or with customised front door.
thus be dimensioned exactly to suit the ● Facilities for installing mounting plates Enclosure is pre-configured as standard for
installation of operating and control units. ● IP 66 protection rating attachment to BERNSTEIN suspension
● Stainless steel lock mounted at side, systems. Delivery time as agreed.
Integral foam gaskets guarantee protection away from protected space
to IP 66. The CC-480 NR comes con- Special sizes on request
veniently pre-configured as standard for Materials
the user to attach to the suspension
system. ● Enclosure 1.5 mm sheet steel Components supplied
stainless steel
B.S.I. 304 S15 / ● Cabinet body with hinged front door
AISI 304 ● 5 mm two-way key safety lock as
● Front door 1.5 mm sheet steel standard
stainless steel
B.S.I. 304 S15 /
AISI 304
● Gaskets PU foam
● Lock 1.5 mm sheet steel
stainless steel
B.S.I. 304 S15 /
AISI 304

430
Dimensions

External enclosure Internal enclosure Mounting area

dimensions dimensions on front door Mounting
WxHxD wxhxd CxDxF Side handles plates
Part number (mm) (mm) (mm) Part number Part number
180.3.0000.01 250x300x130 176.75x240x124.5 140x220x56 980.8.0119.00 982.3.1040.00
180.3.0000.02 350x300x130 276.75x240x124.5 240x220x56 980.8.0119.00 982.3.1050.00
180.3.0000.03 400x350x160 326.75x290x154.5 290x270x56 980.8.0119.00 982.3.1060.00
180.3.0000.04 400x400x160 326.75x340x154.5 290x320x56 980.8.0119.00 982.3.1070.00
180.3.0000.05 500x400x210 426.75x340x204.5 390x320x56 980.8.0120.00 982.3.1080.00
180.3.0000.06 550x450x210 476.75x390x204.5 440x370x56 980.8.0120.00 982.3.1090.00
180.3.0000.07 550x500x210 476.75x440x204.5 440x420x56 980.8.0120.00 982.3.1100.00
180.3.0000.08 550x600x210 476.75x540x204.5 440x520x56 980.8.0120.00 982.3.1110.00

Pre-configuration for suspension system Front door

Fronttür

The CC-480 NR front-door control enclo-

sure comes pre-configured as standard for
attachment to the suspension system. The
H

D
H-80

holes provided for the suspension system

are shown in the diagram on the right. This
level of pre-configuration is designed to
ensure maximum user-friendliness, making
the enclosure simple to attach to the sus- B-100 C F
pension system by one person only. X 2.5:1

34.65
X

Enclosures
+ 0.5

Ø49
-
T

34.65

Ø41 +0.5
Ø5.5

Keyboard shelf Handles

(Part number 980.6.1760.00) in stainless steel for retrofitting to enclosu-
from 500 mm enclosure width; in stainless re sides. Fixing material included. Enclosure
steel. For retrofitting, sloping at an angle of machining required.
10°. Fixing material included. Enclosure
machining required.

431
Control enclosures
CC-600/CC-600 NR

Product benefits Materials + Coating CC-600 Front plate attachment (CC-600)

● Various standard sizes available from – Enclosures: 1.5 mm sheet steel The attachment of front plates with visible
stock – Back plates: 1.5 mm sheet steel screw holes is performed using the
● Door as standard – Front plates: 3 mm aluminium enclosed freely positioned locking mecha-
● Foamed gaskets – Gaskets: PU foam nisms. These locking mechanisms are fitted
● Equipment mounted inside enclosure Enclosure and door – RAL 7035, light grey in a enclosure groove which is not external-
body can be infinitely adjusted in height Back plate – RAL 7035, light grey ly visible. The attachment screws are
and depth on mounting rails Front plate – natural (silver), anodised screwed into the locking mechanisms.
● IP 65/IP 66 (CC-600 NR)
Ingress protection Materials + Surfaces CC-600 NR Front plates with welded studs are clamped
● Enclosure can be mounted to into place using clamping brackets in the
suspension system by one person – Enclosures: 1.5 mm sheet steel interior of the enclosure. These front plates
● Clamping bar for mounting control stainless steel have studs welded on the rear, and provide
equipment can be moved to any B.S.I. 304 S15 a smooth front surface without visible
position in all-round mounting groove – Front plates: 2 mm sheet steel screw heads.
● Clamping bar groove outside protected stainless steel
space B.S.I. 304 S15
● Additional profiled sealing strip to close – Gaskets: PU foam
off space between studded front plates Enclosures
and enclosure (only CC-600 NR) and doors: 240 grain brushed finish
Front plates: 240 grain brushed finish

Application samples

432
Keyboard shelf Keyboard rail M4 cage nuts (8 off)
(Part number 980.6.1750.00 painted (Part number 980.6.1770.00) (Part number 980.8.0041.00)
sheet steel) metal frame with attachment elements for M5 cage nuts (8 off)
(Part number 980.6.1760.00 VA 1.4301) accommodation of PC keyboards. Adjusta- (Part number 980.8.0042.00 )
sheet steel keyboard support for subsequent ble inclination. Mechanical machining is for attaching equipment to the attachment
mounting, RAL 7035, light grey, 10° inclinati- required for mounting. Attachment materi- rails. The cage nuts are simply slid into the
on; mechanical machining is required for al is included. required position.
mounting. Attachment material is included.

Enclosures
Profiled sealing strip
(Part number 980.8.0099.00)
Profiled strip made of silicone for sealing
gap between front plate and enclosure.
Simple to cut to the required length and fit
before mounting front plate.

Application sample CC-600 NRF

Directly mounted Industrial-PC with

hygiene front

433
Dimensions CC-600
Empty enclosure Enclosure- Enclosure- Attachment area External dimensions Front plate Attachment area
ext. dimensions int. dimensions on front plate of front plate with with welded studs on front plate
with welded studs welded studs with screw holes
WxHxD WxHxD WxH WxH WxH
Part number (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Part number (mm)
180.0.0001.00 370x500x150 290x420x145 250x380 318x448 980.8.0002.00 290x420
180.0.0002.00 430x380x150 350x300x145 310x260 378x328 980.8.0004.00 350x300
180.0.0003.00 430x630x150 350x550x145 310x510 378x578 980.8.0006.00 350x550
180.0.0004.00 480x430x150 400x350x145 360x310 428x378 980.8.0008.00 400x350
180.0.0005.00 480x580x220 400x500x215 360x460 428x528 980.8.0010.00 400x500
180.0.0006.00 580x380x220 500x300x215 460x260 528x328 980.8.0012.00 500x300
180.0.0007.00 580x430x300 500x350x295 460x310 528x378 980.8.0014.00 500x350
180.0.0008.00 580x500x300 500x420x295 460x380 528x448 980.8.0016.00 500x420

Dimensions CC-600 NR
Empty enclosure Enclosure- Enclosure- Attachment area External dimensions Front plate Attachment area
ext. dimensions int. dimensions on front plate of front plate with with welded studs of mounting plate
with welded studs welded studs
WxHxD WxHxD WxH WxH WxH
Part number (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Part number (mm)
180.1.0001.00 380 x 380 x 150 300 x 300 x 145 260 x 260 328 x 328 980.8.0053.00 220 x 220
180.1.0002.00 430 x 380 x 150 350 x 300 x 145 310 x 260 378 x 328 980.8.0055.00 270 x 220
180.1.0003.00 430 x 480 x 180 350 x 400 x 175 310 x 360 378 x 428 980.8.0057.00 270 x 320
180.1.0004.00 480 x 430 x 180 400 x 350 x 175 360 x 310 428 x 378 980.8.0057.00 320 x 270
180.1.0005.00 480 x 480 x 220 400 x 400 x 215 360 x 360 428 x 428 980.8.0059.00 320 x 320
180.1.0020.00 530 x 480 x 220 450 x 400 x 215 410 x 360 478 x 428 980.8.0061.00 370 x 220
180.1.0021.00 580 x 530 x 300 500 x 450 x 295 460 x 410 528 x 478 980.8.0063.00 420 x 370
180.1.0022.00 630 x 580 x 300 550 x 500 x 295 510 x 460 578 x 528 980.8.0065.00 470 x 420

Components supplied CC-600 Suspension system machining

● Main body with mounted door, coated The CC-600 and CC-600 NR control enclo-
(RAL 7035, light grey) sures have suspension system machining as
● 8 mm square lock as standard standard. The hole pattern of the suspensi-
● Attachment material for front plate with on system machining for
screws (locking mechanism) CC-600 enclosures with a depth of 300 mm
is compatible with the BERNSTEIN
CS-2000 system 80. The suspension system
Components supplied CC-600 NR machining for CC-600 enclosures with a Machining pattern for CS-2000 couplings
depth of 150 mm and 220 mm matches from system 80
● Enclosure body with door mounted the CS-2000 systems 50 and 60 as well as :60

● 5 mm two-way key safety lock as the CS-2000 SL system.

standard The hole pattern for CC-600 NR enclosures
● Front plate is compatible with the stainless suspension
system CS-600 NR.
4
ø6

.6
ø6

Machining pattern for CS-2000 couplings

from system 50 and 60, and CS-2000 SL

434
External dimensions Front plate Mounting plate set Attachment area Mounting rails Attachment Handles
on front plate screw holes of mounting plate TS 35 rails for side
with screw holes main body
WxH WxH
(mm) Part number Part number (mm) Part number Part number Part number
320x450 980.8.0001.00 980.8.0112.00 210x340 980.8.0031.00 980.8.0038.00 980.8.0025.00
380x330 980.8.0003.00 980.8.0105.00 270x220 980.8.0033.00 980.8.0038.00 980.8.0026.00
380x580 980.8.0005.00 980.8.0113.00 270x470 980.8.0033.00 980.8.0038.00 980.8.0027.00
430x380 980.8.0007.00 980.8.0107.00 320x270 980.8.0035.00 980.8.0038.00 980.8.0028.00
430x530 980.8.0009.00 980.8.0114.00 320x420 980.8.0035.00 980.8.0039.00 980.8.0029.00
530x330 980.8.0011.00 980.8.0115.00 420x220 980.8.0037.00 980.8.0039.00 980.8.0026.00
530x380 980.8.0013.00 980.8.0116.00 420x270 980.8.0037.00 980.8.0040.00 980.8.0028.00
530x450 980.8.0015.00 980.8.0117.00 420x340 980.8.0037.00 980.8.0040.00 980.8.0025.00

Mounting plate Mounting rails Attachment Stainless steel

kit with fixing TS 35 rails for handle kit
material and main body
hinges
Part number Part number Part number Part number
980.8.0104.00 980.8.0079.00 980.8.0088.00 980.8.0095.00
980.8.0105.00 980.8.0081.00 980.8.0088.00 980.8.0095.00
980.8.0106.00 980.8.0081.00 980.8.0089.00 980.8.0096.00
980.8.0107.00 980.8.0083.00 980.8.0089.00 980.8.0095.00 Handles CC-600
980.8.0108.00 980.8.0083.00 980.8.0090.00 980.8.0096.00

Enclosures
980.8.0109.00 980.8.0083.00 980.8.0090.00 980.8.0096.00
980.8.0110.00 980.8.0085.00 980.8.0091.00 980.8.0096.00
980.8.0111.00 980.8.0087.00 980.8.0091.00 980.8.0096.00

B
External enclosure dimension

Handles in stainless steel

CC-600 NR
H

B
Internal exclosure dimension

CC-600/CC-600 NR CS-600 NR Mounting plate CC-600

and CC-600 NR

435
Suspension system
CS-480 NR

System combinations
The wide range of components permits a
high level of flexibility in configuring the
suspension system. A selection of possible
combinations is shown here.

Product description
The CS-480 NR system has been developed 0.66m
600N
specifically for suspending control enclosu-
res in hygiene environments in the food
and pharmaceutical industry.
400N
The CS-480 NR is extremely flexible thanks
to the wide range of variants in which it is
available. You have the choice between a 266N
combination of customised pre-formed tu-
200N
bing and suspension system components
or, if time is scarce, you can combine the
pre-formed tubings and coupling sleeves G

ex-stock with components from the

suspension system.
0.5m 1m 1.5m
System features l
● Assembly apertures on bearing compo-
nents
Load diagram
● Tubing simply clamped in position
The loading capacity of the CS-480 NR
● Loading capacity 400 N/m
suspension system product line is shown in
● IP 65 protection rating
the diagram. Separate approval must be
● Material X10 CrNiS18 9
requested for higher loads.
● Factory-set torque
In the following description, system length
● Wide selection of components for a
l refers to the length shown in the
particularly large number of combinati-
diagram.
on options
l
Machining of enclosures for
mounting couplings
The coupling hole dimensions for enclosure
machining are shown in the diagram below.
ø5.5
ø41

G
ø4

Materials and surfaces

Stainless steel tubings B.S.I. 304 S15/ AISI 304
Stainless steel components X10 CrNiS18 9
Bearings POM Selection support for different load capaci-
O rings NBR ties are presented on pages 400/401.

436
 Customised tubings
On request, pre-formed tubing is available in differ-
ent variants for BERNSTEIN's CS-480 NR suspension
system. The three different variants are
L-shaped, U-shaped and Z-shaped. Straight tubing
can also be supplied in customer-specific lengths.
To order customised tubing, simple indicate the
shape you require when ordering (e.g. straight, L-,
U- or Z-shaped) together with dimensions. The let-
ters used to denote the various dimensions are
shown in the drawings below.

straight
gerade

L-shaped
L-gebogen

Tubings Flexibility enhanced by L-shaped

The 48.3 mm outer diameter tubings are tubes and coupling sleeves
made from 3.6 mm gauge stainless steel Using L-shaped tubes and coupling sleeves U-shaped
U-gebogen
and are available in the following standard in conjunction with straight tubes, it is pos-
sizes. sible to dispense with the time-consuming
Tubing, straight process of making customised tubings.
250 mm Art.-Nr. 952.3.5010.00 Straight tubing, L-shaped tubing and coup-
500 mm Art.-Nr. 952.3.5020.00 ling sleeves are available from stock and
750 mm Art.-Nr. 952.3.5030.00 are perfect for configuring a flexible sus- Z-shaped
Z-gebogen
1000 mm Art.-Nr. 952.3.5040.00 pension system in next to no time. Tubing,
1250 mm Art.-Nr. 952.3.5050.00 L-shaped R min. 100 Ø = 48.3

1500 mm Art.-Nr. 952.3.5060.00 250x250 mm Part number 952.3.5000.01 Note: Dimensions B and C at least 220 mm;
500x500 mm Part number 952.3.5000.11 dimension A in U- and Z-shaped version at least 320 mm
Coupling sleeve Part number. 101.3.0512.00

System components
Type CS-480 NR

Enclosures
Article Coupling (for enclosure mounting) Angle coupling (for enclosure mounting)
Part number 101.3.0501.00 101.3.0503.00
Weight 1.4 kg 1.0 kg

Example application

Version Flange coupling for attaching enclosures. Rigid flange coupling with 15° angle of
Turns through 340° with rotation limiter. inclination for attaching enclosures.
Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free bearings. Complete with gaskets and fixing material.
Complete with gaskets and fixing material.

Dimensional drawings ø48.3 ø70

ø48.3
(dimensions in mm)
60
30

54
80
16.6
15 °

ø40 deep
M5, 15 tief
ø84
ø40 deep
M5, 12 tief

ø5.5
CS-480 NR
Kupplung
1013050100
18.03.1999 dan
ø5.5
ø41

ø41

9
ø4

9
ø4

437
System components
Type CS-480 NR

Article Rotational base, for external attachment Rotational base, for internal attachment
Part number 101.3.0505.00 101.3.0506.00
Weight 4.2 kg 3.8 kg

Example application

Version Rotational base for attachment to machine or floor. Rotational base for attachment to machine or
Turns through 340° with rotation limiter. floor. Turns through 340° with rotation limiter.
Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free bearings. Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free bearings.
Complete with gaskets. Complete with gaskets.

Dimensional drawings ø109 ø109

ø71
(dimensions in mm) ø71
ø48.3
M8 / ø9
ø48.3
5 ø9
5.
ø9
6
10 75
( 91.2)

.ø .ø
ax ax

110
110

m m
48
48

10

ø129 deep
ø40 ø9 ø40 M8, 12 tief
ø149 ø116

CS-480 NR
Standfufl drehbar
Auflenbefestigung
1013050500
11.03.1999 dan

CS-480 NR
Standfufl drehbar
Auflenbefestigung
1013050500
11.03.1999 dan

Article Rotational base bracket coupling, internal Wall joint S

Part number 101.3.0508.00 101.3.0509.00
Weight 4.1 kg 7.3 kg

Example application

Version Rotational base bracket coupling (internal Wall joint with vertical socket for attachment
attachment) for directly attaching enclosures to to vertical surfaces. Cover to facilitate wiring.
machine or floor. Turns through 340° with rotation Turns through 340° with rotation limiter.
limiter. Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free bearings. Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free bearings.
Complete with gaskets and fixing material. Complete with gaskets.

ø5.5
Dimensional drawings
(dimensions in mm)
ø41

ø109
9
ø4

ø71
ø48.3
ø109
ø71
deep
M5, 12 tief 12 M8 / ø9
62
ø9

5 ø9
5.
ø9 CS-480 NR
8.5

Wandgelenk
senkrechter Abgang

60
177

1013050900
59

75 .ø
11.03.1999 dan
8.5
110

ø ax
ø129

a x. m
ø40

76
ø40 deep
M8, 12 tief
ø116 85
149.5

438 CS-480 NR
Wandgelenk
senkrechter Abgang
1013050900
11.03.1999 dan
Base bracket/wall flange Base bracket angle coupling Rotational base bracket coupling, external
101.3.0502.00 101.3.0504.00 101.3.0507.00
1.4 kg 1.9 kg 4.5 kg

Base bracket or wall flange for attachment Rigid, 15° angle coupling for direct attachment of Rotational base bracket coupling (external
to horizontal and vertical surfaces. enclosures to horizontal and vertical surfaces. attachment) for directly attaching enclosures
Complete with gaskets. Complete with gaskets and fixing material. to machine or floor. Turns through 340° with
rotation limiter. Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free
bearings. Complete with gaskets and fixing material.
ø5.5
ø5.5
Dimensional drawings

ø41
(dimensions in mm) 9
ø41

ø4
9
ø4

ø71
ø109
ø48.3 M8 / ø9 ø71
ø70 M8 / ø9
deep
M5, 12 tief
M5, 12 tief
9.4

M8 / ø9
15°
60

6
10

( 91.2)
.ø
65

.ø
ax

ax

110
10

85

60
m

m
.ø
3

ax
10

10
ø42 ø9 64 ø40 ø9 ø129
64 ø40 ø9
ø109 ø109 ø149

Enclosures
Wall coupling S Wall bracket S Coupling sleeve
101.3.0510.00 101.3.0511.00 101.3.0512.00
7.3 kg 7.7 kg 1.5 kg

Rotational wall coupling for direct Wall bracket with vertical socket for attachment to Coupling sleeve to facilitate assembly and
attachment to vertical machine surfaces. vertical surfaces. Cover to facilitate wiring. disassembly of tubing configurations.
Turns through 340° with rotation limiter. Complete with gaskets. Complete with gaskets.
Cover to facilitate wiring. Pre-set torque.
Maintenance-free bearings. Complete with
gaskets and fixing material.
ø5.5
ø41

9
ø4

ø109
ø71
ø40 deep
M5, 12 tief

ø71
12 M8 / ø9 12 ø48.3 M8 / ø9
ø9
ø9

112
121

54 4
8.5

8.5
44

60 0
76

6
177

ø .ø
8.5

x.
8.5

a ax
ø129
ø129

23

m
123

m
ø48.3

ø70
ø40
ø40

76

85 85 C
W
st

149.5 149.5

439
Suspension system
CS-600 NR

Product description System benefits Cable entry

The CS-600 NR suspension system has ● Assembly apertures on bearing compo- The various suspension system components
been developed specifically for suspending nents with horizontal socket offer differing amounts of space through
control enclosures in hygiene environments ● No external screws or dirt traps - ideal which to insert cables. The diagrams below
in the food and pharmaceutical industry. to clean show the dimensions at the narrowest
Compared with suspension products, ● Tubing simply clamped in position point of apertures inside the components.
hitherto familiar, this system is distinguish- ● Anti-vibration capability for all compo-
ed by its particular suitability for hygiene nents
ø53 ø53
environments and its fully modular design. ● Loading capacity 600 N/m
The CS-600 NR enables the user to confi- ● IP 66 protection rating
gure angled systems without the need for ● Factory-set torque
pre-formed tubing. This dispenses with the ● Modern design
41.5

time-consuming process of procuring spe- ● Wide choice of components for a parti-

cially pre-formed tubing. The modular sus- cularly large number of combination
pension system is flexible and versatile, and options
can be assembled with ease by the user ● Choice of materials for components Coupling Elbow coupling
from components that are available ex Stainless steel X10 CrNiS18 9 or 2206 mm2 1853 mm2
stock. anodised aluminium ø53 ø53

Wall flange/ Rotational base

bracket 2206 mm2
2206 mm2

440
 System combinations
The wide range of components permits a
high level of flexibility in configuring
suspension systems. A selection of possible
combinations is shown here.

Load diagram Tubings

The loading capacity of the CS-600 NR sus- The 60.3 mm outer diameter tubes are
pension system product line is shown in made from 3.6 mm gauge stainless steel
the diagram. and are available in the following standard
In the following description, system length sizes.
l refers to the length shown in the dia-
gram. 250 mm Part. number 952.3.0010.00
500 mm Part. number 952.3.0020.00
750 mm Part. number 952.3.0030.00
1000 mm Part. number 952.3.0040.00
1250 mm Part. number 952.3.0050.00
1500 mm Part. number 952.3.0060.00

Customised tubings
On request, pre-formed tubings are available in
different variants for BERNSTEIN's CS-600 NR
suspension system. The three different variants are
L-shaped, U-shaped and Z-shaped. Straight tubings
can also be supplied in customer-specific lengths.
To order customised tubings, simple indicate the
shape you require when ordering (e.g. straight, L, U
Selection support for different load capaci- or Z-shaped) together with dimensions. The letters
ties are presented on pages 400/401. used to denote the various dimensions are shown in

Enclosures
the drawings below.
ø53 ø53

L-shaped
49
49

Wall joint Top-mounted joint

2130 mm2 2130 mm2 U-shaped

47
50.8

Machining enclosures for

mounting couplings
Elbow Z-shaped
1649 mm2
The coupling hole geometries for enclosure
machining are shown in the diagram
below.
Materials and surfaces

Stainless steel tubings 1.4301

front

Aluminium components AlMgSi 1 straight

Stainless steel components 1.4305
Bearings POM Note: Dimensions B and C at least 300 mm;
O rings NBR dimension A in U and Z-shaped version at least 450 mm.

441
System components
Type CS-600 NR

For enclosure mounting For enclosure mounting

Article Coupling Elbow coupling
Part number Stainless steel 101.4.0501.00 101.4.0502.00

Example application

Version Flange coupling for attaching enclosures. Flange elbow coupling for attaching enclosures.
Turns through 300° with rotation limiter. Assembly aperture cover conceals screws for
Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free bearings. perfect hygiene. Turns through 300° with rota-
Complete with gaskets and fixing material. tion limiter. Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free
bearings. Complete with gaskets and fixing
material.

Drawings
(dimensions in mm)

front

front
deep

deep

Article Elbow Rotational base, attachment from outside

Part number Stainless steel 101.4.0507.00 101.4.0504.00

Example application

Version Elbow for connecting two tubes at 90°. Includes Rotational base for attachment to machine or
screw cover and gaskets. floor. Turns through 300° with rotation limiter.
Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free bearings.
Complete with gaskets.

Drawings
(dimensions in mm)

442
Rotational base, attachment from inside Top-mounted joint, attachment from inside
101.4.0515.00 101.4.0516.00

Rotational base for attachment to machine or Top-mounted joint for attachment to horizontal
floor. Turns through 300° with rotation limiter. surfaces. Assembly aperture cover conceals
Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free bearings. screws for perfect hygiene. Turns through 300°
Complete with gaskets. with rotation limiter. Pre-set torque. Mainten-
ance-free bearings. Complete with gaskets.

deep
deep

Enclosures
Wall flange/base bracket Top-mounted, attachment from outside Wall joint
101.4.0503.00 101.4.0506.00 101.4.0505.00

Wall flange or base bracket for attachment to Top-mounted joint for attachment to horizontal Wall joint for attachment to vertical surfaces.
horizontal and vertical surfaces. Complete with surfaces. Assembly aperture cover conceals Assembly aperture cover conceals screws for
gaskets. screws for perfect hygiene. Turns through 300° perfect hygiene. Turns through 300° with rota-
with rotation limiter. Pre-set torque. Mainten- tion limiter. Pre-set torque. Maintenance-free
ance-free bearings. Complete with gaskets. bearings. Complete with gaskets.

443
Cable glands metal
Accessories for cable
glands

Standard cable gland Thread Cable Ø Part number Part number

Material: brass, nickel-plated
size mm Screw fitting mm Lock nut
Temperature: –20 °C to +60 °C or +80 °C
Gasket: soft rubber + Neoprene and 2 iron thrust collars Pg 7 5… 7 14 13 943.1.0070.00 15 943.1.0330.00
Protection: IP 55, with O ring IP 65 Pg 9 6… 8 17 15 943.1.0080.00 18 943.1.0340.00
Standard: DIN 46 320/C4 Pg 11 8…10 20 18 943.1.0090.00 21 943.1.0350.00
Information: with base for screws on intermediate connection piece
Pg 13.5 10…12 22 20 943.1.0100.00 23 943.1.0360.00
Hexagonal lock-nut Pg 16 12…14 24 22 943.1.0110.00 26 943.1.0370.00
Material: brass, nickel-plated
Pg 21 15…17 30 28 943.1.0120.00 32 943.1.0380.00
Standard: 46 320
Pg 29 24…26 40 37 943.1.0130.00 41 943.1.0390.00
Pg 36 31…33 50 47 943.1.0730.00
Pg 42 39…41 57 54 943.1.0740.00
Pg 48 45…47 64 60 943.1.0750.00
Cable gland with strain-relief Thread Cable Ø Part number
Material: brass, nickel-plated
size mm
Temperatur: –30 °C to +90 °C
Dichtung: Neoprene gasket and 2 galvanised iron Pg 9 4… 9.5 19 17 943.1.0210.00
thrust collars Pg 11 6…11.5 22 20 943.1.0220.00
Protection: IP 54, with O ring IP 65 Pg 13.5 6…13.5 24 22 943.1.0230.00
Information: with centrically operating strain-relief
Pg 16 6…15.5 27 24 943.1.0240.00
Pg 21 9…21.5 34 30 943.1.0250.00
Pg 29 17…29.5 42 40 943.1.0260.00
Pg 36 23…36.5 52 50 943.1.0510.00
Pg 42 29…42.5 62 57 943.1.0550.00
“Perfect” cable gland Thread Cable Ø Part number Outer Ø Part number
Material: brass, nickel-plated
size mm Screw fitting Inner Ø mm O ring
Temperature: –40 °C to +120 °C, for short periods +150 °C
Gasket: Neoprene Pg 7 3… 6.5 14 943.1.1650.00 13/10 943.0.0380.00
Protection: IP 68/5 bar Pg 9 4… 8 17 943.1.1660.00 17/13 943.0.0380.00
Information: excellent strain-relief, fully insulated, large terminal Pg 11 5…10 20 943.1.1670.00 20/16 943.0.0340.00
space, O ring on connection thread
Pg 13.5 6…12 22 943.1.1680.00 22/18 943.0.0370.00
O ring Pg 16 10…14 24 943.1.1690.00 24/20 943.0.0220.00
Material: Perburnan, oil-resistant
Pg 21 13…18 30 943.1.1700.00 28/24 943.0.0250.00
Pg 29 18…25 40 943.1.1710.00 37/33 943.0.0390.00
Pg 36 22…32 50 943.1.1720.00 47/42 943.0.0290.00
Pg 42 30…38 57 943.1.1730.00 53/48 943.0.0400.00
Pg 46 34…44 64 943.1.1740.00 60/54 943.0.0410.00
“Perfect” cable gland with metric thread Thread Cable Ø Part number Thread Head Ø Part number
Material: brass, nickel-plated
size mm Screw fitting length mm Lock nut
Temperature: –40 °C to +120 °C, for short periods +150 °C
Gasket: Neoprene M 12 x 1.5 3… 6 14 943.1.2800.00 3.0 13.0 943.1.2880.00
Protection: IP 68/5 bar M 16 x 1.5 5…10 17 943.1.2810.00 6.0 20.0 943.1.2890.00
Information: excellent strain-relief, fully insulated, large terminal M 20 x 1.5 8…13 22 943.1.2820.00 6.5 22.0 943.1.2900.00
space, O ring on connection thread
M 25 x 1.5 1…17 27 943.1.2830.00 7.0 28.0 943.1.2910.00
Lock-nut with metric thread M 32 x 1.5 15…21 34 943.1.2840.00 8.0 35.0 943.1.2920.00
Material: brass, nickel-plated
M 40 x 1.5 19…28 43 943.1.2850.00 8.0 45.0 943.1.2930.00
Standard: 46 319
M 50 x 1.5 26…35 55 943.1.2860.00 9.0 55.0 943.1.2940.00
M 63 x 1.5 32…42 65 943.1.2870.00 10.0 68.0 943.1.2950.00

Filler plug Thread Part number

Brass, galvanised, nickel-plated, with metric thread
size mm
excellent seal with assembled O ring
Standard: 46 320 M 12 x 1.5 15 943.1.2960.00
M 16 x 1.5 19 943.1.2970.00
M 20 x 1.5 24 943.1.2980.00
M 25 x 1.5 30 943.1.2990.00
M 32 x 1.5 36 943.1.3000.00
M 40 x 1.5 46 943.1.3010.00
M 50 x 1.5 60 943.1.3020.00
M 63 x 1.5 70 943.0.3030.00

Width across corners (mm)

Head width (mm)

444
 Cable glands for HF/EMC shielding Thread Cable Ø Part number
Material: brass, nickel-plated
size mm
Gasket: Neoprene
Temperature: –20 °C to +130 °C Pg 7 4 … 8 18 943.1.3040.00
Protection: IP 68 Pg 9 6 …11 22 943.1.3050.00
Information: with connection thread gasket ring, IP 68/20 bar Pg 11 6 …11 22 943.1.3060.00
Pg 13.5 7.5…13 24 943.1.3080.00
Pg 16 12.5…18 30 943.1.3090.00
Pg 21 12.5…18 30 943.1.3100.00
Pg 21 17.5…23.5 41 943.1.3110.00
Pg 29 17.5…25 41 943.1.3120.00
Pg 29 24.5…31.5 52 943.1.3130.00
Pg 36 24.5…33.5 52 943.1.3140.00
Pg 36 33 …40.5 63 943.1.3150.00
Pg 42 33 …43 63 943.1.3160.00
Hexagon nut Thread Thickness Part number
for earthing, nickel-
size L1 L2
plated brass, with cutting edges for optimum
contact through protective or powder Pg 7 15.0 4.7 3.7 943.1.3500.00
coatings. Pg 9 18.0 4.7 3.7 943.1.3510.00
Pg 11 21.0 4.7 3.7 943.1.3520.00
Pg 13.5 23.0 4.7 3.7 943.1.3530.00
Pg 16 26.0 4.7 3.7 943.1.3540.00
Pg 21 32.0 5.2 4.2 943.1.3550.00
Pg 29 41.0 5.7 4.7 943.1.3560.00
Pg 36 51.0 6.0 5.0 943.1.3570.00
Pg 42 60.0 6.0 5.0 943.1.3580.00
Pg 48 64.0 6.5 5.5 943.1.3590.00
Cable gland for HF/EMC Thread Head Ø Thread Part number
with metric thread
size mm length
Material: brass, nickel-plated
Gasket: Neoprene M 12 x 1.5 4 … 8 18 943.1.3170.00
Temperature: –20 °C to +130 °C M 16 x 1.5 6 …11 22 943.1.3180.00
Protection: IP 68 M 20 x 1.5 7.5…13 24 943.1.3190.00
with connection thread gasket ring, IP 68/20 bar
M 25 x 1.5 12.5…18 30 943.1.3200.00
M 32 x 1.5 17.5…25 42 943.1.3210.00

Enclosures
M 40 x 1.5 24.5…33.5 52 943.1.3220.00
M 50 x 1.5 33 …43 63 943.1.3230.00
M 63 x 1.5 42.5…55 77 943.1.3240.00
Filler plug Thread Head Ø Thread Part number
Material: galvanised brass, nickel-plated with assembled
size mm length
Perburnan O ring, excellent sealing
Standard: DIN 46 320 Pg 7 14 4.5 943.1.0400.00
Pg 9 17 4.5 943.1.0410.00
Pg 11 20 4.5 943.1.0420.00
Pg 13.5 22 6.0 943.1.0430.00
Pg 16 24 6.0 943.1.0440.00
Pg 21 30 6.0 943.1.0450.00
Pg 29 39 8.0 943.1.0460.00
Pg 36 50 9.0 943.1.0930.00
Pg 42 57 10.0 943.1.0770.00
Pg 48 64 10.0 943.1.0810.00

Note!
On 1. 1. 2000 EN 50 262 came into force
prescribing metric threaded cable glands
as standard.

Width across corners (mm)

Head width (mm)

445
Cable glands plastic
Accessories for cable glands

Compression gland with nut collar Thread Cable Ø Part number

Material: Polyamide, glass-fibre reinforced
size mm for RAL 7035
Gasket: acrylonitrile rubber
Temperature: –20 °C to +80 °C Pg 7 5… 7 15 13 943.2.0330.00
Protection: IP 65 with connection thread, gasket ring Pg 9 6… 8 19 16 943.2.0340.00
(see below) Pg 11 8…10 22 19 943.2.0350.00
Standard: DIN46320
Colour: RAL 7035 Pg 13.5 10…12 24 21 943.2.0360.00
RAL 9005 on request Pg 16 12…14 27 23 943.2.0370.00
Pg 21 15…17 32 30 943.2.0380.00
Pg 29 24…26 42 40 943.2.0390.00
Pg 36 31…33 53 50 943.2.0400.00
Pg 42 39…41 60 55 943.2.0500.00
Pg 48 45…47 65 60 943.2.1010.00
Compression gland with nut collar, bending protection Thread Cable Ø Part number
and strain-relief
size mm for RAL 7035
Material: Polyamide, glass-fibre reinforced
Gasket: soft rubber Pg 7 4… 6 15 943.2.0080.00
Temperature: –20 °C to +80 °C Pg 9 6… 8 19 943.2.0090.00
Protection: IP 65 with connection thread, gasket ring (see below) Pg 11 8…10 22 943.2.0100.00
Accessory: terminal compartment of hostaform C
Colour: RAL 7035 Pg 13.5 10…12 24 943.2.0110.00
RAL 9005 on request Pg 16 12…14 27 943.2.0120.00
Pg 21 14…18 32 943.2.0130.00
Pg 29 18…24 42 943.2.0140.00
Euro 2000 cable gland Thread Cable Ø Part number Cable Ø Part number
Material: Polyamide
size mm Euro 2000 mm Perfect
Gasket: Neoprene
Temperature: –40 °C to +120 °C for RAL 7035 for RAL 7001
Protection: IP 66; IP 68 with connection thread, gasket ring Pg 7 3 … 6.5 15 943.2.4450.00 3… 6.5 943.2.2910.00
Information: VDE-tested, halogen-free Pg 9 5.5 … 8 19 943.2.4460.00 4… 8 943.2.2920.00
certification test according to VDE 0619
Colour: RAL 7035, RAL 9005 on request Pg 11 6 …10 22 943.2.4470.00 5…10 943.2.2930.00
Pg 13.5 7 …12 24 943.2.4480.00 6…12 943.2.2940.00
“Perfect” cable gland Pg 16 9 …14 27 943.2.4490.00 10…14 943.2.2950.00
Material: Polyamide
Pg 21 13 …18 33 943.2.4500.00 13…18 943.2.2960.00
Gasket: Neoprene
Temperature: – 40 °C to + 100 °C (up to + 120 °C for short periods) Pg 29 18 …25 42 943.2.4510.00 18…25 943.2.2970.00
Protection: IP 68/5 bar in specified terminal space Pg 36 53 22…32 943.2.2980.00
Information: halogen-free, use of multiple gaskets possible Pg 42 60 30…38 943.2.2990.00
(UL testing on request)
Colour: RAL 7001 Pg 48 65 34…44 943.2.3000.00

“Perfect” cable gland with metric thread Thread Cable Ø Part number
Material: Polyamide
size mm for RAL 7001
Gasket: Neoprene
Temperature: – 40 °C to + 100 °C (up to + 120 °C for short periods) M 12 x 1.5 4… 7 15 943.2.4620.00
Protection: IP 68/5 bar in specified terminal space M 16 x 1.5 5…10 20 943.2.4630.00
Information: halogen-free, use of multiple gaskets possible M 20 x 1.5 8…13 24 943.2.4640.00
Colour: RAL 7001
M 25 x 1.5 11…17 29 943.2.4650.00
M 32 x 1.5 15…21 36 943.2.4660.00
M 40 x 1.5 19…28 46 943.2.4670.00
M 50 x 1.5 27…35 55 943.2.4680.00
M 63 x 1.5 35…48 68 943.2.4690.00
Euro 2000 cable gland with metric thread
on request

Connection thread, gasket ring Thread Part number

Material: Polyethylene
size Gasket ring
Temperature: –50 °C to +170 °C
Colour: transparent Pg 7 9.43.0.002
Pg 9 9.43.0.003
Pg 11 9.43.0.004
Pg 13.5 9.43.0.005
Pg 16 9.43.0.006
Pg 21 9.43.0.007
Pg 29 9.43.0.008
Pg 36 9.43.0.009
Width across corners (mm) Pg 42 9.43.0.010
Head width (mm) Pg 48 9.43.0.011

446
 Filler plug Thread Head Ø Part number*) Part number*)
Material: Polyamide, glass-fibre reinforced
size mm Filler plug Blanking plug
Temperature: –40 °C to +100 °C
Standard: DIN 46 320 Pg 7 15 943.2.1140.00 943.2.4720.00
DIN 40 430 Pg 9 19 943.2.1150.00 943.2.4730.00
Colour: RAL 7035 Pg 11 22 943.2.1160.00 943.2.4740.00
Protection: IP 65 with connection thread, gasket ring
Pg 13.5 25 943.2.1170.00 943.2.4750.00
Blanking plug Pg 16 27 943.2.1180.00 943.2.4760.00
brass and plastic for seal up to IP 68.
Pg 21 33 943.2.1190.00 943.2.4770.00
Used for Euro 2000 and Perfect cable glands
Colour: RAL 7035 Pg 29 44 943.2.1200.00 943.2.4780.00
Material: Polyamide Pg 36 55 943.2.1080.00 943.2.4790.00
Pg 42 62 943.2.1360.00 943.2.4800.00
Pg 48 69 943.2.1370.00 943.2.4810.00
Filler plug with metric thread (on request) Thread Head Ø Part number
Material: Polyamide, glass-fibre reinforced
size mm
Temperature: –40 °C to +100 °C
Standard: DIN 46 320 M 12 x 1.5
DIN 40 430 M 16 x 1.5
M 20 x 1.5
M 25 x 1.5
M 32 x 1.5
M 40 x 1.5
Lock-nut Thread Head Ø Part number*)
Material: Polyamide, glass-fibre reinforced
size mm
Temperature: –40 °C to +100 °C
Standard: DIN 46 320 Pg 7 19 943.2.3100.00
Pg 9 22 943.2.3110.00
Pg 11 24 943.2.3120.00
Pg 13.5 27 943.2.1960.00
Pg 16 30 943.2.1970.00
Pg 21 36 943.2.1980.00
Pg 29 46 943.2.1990.00
Pg 36 60 943.2.2000.00
Pg 42 65 943.2.2010.00
Pg 48 70 943.2.2020.00
Lock-nut with metric thread Thread Part number

Enclosures
Material: brass
size mm
Temperature: –40 °C to +100 °C
Standard: DIN 46 320 M 12 x 1.5 15 943.1.2880.00
M 16 x 1.5 19 943.1.2890.00
M 20 x 1.5 24 943.1.2900.00
M 25 x 1.5 30 943.1.2910.00
M 32 x 1.5 36 943.1.2920.00
M 40 x 1.5 46 943.1.2930.00
M 50 x 1.5 60 943.1.2940.00
M 63 x 1.5 70 943.1.2950.00
Sealing plug with piercing diaphragm Thread Part number*)
Material: Polyethylene
size
Temperature: –20 °C to +70 °C
Colour: RAL 7035 Pg 9 943.2.0290.00
Pg 11 943.2.0300.00
Pg 13.5 943.2.0310.00
Pg 16 943.2.0320.00
Pg 21 943.2.0410.00
Pg 29**) 943.2.0420.00
closed type * = for RAL 7035 ** = open type

Note!
On 1. 1. 2000 EN 50 262 came into force
prescribing metric threaded cable glands
as standard.

Width across corners (mm)

Head width (mm)

447
448
Bernstein Ltd
Westgate
Aldridge
West Midlands
WS9 8EX
Telephone: 0 19 22/74 49 99
Telefax: 0 19 22/45 75 55
E-mail: sales@bernstein-ltd.co.uk

Bernstein AG
Tieloser Weg 6
D-32457 Porta Westfalica
Telefon 05 71/7 93-0
Telefax 05 71/7 93-5 55
info@bernstein-ag.de

www.bernstein-ag.de The Catalogue

700.0000.674 02.2003 1302Bö. Alteration rights reserved!

The Catalogue